


NI \. | 


fc 


he 
as 


a 


LIFOR 


+ 


A 
. 


x. 


OF CA 


” 


UNIVERSITY 





GI 


- 


Fr OF 


Mrs. SARAH P. WALSWORTI 


4 


’ 


Received October, 1894. 


Accessions No.7, 3Y2. Class No. 














Hy 


tere) 
ate 





Gry 


a 


Bh BUA 
hehe, yn 
fal 


” 





ae 


__ Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 


S 


v 


oft Corporati 


Sharan 
A 
pee I as 


https://archive.org/details/grammarofgreeklad0anthric 





ot. oe . 
sey Lame th rata 








5 ew te 
eee TE 
ey eae 





- 


A GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE, 


FOR THE 


‘Xe 
ne 
a 


USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 


BY 
CHARLES ANTHON, LL.D., 


sa¥ PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGR, 
NEW-YORK, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL 


NEW YORK: 


HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 


329 &.331 PEARL STREET 
FRANKLIN SQUARE. 


1856. 
a 
oD A 
“Ty Ie OE, FD «Ee 


<> a Ry >. 





2 - Saye ah 
a 4) ee ' Gud g 
ah 
" 
eof 
“ 


im wy _ 
: eh a 
re : | 
ate 
ee 








TO 


THE REV. WILBUR FISK, DD, 


PRESIDENT OF THE WESLEYAN UN'VERSITY, 


This Work ts Enserthed :- 
AS A TRIBUTE OF SINCERE RESPECT 
TO ONE, IN WHOM HUMAN LEARNING IS SO ADMIRABLY BLENDED 


WitH THAT BETTER AND PURER KNOWLEDGE, WITHOUT 


WHICH IT IS COMPARATIVELY VALUELESS 


he 


- J - ‘i : xe \ 7% ee i 

. BW tapes Foe Raa. Paka = 
ea RAS oanee S 
i a Fy Lata ee co 


‘© 


ae 2 








PREFACE. 





Tue author’s object, in preparing the present work, was 
to furnish the student with such a view of the leading fea- 
tures in the Grammar of the Greek Language as might prove 
useful to him, not only at the commencement of his career, 
but also during its whole continuance. Nothing has there- 
fore been omitted, the want of which might in any degree 
retard his progress ; and yet, at the same time, the work 
has been brought within such limits as will render it easy 
of reference and not deter from perusal. The best and 
latest authorities have been carefully consulted, and every 
effort has been made to exhibit a concise outline of all the 
leading principles of Greek Philology. Under the head of 
Prosody the author has given merely a brief collection of 
rules, as the larger work on this subject, now in the press, and 
which will appear in a few weeks, will be found to contain 
all that is requisite in this department of instruction. To 
that same work the author has been compelled to transfer 
the remarks on the analogies of the Indo-Germanie tongues, 
which were originally intended to form part of the present 
volume. It was f yund, as-the Grammaradvanced towards 
its completion, that the addition of these analogies would 

A2 


vi = PREFACE 


make it too large in size; and although a work like the 
present is certainly the true one for such a discussion, yet 
it is hoped that the remarks in question will not be out of 
place even at the end of a treatise on Greek Prosody. 

The present work, it will be perceived then, lays but 
few claims to originality either of design or execution. 
The object of the editor has been to present, in a small 
compass, all that his own experience as an instructor has 
shown him to be really useful in Greek elementary studies. 

His principal guide has been the excellent grammar of 
: Matthie, of which the present volume may be in some re- 
spects considered as an abstract; and valuable materials 
have been at the same time obtained from the labours of 
Buttmann, Rost, and other distinguished philologists. As 
regards the formation of the Greek verb, he has preferred 
the old system to the more philosophical and elaborate 
one of Thiersch, from its being better adapted to the ca- 
pacities of younger students. Thiersch’s system will do 
very well after an acquaintance with the formation of the 
- Sanscrit verb, but its success otherwise, in this country 
at least, is extremely problematical. 

In preparing the present edition for the press, great pains 
have been taken to ensure accuracy, and in several in- 
stances changes have been made where the language ap- 
peared either obscure or wanting in precision. One or 
two inadvertences of expression, moreover, of no great 
moment in themselves, have also been rectified, and the 
work is now presented to the young student in the full as- 
surance that he will find in it both a useful and an accu- 
rate manual, 


PREFACE. . vn 


The compiler of the present volume owes it to himself 
to state, that he intends, at no very distant day, to publish 
a Grammar of the Greek Language which will lay more 
claim to the character of an original work, and will be elu- 
cidated throughout by references to the Indo-Germanic 
tongues. Such a work, of course, will be intended for 
more advanced students. In the mean time, he hopes that 
the plain and unpresuming volume which he now puts 
forth will not be regarded as the “ultima Thule” of his 
own researches in Greek philology. 

Columbia College, June, 1839. 


* 


ie 





Peis oie 


BCCents «kk she! 
Accusative. . «+ . 
—__——, Syntax of 
Active Voice . . . 
Adjectives . . «+ - 
Adverbs. . 2. . 
folic Dialect . . . 
Anapestic Verse . . 
Apostrophe. . . . 
Article ‘ 
, Syntaxof . 
Attic Dialect... ; 
Augments . .. . 





Breathings . . . - 


Cass. & 2 «5 
Changes of Letters . 
Comparison. . . . 


INDE X. 





Composition, Prosody of 


Conjunctions .. . 
Consonants. ... 
Contracted Verbs . 

Contraction. . . . 


Dative ‘ 
» Syntax of . 
Declensions . . . 
Deponents . . . 
Dialects... . 
Digamma . 
Diphthongs . 





— Doric Dialect 


PAGE 


7, 275 | Eluaz, “TI clothe myself” 
os SG! Bink, *T am’. >." 


s 243 


. 92 
. 48 
. 194 
. 282 
. 270 
as 
ie 19 
. 229 
283 
101 
ee 
. 8 
13 
67 

. 255 
. 202 
Meas «. 
. 139 
9 

37 
241 
. 20 
138 

. 281 
%, 274 
3 

. 282 


Barat. 0 gets oa 
"nae, “Tet ow 
Bnelities: 25. sss 


Ve RR se ey 
Gait, Tsay e's 
First Aorist Active ° 
Passive . 
Middle .. 
First Future Active . 
Passive . 
— Middle 


























Formation of the Tenses 


Gender. 2. 
Genitive, Syntax of . 


Iambic Verse . . . 
"Input, “I send” 
Imperfect Active . 
Passive. . 
—— Active in put 


Passive in we . 


Infinitive, Syntax of 
Ionic Dialect 
Irregular Nouns 

— Adjectives . 
Verbs 
Verbs in ps 














Keipai, * J lie” 


PAGE 


164 

89 
158 
164 
279 


267 
167 
108 
116 
119 
108 
117 


. 119 


108 


18 
236 


269 
161 
108 
115 
156 
156 
245 
282 

43 

63 
170 
158 


165 


“A 
\ 


 e 


Vill 


ie 


* Metres 


a ae 


Middle Voice . . 











INDEX 


PAGE 


bt 


Prepositions 
Proneans. «ss. 


268|Prosody. . . . js . 





























* 


- - 124 
Relative, Syntax of . 
N added . ote 11 
Nominative and Verb . 231|Second Aorist Active . 
Noun .« =). ‘ 20 Passive . 
Numbers & 18 Middle . 
Numerals ; 72 Active in we. 
Middle in pe . 
Partiviple, Syntax of . 247 | Second Future Active . 
Parts of Speech’ . atin 2 Passive . 
Passive Voice . is a OS Middle 
, Syntax of 245 | Substantive and Adjective 
Patronymics oe, SC, BYMREE.* 6% ah see 
Perfect Active. . . . 109 
presive “ss SIDI VRE. a os oe 
Middle . . .118, 127 Rg 2. Wer 
Pluperfect Active. . - 110 Mf 0 0) 3 
Passive . . . 116|)Vowels . .. : ‘ 
- Middle. .. . 118 





The Greek alphabet consists of twenty- 


I. THE ALPHABET." 


GREEK GRAMMAR 9 * | 


Y 
sd 


four letters, 


namely : 

A, a, "AAoa, Alplia, a: 
B, B, 6, Bjra, Beta, b. 
ee P Tdaupa, Gamma, 2g. 
A, 0, AéAra, Delta, -. d. 
FB, €, "EwiAov, Epsilon?  €. 
Z, , Zijra, Zeta, Z.- 
H, 7, "Hra, Eta, Gs 
0, 3, 4, O7Ta, Theta, th, 
I, ¢; "lora, Iota, 1. 
K, k, Kdrra, Kappa, k. 
A, A, Adub6da, Lambda, 1. 
M, Mv, Mu, m. 
N, Nv, Nu, n. 
Cea by iby Xi, x 
| ee "Ouxpov, Omicron? 6. 
Il, 7% Iiz, Pi, p- 
P, 9, ‘Po, Rho, r. 
x, o, (when final, s)* Xéypa, Sigma, Ss 
yee av, Tau, t. 

Rens #9 Te "Ypiddy,  Upsilon,® — u. 
+ 2%, d; Pi, : Phi, . p 
X, %; Xi, Chi, bie 

¥, Y, wl, Psi, Pie : 

— Q, s "Quéya, Omega, Cae 





ie Consult Excursus A, at the end 


of this volume. 


: 


2. Smooth, or unaspirated ¢; so called to distinguish it from H, which 
was anciently one of the marks of the rough breathing, or aspirate. 
3. Small o, to distinguish it from omega (w), or great (i. e., long) o. 
4. The German scholars have introduced the practice of using ¢ at 


the .end of syllables likewise, when they make an entire word with which 
another is compounded; as, dvcuevyjc, eicdépw, mpoceirov. But this 
practice, which has not even the authority of MSS. in its favour, cannot 
be systematically introduced without inconvenience to orthography ; and 
it is not agreeable to the genius of the ancients, who were not accustomed 
to separate, by the understanding, the different parts of discourse. 

5. Smooth v, to distinguish it from the aspirated v (‘Y), which was 
one of the ancient signs of the digamma, and also passed «to' the Latin 
V, as, Vint, Arvom. k 


ea 
ie 


2 ) PRONUNCIATION. 


II. PRONUNCIATION OF THE LETTERS. 


A, when long, is sounded like the English a m far 
when short, like the @ in fat. 

I’, before a vowel, like the hard English ¢; but before 
another y, and also-before a #, &, v, is sounded like nz in 
sing. ‘Thus, dyyeAoc, pronounce ang-élos; dyKko@v, ang-kon, 
dc.” 

H, like the short English ¢ in met. 

Z, like a soft d passing gently into the sound e z. Thus, 
¢é@, pronounce d-zao; pedicw, melid-zo, &e. 

H, like the English a in cane.® 

0, like the English th in think. 

I, when long, like the English e in me; when short, like 
the 2 in pin. 

Y, like the French wu in une, or ey German i. 

X, always guttural, like the German ch in buch. 

Q, like the o in throne. 


PRONUNCIATION OF THE DIPHTHONGS.* 
Au, like the English adverb aye. 3 
Av, like the syllable ow in now. 
Evg like the English word eye. 


1. ee pronunciation here given is that which has been adopted at the 
institutfon from which the present work emanates. It is by no means 
offered as accurate in every respect, but merely as giving, in some cases, 
an approximation to the ancient sound, and, in others, the result of mod- 
ern, though erroneous, usage.. A separate ‘work on this much-contested 
point will appear at no very distant day. 

2. The true sound of, the y before a vowel would appear to have re- 
sembled that of the soft g in the German legen. 

3. The 7 appears to have had, originally, a middle sound between a 





-and-e, and the grounds on which this opinion rests are as follows: 1. 


The ‘contraction of ae and ea into 7; as, ypderat, ypyTat, Cdelc, Cie, 
TEiVed, teixn, An béa, arn. 2. The augment 7, y, and 7v, from a, at, 
and av; as, ‘Hxovov qveoa, and nda. 3. The Doric and Molic change 
of 7 into a; as, odua, Dor . for. dnun ; mida, Aol. for rdAn. | 

4: The primitive sound of the diphthongs appears to have been a-s, 
a-v, €-1, e-v, &e. ‘The pronunciation of av is obtained from the barking 
of the dog (ad, av) in Aristophanes, Vesp., 903. The primitive sound 
of oc seems to have resembled the syllables owy in the word snowy, 
though, of course, with more of a diphthongal sound. ae 





DIVISION.\OF LETTERS. 3 


- 


Ev, like the English word yew. 

Oz, like the syllable oy in doy. 

Ov, like the 00 in soon, or the ou in ragost. 
Yz, like the English pronoun we. | 


II. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. 


Seven of the letters are vowels, namely, a, €, 7, t, 0, ¥ 
© The remaining seventeen are consonants. 


1. VowELs. 


~ 1. The seven vowels are divided into three classes, 
namely: short, long, and doubtful. Thus, 
Short, &, 0, 
Long, 7, ®, 
Doubtful, a, 2, v. 
2. The short vowels are those, the pronunciation of which 
occupies the shortest possible time. } 
3. The long vowels are those which require in their 
pronunciation twice as much time as the short. 
4, The doubtful are those which can be pronounced both 
as short and long in different words, being short in some 
words and long in others.’ 7 


2. DipHTHoNGs. . a 


1. The vowels are combined in a variety of ways, two 
and two together, into one sound, and hence aré formed the 
diphthongs. 

2. Diphthongs are formed by the union of a back-vowe?? 
(a, €, 0) with a front-vowel (t, v), producing one sound. — 





1. The student must not suppose, from the epithet ‘¢ doubtful,”’ as ap- 
plied to these vowels, that there is, in every case, something wavering 
and uncertain in their nature. The meaning is simply this: the short 
vowel ¢ has its corresponding long vowel 7, and the short vowel o its 
corresponding long vowel w ; but in the case of @, ¢, v, there is no sep- 
arate vowel-sign for the long and short quantities, and, therefore, the length 
or shortness of the vowel is to be determined, not by the eye, but by the 
application of some rule. ei 
_ 2. The sounds of a, ¢, o, being formed by the organs in the back part 


4 DIVISION. OF LETTERS. 


3. Of the diphthongs, six are proper, where both vowels 
are heard combined into one sound; and six improper, 
where the sound of one vowel predominates over that of 
the other. : 2 

4. The proper diphthongs are, therefore, az, av, él, ev, OL, 
ov. The improper are a, 9, @, where the ¢, or second vowel, 
is subscribed, and also 7v, vt, wv, which last three are not 
of as common occurrence as @, 4, @.! 


. , be LCG 3. ConsoNANTs. 


1. Of the seventeen. consonants, nine are mutes, that is, 
letters whereof no distinet sound can be produced without 
the addition of a vowel. 

2. These nine are divided into three classes, namely, 
soft, intermediate, and aspirate. ‘Thus, 

Three soft, Sars He 
Three intermediate, 6, yy, 0. 
Three aspirate, od, x; 0. 

3. These, when read perpendicularly, form the three 
orders of mutes, each soft consonant having its correspond- 
ing intermediate and aspirate. 'Thus, 


Tt, B, d. 


| Ky Vs X%- 
f 720, iG. 


of the mouth, thay be called back-vowels;; and the sounds of ¢ and v, be- 
ing formed in the front part of the mouth, may be denominated front- 
vowels. 

1. Originally, the g, 7, @ were closely allied to az, et, 01, and only so 
distinguished, that, in the latter, a, e, and o were sounded of the same 
length with the ¢; while, in the former, the long sound of @, é, and 6 pre- 
ceded, and the 7 merely followed as a short echo. ‘This accurate pronun- 
ciation, however, appears to have been lost at an early period, even among 
the Greeks themselves, and therefore, at present, we pronounce @, 7, @ 
m the same way as d, 7, w; and the subscribed or underwiitten iota 
serves as a mere grammatical sign for determining the derivation and for 
distinguishing the forms. Originally, the c, even in these improper diph- 
thongs, was written by the side of the other sound, and in the use of cap- 
itals this*practice still obtains. ‘Thus we write ddye¢, but “Avdye, passing 
over, in either case, the sound of the 4. So, again, 07, but, with the 
rapital letter, ’Qud7. 





DIVISION. OF LETTERS. 5 


"4. Mutes of the same class must always come together, 
from a principle of euphony. Thus, 


INTE RMEDIATE. SOFT. ASPIRATE, 
Eb6domoc. EnTa. pO6voc. 
dydooc. | OKTO. éxOoc. 


§. From the organs with which they are pronounced, 7, 
83, @ are termed ladials or lip-letters ; Kk, Y, X%, gutturals ; 
and tT, 0, 0, dentals. 

6. Four of the consonants are called liquids, narnely A, 
wu, Vv, p; and they are so denominated because, in pronunci- 
ation, they easily flow into-other sounds. 

7. These four liquids, together with the sibilant, or hiss- 
ing letter ¢, are also called semivowels, because their sound 


can be pretty aistiacty perceived without the accession of 


a vowel. 


8. There are three double consonants, namely, ¢, &, »,. 


composed of any letter of each of the three orders of mutes. 
followed by ¢. ‘Thus, 


mC, Bo, p¢, form ¥ ; 
Ke, YS, XS, form ¢; 
(tc), d¢, (Oc), form ¢." 

9. These double consonants are universally used (except 
in AMolic and Doric Greek) instead of their corresponding 
simple letters. Not, however, where the two simple letters 
belong to two different parts of the compound, as éx-cetw, 
_not bet? 





1. The combinations t¢ and @¢ are merely inserted to complete the 
analogy to the eye; since ¢ is equivalent, in fact, to dc merel , and 
whenever a, T, or 8 comes before o, it is thrown away ; as, dvvow for 
avitow, and reiow for reifow. Sometimes, even in the case of dc, the 
same rejection takes place, as épeiow for tpeidow, where ¢ could not oc: 
oe the place of the characteristic letter (c) of the future. 

. Yet ’"AOjvate is used instead of ’APjvacde. 
A2 


Ge, 


6 _ BREATHINGS. are 


Iv. BREATHINGS. 


1 ie vowel, or diphthong, which i is pronounced with- ~ 
out a letter preceding it, is necessarily connected with a 
breathing. 

_ 2. There are two breathings, the soft! and aspirate; and, 
consequently, every word beginning with a vowel, or diph- 
thong, must be pronounced with one of these breathings. 

3. The signs employed for these breathings are, for the 
soft (’), as del, &; and for the aspirate (‘), as imép, jueic? 

4. The soft breathing has no perceptible power ;* the as- 
pirate is equivalent to the modern h, as vmép, pronounce 
huper. 

5. Y at the beginning of words in the Attic dialect is al- 
ways to be pronounced with the npirate 5 ; as vd«tvOoc, 
bdAoc, UBpts. 

6. In diphthongs the breathings are marked over the 
second vowel ; as ol, al, eb0vc, abté¢ ; because the breath- 
ing does not belong to either of the blended vowels separ- 
ately, but to the whole mingled sound. When, however, 
an improper diphthong has the iota adscribed, as in the 
‘case of capital letters, or, otherwise, subscribed, the mark 
of the breathing is placed by or over the anit vowel,.as 
"Ardnc, Gone. 

7. P is the only consonant that receives a breathing, 
since it cannot be pronounced without an audible expiration. 
When p stands at the beginning of a word, therefore, this 
breathing is always the aspirate ; as péw, putéc, which in 
Latin is placed after the R, as rhetor, from the Greek pjrwp. 





1. Called also “ smooth,” and by its Latin name lenis. 

2. Originally the rough ‘breathing alone had a sign, namely, H, and ~ 
the smooth remained unmarked. Afterward that sign was divided into 
two halves, and the first half, F, was employed to denote the aspirate 
the second half, 1, the soft breathing. By a subsequent abbreviation of 
these, two other marks were formed, namely, | and J, which finally 
changed into (‘) and (’), the signs now in use. 

3. It attaches itself to the sound pronounced, as if ipvarencoualy, with: 
ont any exertion of -he lungs. 


7 


DIGAMMA. — . y 


8. But when a p is followed by another p, the first must 
have the soft breathing, and the latter the aspirate, as dp» 
pnktoc, &ppeov ; for two of these letters could not be pro~ 
nounced in succession each with an aspirate. | 


V. DIGAMMA. 

1. Besides the rough breathing, there was in several di- 
alects another sound, somewhat similar in nature, formed 
between the lips, and having the same relation to ip ph, and 
v, that the aspirate bears to ch, g, and &. 

2. It was originally a full and strong consonant, and rep- 
resented by a letter closely resembling the Roman F. This 
letter was called digamma, because looking like a double 
gamma, and originally occupied the sixth place in the Greek 
alphabet. 

3. The term Molic digamma was given to it, b because it 
was retained in the alphabet principally by those branches 
of the Greek race that were of AXolic descent. Its true 
name, however, was Bai (Vau), the other appellation hav- 
ing been invented by the grammarians. 

4. In the dialects which retained the digamma, its sound 
was soon softened down, and it then answered, in pronun- 
ciation, to the English wh. Between two vowels it was 
still more attenuated, and passed, even with the olians, 
into v; as abvjp, aide, for dfp, Hac. 

5. In Aolic the digamma served also for the rough 
breathing, which had no place in that dialect.’ — 


VI. ACCENTS.? 
1. There are three accents in Greek; the acute, grave, 


and circumflex. 
2. The acute is denoted by the sign O; as Oe The 





1. For some further remarks respecting the digamma, consult Excur- 
¥1s B, at the end of this volume. 
2. For a more enlarged view of accents, consult Excursus C 


pest 


8 -- ACCENTS. 


grave is never marked, but lends its sign to the softened 
acute. The circumflew is indicated by (~), as xfjro¢. 

3. In every word there can be but one predominant tone, 
to which all the rest are subordinate. ‘This is the sharp or 
acute accent, the fundamental tone of discourse being the 
grave: : “ : 

4. The grave accent, therefore, does not require any 
mark ; since, if the syllable which receives the strengthened 
accent be ascertained, we know that all the rest must have 
the weaker or fundamental one. Consequently, it would 
be srperfluous to write OéddHpo¢, since Oeddwoog is sufli- 
cient. : 


5. When a word which, by itself, has the acute accent 


on the last syllable, stands in connexion before other words, 
the acute tone is softened down, and passes more or less 
into the grave. ‘This depressed accent is called the soft- 
ened acute, and is indicated by the mark of the grave, the 
sirictly grave syllables having, as we have just remarked, 
no use for this sign, and lending it, therefore, to the soft- 
ened acute. Thus, dpy7 0& moAAd dpay aGvayxdte Kaxd. 
_ 6. The acute accent is placed on one of the last three 
syllables of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. 

7. All words which have no accent on the last syllable 
are called Barytones, because a syllable neither marked by 
an acute nor circumflex accent has, of course, the grave 
tone (Gapdy Ttévov). — | 

8. All words which have the acute on the last syllable 
are called Oxytones (’Odvréva, from d%b¢ and tévoc).! 





1. The ancients observed, in pronunciation, both quantity and accent. 
This, however, is extremely difficult of accomplishment at the present 
day, and it is better for the learner, therefore, to let the quantity predom- 
mate, as being for us the more important of the two. Still, however, the 
student should accustom himself to distinguish every accented vowel 
from an unaccented one. Thus, for example, we can accent the first 
syllable in GvOpwoc, and yet keep the second long; as inthe English 
grandfather, alms-basket. , Care must be taken, at the same time, not 
to prolong the accented short vowels; as, for example, not to pronounce 
Sep like grep. 


~ 





MARKS OF READING. 9 


‘a ems VII. MARKS OF READING. 

1. For a period and comma the same signs are employed 
in Greek as in English. 

2. The colon and semicolon have. one and the same mark, 
namely, a dot or point above the line ; as, Erupawoe | ue Kal . 
tupAoc elt. 

3. A sign of interrogation has this form (;), as, tl tovro; 
It is the same in appearance as our English semicolon, and 
not unlike our mark of interrogation inverted. 

4. No sign of exclamation occurs in the older editions, 
yet, after interjections, and terms indicative of feeling, it is 
well to put the one in use among us; as, @ ol, TOY Tapdr- 
TwWY KaKw@v! dev! dev! 

5. Diastéle, or hypodiastole, has the same sign as the 
comma, and is used in certain small compound words, to 
distinguish them from others ; as, 6,r¢ (“ whatever,” formed 
from dortc) for distinction sake from 6rz (“ that”); and 6,r¢ 
(“which also”) for distinction sake from dre (“ when”). 

6. In place, however, of the diastole or hypodiastole, 
many of the more recent editions have merely the syllables 
of such words separate, and without the inserted mark ; as, 
6 Tt and 6 Te, instead of 6,tt and 6,te. This method is at- 
tended with less interruption than the other, and is, at the 
same time, equally perspicuous. 

7. A dierésis, or sign of separation, is put when two vow- 
els that follow in succession are not to be read as a diph- 
thong, but separately. It is indicated by two dots placed 
horizontally over the second one of the two vowels ; and, if 
the accent fall on that same vowel, the accentual mark is 
placed between the two dots. Thus, didj¢ (to be pro- 
nounced 4-.dfc), tpaic ‘to be pronounced mpa-vc): 


Vill. CONTRACTIONS. 


1. Contractions are of two kinds, proper and. improper 
called, otherwise, synerésis and crasis. 


LO CONTRACTIONS. 


2. A proper contraction, or syneresis, is when two sin- 


gle vowels, or open sounds, coalesce without change into 


one diphthong ; as, 76i contracted into 71K 3 ; Telyet con- 
tracted into Tevet. 7 
3. An improper contraction, or crasis, j is when two single 


- yowels coalesce, but are mixed together to such a degree 


that a vowel or diphthong of a different. sound is substitu- 
ted ; as, teiyea contracted into telyn; 6 ends contracted 
into obpoc. 

4. Syllables contracted by crasis.are long, and have com- 
monly a»mark (’). placed over them, indicative of its having 
taken place. Thus, raya0d for ta dya0d; tabta for ta 
avTa. 3 7 

5. If, in the process of contraction, a mute is brought be- 
fore an aspirated vowel, the mute is also aspirated; as, 
Soidatoc for Tov bdaToc ; Yoiudrtoy for To ivdtiov. 

6. The subscript iota ought never to appear in contrac- 
tions by crasis, unless it be found, previous to contraction, 


in the: first syllable of the second word. Thus, kata for 


kai eita; and éyada for éy@ olda. But xan for nai ért, 


“not céme ; and «dv for kai dy, not Kav. 


. IX. APOSTROPHE OR ELISION. 


1. By apostrophe i is meant the cutting off of a short vowel 
at the end of a word when the next word begins with a 
rowel; and, when this takes place, it is indicated by the 
mark (’) set over the empty space; as, én’ éuov for éni 
éuov. 

2. When the following word has the rough baeathie 


and the elided vowel was preesales, by a smooth mute, this 


mute becomes aspirated ; as, dd’ ov for ard ov. 
3. The vowels elided by apostrophe are a, ¢, 4, 0, but not 


”. Monosyllables, however, in a, t, o (the epic pad ex- 





1. Many editions of the ancient writers, and almost all the lexicons, of 
fend against this rule. 


ee ee ee 


APOSTROPHE. 11 


cepted), and the z in the dative singular and plural of the 

third declension, are not elided. 

_ 4, Neither does the ¢ in te and 6+¢ suffer elision, except 
in the Homeric dialect. The reason with regard to t+ is, 

that it might sometimes be confounded with te; while, if 

the ¢ in 6rz suffered elision, 67’ might be confounded with 

dre, and 60’ with 66c. 

5. The o in 776 is not elided, and for that very reason is 
‘not used by the poets before a vowel. In composition, 
however, it coalesces with the augment, and with the initial 
vowel of the following word, and oe and oo are contracted 
into ov ; as, mpovTuper for mpoéTuWer ; mpovTrTog for mpdoT- 
TOC. 

6. The poets elided, though seldom, the diphthong az ; 
and only in the passive endings pat, oat, Tat, Oat; as, 
BobAcad’ én, Epyou’ Eywv. Of the elision of the diphthong 
ot no example is found in Homer and the epic poets. The 
Attics elided it only in mee for olyot before , but not in 
jot and oot. 

7. Since elision, by the suppression of ies evidently 
hurts, in some degree, distinctness of expression, it is gen- 
erally avoided in prose, so that even the slenderest sounds 
sometimes remain open. ; 

8. When the first word ends with a long vowel or diph- 
thong, and the second begins with a short vowel, this latter 
is elided by the Attic poets; as, mov ’otiy for mov éorty ; 
‘Epy7 "utroAate for ‘Epu7n éutroAaie. And, in prose writers, 
@ "yabé for © ayabé. | 

9. In diphthongs, also, the first short vowel is cut off 
after a long one in the preceding word, chiefly after 7; as, 
7 "voébera for 4 evaébera ; 7) ’bpw for pi) evpw. 


X. N égeAnvarixdy. 


1. By v édeAxvortixév is meant v appended to certain 
final syllables, and it was so called because, as was erro- 


a: 


7 


12 >. FINAL LETTFRS. 


neously supposed, this v did not belong to the termination, 
but was appended to the final vowel merely to prevent an 
hiatus (a word ending with a vowel and the next word be- 
ginning with one), and, therefore, drew, as it were, the sec- 
ond vowel to the first. 

2. In truth, however, this v is not, as is generally sup- 
posed, merely an invention for the sake of euphony, but be- 
longed to the ancient formation, and was first dropped be- 
ee a consonant as the language became softer. _ 

3. This v édeAxvotixéy is added (to-adopt the language 
of grammarians) to datives plural in oz, and, consequently, in 
é and wz; to the third persons of verbs in « or 2; to the 
numeral eixooz, “twenty,” and to the adverbs 7épvor, mav- 
Ténact, voodt, mpba0e, ke, vv, when the following word be- 
gins with a vowel; as, év pgoly dAlyotc, naovy elev éxei- 
vow, Eturipey abTov, sikoowy ETN yeyovac, &c. 

“XI. OTHER FINAL LETTERS. 

1. The letter ¢ is sometimes found at the end of words, 
on the same principle as the v édeAxvotixév. 'Thus, we 
have ovrtw before a consonant, and ovtwe before a vowel. 
So also in péypi¢ and aypi¢, except that these two last often 
stand without c before a vowel. 

2. In like manner, the particle ov, “ not,” takes before a 
consonant a final x#, and, rng he before the rotigh 
breathing a final x Thus, ob mdpeotiy, obk Eveotiv, aby 
breori. 

3. When, however, this particle stands at the end of a 
clause, or where there is a pause in the sense, the « falls 
away; as, touto 0” ov, “ but this not.” Ov GAX’ brav—, 
“ No: but when—.” 

4. The preposition é&, “ out of” has this form bie’ be- 
fore vowels and before a pause; as, && éuov, & drov, Ka 
nav é&. Before all consonants the ¢ of the double letter ¢ 
(x¢) falls away, and the « remains; as, é% Tobrov, ék 0ai- 


a007¢, ék yn¢. 





CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS, 13 


Ye TVA’ Agi CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 


1. In the concurrence of two or more consonants, those 
of the same class can alone stand together, as has already 
been remarked. Hence an aspirated consonant can only 
be joined to an aspirate, a middle to a middle, a smooth. to 
a smooth. In the formation of Greek words, therefore, we 
must change ( 

 rétpi6rat into Tétpitrrat. 
yéypaprat “= yéypanrat. 
pardog  * pdbdoc. . 
ériypadony “ énvypdbdny. 
étonOnv étbgpOny. 
tpibOjoouar “ tpipOjcowat. 
AédeyTat  AEXEKTML. 
Bébpeytae “ Bébpexrat. 
6xd00¢ “¢  6ydooc. 
émArénOnv  * érdéxOnv.- 
AeyOjoonat “ AexOjoopat. 


In composition, however, the preposition é« remains un- 
changed before 7, 6, 0, and hence we have éxdidévat, éx- 
Oeiva, &ec. - 

2. Three or more consonants cannot stand immediately 
together: but one of them (usually a o standing between 
two consonants) must be omitted, or such forms entirely 
avoided. ‘Thus, 


Instead of tétudabe we say Tétvdee. 
menAéyoOar =“ ~— mreTrAEX Oat. 
tétugvTae =“ | TeTUaTaL, OF 


TeTuppéevot elal. 


Exceptions. (1.) This rule does not operate in com 
pounds, where perspicuity of derivation renders the reten 
tion of the third consonant necessary ; as, éxmTbw, éxonév 
dw, dvopOaproc. (2.) If the first or last of the three con. 
sonants is a liquid (A, p, v, p) whereby the harshness of 
pronunciation is softened ; as, éxxAqjoia, meup0eic, oxAnpoc, 
aoOua, aioxpoc. eT 

3. 'T'wo syllables following one another cannot both be- 
gin with an aspirate (¢, x, 0); but, in this ease, the aspi- 
rated consonant which stands at the beginning of the first 
syllable is changed into its kindred smooth. "Thus, 

B . . 


s 





i4 NGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 
~ For 1 Geplanna we say TreplAnta. 

‘ioe, XEXopnka KEX@PTKA. 
i CEOvnKa = “* ss TED HKG. 
Exceptions, (1.) ‘The passive termination in 97y, and all 
its derivative terminations which begin with 9, have no in- 
fluence upon the preceding aspirate ; and thus we write, 
OPIGInY, ExbOgr, SapOjoovrat, Spe~Ojvat. In the verbs 
Sie and TOévat alone, 3 is changed into t before those 
terminations ; as, érvOqv, éréOnv. (2.). So also the adver- 
bial terminations Sev and % ; ; as, TavTayober, KopevO00t. 
(3.) In most compounds also the rule is neglected; as, dv- 
Ooddpog, Edvdaivo. 

4. If the latter aspirate, which caused the change, dis- 
appear, the former resumes its proper shape; thus, 0d- 
dog becomes tddoc, “a grave,” by the previous rule, but 
the verb is Sartw, “J bury.” So tpédw makes Ypébo, 
in the future; tpéyo, SpéFw; Tidw, Yoyw ; the presents 
of these verbs being. changed by the previous rule from 
Spéepw, SpEX, and dig¢w. So also the noun pis, “ hair,” 
makes tpivvoc in the genitive (instead of the old form pi- 
xoc) and Spice in the dative plural, where the aspirate re- 
appears. | 

5. ‘The rough breathing likewise disappears in the first 
syllable when ¥ stands in the next. Thus, the old and 
genuine form of éyw was xy, but the aspirate was changed 
into the smooth for euphony, and reappears when the ¥ is - 
no longer present, as in the future éw. 

6. When the rough breathing meets with a smooth, it 
changes the same into an aspirate, not only in composition, 
but, as has already been remarked, even in accidental con- 
currence; as, &dodoc¢ (from érié and 606g), Sex Anepos (from 
déxa and ‘4pépa), éd’ nuépav (for én’ quépav), & 

7. Aspirates are never doubled ; but, when tr come to- 
gether, the first must be changed ‘into its own smooth ; as, 
Lapa, not Lapda ; Baxyoc, not Bayyxoc ; ’ATOic, not "A0- 
Bic ; Mat@aioc, not Ma6Gatoc. 

8. The letter p in the beginning of a word is doubled 
wheneyer it is preceded by a vowel in composition or in- 
flection; as, éppéO0nv from péw; appnroc, mepippooc, &c. 
After a diphthong, however, the single. p. remains ; as, Ev- 
pons: evpvOjL00. 

. Before jz, the labials B, 7, ob, are itnped into ps; 


A 
en 
a 
y & 
eer 


CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 15 


as, for térpibyar write tétpiupar; for Térvmpat write ré- 
Tuppat ; for yéypadua, yéypayyat. Before the same let- 
ter, < and y are changed into y; as, AéAeywas for AéAcy- 
wat; dédoypat for dédoxpat. And the linguals 0, 0, T, ¢ 
- are changed before the same into o; as, dopa for ddua ; 
mérrecowar for mérecOuar; Avvopat for qvuTpar ; ~hdioua 
for wHpigua. ae : ) 

10. Before o, the linguals 0, 6, r, ¢ are dropped; as, for . 
nédot write ré0t; for TAR00w, TAHOw ; for C@paToL, Oo- 
uaot; for dprdacow, aprrdacw. 

11. The letter v, before the labials B, pw, 7, >, a, is 
changed into »; as, éuBdAdAw (from év and BaAAw), ov 
mpdoow (from ovy and mpdoow), &c. The same letter is 
changed into y before y, «, y, € (though pronounced as ng) ; 
as, éyyeAdw (from év and yeAdw), ovyxaipw (from ovy and 
walpw),&e. - 9 

12. If » comes before 1 or p, it is changed into A or p, 
as, for cvvAoyigo, ovvpintw, write ovAdoyiga, ovppinTo. 

13. The letter v is usually thrown away before o or ¢; 
as, for datwovot, ovvgvyia, write daluoot, ovovyia. But 
the preposition év before o and ¢ remains throughout un- 
changed ; as, évosiw, évgéowat. On the other hand, the 
preposition ovv, before o followed by a vowel, changes v 
into 0; as, ovoaitia, ovoosiw, for ovvottia, ovvosiw. 

14. When the letter v, and 7, 0, or @ following, are to- 
gether rejected before o, then the vowel remaining, if short, 
is changed into a diphthong, namely, ¢ into ec, and o into 
ov ; and, if a doubtful vowel, is lengthened. The long vow- 
els 7 and w remain unchanged. ‘Thus, | 


tudbevtat becomes tuPbeiot. 
onevdow “  omeiow. 
Acovto. -“  A€ovot. 
tuntovto. “ — TYMTOVCL. 
tuvavtat = Thao. 
yryavrow 6 sk yGiot. 
detxvuvtot “* —s Oeikvvot. 
-TUNTWVTOL TUNTOOL. 


In some instances this alteration takes place when only 2 
has been rejected ; as, vg becomes glo; TdAave, TaAGC, 
uédave, péras. "he 


ae... FIGURES AFFECTING SYLLABLES. 


XIII. FIGURES AFFECTING SYLLABLES. 
___ 1. Prosthésis is the addition of one or more letters at the 
beginning of a word; as, te for puxpo¢ ; éetxoor for 
elxoot.' 

2. Paragége is the addition of one or more eters at the 
end of a word; as, 700a for j¢; Adyoroty for Adyoug. — 

3. Epenthésis is the insertion of one or more "ietters. in 
the body of a word ; as, 776Aewoe for mrOAE[O 5 3; Omndrepo¢ 
for o7réTEpos. 

4, Syncope is the taking away of one or more letters 
from the body of a word ; as, Tépaoc for he i ; TaTpo¢ 
for tratépoc. “ss : 

5. Apherésis is the taking. away of one or more letters 
from the beginning of a word; as, elBw for AéiBo ; & for 
oi or En. | 

6. Apocope is the taking away of one or more letters 
from the end of a word; as; rép for mapa ; d@ for dapa. 

7. Metathésis is the transposition of letters and syllables , 
as, Expaov for ErapOov, from ree ; papeten for edapKoy, 
from dépxe ; Kpaoia for Kapdia; arapro¢ for arparréc. 

8. Tmésis is the separation of the preposition of a com 
pound from the verb by means of some other word interve 
ning; as, b7rép Tivad Exetv for vtTEepévety Tivd. 





XIV. DIALECTS. : 

1. The principal dialects of the Greek language are four; 
the Molic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. 

2. The Molic retained the most numerous traces of the 
early Greek, and hence the Latin coincides more with this 
than with the other dialects. It was distinguished from the 
Doric by trifling differences ; chiefly, however, by the 1 use 





.. Most, if not all, of the examples of prosthesis are, in we, old forms 
of the language. So also those of paragoge and epe 

2. For more particular remarks conceming the dialects, eonsult Ex 
cursus D, and the observations at the end of each declension, &c 


DIALECTS. 17 


- of the digamma before vowels at the beginning and in the 
middle of words, and before some consonants, as p; whereas 
the digamma was dropped by the Doric and other dialects. 

3. The Doric was hard, rough, and broad, particularly 
from the frequent use of a for 7 and w; as, @ Ad@a for 7 
AnOn; tav xopav for Tv KopSyv ; and from the use of two 
consonants, where the other Greeks employed the double 
consonants ; as, eArcdetat for pedscerat, &c., which was 
also the custom in Afolic.. It was rudest among the Spar- 
tans, the enemies of all change, and was spoken in its great- 
est purity by the Messenians. 

4. The Ionic was the softest of all the dialects, on ac- 
count of the frequent meeting of vowels, and the rejection 
of aspirated letters. ‘Thus, they said troséw for ror 3 TiT- 
teo for Timrov; déxowar for déyouat ; drrarpéw for d@aipa 
Hence also it is fond of the hiatus, or confltience of vowel 
sounds, against which the Attic so carefully guards. 

5. The Attic was the most polished dialect, and forms 
the basis of our ordinary grammars. It avoided the colli- 
sion of vowel sounds, and was, therefore, fond of contrac- 
tions. It differed from the Ionic by using the long @ where 
the Ionians employed the 7 after a vowel or the letter p, and 
by preferring the consonants with an aspirate, which the 
Ionians rejected. It employed, also, in its later stages, the 
double pp instead of the old p¢, and the double tr instead 
of the hissing oo. 


XV. PARTS OF SPEECH. 


1. There are eight parts of speech in Greek, sassy , Ar- 
ticle (a4pOpov), Noun (6vowa), Adjective (érriOerov), Pronoun 
(a4vtwvupia), Verb (pia), Adverb (érupphua), Preposition 
(xpo6éotc), and Conjunction (otvdecpoc). 

2. The Interjection is ranked among adverbs. 

3. The Article, Noun, Adjective, and Pronoun are de 

B2 


“the woman ;” 7d ypnua, “ the thing” Some nouns 


. ae . 


18 PARTS OF SPEECH. 


clined ‘ by Genders (yévn), Cases (rréoett and Numbers” 


(dprOuol). 
4. There are three Genders; the Metseutine (yevoc dp- 


| oevinbv), Feminine (SnAvKéyv), and Neuter (ovdérepor) ; and 
to mark the gender the article is usually employed 1 in’ gram- 


mar; namely, 6 for the masculine, 7) for the femin: n 
76 for the neuter. ‘Thus, 6 avOperroc, * the man 3” 





ever, are both masculine and feminine ; as, bith Mk KérLv0C, 
“ the wild oltve-tree.” ‘These are said to be of the common 
gender. 

5. There are three minions the Stidulor (apiOpade EvL- 
x6c), Dual (dvinée), and Plural (rAnOvvrindc). The sin- 


gular denotes one ; the plural ‘more than one ; the gag two, 
ora Soa 


* 
. There are five cases, the Nominative (mr@otc biiiss. i 


oe, Genitive (yevixh), Dative (dottKh), Accusative (aitt- 
aTlKi}), and Vocative (kAqrtKh). 

7. The Greek name of the ablative would be ddacpeti- 
eh, but the national grammarians of Greece do not make 
mention of this case, because in Greek its form is, in every 
instance, the same with the dative. 


GENERAL RULES. 

1. Kiouaa of the neuter gender have the nominative, ac- 
cusative, and vocative alike in all the numbers; and these 
cases in the plural end always in a. 

2. The nominative and vocative plural are always alike. 

3. The nominative, accusative, ‘and vocative dual are 
alike ; as also the genitive and dative. 

4, The dative singular in all three declensions ends i in #. 
In the first two, however, the z is subscribed. 

5 The genitive plural ends always in wy. © 





eee 


THE ARTICLE. ; 19 


_ XVI. THE ARTICLE. 


1 The article is a word prefixed to a noun, and serving 
to ascertain or define it.. Its declension is as follows 





* 


ee “ a Singular. 
og Mase. Fem. = Neuter. 
Non | 6 1) TO the. 
Gen, — TOV THC TOU of the. 
Dat. ~~ “T TH TO to the. 
Accus. TOV THY TO the. 
on Dual. 
ey i Nom. ; << ge ee, es : he : 
t Acteutt TO ¥ 4 : TO) the 0: 
Gen. - 8 3 of or to the 
en ¥ ts 
Dat. TOL Tal TOLV pe P 
Plural. 
Nom. of ai Th the. 
Gen. TOV TOV TOY of the... . 
Dat. _ ToC Talc TOC to the. ~ 
Accus.. TOvC THE Th thee ee i 


> «“ 


REMARKS ON THE ARTICLE. 


1. The article was originally a demonstrative pronoun ; 
but, in the later Ionic and Attic dialects, it became merely 
a means of defining nouns.’ nas 








1. In the older grammars two articles are given; the prepositive, 6, 
_%, TO, and the postpositive, 6c, 7, 5, which we call, at the present day, 
the relative pronoun. In a sentence like the following, “This is the 
man who will deliver us” (Otroc éotiv 6 avyp b¢ cdcet jude), the two 
words “the” and “who” (6 and 6c) refer so intimately to each other, 
and lock, as it were, into one another so much like joints, connecting in 
this way the two clauses as members or limbs of one sentence, that the 
Greeks termed them appa, articuli, or joints. The first of these, how- 
ever, namely, 6, 7, To, stands very commonly with its simple clause 
alone, and is therefore, strictly speaking, in such instances no longer 
an article or joint. But this arises from the circumstance, that, in very ‘ 
many instances of tis kind, the second clause is not expressed in words, 

put is left to be mentally supplied ; such as, “who is spoken of,” or 


oe : 
7 
la 









we p 


20 '  _. NOUNS, 


2. There is no form of the article for the vocative, for & 
_Is an interjection. . : an 

3. If the particles ye and de are annexed to the article, 
it has the signification of the pronoun “ this,” but the de- 
clension remains the same. ‘Thus, 6de, 7jde, Téde, genitive 


- tovde, THOOE, TOVE, &c. 


4. In the early Greek the article was réc¢, TH, 76, and 
hence arise the plural toé, taé in Doric and Ionic, and the 
T in the neuter and the oblique cases. 


XVII. NOUNS. 


1. "The Declensions (kAiceic) of nouns are three, corre- 
sponding to the first three declensions in Latin. 

2..'The First Declension has four terminations: two fem- 
inine, @ and 7; and two masculine, ac and 7¢. 

3. The Second Declension has two terminations,-o¢ and 
ov. Nouns in o¢ are generally masculine, sometimes femi- 
nine ; nouns in ov are always neuter. 

4. The Third Declension ends ina, t, v, neuter; w fem- 
inine; and v, &, p, a, w, of all genders; and increases in 
the genitive. 


XVIII. FIRST DECLENSION. 


7 Terminations. 
t feminine. 


‘1. Nouns in pa and a pure, that is, @ preceded by a 
‘vowel, together with some proper names, as Ada, ’Av- 
dpouédar, biAouhdAa, Avoriwa, and also the substantive dAa- 
Ad, “a war-cry,” have the genitive in ac, and retain their 
a through all the cases of the singular. | 





b:. k masculine. 
n¢ 





‘‘ who is here concerned,” or ‘‘ whom you know,” &c. Hence it became, 
by degrees, a usage of the language to annex the prepositive article 4, 77, 
76 by itself to every object which is to be represented as definite, either 
by means of the language itself or from the circumstances. In their 
whole theory, however, the two articles are adjective pronouns. (Butt. 
mann’s larger Gr°mmar, p. 121, Robinson’s transl.) 


_ 


ff, 
* i 
= 


FIRST DECLENSION. 


21 


2. All the contracted nouns of this declension likewise 
retain the a in the genitive and other cases of the singular ; 


as, ud, pv-ac, &e. ; "AOnva, ’AOnv-ac, &c. 
3. All other nouns in a have the genitive in 4¢, and 
tive in 9; but in. the accusative and vocative they res 


their q. 






4. Nouns i in 7 retain the 7 throughout the ila di num: 
ber, making the accusative in 7v, and the vocative in 7. 


Singular, 
N. 7 7pép-a, 
G. rig mpép-ac, 
D. Th -Mkép-2, 
A. THY Tpép-av, 
¥ pép-a. 





%, 
Singular. 
.4  oodgi-a, 
THE cogi-ac, 
. TH oodgi-a, 
THY Codi-av, 

cogi-a. 


SPOUMZ 


Singular. 
n  0-a, 
tig 05-6, 
ty d65-n,. 
THv O0§-ay, 
66&-a. 


<> uaz 


Singer 
N.% Kegaa-7, 


G. Tij¢ Kegar-je 


D. tH Kepar-q, 
A. THY kegan-qy, 
¥. kegaa-7. 


EXAMPLEs. 


7 Tpépa, * the day.” 


Dual. 
N. ry npép-a, 
G. raiv huép-aty, 
D. taiv jyép-acy, 
A. Ta tpép-a, 
¥. Hsp a. 





~ 


4 copia, “* wisdom.” 


Dual. 
. TE oogi-a, 
. TA copi-auy, 
; Taiv oopi-aly, 
TZ o0gi-a, 
oogi-a. 


stom 


—s 


Dual. 
N. ra d68-a, 
G. raiv 66§-aty, 
D. raiv 66§-arv, 
A. Ta 606é-a, 
V. 06&-a. 


Pen 


Dual. 
N. trad = xegaa-d, 
G. raiv xedad-aiv, 
D. ratv Kegar-aly, 
A. Td Kepad-d, — 
aD Kegaa-d. 











déka, “ the opinion.” 


Kepaah, * the head.” 





<Peer 


SP EQAa 


N 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


. TOV v) €p-OV, 
‘ tac nfLép-ate 
. TaG Nuép-ae, 


pep-ae. 


Plural. 
al codgi-at, 
TOV Gogl-Ov, 
Taig oopi-atc, 


. TAC oogi-ac, 


oogi-at 


Plural. 
ai 66€-at, 
tav do§-dy, 
taic 06€-arc, 
tac 06&-ac, 

06€-at. 


= 


' Plurai. 


ak Kedad-ai, 


Tay Kedaa-Ov, 

Tale Kepar-ai¢ 

Ta¢ KEpad-ae, 
kepad-at. 


22 


| éynipa, an anchor, 
yépipa, a bridge. 


Like 66a, 
yAaooa, a tongue, 
dina, thirst, 
Teiva, hunger, 
Vdhacoa, a sea, 
pila, a root, 
dp \Aa, a contest. 





we 


~ 





+ 





‘FIRST DECLENSION. 


Like co¢ia, 
oixia, a house, _ 
oKia, a shadow, 
praia, friendshig 


. aitia, a cause, 


GAnGeta, truth. 


Like xegaag, 
KON, hair, 
porn, a voice, 
On, & song, 
vepédn, a clous, 
oeAnvn, the maon, 
Tun, honou. 


5. Nouns in a¢ make the genitive in ov, and the dative 
in a, and the remaining cases like those of 7juépa. 

6. Nouns in 7¢ make the genitive in ov, the accusative 
in 77, and the vocative in 7, and the rest like vinpa 


EXxAmPLes. 
| 6 veaviac, “ the youth.” ~ . 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N.6  veavi-ac, | N. tT veavi-a, N. of ‘veavi-at, 


G. rod veari-ov, 
D. 76 veavi-g, 
A. rov veavi-ayr, 





G. toiv veavi-aty, 
D. rotv veavi-aty, 
A. T® veavi-a, 


G. Tév veavi-dv, 
D. roi¢ veavi-aic, 
A. ‘robe veavi-ac, 





V. veavi-a. V. veavi-a. Va veavi-at. 
; 6 TeA@une, “ the tax-gatherer.” 
; : Singular. Dual. . Plural. 
- N.6 reAdv-ne, N. 7 Tedov-a, N. of = reAdr-a, 


G. Toi TEAav-ov, 
D. t6 TeAdr-y, 
A. Tov TEAGv-nv, 


G. roiv reAGv-aw, 
D. roiy teAdv-av, — 


A.T®  Tedov-a, 


G. tév TEedwr-Gy 
D. roic. reAdv-aic, 
A. Tove TEAdrv-ac, 





V. TEAav-N. V. TEAOV-a. V. TEAGy-at. 
: Decuine 
_ Like veaviae, : Like reAdvye, 
poviac, a solitary, Gxwaxne, a short sword, 
Tauiac, a steward, XELporEXvNs, a workman, 
° KoxAiac, a snail, . | abyoOqAne, a goat-sucker, : 
Aiveiac, Eneas, * 1. éAAnvodixne, ajudge at the games 
TivOayépac, Pye ae 2 ’Arpeidne, Atrides, 
- ’Avasayépac, Anaxag ae ro, "Ayxionc, Anchises. 








Dh si 


FIRST DEC TENSION. e Qo 


7 Nouns in THs compounds in 77¢ ; 3 as, KvvaTne, * an 
umpudent person ;” names indicative of nations ; as, Ilépone, 
“@ Persian,” SKvOnc, “ a Scythian ;” together with deriv- 
atives from peTpa@, TWA, and Tpi6w, as, yewuéTpne, “a ge- 
ometer,” uvpoToAnc, “a vender of perfumes,” tratdotpibyc, 
“a teacher of gymnastics,” make the vocative singular in a, 
notin 7. Thus, cvvarne, voc. kuvard ; Ilépong, voc. Ilép- 
od. But Ilépoyc, a man’s name (Perses), makes 7. 

8. Nouns in orne¢ have 7 or @ in the vocative ; as, ANoTAS, 
** a robber,” voc. AyoTh or ial 


CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


1. In forming these contractions, ea preceded by p, and 
also aa, make @; as, épéa, contracted épa, “ wool ;” wvda, 
pva, “a mina;” Bopéac, Boppac, “ the north wind.” 

2. But ea not preseded by p, together with e7 and on, 
become 7 ; as, yéa, yij, “ the earth ;” yadén, yarn, “a wea- 
sel ;” dunn, Siraj, “ double ;” ‘Epuéac, ‘Epyje, “ Mercu- 

ry 3” ’AmeAAéne, ’"AmeAdijc, “ Apelles.” 

3. In the genitive, ov absorbs the preceding vowel; as, 
‘Eppéov, "Epuov. 


EXAMPLEs. 


épéa, contr. éoa, “ wool.” 








Singular. Dual. _ Plural. 
N. épé-a, _ ép-d, N. épé-a, ' N. épé-at, ép-at, 
G. épé-ac, ép-de, G. épé-ay, G. épe-Gv, ép-Gv, 
D. épé-g, 8 p-G, D. épé-arv, D. épé-atc, ép-aic, 
A. épé-av, ép-ay, A. épé-a, A. épéac, ép-dic, 
V. épé-a, ép-d. V. épé-a. Vi. épé-a; — Ep-ai. 


yarén, contr yadn, “a weasel.” 


Singular. Dual. : Plural. 
N. yadé-n, yad-7, |. N. yadé-a, yad-d, | N. yadé-at, yad-ai, 
G. yaré-ne, yad-ijc,| G. yaré-aty, yad-aiv, | G. yade-dv, yad-Gy, 
D. yaré-n, yar-#, | D. yadé-atv, yad-aiv,| D. yaAé-atc, yaA-aie, 
A. yaré-nv, vali, A. yahé-a, yad-a, ee yaré-ac, yah-dc, 
V. yaré-n, yad-n. | V. yaaé-a, yared. iV aia (ag 


y= 








. | 
24 DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 


‘1. Instead of the terminations y¢ and ac of the nomina- 
tive singular, the AZolians employed @ Hence ronrie¢ 
and veaviac become, in AXolic Greek, roinrd, veavid. So 
also we have in the same dialect the Homeric nominatives, 
pyntléeTa, vedédAnyepéta, evpvord, &c. From this source 
comes the Latin nominative singular of the first declension, 
poeta, comet, &e. 

2. The Aolians made the genitive singular end. in aic, 
and also. in ac, which latter form was common unto them 
with the Dorians. Thus, 7uépaic for quépac; ddzac¢ for 
d6&n¢,from the AXolic nominative d6é¢@. From the genitive 
in ai¢ the Latins derived, by dropping the final ¢, their old 
genitive of the first declension in ai, as musat, aulat, terrai, 
which afterward changed toe. The other genitive, name- 
ly, that in‘ac, gave rise to another early form of the genitive 
in Latin, that in as, which still remains in paterfamilias, 
n:aterfamilias, &c. , 

3. The A®olians used in the genitive plural Gwy instead 
of wy, and in the accusative plural they had asc for ac. 
Thus, pedcodwyv for yedtooov ; Kadatc, codaic, for kaddc, 
oopac. 

4. The Dorians employed the broad @ in the termination 
as well as other parts of the nominative and oblique cases. 
Thus, djun, Doric daua ; vipdn, Doric viuda; djunr , 
Doric ddpyay, Xe. 

5. The Dorians give nouns in a¢ the genitive in @; as, 
Aiveiac, gen. Aiveia ; Iindeidac, gen. Iindeidd. ‘This gen- 
itive is formed by contraction from do; thus Aiveido, con- 
tracted Alveia ; IlnAeidao, contracted I7nAeidd. _ So, also, 
in the plural, they contracted d@wy into av, saying for MeAz- 
adwy, Medrav ; for dnAvtepawv, InAvtepay, &c., where the 
Ionic has éwy, and the Attic ov. 

6. The Ionians changed the long a of this declension 
into 7; as, codin, uépn, venvinc, &c.; very seldom, how- 
ever, the short @. ‘The onians also changed ov of the 
genitive singular into ew, and @v of the genitive plural into 
éwy ; thus ’Atpeidew for ’Atpeidov ; rrorntéw for rroenrov ; 
kounréwy for Kounta@v ; iketéwy for ixeTor. : 

7. The Ionians employed the termination ea instead of 
nv in the accusative singular of nouns in 7¢; as, deoT6Tea 
for deondérnv ; Kapbioea for Kapb6ienv. So in the accusa- 


“ R 
SECOND DECLENSION. 25 


tive plural they used ea¢ for ac; as, , deondreag for dea 

moOTaC. 

8. The Ionians, in the Dative plural, employed got fos 

auc as, deororgas for deonétatg ; ynotdtyot for vyowtae 
XIX. SECOND DECLENSION. 


Terminations. 


o¢, masculine, sometimes feminine. 
ov, always neuter.’ 


EXAmMpLes. 


6 Adyos, * the discourse.” 











_ Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N.6 Ady-o¢, . N. TO Ady-o, N. of Ady-ot, 
G. tod Ady-ov, G. Toiv Ady-ow, G. Tév Ady-or, 
D. 76 Ady-y, D. rot A6y-ouw, D. roi¢ Ady-or¢, 
A. Tov Ady-ov, | A.T® éy-0, A. rov¢ Ady-ove, 
¥. Aoy-e. Vv. Aoy-0. Vv Aoy-0¢. 

4) 606c, “ the way.” 

Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N.7 60-6¢, N. ta 60-0, N. ai  66-0i, 
G. tij¢ 66-08, G. raiv 66-oiv, G. tiv 66-7, 
D. r7 «60-6, D. raiv 66-oiv, D. raic 66-oi¢, 
A. tv 60-67, A.ra 66-0, A. tag 60-ov¢, 
V 60-é. D hf 66-0. Vv. 60-08. 

TO Oawpor, * the gift.” 

Singular. Dual. | Plural. 
N. 76 dép-ov, | N.1d dép-o, N. ta. 65p-a, 
G. rod dap-ov, G. roiv dép-ov, | G. tov d6p-or, 
D. 76 bép-y, > D. Totv dap-ow, D. Toig ddp-00¢, 
A. 76 ddp-or, A. T® dép-a, A. Ta dép-a, 
Vy. OGp-ov. | Vz. one V. d6p-a. 











1. Except in Gdshutives of female names, where, by a species of sy- 
nesis, the gender refers to the person meant, not to the termination of 
the noun. Thus, 7 [Avxépcov, from Tvnepd § ; a sah Ser ‘So in 
Terence, “ mea Glycerium.” C 


26 SECOND DECLENSION 





Dectine : i) 

Like Adyoe, Like dépor, 
Ojp0¢, a@ people, i! Oévdpor, a tree, 
KvpLOG, a master, EvAov, wood, 7 
ivOpwroc, a man, épyavoy, an instrumen 

adeAgoc; a brother,  &pyov, a work, 
vloc, @ son, | : pijdov, an apple, 
avepnoc, a wind, apobatov, a sheep, 
ayyehoc, a messenger, CGor, an animal, 
vowoc, a law, ths téxvov, a child, 
olxoc, a house, podov, a rose, 
olvoc, wine. . obkor, a fig. 
Like ddédc, 


- Gutehoc, a vine, 
" vijooc, an island, 
a vécoc, a disease, 
omoddc, ashes, 
mapbévoc, a maiden, 
BiBAoc, a book. 

1. Many words of this declension have a double guuader, 
as something masculine or feminine is denoted by them ; 
as, 0 Yebc, the god, ) Sedc, the goddess ; ) aviparog, the 
man, 7) GvOpwroc, the woman; 6 a apKTOS, the he-bear, ) dpk- 
toc, the she-bear, &c. 

2. Others, again, have a double gender, without such 
ground ; as, 0, 7), p pers, the skin; 6,1), Sduvoc, the shrub; 6, 
7, 6apbitoc, the lyre; 6, 7), Shier, the path, &c. 

3. Some with the gender alter likewise the scandy 
as, 6 Cuyéc, the yoke, 1) Suyéc, the balance ; 6 imroc, the horse, 
4) irroc, the cavalry, and also the mare ; 6 A€éx.O0c, pulse-broth, 
i} A€KLOOC, the yolk of an egg. 

4, The following become neuter in the plural : 


6 Béotpuyoc, the curl, Ta BooTpyya. 
0 deopoc, the chain, Ta Jeopd, 

6 Seopoc, the law, Ta Seoud. 

0 Oi¢poc, the chariot-seat, 7a didpa. 

7 KéAevOoc, — the way, - Ta KéAEvOa. 
6 Adxvoc, the torch, Ta AbyVa. 


6 citoc, the corn, Ta OITA. 


ATTIC FORM OF DECLENSION, 27 


5. ‘The vocative singular has not only ¢, but likew.  o¢ 
for a termination. ‘Thus, 6 @ed¢, voc. © Bed¢. So, also, 
® dtAé¢, &c. This is particularly the case in the Attic di- 
alect. 


} ATTIC FORM OF DECLENSION.! | 

1. The Attic form of declension makes the vocative lik: 

the nominative, and has w in the termination of every case 

2. The final v is often omitted in the accusative singu 

lar ; as, Aayo for Aayov ; ved for vedy; Ew for wv. This 

‘is particularly the case in, proper names; as, Ko, Kéa, 
Téw, “AOw, for Kév, Kéwy, &e. | 


oe 








Exampnes. 
6 Aayoc, “the hare.” 

Singular. Dual. Plural. 
N.6 Aay-oe, N.7® Ady-d, N.of Aay-d, 
G. Tod Aay-d, G. roiv Aay-Gv, _ G. Tév Ady-6r, 
D. r6 Aay-6, D. toiv Aay-Gr, | D. rote Aay-de, 
A. Tov Aay-av, A. To Aay-6, A. Tovg Aay-0¢, 
V. Aay-o¢. V. Aay-o. V. Aay-@. 

TO avayewy, “ the dining-rocm.” 

Singular. Dual. ‘Plural. 
N. rd dvdéye-wr, N. TO dvdye-o, N. ta dvdye-w, 
G. Tod avaye-o, G. toiv dvaye-wr, G. Tév aveye-wr, 
D. 6 aroéye-y, D. roiv dvéye-yr, D. roi¢ dvéye-we, § 
A. 76. dvoye-ar, A. TO dvaye-w, A. tad = dvoye-w,- 
V. dvéyée-ov. | V.° § dvdye-o. VV. — dvGye-ao. 








1. The neuters of some adjectives have also w in the 
nominative and accusative, especially dyfpwe, neuter dyf-- 


po. | . : 
2. Words, which otherwise belong to the third declen- 
sion, are often declined after this particular form ; as, Mévw 





1. Buttmann calls this an old and peculiar mode of inflection, em- 
ployed by the Attics (Ausf. Sprachl., p. 157). 'Thiersch, on the con- 
trary (G. G., § 53, 4), maintains, that these forms arise merely from the 
rejection of the formal letters 0, e, a after the vowels contracted inte ew 
Buttmann’s opinion is undoubtedly the true one. 


28 CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION 


(from Mivac, Mévagc) for Mivwa in the accusative. So, 
also, yédov from yérws, yéAwroc) for yédora ; and 7p0v 


| Geet ijpac, 7jpwoc) 


for 7jpwa. 


3. Only one neuter in w¢ is assigned to this form of de- 


clension, namely, TO ypéwe, the debt. 


According to the an- 


cient grammarians,.it has ypéw¢ not only in the accusative, 


but also in the genitive singular. 


formed from ypéoe ; ‘thus. PI xpéd, &c. 


All the other parts are 


CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


1. The letters £0, de, and 60 become ov ; as, ddeAdidéoc 
contracted ddsAdidove ; vde, vov ; Vd0¢G, vovE. 


2. A short vowel before a long one, or a diphthong, is 


absorbed ; as, 7Adwy, TAGY ; TAOOLY, TAOLY. 
3. In the neuter, @ absorbs the preceding vowel, and be - 
comes long ; as, d0réa, dora. 
4. In the vocative, ee is not contracted ; as s, ddeApidee 


EXAMPLES, | 


Eat 


0. vooc, contracted vovc, “ the mind.” 


Singular. ~ 
N. 6  v6-0¢, voice, 
G, tot vdé-ov, vod, 
D. 76 v6-@, v6, 
A. Tov v6-ov, voir, 
V. vo-€, vod. 


Dual. 
N. 7d v6-0, “vb, 
G. roiv v6-ow, voir, 
D. roiv vd-owv, voir, 
A.Ta v6-0, v6, 





V. VO-0, VO. - 


Plural. 


N. of  v6-01,- voi, 

G. Tév vé-wv, vor, 
D. roi¢ vd-otc, voic, 
A. rove vd-ouc, voi, 


id vo-ol, vot. 


rd doréov, contracted daTovy, “ the bone.” 


Singular. 
N.70 d07é-ov, d0T-odr, 
G. Tob doré-ov, daT-0d, 
D.76 d0ré-@, d0T-6, 
A. T0. baré-ov, d0T-obr, 
VV... deré-ov, d0T-0dv. 





Dual. 
N.7® 60Téw, do7-6, 
G. roiv do0ré-orv, d0T-oiv 
D. roiv d0ré-o1v, doT-otv 
A.t® é0ré-w, dot-G, 
Mi dcré-w, boT-6. 





Plural. 
N.ra@ doré-a, doT-d, 
G. rév b0Té-wy, d0T-Ov, 
D. roi¢ d0ré-o1c, d07-08¢ 
A.ta bécré-a, do7-d, 
Vv. dcré-a, doT-a 


DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


1. The ASolians wrote the dative singular without the 


subscribed ; as, oof@ for oop@. Hence the Latin dative 


and ablative ; in o of the second deciension. 


In the accusa 


= 


THIRD DECLENSION. 29 


tive plural they are said to have employed the termination 
ot¢ for ove ; as, KdtToL¢ Youotc for KaTa TOvG VouoUC. ) 

2. The Dorians changed the termination o¢ of the nom- 
inative into op; as, Tydceop 6 MiAnotop for Tyud0eoc 6 
McAjetoc. In the genitive singular they changed the ter- 
mination ov into w; as, T@ voue for Tov vowov. And in 
the accusative plural they employed the termination w¢ for 
ove ; as, TOC AdKwC for Todc AdKovc. Hence the accusa- 
tive plural in os of the second declension of Latin nouns. 

3. The Ionians use ew, in the termination of the genitive 
se a for ov; as, Kpotoéw for Kpoicov ; Barréw for Bat- 

ov.- In the plural they changed oy of the genitive into 
éwy ; as, Tedoéwy for Tecowy ; Tvpéwy for Tup@y ; and in 
the dative. used ozoz for o1¢; as, “Ul@oror for AiBorc. 

4. The form of the genitive ovo for ov occurs for the most 
part in the poets only, chiefly the epic. The original form 
of the genitive seems to have been -oo (analogous to ao in 
the first declension), whence came ovo, and by contraction 
ov. In the genitive and dative dual the epic poets insert 
ant; as, Urroliy, moiv, orabuoiiv. 

5. The old forns of the dative occurs also in Attic ; as, 
xakolowv, Plat. Gorg. p. 497, D.; tobrotot, ib. p. 28 ; olKot- 
ov, Soph. Gad. T. 249, &c. 


. XX. THIRD DECLENSION. » 
- Terminations. 

a, l, V, neuter. 

@, feminine. 


v, &, p, 0, w, of all genders. 


1. The third declension is distinguished from the two 
preceding in making the oblique cases longer by one syl- 
lable than the nominative. In other words, it is said to . 
mcrease in the genitive. The genitive ends always in oc. 

2. ‘The root of the words in this declension is generally 
disguised in the nominative by added vowels and conso- 
nants, and is to be discovered by taking away o¢ from the 
genitive. Thus, nominative 6 daiywy, “ the deity,” geni- 
tive daiwov-oc, root daizov; 6 yiyac, “ the giant,” gen. yi. 

C2 


30° THIRD DECLENSION. 


yave- -0¢, root ylyarr ; TO capa, * the ae gen. OWpar-os. 
root OouaT, &e. 








| Examp.es.! 
_- 6 Ofp, “the wild beast.” 

Singular. 5 — Dual. a Plural. 
N.6 fp, | N. td S%p-e, N. of Ofp-ec, - 
G. rod 3np-o¢, G. toiv Snp-oiv, G. tév Onp-dr, 
D. 76. Onp-i, D. roiv Onp-oiv, D. roi¢ Snp-ci, 
A. Tov Sijp-a, A. TH Vip-e, | A. rode Sijp-ac, 
Ww O70. V Sijp-e. ¥. Jijp-e¢. 


é aldy, “the age.” | 
Singular. 7 Dual. ~- ~ © Plural. 

















N. 6 aidv, N. 7 aidrv-e, N. of aidv-ec, 
G. Tod aidy-oc, G. toiv aidv-ouw, G. Trav alay-an, 
D. tT aidr-t, D. toiv aidyv-otv, ~D. Tore aid-o1,? 
A. Tov aiév-a, | A. 7 aidy-e, |. A. Tove a 
V. aiav. ¥. aidv-e. - - | VV.  — aidp-ec. 
a hat 
6 daiwwr, “ the deity.” 

Singular. Dual. ! Plural. 
N.6 dai, OV, N. 7d daipov-e, N. of daipov- eC, 
G. tod dai 1G. tot Sayuov-o.v, G. Tév daiudrv-wr, 
D. 7G daipov-t, ~ | D. roty Says v-OLV, D. roig daipo-o1, 
A. tov daiuoy-a, A. T@ Oaisov-e, _ | A. Tove Oaiuor-ac, 
Vv daipov. VV. — daipor-e. V Oaipov-ec. 

6 Aéw wy, “ the lion.” 

Singular. Dual. _ Plural. 
N.6  Aéwr, N. ra “Aéovr-e, N. of Aéovr-ec,. 
G. rod Aéovr-oc, G. totv Aedvr-ouv, G. rév Aedvt-wr, 
D. TO AéOVT-L, | D. roty Aedvr-owv, D. roi¢g Aéov-ou,4 
A. Tov AéorT-a, A. Tt AéovrT-e, A. Tov¢ Aéovt-ac, 
V. Aéov. re Aéovt-e. V. Aéovt-ec. 





1. We have placed the paradigms before the remarks on the formation 
of the cases, an arrangement less repulsive to the learner than the other 
would have been; though, in strictness, the remarks on the cases pean 
to come first. 

2. Oid form aiéy-o1, whence, by rejecting v before o, we have aiG-ox 

3. Old form daipov-o1, whence, by rejecting v before o, and retaining » 


the short vowel of the root, we have Oaipo-o1. 


4. Old form Aégovr-ot, whence, id rejecting the yr and changing o int 
ov, we have Aégov-ou. 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


“31 


#) AatAarp, “ the storm.” 


i THE Aaiddn-oc, 
" TH Aaihar-t, 
THY Aaihan-a, 





Aainaw. 


q ™TEpvs, “ the wing.” 


eae ik 

h_  wrépus, 
Tig wrépy-0¢, 
- TH TT répuy-t, 
. TH TTépvy-a, 
nrépvé. 


5 Sigg 


ee 


N.6. & N. 70 épar-e, 
G. roo bara, G. roiv ipdr-o1v, 
D. 76 Epwr-t, _ D.-roiv épdr-otv, 
A. Tov Epwir=d, A: 7® épwr-e, 
V. Epwe. ¥. Epwr-e. 
6 ind, * the thong.” 
Singular Dual. 
N.6 bude, N. To ipdvr-e, . 
G. tod ludyr-oc, G. roiv iudvt-ow, 
D. 16 ldvr-t, D. toy ty iyT-oww, 
A. tov iudyvt-a, A. tT indvr-e, 
V. ludy. V. iudvr-e. 
4 padaayé, “ the phalanx.” 
Singular. - Dual. . 
N. 7 ¢dAayé, | N. ra $ddayy-e; 
G. tij¢ dadayy-os, G. taiv padéyy-ow, 
D. th gddayy-t, | D. ratv gaddyy-ow, 
A. thv ddahayy-a, A.ta gdhayy-e, 
V. paaayés. V. parayy-e. 





Dual. 
N. ra Aatddn-e, 
G. raiv AaiAdr-olr, 
D. raiv Aarar-orv, 
A. tad Aatiar-e, 
Vv. Aadar-e. 


Dual. 
N. ta | wrépuy-é, 
G. raiv mTEpvy-olv, 
D. raiv xrepiy-owv, 
A. T& mTépvy-e, 
Vv. TTEPVY-€._ 


5 Epwe, “ the love.” 


Dual. 








| 








Plural. 
N. ai Aaidar-ec, 


G. rév Aatddn-wr, 
D. tai¢g Aairarp-c,' 
A. ta¢ Aaihan-ac, 
V. Aaihat-€s 


Plural. 
N. ai _ mrépuy-ee. 
G. tév mrepby- ar, 
D. Taig mT EpVE-t," 
A. tag mrépvy-ac, 
TTEPVY-EC.. 


Plurat. 
EpWT-E¢, 
G. rév épdt-av, 
D. toi¢ épw-ot,® 
A. rov¢ épwrt-ac, 


N. of 


ENWT-EC. 
- Plural. 
N. okt LEVT-€C, 


G. Tév § edited 
D. toi¢ luao-1,4 
A. rove ludvr-ag, 
V. 


budvr-ec. 


Plural. 
N.ai gddayy-ec, 
G. Tév gaddyy-wv, 
D. Tai¢ padays-t,° 
A. Tae. padayy-ac, 
V.  panayy-es. 





1. Old form Aatian-or, whence, by substituting the double letter, we 


have AaiAarp-c. 


2. Old form mrépvy-or, whence, by substituting & for ys, we have 


wréové-t. 


3. Old form Epwt-ot, whence, by rejec*ing r before o, we have Eca-ot, 


4, Old form / iudvt-ot. 


6. Old form $dAayy-ct. 


<P oo 


‘ 


Singular. 
N. 6 . .déc, 
G. Tod Bw-de, 
.T6 Vo-l, 
Tov 8é-a, 

Pac. 


SP 


Singular.» 
6. Kie, 
‘ » Va c* 
. TON KL-06, | 
T@ “Kt-i, 
TOV Ki-v, 
kic. 


Singular. 

TO oud, 

TOD TOpUAT-0C, 

TO COpar-t, 

TO oGua, 
oGua. 


seen 


5 Ode,“ the jackal.” 








are 


. Toy owpar-orr, 
. Tov Gupdr-o1y, 


THIRD DECLENSION. 











oOuat-e. 


“Dual. Pluval. 
N.70 6-e, N. of  dé-e¢, 
G. roiv 36-oLr, G. 16y 96-or 
D. Telv 86-01”, D. Toi¢ Vw-ci, 
A.7a %é-e, A. tobe 36-ac, 
V. YG-e. V. VG-e¢. 
6 xic, “the wood-worm.” 
Dual. - * Plural. 
N.t® xKi-e, | | N. of — xi-ee, 
G. toiv ki-oiv, G. tiv Ki-dv, — 
D. roiy K1-oiv, D. toie xt-ot, 
A. T® Ki-e, A. Tove Ki-ac, 
Vv. ki-e Vv xi-e¢. 
Td o@pa, “ the body.” 
Dual. _ Piural. 
. TO sipar-e, N. ra oopar-a, 


G. rév slr mbied- 
D. roig oiua-ou,! 

A. Ta OGMaAT-a, 

VV. . o@par-a. 


ExaMpies ror Exercise in DECLENSION. 








Old form cduar-ot, 


Gen. Nom. Gen. + rt 
7 ow, - érdée, the voice. 6 avaé, -axto¢, the kg. 
4 oapés, capKoc, the flesh. . | GAc, dAéc, the sea. 
6 cwryp,  -Thpoc, the preserver. 6 oe: -jpoc, the harper. 
6 Knpvé, ~UKOC, the herald. 7 pit, ptvéc, thenose. — 
 oadé, -oy6c, the flame. 6 yeudiv, -Gvoc, the storm. 
9 Opts,  -tpixdc, the hair. 6 dp, wapoc, the starling. 
7d b6¢, gwric,. the light. 6 Aygy,  -évoc, the harbour. 
7 piAdrnc, -ryT0¢, the friendship.|6 dkuwv,  -ovoc, the anvil. 
76 BobAevpa, -aroc, the counsel. | v0é, vuKroc, the night. 
76 pent, -itoc, the honey. TO Tip, avpoc, the fire. 
7 meheic, -ddoc¢, the dove. v Aapaéc, -d0o¢, the torch. 
% Képve,  -vOoc, the helmet. |6-pdprvp, -¥poc, the witness. 
6. yiyac, “avTog, the giant. 6 pytwp,  -opoc, the orator. — 
6 ddobce,  --dvToc, the tooth. 6 Kopaég, -axoc, the raven. 
56 Adiy&,  -tyyoc, the pebble. h Gda@nnk, -exoc, the fox. 
% odAmtys, -vyyoc, the trumpet. \7d odbc, Otic, the ear. 
1, 


FORMATION OF THE CASES. 33 


FORMATION OF THE CASES. ~ 


Genitive. 


As a general rule, the genitive singular of nouns of the 
third declension is formed by adding o¢ to the termination 
of the root, such changes taking place, at the same time, 
as the laws of euphony require. — 


1. Some nouns, and chiefly those which, in the nomina- 
tive, end in v or p, form’ the genitive by adding o¢ to the 
termination of the nominative ; as, (fv, “a month,” gen. 
unv-o¢; owTnp, “a preserver,” gen. owrTnp-o¢, &c. ‘In the 
greater part, however, the long vowel in the termination of 
the nominative is changed into the corresponding short 
vowel ; as, Apiy, “a harbour,” gen. Auév-o¢ ; wATNHp, “a 
mother,” gen. pytép-o¢ ; xeAlday, “a swallow,” gen. xedi- 
dév-oc, &e. 4 

2. When the nominative already has a final ¢, this final 
letter disappears before the o¢ of the genitive, and the long 
vowel preceding it in the termination of the nominative is 
changed into its corresponding short; as, TPLIPNS, * @ tri- 
reme,” gen. Tpijnpeoc, &c. 

3. When the nominative ends in a double consonant, 
such as € (which is equivalent to yc, x¢, or ¢) or ap 
(equivalent to Bc, mc, or dc), the double consonant is re- 
solved into its component parts, the termination o¢ is ad- 
ded, and the ¢, OF final letter of the root, is thrown out; as, 
alz, “a goat,” resolved into alyc, genitive aly-6c ; cdot, 


“@ fox,” resolved into dA@mnKc, genitive (with the short. 


vowel also for the long) diamek-o¢. So, also, Ypié, “ hair” 
(tpixc), gen. tpiy-d¢; pAéyp, “a vein” (bA€Be), gen. preb- 
0¢; arp), “an eye” (@m¢), gen. WTr-d¢ ; kari, “a roof” 
(kaTnAidc), gen. KathAtd-o¢. In like manner, ddAayé, “ a 
phalana” (dédayyc), gen. padayy-o¢ ; ; Adpvyé, “ the larynx” 
(Adpvyys¢), gen. Adpvyy-oc.! 





hk Sometimes, instead of these, which were the regular forms, we find 
them with only a single y; as, ¢dpiyoc, Od. 9, 373; Eurip. Cyel. 
592. So Adpvyoc, Schweigh. ad Athen. vol. iv., p. 545. But Avyé 
“ the lynz,” | has both Avyxdc and Avyyd¢. So, also, vdF and dvaf make 
vUKTOS and dvaxtoc, the r being a part of the root (vixor) of the former, 
and, in the case of the latter, being brought in probably to strengthen 


ha 


> 
ee 
——- 
Nee 
Pe ye as 


384 » FORMATION OF THE CASES. 


4. Nominatives in Ge, etc, and ove, being, for the most 
part, formed from roots ending in avec, evtc, ovt¢c (where 
the y and 7 are thrown out, and the preceding short vowel 
_is either made long or else is changed into a diphtheng), 
have their genitives in avtoc, evtor, or ovto¢. ‘Thus, ENE- 
pac, “an elephant” (root éréparre), genitive sdéparr-o¢ ; 
Xuuoetc, “ the river Simois” (root Xydertc¢), gen. Lyudevr- 
oc ; ddovc, * a tooth” (root dd6vT¢), gen. dd6vT-o¢. 

5. Words which end in a, t, v, add -the syllable to¢ to 
the termination of the nominative, and thus form the geni- 
_tive case ; as, o@ua, “a body,” genitive owpat-o¢ ; pédt, 
** honeys” gen. wéAtt-o¢. Those in v change also this vowel 
into a-before toc; as, dopr, “a@ spear,” gen. ddpat-o¢ ; 
youu, “a knee,” gen. yovat-oc. In strictness, however 
these nouns in‘a, 4, v come from roots that terminate in T, 
as, o@pat, wéAtt ; and hence o¢ is only added, in fact, to 
the root. _While with regard to the vowel-change i in yovr, 
dépv, and other words of similar ending, it must be borne 
in mind that the old nominatives were in ac, as y6vac, d0- 
pag (i. e. yovatc, ddpat¢), whence, of course, the geni 
tives 5 yovar-o¢ and ddpat-oc, by dropping the final ¢ of the 
root.’ 

6. Words in ap make either aro¢ in the genitive ; as, 
Overap, “a dream,” gen. dvelat-oe ; ; qmap, “the liver,” gen. 
iTaT-0¢ ; Huap, « a day,” gen. TPAT-06 5 ; ppéap, “a well. . 
gen. dpéat-o¢ ; or else apoc ; as, Eap, “ spring,” gen. éap- 
o¢; dévap, “ the palm of the hand,” gen. Peet: But da- 
pap makes ddjapr-oc. 

7. Neuters in d¢ make partly aToc ; as , wpéac, “ flesh,” 
genitive Kpéat-oc ; Képac, “a horn,” gen. Képar-o¢. More 
commonly, however, they form the genitive in aoc; as, 
Kvépac, “ darkness,” gen. Kvépa-oc, in which case the At- 
tics contract the termination aoc into Wc; as, Képwe, Kpé- 
OS, &ec. 





the root avax, after the removal of the¢. From the regular declension 
- of Gvag (i. e., Gvax-og in the genitive, &c.) comes “Avaxec, the name 
of Castor and Pollux ; while, on the other hand, the oblique cases of 
nox in Latin show the ¢ of the root. Compare the German naché and 
the English night. 

1. Matthiz, G. G. vol. i., § 72, 1.° The noun yada, * sill makes } 
deer as from yanag (i. e., yédare) ; : oivnTt, “ mustard,” makes, 
according to § 11, OWVATL-0C, and in Attic OWHTE-OC ; ; dorv, “a city,” 
makes dore-o¢, Att. dor wc. Other nouns in v also vary from the rule 
above given; as, ddxpu, “ a tear,” gen. ddKov-oc, &c. 


FORMATION OF THE CASES. 35 


8. Nominatives in avg make ao¢ and yo¢; as vaie, “a 


ship,” gen. vad¢ and v7dc. - | 
5, Nominatives in evc, different from those mentioned in 
§ 4, make the genitive in evoc ; as, Kteic, “a comb,” gen. 
krev-6c; or in etdd¢; as KAéic, “a key,” gen. KAetddc. ~ 
10. Nominatives in y¢, other than those alluded to under § 
2, make the genitive in 7To¢ and 76o¢ ; as, piAdrye, “ friend- 


ship,” gen. piddryt-o¢ ; Tévgc, “a poor man,” gen. TEVYT- | 


o¢ ; _Ildpync, “a mountain on the confines of Attica,” gen. 
' Iidpv70-o¢. Here again o¢ is added to the termination of 
the roots, diAdtyTS, TEVATS, Ke. 

11. Nominatives in c¢ make the genitive in toc, tdoc, 
i@oc, troc, and tvoc. The Atties, however, changed toc 
into ewc. Thus, dic, “a serpent,” gen. ddt-o¢ (Att. ode- 
wc); éAric, “ hope,” gen. éAnid-o¢ ; dpvec, “a bird,” gen. 
dpvi0-o¢ ; yapte, “a favour,” gen. yapit-o¢ ; antic, “a beam 
of the. sun,” gen. daxtiv-o¢. All these terminations, like 
those mentioned in the preceding paragraph, are only o¢ 
added to the several roots. : 

12. Neuters in o¢ make the genitive in o¢, which. the 
Attics contract into ov¢ ; as, Telvoc, “a wall,” gen. TeixeE-oc, 
contr. Teix-ove. 

13. Words in ote, other than those mentioned under § 4, 
make the genitive in o0¢; as, Bove, “an ow,” gen. Bo-6c. 
Some -again, when ov¢ arises by contraction from decc, 
gen. devtoc, make the genitive in ovvto¢ ; as, ’OTrov¢, “ the 
name of a city,” gen. Orovyt-o¢. So, also, Tparecoue, 
wedttove, &c. 3 

14. Words in vé make the genitive in vyo¢ ; as, dewpvé, 
“ @ canal,” gen. dtwpvyx-o¢.. Others have vyog¢ ; as, &7Tvé, 
“the river Styx,” gen. XtTvy-oc. | 

15. Words in ve make dog ; as, dodtc, “ the loins,” gen. 
dodb-oc ;. Opve, “ a tree,” gen. dpv-dc ; and sometimes tdoc, 
voc, and vvoc; as, yAapic, “a cloak,” gen. yAapuid-o¢ ; 
Kopue, “ a helmet,” gen. K6pv0-o¢ ; Kéuve, “a bundle,” gen. 
kwuvd-oc ; Pdpkve, “ Phorcys,” gen. P6pKvv-oc. 3 


16. Words in we make woc, wroc, oo¢ (contr. ov¢), and 


7 


otoc. Thus, duoc, “a slave,” gen. duw-6¢; 7p0¢, “a 
hero,” gen. hpw-o¢ ; pac, “ light,” gen. pwrdc¢ ; Epwe, “ love,” 


gen. épwr-o¢ ; aldwc, “ modesty,” gen. aidd-o¢, contr. aid- _ 


<ov¢ ; TeTvdec, perf act. participle of timTw, gen. TeTv¢- 
6T-0¢. 3 ei ap a 


36 FORMATION OF THE CASES.. 


Accusative. 


As a general rule, the accusative singular of nouns of 
the third declension, that are not neuter, is formed by 
changing o¢ of the eae into @; as, alias 9% piy-os, 
accus. [LAv-a. | 


1. But nouns in tc, ve, ave, and ove, fhe genitive ends 
in o¢ pure, take » mstead of a; as, mOAsc, “a city,” gen. 
TrOAL-0¢, acc. TrOAeY ; vane, “a ship,? gen. vN=6¢C, ACC. VAVY ; 
_ Bods, “an ox,” gen. ' Bé-0c, acc. Bovy, &e. 

2. Other nouns in tc, ve, &c., whose genitive ends in o¢ 
- impure, and which have no accent on the last syllable of 
the nominative, make the accusative in.@ and », the latter 
particularly with the Attics. Thus, dpric, “a bird,’ ”. gen. 
6pv0-0¢, ace. bpvi0-a, Att. Opyiy; KAsic, “a key,” gen. 
KAsid-o¢, acc. KAeid-a, Att. xAsiv. So the compounds of 
move ; as, Bpadvrrove, “ slow of foot,” ace. Bpadirrod-a, Att. 
Bpadirovy ; Qldtransh vs Edius,” acc. Oldimod-a, Att. O- 
dimou. 


Vocative. 


The vocative of the third declension is generally like the 
nominative ; and this is particularly the case among ihe 
Attic writers; as, 6 O7p, “ the wild beast,’ voc. OP ; 
xelp, “ the hand,” voc. yeip. 


1. But the endings éve, tc, ve, as also the words matc, 
“a boy,” ypavc, “an aged female,” and Bove, “ an ox,” cast 
off their ¢ to form the vocative, and those in evc then as- 
sume the circumflex; as, BaovAeic, “a hing,” voc. Baotd- 
sv; Wdpic, “Paris,” voc. Wdp-t ; THOve, “ Tethys,” voc. 
T70-v ; Tale, ‘voc. Tal; ypavg, voc. ypav ; Bovc, voc. Bot. 
Other nouns in ove more. frequently retain than drop the 
¢. ‘Thus, Oldtn-ov i is found; but Oidizove is more com- 
mon. 

2. Words in ac and etc, which arise from old forms énd- 
ing in ave and eve, and which form their genitive in avoc, © 
avrToc, or evToc, throw away ¢ in the vocative, and then, for 
the most part, resume the »; as, tdAac, “ miserable,” gen 


FORMATION OF THE CASES, 37 


TdAav-o¢, voc. tTdAay ; Alac, “ Ajax,” gen. Alayt-vc, voc. 
Alay; yapieic, “ graceful,’ gen. yapievt-oc, voc. yaptev. 
But several proper names in d¢, avtoc, have in the voca- 
tive only the long a; as, "AtAac, gen. “ATAayt-o¢, voc 
"ATAG. | 

3. Words which have 7 or » in the termination of the 
nominative, and the corresponding short vowel (e or 0) in 
the genitive, and which have no acute accent on the last 
syllable, take the short vowel also in the vocative; as, ju7j- 
Tnp, “a mother,” gen. pytép-0¢, voc. patep ; pytwp, “an 
orator, gen. pHrop-0¢, voe. pytop ; Lwxpatyc, “ Socrates,” 
gen. Lwxpat-eoc, voc. L@kpatec. If, however, the last 
syllable of such words has the accent, then the long vowel 
is retained in the vocative; as, wou7y, ‘a shepherd,” gen. 
Trowuév-oc, voc. Trouwqv. But this only applies to nouns, 
not to adjectives, and hence xeAarvedj¢ makes in the voca- 
tive KeAarvedéc. , | et 

4. Words which retain the long vowel in the genitive 
keep it also in the vocative; as, IlAdrwy, ‘“ Plato,” gen. 
TlAatwv-oc, voc: llAdt-wyv ; Zevoday, “ Xenophon,” gen. 
Revop@vtT-oc, voc. Zevod-@v ; inrnp, “a physician,” gen. 
inrijp-oc, voc. int-fp. But the following three make the. 
vowel short in the vocative; “AmdAAwy, “ Apollo,”. gen. 
"ATrOAAwY-oc, voc. "ATroAA-ov ; Iloced@y, * Neptune,” gen. 
Ilocewdév-oc, voc. Iléceid-ov; owrnp, “a saviour,” gen. 
OWTIP-0¢; VOC. OWTEP. : 

5. Proper names in KAj¢ make -xAecc¢ in the termination 
of the vocative ; as, NexoxAjc, voc. NuxéxdA-evc. Here the 
nominative was originally -xAénc, and consequently the vo- 
cative is -kAeec, contracted KAecc. 

6. Words in w and wc make ov in the vocative ; as, AnTo, 
“ Latona,” voc. Ant-ot ; Lame), Sappho,” voc. Lar-ot ; 
aldéc, “ modesty,” voc. aid-ot.. Ss 


Dative Plural ~ 
The dative plural in nouns-which end in eve, ave, and 
ove, is formed by appending z to the termination of the 
nominative singular; as, BaotAeic, Baotdevor ; vave, vav 
oi; Bovc, Bovot. In the case of other nouns, the dative 
plural is formed by adding ov to the root, such changes 
being at the same time mes the rules of euphony re- 


88 CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


quire ; as, vvé, gen vuKt-dc, dat. pl. vvii (i. e. vvKTat) , 
dove, gen. dddvt-oc, dat. pl. ddovor (i. e. ddévTaL); Taig, 
gen. mratd-6c, dat. pl. tarot (i. e. masdot); “Apar, gen. 
"Apab-oc, dat. pl. "Apayu (i. e. "“ApaBor) ; turele, gen. 
tunévt-oc, dat. pl. tumeiar, (i. e. TumévTot), KTEic, gen. 
krev-6¢, dat. pl. kteat (i. e. KTeval), &c. 


1. When the ending ov, on being added to the root, is 
preceded by a vowel, or, in other words, when the genitive 
ends in o¢ pure, this. ‘vowel remains in the dative plural un- 
changed, as in the other oblique cases; as, Tetyoc, gen. 
Telyz-0¢, dat. pl. teiyveor; Dpve, gen. dpv-de, dat. pl. dpvoiv ; 
GAnOac, gen. aAnOé-oc, dat. pl. aAnOéor. When, however, 
the nominative singular has a diphthong, the dative: plural 
takes it also; as, BaovAetc, gen. Baotré-we, dat. pl. Baota- 
evot, and the other nouns mentioned in the beginning of 
the previous paragraph. 

2. Some nouns in 7p, gen. -epoc, drop the ein the geni- 
tive and dative singular, and also in the dative plural, and 
then, in the latter case, insert after p the more sonorous @; 
as, TaThp, “a father,” gen. tratp-6¢ (from trarép-oc), dat. 
tTaTpl (from tmarép-t), &c., dat. pl. matpdoz. ig also, u7- 
THP, YaoThp, Svyarnp, Anuiyrnp. | 


CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
‘1. Nouns in 7¢ undergo contraction in every case, except 
in the nominative and vocative singalat, and dative pineal, 


Thus : 
7 TpLApNS, “ the trireme.” 

Singular. aie Dual. ie Plural. 
tpinp-nc, — | N. Ta toshesy ~n, |N.al rptnp-eec, ~exc, 
Tpinp-e0¢, -ove, | G.-raiy Tuy -OLY, G. rév TPLIP-EWV, -WY, 
__ Tpijp-ei, -et,. | D. ratv Tpimp-EOLr, -ov,| D. raig rpinp-eot, 

Tpinp-ead, -n, |A.Ta TpLnp-Ee, -n, |A.Tda¢ TPLIP-EAG, -ELL; 
TPLHp-EC. V. Tpinp-ee, -n. IV. Tplpp-EeC; -ELC. 











<P uaz 
~ Ss 
{3 & 





2. Like tpujpng are also declined the proper names end- 
ing in KAenc; as, ‘HpaxdAénc, contracted ‘HpakAne ; Oepyso- 
rOoKAnc, IepixAje, &c. In the dative they have a double 

contraction. ‘Thus: 


CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSIDN. 39 


6 ‘Hpakréne, “ Hercules.” 
N. 6 ‘Hpaxd-éne, -fie, 
G. rot ‘Hpakd-éoc, -otc, 
D. 76 ‘“Hpaxd-éei, -éet, -e7, 
A. tov ‘Hpakd-éa, -fy 
V ‘HpdkA-eec, -ei¢. 
3. Nouns in o¢ are neuter, and make the nominative, ac- 
cusative, and yocative plural in ea, contracted 7, and the 
genitive in éwy, contracted Oy. Thus: - 


- 


TO Teixoc, “ the wall.” 


Singular. 
N. 7d reiyx-oc, 
G. tod Teix=e0¢, -ove, 
D.76 rety-ci, -et, 
A. 70 Teix-o¢, 
V. TELy-0¢. 


Dual. 
N. ro Teix-ee, “1; 
G. toiv Tetx-Eolv, -0lVv, 
D. Tol Teux-Eolv, -OLY, 
A.TO Téix-ee, ~-7, 
V: Teiy-e€, -N. 








Plural. 
N.trad Teix-ea, 
G. rév Tety-éwr, 
D. roi¢ reiy-eor, 
A.ta& Teiy-ea, 
Vv. Tely-ea, 


t/ 
“OY, 


t/ 
“7. 


4. Nouns in @ and oe have three contractions, namely, 
oo¢ of the genitive singular into ove, of of the dative into 


ot, and oa@ of the accusative into @. 


Their dual and plural 


have no contractions, but are declined throughout like the 


corresponding parts of Adyoc. 


Few of them, indeed, from 


their signification, admit, strictly speaking, of a dual or 


plural. ‘Thus: 


" Singular. - 
z 7 7X-O, a 
. THE Ix-b0¢, -00¢, 
. TH 7x-0i, -ol, ; 
- THY 1X-60, -O, 
HX-01. 


“RD OZ 


Singular. 

47 ~~ ald-o¢, 

Tit¢ aid-doc, -ovd¢, 

TH aid-di, --0i, 

Thy aid-da, -0, 
aid-ot. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


va), “ the echo.” 











Plural. - 


atdec, “ the modesty.” 


Dual. 
N. ra aid-d, . 
G. taiv aid-oiv, 
D. taiv aid-oiv, 
A. Ta aid-d, 
Vv 


aid-0. 





N. ai jy-ol, 
| G. rév ny-dr, 
D. rai¢ jy-oic, 
A. tag 7x-00¢, 

V. 7X-0l. 
Plural. 

N. ai _aid-oi, 
G. tév aid-dy, 
. Taig aid-olc,. 
. Tag aid-ote, 

; aid-ot 


40 CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


5. Nouns in ce and. have three contractions, namely. ev 
of the dative into e, ecc of the nominative and vocative 
plural into exc, and eac: of the accusative plural into «cc. 
Those in cc have also in the genitive singular, and the gen- 


itive and dative dual, the Attic terminations ews and eyy 


instead of coc and cory. Thus: 


4 TrOALG, “‘ the city.” 
Singular. Dade ’ Plural. 





N. qh TOA-t¢, N. 7a éA-ee, N. ai dA-ee¢, -é0e, 
G. Tijgem6A-eue, G. taiv 76A-ewr, | G. tév ro0A-éwr, 
D. Ti TOA-ci, -El; D. taiv r6A-ewr, D. rai¢ 76-01, 

A. tH r6A-ty, A. Ta mOA-Ee, A. Tag méA-ea¢, -er¢, » 
V TOA-t. V. TOAEe€. V. TOA-E&C, -EtC. 
TO oivynrt, “ the mustard.” 

Singular. . - Dual. Plural, 

N. 70 oivyr-t, N.7@  owvgyr-ee, N.ta& ownr-ea, — 
G. Tot ownr-eoe, G. toiv. oivynn-éorr, G. Tév o1vnn-éor, 
D. tT ownr-ei; -et, D. roiv ownr-éow, | D. toi¢ owgr-eot, - 
A. 76 oivyr-t, A. TO ~ owwnr-ee, A. ta olvqr-ea, 
VV. oivyrst. Vv OWNT-E8. Vy. OLvAT-ea. 


6. Nouns in ve, gen. voc, have two contractions, name- 
ly, ve¢ of the nominative and vocative plural into ve, and 
vac of the accusative plural into ve. Thus: 


6 iyObe,.« the fish.” | 
Singular. Dual. : Plural. 





N. 6 iy6-ve, N.7o iyO-te, ° . | N. oi iy6-tec, -de, 
G. toi ix6-éoe, ‘_ | G. roiv ix6-towv, G. tév ixy8-bar, 
D. 76 iy6-di, ~ D. roiv ix6-dowv, D. toi¢ iyé-dat, 
A. tov iyé-tv, A. TO  ix6-te, A. tovs ix6-dac, -d¢, 
V. ix6-0. V. iy0-%e. V. ix0-de¢, -d¢. 


« $ Nouns in eve, and those in v¢ which make, like them 
the genitive in ewe, have four contractions, namely, ez of 
the dative singular into e, ee of the dual into 7, ee¢ of the 
nominative and vocative plural into evc, and eac of the ae 
cusative plural into ec. But in the last case the uncon 
tracted eac is the more usual form. Thus. | 


ri _ ‘. 


SA i ha al eo 


a 





CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 41. 


6 Baotrete, “ the king.” 


Singular 
N.6 Bacrd-cic, 


D. 76 BaotA-ci, -si, 


Dual. 


T® PBacta-ée, -7, 


toiv Bactd-éolv, 


N. 

G. trod BaotA-éwe, G. roiv BaotA-éowvr, © 
D. 
A 


A. tov Baotd-éa, 


.T Pao-ée, -i, 


V. Baota-ed. V. Pacta-ée, -7. 





Plural. 
N. of Baord-éec, -ex¢, 
G. tév Baotd-éwr, 
D. roi¢ BactA-ciar, 
A. tobe Bactd-éac, -eir, 
V. BaotA-éec, -ei¢. 


&. Neuters in v make the. nominative, accusative, and 
vocative plural in ea, contracted into 7. They also con- 
tract ef into et, and ce into 7. ‘Thus: 


70 doty, “ the city.” 


Singular. 
N.76 dor-v, 
G. Tod dor-e0¢, 
D.76 dGor-ei, -et, 
A.T0 dort-v, 
V. aorT-v. 


Dual. 
N.t® Got-ee, -7, 
G. toiv dot-éorv, 
D. toiy dot-éoww, 
Ai 70 Gdor-ee, -N, 
Vv. Gor-c&, -7. 





Plurai. 
N. 7& Gor-ea, -n, 
G. tév dot-éwr, 
D. toi¢ dor-ect, 
A. ta. dot-ea, -n, 
Y. ioT-£0, -7. 


9. Neuters in a¢ pure and pac reject t by syncope in 
the Ionic dialect, and are also farther contracted by crasis 
in the Attic, in every case except the nominative, accusa- 
tive, and vocative singular, and the dative plural. Thus: 


TO Kpéac, ‘ the flesh.” 


Singular. 
N. 70 Kpé-ac. 


G. tod xpé-aroc, by. svi.cope Kpé-aoc, by crasis“Kpé-we. 


D. 76 xpé-att, . 
_A. 76 Kpé-ac. 
V. Kpe-ag. 
Dual. 
. TO Kpé-are, . 
. TOiv Kpe-GTOLY, 
. Toiv Kpe-dToLy, 
.T® Kpé-aTe, . 
Kpé-are, 2 
Plural. 
Ta Kpé-ara, 


<d>yaz 


= Toi¢ Kpé-act. 
. T2 Kkpé-ara, 
kpé-aTa, 


<> voz 


tiv Kpe-dTov, © 


° . Kpé-ai, . 


o! %: bee Kpé-ae, . 


cA 
. ° pre c0r; 
. kpe-doty, 
. o Kpé-ae ; . 
° kpé-ae ? ° 


giish Ae, i 


alee kpé-@. 
° ’ Kpé-a. 
- « Kpe-Ov. 
- Kpe-Ov. 
. « Kkpé-a. 
- « Kpé-a. 
. » Kpé-a. 
s+ Kpe-Ov.. 
- +, Kpé-a. 
- + Kpé-a.— 


~ 
wa. 
Pr te 
ad 
a. 
4 


42 CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


Td Képac, “ the horn.” - 

Singwar. ea 
N. 70 xép-ac. : 
G. tov Kxép-aroc, by syncope Kép-aoc, by crasis Kép-we. 
D. 16 wép-att,, . . . Kép-ai, ... . Kép-q: 
A. 76 Kép-ac. 
V. - Kép-ac. 

Dual. 


N. 7 Kép-aTe,. . . kép-ae, . . . Kép-. 
G. Toy Kep-dtolv, . . . Kép-dow, . . KEp-Gv. 
D. toiv kep-Grow, . . . Kep-Gow, . . Kep-Gv. 
A. 7. Kép-ate,... . . ‘Kép-ae, . . . Kép-a. 
V. KEP-ATE,- +>. » KEP-Q&, . . . Kép-0. 


Plural. 
N. ra ‘«ép-ara, .. 5 Kép-eoa, . . 3 Kép-a. 
G. Tév Kép-aTwv, . . . KEep-dwv, . . Kep-iv. 
D. roi¢ Kép-aot. ; Pea S 
A. Tad Kép-ata, .. » « kép-aa,. . .~ Kép-a. 
V. kép-aTa, . . « Kép-ad,. . . Kké&p-a. 

10. Some words in 7p, genitive -epoc, throw away the e 
before p in the genitive and dative, and so exhibit a double 
form. After the letter v, when it is brought into collision 
with p in such forms, a do is added in order to soften the 
sound. ‘The noun var#p is an instance of the first mode 
of declining, the noun dvfp of the second. Thus: 


6 Tathp, “ the father.” | 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 





N.6 sat-7, N. ta sat-épe, N.oi sar-épec, 

G. tot mar-époc, -pdc, | G. Toiv rat-époly, G. tév rat-épwr, -pdv, 

D. .6 ‘aar-épt, -pi, | D. roivrar-épow, | D. roic rar-pdou, 

A. Tov mat-épa, A.T® mar-épe, A. Tove rar-épac, 
WAT-Ep. ¥, TaT-épe. V. Tar-épec. 








~ 


1. In the same way are declined pyjryp, “a mother,” and yaornp, “a 
stomach,” except that yaot7p makes in the dative plural yaerjpor, which 
appears to have been also the old form of zar#p and parnp.. It must 
be remembered, moreover, that matjp, uatnp, and yaor#p make the ac- 
cusative singuiar without contraction. This is done in the case of 7- 
Typ, to prevent its being confounded with pu7Arpa, -ac, ‘a womb ;” in the 
case of zarfp, to prevent its being confounded with mdrpa, -ac, “<a pa- 
ternal land ;” and in yaornp, to prevent similar confusion with ydorpa, 
-ac, ‘‘ the bottom of a vessel.” 


Lg Te Te 


ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 43 


6 dvip, “ the man.” 

‘Staguler. . _ Dual. - Plural. 
N.6  av-tp, {N. ra dv-épe,  -dpe, N. of — dv-épec, -dpec, 
G. Tod av-Epoc, -dpdc, |G. rotv dv-Epotv, -dpoiv,|G. tov av-Epwr, -dpwr, 
D. 76 av-épt, “Opi, | D. totv av-épolr, -Opoiv,|D. tot¢ av-dpdot, 
A. Tov dv-épa, -dpa, |A.T® dy-épe, -dpe, |A. Tove av-épac, -dpac, 
V y-ep. V. dv-épe, -dpe. IV. Gv-épec, -dpec. 





11. Some nouns are contracted by either dropping a 
vowel, or blending two vowels into one, and this contrac- 
tion takes place in every case. Thus: 


= 





TO Eap, contr. 7p, 6 KEvEwY, contr. KEVOY, 
“the spring.” * the belly.” 
Singular. Singular. 
N. rd éap, 7 Py -| N.6  kevedv, revir, 
G. tot Eap-o¢, 7p0¢, G. rod Keve-Gvoe, Kev-Gvoc, 
D. 76 éap-s, jpt, &e. D. 7 keve-Gvt, kev-6ve, &e.. 


ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 


1. That is called anomalous which is inconsistent with 
the prescribed laws of formation; as, for example, when 
xaptc, though formed from a root vapid, makes yapiTo¢ in 
the genitive, not ydpidoc. 

2. The greater part of the actual deviations from regular 
declension consist in the interchange of forms. In the 
more ancient language, it often happened that a word had 


two or more terminations and modes of inflection, with only - 


one and the same signification. Only one of these forms 
was; for the most part, retained as the language became im- 
proved. ‘The other was merely employed, now and then, 
when a more sonorous term was needed, especially in po- 
etry. Thus, Ajuqrnp, more seldom, Anuntpa, “ Ceres ;” 
ddxpvoyv, older form daxpv, -voc, “a tear.” 

3. Sometimes the two forms remained more or less in 
common. use: by the side of each other ; as, vidc, “a son,” 
genitive viov ; and also viéoc, from a nominative of the third 
declension i in eve. 

4. Sometimes both forms originate from the same nom- 
inative, in which case the word is called a Heteroclite. 
Thus, Oidirove, genitive Oidirodoc¢, and Oidérov. 

5. When, however, one of the forms can be traced to an 


44 ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


obsolete or unusual nominative, it is called Metaplasm ; as, 
dévdpov, gen. -ov; dative plural dévdpore, and also dévdpeo- 
tv, from a nominative 76 dévdpoc. 

_.6. Most of the common and poetical anomalies that oc- 
cur in declension consist of heteroclites and metaplasms. 

7. ‘To the heteroclites belong certain words that are in- 
flected after both the first and third declensions. Some of 
these carry this double mode of inflexion throughout; as, 
pokne, “a mushroom,” genitive wiKov and piKnntoc, &c. 
This is particularly the case with proper names in 7¢ ; as, 
Adpn¢, genitive Adpov and Adpyto¢.. Others have it only 
in part; as, Swxpdr¢, accusative Lwxpatn and Lwxparny. 

8. Nouns in w¢ sometimes make the genitive in w and 
woc. Thus, Mivwc, gen. Mivw and Mivwoc; ratpwe, “ a 
paternal uncle,” gen. madtTpw and TaTpwoe. ne : 

9. Nouns in w¢, genitive wto¢, sometimes drop the 7; 
as, dpac, “sweat,” which has not only idp@re and idpaira 
in the dative and accusative, but also T@ idp@ and tov idpd, 
the latter being Attic forms. 

10. Nouns in w¢ and wy have sometimes the anomaly 
still more apparent, since it shows itself even in the nom- 
inative. Thus, 6 radc¢, gen. Tae, “ the peacock,” and 6 Ta- 
Ov, genitive tadvocg. So, also, 7 dAwe, gen. dAw, “ the 
threshing-floor,” and GAw¢, gen. dAwoc. 

11. The declension of vavc, a ship, is as follows : 


q vadc, “the ship.” 


Aitic. Epic and Ionic. Dorie. 
Sing. N. vate, Sing. N. vaic, Sing. N. vac, 
G. vede, - G. vnée and vede, G. vade, 
D. vai, D. vii, D. vai, 
_ A. vaiv, A. via and véa, A. vaiv and vay, 
: V. vaic : VY. vac. V. vac. 
Dual. N. vie, Dual. N. vije, | Dual. N. vite, . 
G. veoiv,. G. veoiy, . G. vaoiv, 
D veoiv, D. veoiv, D. vaoiv, 
A vije, A. vije, A. vae, 
V«. viaje. V. vije. " V. vde. 
Pl. -N. vijec, Pl. N. vijec and véec, Pl. _N. vide, 
G. vedv, . - G. vedy, G. vabr, 
~ D. vavoi D. vyvoi and véecot, OD. vavoi, 
A: vaie, A. vijac and véac, A. vdag, 
V. vigec. V.vijec.  V~. vider. 











‘DEFECTIVE NOUNS. . 45 


12. The noun Boic, “ an ox,” makes GBod¢ in the geni 
tive, Govv in the accusative, and in the plural, nom. Bdec, 
contracted Govc, dative Bovoi, accusative Bdac, contr. Bove 

13 The declension of Zev¢-is also peculiar. ‘Thus, 

N: Zebe, 
_ G. Znvdc¢ and Arde, 
D. Znvi and Aci, 


A. Ziva and Aia, 
V. Zed. 


14. Under the head of anomalies in declension may be 
ranked the very peculiar paragogic ending in giv or qe. 
This is of very common occurrence in epic poetry, and is 
used instead of the ordinary dative or ap singular. 
The rules that control it are as follows: 1. In the first de- 
clension, nouns in 7 throw away the o of "ahs genitive ; as 
from evv7¢ is formed evvajper. The dative, however, ap- 
pends ¢cv or gt at once ; as, evvy, evvggir. 2. If the noun 
end in o¢ or ov, the o alone remains before ¢zv or ot, while 
in those in o¢, which make the genitive in €0¢, contr. ove, 
the form e¢ (or eve), the Ionic contraction from eo¢ enters. 
Thus we have from otparot the form OTpAT Oey ; from 
Epéboc, gen. épébeoc, contr. -ovc, the form épébevodry ; from 
oT70oc, gen. ori0eo0c, contr. orjOove, the form ori egw. 


DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 


1. Defective nouns are such as cannot, from their very 
nature, occur in more than one number.. Thus, of ér7- 
ola, “the etesian winds ;” ta Avoviora, * the festival of 
Bacchus.” 

2. Some again are only employed in the nominative and 
accusative ; as, the neuters, dvap, “a, dream;” trap, “a 
vision ;” déwac, “ a body.” 

3. Others are only used in the nominative; as, ddedoc, 
“advantage ;” 700¢, “ benefit.” Or in the vocative ; as, @. 
ray, “ O thou.” , 

4. Many from having been nouns have become adverbs 
in consequence of their bing gen hoa in only one partic- 
ular case ; as, énixAny, “ by name’ 


46 DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


INDECLINABLE NOUNS. 
1. Under this are ranked most of the cardinal numbers ; 
as, mévTe, “ five ;” &%, “six 3” émra, “ seven,” &e. 
2. The names of the letters ; as, aApa, Bara, oy 
3. The neuter participle T6 ypewy, from the Paremonn 


Xpf. 
4. The noun in DEG, when it. occurs in the forinula EMG 


éort. 


DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 


1. The olians said 7é6Avrrov for troAbrrovy, the accusa- 
tive ofroAtmovg. ‘They also. employed yédov for yéAwra, 
the accusative of yéAwe, and jjpwy for TPs. 

2. The /Eolians said Zarda, Anrde, i in the nominative, _ 
instead of Lavow, Aro. 

3. The /Eolians frequently employ the termination eve 
instead of ¢ ;, as, “Apeve for "Apc, and form the oblique 
cases as follows: gen. “Apevo¢ ; dat. “Apeve ; acc. "Apeva 
The nominative in ev¢ sometimes occurs also in Doric; as, 
Evpndeve, Theocrit. 5, 134. 

4. ‘The Molians and Dorians use in the genitive singular 
the termination eve instead of eo¢ ; as, Odubeve for Sdpubeoc. 
So, also, eve for ewe ; as, "AytAAeve for "AyiAAEwS. 

5. The Aolians say Lwxpdrov in the genitive instead of 
ZwxKparove ; and in the vocative Xwxpate. Hence Pericle 
in Cicero, Off. 1. 40.8. 

6. The Dorians said, in the genitive plural, aiyay for ai- 
yov ; &npav for. Snpir 5 and, in the nominative, Tlocedav 
for Tooedov. 

7. The Dorians said rowdy for trouu7jy, and so through 
‘out. So, also, dpact for pent, the dative plural of do7jy. 

8. The Dorians used xpi¢ ae Kpéag ; and @pyré for ppé 
art, the dative of dpéap. - - 

9. In such forms as Bove, gen. Booc, the Dicins change 
ov in all the cases into @; as, nominative Bac, Theocrit. 
8. 77.; acc. pl. td¢ Bac ; dative. pl. Bwoiv, &e. | 

10. The Dorians often employ the termination 7¢ in the 
nominative for evc. ‘Thus they say, "Opone for ‘Opbets ; ; 
@iAne for Direc, &e. 

11. The Doric vocative of nouns in, ug is formed in N ; 
as, THd7. : 


Te ee Sa 


PATRONYMIC NOUNS. » 47 


12. In the Ionic dialect, the genitive plural ends in éwy ; 
as, dvdpéwr, verpéwy, pnvewy. 

13. Nouns in tc, gen. doc, lose in Ionic the 0, and those 
in ac, gen. aro¢, the T. ‘Thus, "Ootptog for *Oatpidoc ; ; 
Oére for Oéride ; ypaog for yipatog ; Képaog for Képarog. 

14. The Ionians do not contract the cases of contracti- 
ble nouns ; as, évidpvec, not évidpuc. So, also, they say 
dpptac, Ereoc, ‘Hpakrénc, Kc. 

15. The Ionians decline nouns in eve with 7 not con- 
tractible ; as, BaorAgjoc, ToKn@Y, &c. 

16. Nouns in t¢ are declined by the Ionians with ¢ con- 
tractible ; as, m6Acc, gen. m6ALog ; duc, gen. d¢peos. 

17. The Ionians are fond of the termination coz in the 
dative plural; as, velpeor, Kiveot, dvd«reot, &e. 


XXI. PATRONYMIC NOUNS. 
1. Patronymics are nouns which designate a son or a 


daughter. ‘They are derived from the proper name of the 


father, sometimes also from that of the mother. 

2. The Mascutine Patronymics are of two classes. 
The first class end in either idn¢, ddn¢, or eddqc, and form 
the genitive in ov. ‘The second end in cwy, and make the 
genitive in wvoc, rarely ovoc. 3 

3. Patronymics in cdq¢ and twy are formed from nouns 


in o¢ of the second declension. Thus, from Kpévoc, “ Sat- 


urn,” come the patronymics Kpovidy¢g and Kpoviwy, both 
meaning “ the son of Saturn,” i. e.,Jupiter. So from Ké- 
dpoc we have Kodpidyc; from Tdvtaioc, Tavradione ; 
from Aianéc, Aiaxidne. 

4, Patronymics in cadn¢ are formed from nouns in coc: 
as, from “HAwog comes ‘HArddye ; from ’AoKAqmtioc, ’Ao 


_ KAnmdone ;, from Aagptioc, Aasptiddne. 


5. Patronymics in édn¢ come from nouns in 4¢ and ac¢ of 
the first declension. Thus, from ‘Imméty¢ comes ‘Inmord- 
On¢; from ’AAevac, ’AAevddne. 

6. In nouns of the third declension the genitive serves 
as the basis of derivation. If the penult of the genitive be 
short, the patronymic from o¢ is formed in édyc; as, from 


48 ADJECTIVES. 


Ayapéuvor, gen. -ovoc, comes ’Ayapeuvovidne ; from Oéo- 
Twp, gen. -opoc, OcoTopidne ; from Ante, gen. -ooc, Anroi- 
dnc, &e. But if the penult of the genitive be long, the 
patronymic ends in 1édq¢ ; as, from Tedapav, gen. -@voc, 
comes TeAapwriddne ; from eet gen. -wver, "A 
giTpvwriddne. 

7. Nouns in eve, which in Ionic have the genitive in noc, 
give rise to the patrymonic form yiddy¢. . Thus, from I7- 
Aeic, gen. -Hocg;.comes IlyAqiddn¢; from Iepoetic, gen. 
-noc, Ileponiddn¢. But since these have also the termina 
tion :%¢ in the genitive, which continued to be the prevail- 
ing one in the Attic and common dialects, hence arose, from 
. Ilepoeic, gen. Iepoéwe, the patronymic form Iepaeidne : 
from ’Atpevc, gen. ’ATpéwe, the form ’Arpeidye. 

8. The Fremate Patronymics have four terminations, 
namely, either ide, (¢, ivy, or wv7n. Thus, from Bpioedc 

comes Bptonic ; from “AtAac,’AtAavtic ; from "Adpnotos, 
"Adpnotivn ; from ’Axpiovoc, *Axptoraivyn. It is to be re- 
-marked, that the termination 1v7 arises when the primitive 
has a consonant before its own termination, and the termi- 
nation 4@v7y when the primitive has before its ending the 
vowel z or v. 


XXII. ADJECTIVES. 


1. The declensions of adjectives are three. 
2. The first declension of adjectives has three termina 
tions ; the second, two; the third, one. 
3. Adjectives of three terminations are the most, numer- 
ous, and have the feminine always in 7, except when pre 
ceded by a vowel or the letter p,in which cases it ends im 
#. Thus: | 


Sevdéc, decaf, devddv, “ cowardly ;” 
Kadoc, Kadh, Kaddv, “handsome ;” 
sopdc, sodh, aopdv, “wise.” 


~~ 


Pe ees |* 


“yt 


<PyuaZz 


Prone 


ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. ‘49 


But, 
pidrtoc, dtria, pidiov, “ friendly ;” 
aytoc, Gayla, aytov, . “ holy ;” 

-  bepéc,  Lepd, ~—Lepév, * “ sacred.” 


4. 'The masculine termination in o¢ and the neuter in ov 
are inflected after the second declension of nouns. ‘The 
feminine termination in 7 or @ is inflected after the first de-« 
clension of nouns: 

5. Adjectives in ooc, however, eve the feminine in 7, 
as, dydooc, dydén; VYodc, So#. But, when 0 precedes, 
these have also a; as, d9pdoc, d0péda. 


1. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 
1. Termination in oc. 
copes, ‘ wise.” 


Singular. - Dual. ow Plural. 
. 009-6¢, -7, ~-Ov, . 009-0, -d, -0, | N. cod-oi, -al, ~4, 
- GOG-00, -7¢, -0v, . 606-0”, ~air, -0iv, ms G0g-Ov, -Ov, OY, 
009-0, -7, -@, t 0g-0iy, -aiv, ~olv, D. co¢-olc, -aig, ~oit, 
. OOb-6v -HV, -Ov; : o0$-0, -d, -0, A. o09-ov¢, “a, -4, 
oog-é, -i, -Ov. . 009-0, -d, -0. | V.cog-0i, -ai, -d. 


SP OQZ 





iepdc, “ sacred.” 





Singular. - "Dual. Plural. 
. bep-6¢, -d, -6v, N. fep-d, -d, “0, N. fep-o/, -al, -d, 
. bep-00, -ac, -6u, G. lep-oiv, -aiv, -otv, G. lep-v, -dv, <dr, 
. lep-,  -d, -@, D. fep-oiv, -aiv, -oiv, D. lep-oic, -aic, -oi¢, 
. lep-dv, -dv, -dv, A, lsp-6,° -é, -0, A. lep-ov¢,.-d¢, -d, 
V.ilep-é, -d, -dv. V. lep-6, -d, -0. V. lep-of, -ai, -& 
. 2. Termination in coc. 


Adjectives in eo¢ are contracted tHroughout. In the fem- 
uine, ea is contracted into a when a vowel or the letter p 
srecedes the termination o¢ ; but otherwise it is contracted 
ato 7. In the neuter plural, however, ea is always con- 


racted into a, whatever letter may precede o¢. Thus ° 


50 


ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 


xpvoeos, contr. ypvaove, “ golden.” 





Singular. . Dual. 
N. ypio-eoc, -éa, -e0%, N. xpvo-éw, -éa, ~£0, 
ove, 7s ovy, 7 0, a, @, 
G. ypvo-éov, -éac, -éov, G. ypvo-éow, -éav, -éour, 
od; 7, ov, oi, aiv, oiv, 
D. ypvo-é, -é@, -é@, _D. ypvo-éorv, -éarv, -éowr, 
@, Ds Q, oiv, aiv, oiv, 
A. xpto-cov, -éav, -E07, A. xpva-éw, -éd, -E0, 
. ody, Vv, ovr, ‘ 0, a, 6, 
V. xpto-ee, -é2,  ~e0r, V. xpvo-éa, -éa, ~é0, 
; Ty ovr. 0, a; 0. 
Plural. 
N, xpto-eo1, -éal, ed, 
. her | 4 ai, a, 
G. ypvo-iwv, -éwv, -éwr, 
bv, év, Gv, 
D. xpvo-éoir, -éatc, —-éoue, 
oi¢, aic, otc, 
A. ypvo-éove, -éac, 84, 
ove, ss, a, 
V. ypto-e0t, -€al,  --€0, 
ol, ai, a. 


3. Termination in ooc. 


1. Adjectives in 6o¢ are contracted throughout like those 
in coc. In the feminine 67 is contracted into 7, and in the 
neuter plural 6a into a. 

2. When the letter p precedes the termination, the fem- 
inine is in 6a contracted @ But the adjective GOpooc, 
“ crowded,” is not contracted in the feminine dOpéa, to dis 
tinguish it from the adorns aOpove, “ noiseless,” which is 
of two terminations. 


arAéoc, contr. dtAovc, “ simple.” 


Singular. Dual. 
N. drA-doe, -6n, -6ov, N. atA-de, ~6a, -60, 
e OUss th eve e 7 . “4G, ae 
G. drA-dov, -On¢, ov, G. drd-dowv,  -daiv, -dow,y 
ov, HC, ov, oiv, aiv, . - 
4 * : 4 
D. drA-do, -on, -60), D. dna-éow, dav, -dolv, © 
al ae %, Gn tsis , air, OY," 
A. drA-édor, -6nv,  -607, A. dr1-60,. 6a, -60, 
ov, iv, ovr, 6, FF a, 6, 
V. dxA-ée, ~On, -600, V. dtA-6a; -0a, -00, 
Ov; Ws ORY. Ws a a, @. 





ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 51 


Plural. 

N. drA-dor, -0al, -da, 

oi, ai, a, 
G. dz/A-dwrv, -dwr, -dur, 

ov, ov, ov, 
D. drA-doic¢,  -datc, —_ -dore, 

oi¢, aic¢, otc, 
A. drd-dovg, -dac, ~— -da, - 

o vc, Gg, a, : 

V. drA-do1,° -dat,  ——--a, 

Ol, . “wa aly Gi.” 


4. Termination in ac. 

1. Adjectives in a¢ have. ava in the feminine, and av 
in the neuter; but participles in a¢ have the feminine in 
aca. Hee 

2. The adjective mac, “ all,” “ every,” is declined like a 
participle. 


péAac, “ black.” 





Singular. Dual. 
N. péd-ac, <alva, =a, N. péA-ave, -aiva, -ave, 
G. uéA-avoc, -aivyc, -avoe, G. ped-dvow, -aivaw, -dvowyv, 
D. péA-avi, ss -aivg, = -avt, D. peda-dvow, -aivaiy, -dvow, 
A. péA-ava, = -alvay, = -av, A. péd-ave, -diva,  -ave, 
V. uéd-ac, ava, = a. V. péd-ave, -aivad, -ave. 
Plural. 


N. wéA-avec, -atvat,- -ava, 
G. ped-dvov, -avdv, -dver, 
D. uéd-act, -aivate, -aot, 
A. péA-avac, -aivac, -ava, 
V. péd-avec, -alvat, -ava. 


tinac, “having struck.” 


Singular. ° Dual. 
N. riw-ac, ~aod, . -ay, N. riyp-avre,. -doad, -avie, 
G. riw-avtos, -dons, -avTos, G. rup-dvrow, -doav, -dvToy, 
D. ri-avti, -don, -arTt, D. rup-dvrow, -doaw, -dvroww, 
A. ti-avta, -acav, -ar, A. tip-avte, -doa, -avre, 
ww , 4 
V. rid-ac, -aoad, -av. V. ri-avte, -doa, -avre. 
Plural. 


N. réiw-avrec, -acal, -avrta, - 
G. Tup-dvTavr, -aaQV, <AVTOY, . 

D. Thp-aot, ~doaic, -act, 

A. Tvy-ayTa¢, -doac¢, -avTa, ea 
V. Tip-avteg, -aoal, -avra. 


52° ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATICNS. 

. r 5 . 
Tac, * all,” * every. : 
Singular. Dual. . 
N. zac, rioa, war, N. wdvte, wdoa, wdvrte, 
4 h 
G. mavréc, maonc, wavrToc, G. rdvrow, mdoav, wavrow, 3 
; 
D. wavri, ndoy, ~~ mavti, D. mavTow, TACALY, KAVTOLY, 4 
A. xévrta, raoav, ar, A. wave, mwéoa, Taye, 
V. rac, mTaoa, wav. V. wdévre, . wdoa, ‘névre. . 
Plural. 

N. wdvrec, maoa, . ndvt a, 
G. mavTwv, Tacdv, TévTwY, | 

D. xaot, maoate, wat, 
A. mdvtac, mdoac, mévra,. 
. V. wavrec, maoat, mara. 


5. Termination in etc. 


Adjectives in eve make the feminine in eooa and the 
neuter in ev. Participlos 1 in et¢ make the feminine in eLoa. 


Singular. 


N. xapi-etc, re00a,  -Ev, N. xapi-evre, -éooa, 
G. yapi-evtoc, -éoong, -EevTos, G. Xaps-évrowv, -éooaly, 
D. yapi-evrt, -éoon, -evtt, | D. xapi-Evrow, -éooaty, 
A. yapi-evta, -e00ay, -Ev, A. Rapier, -éo0a, 
V. yapi-et, 
or -e00d, Ev. ¥; yapi-evre, -éooa, 
Xapi-ev, 
Plural. 
_ N. yapi-evrec, -e00at, -evrta, 
G. yapi-évTwr, -ecobv, -évTwr, 
D. yapi-eot,. -éooac, -E0t, 
‘ A. xapl-evrar, -éo0at, -EevTa, 
V. aapi-evres, -€0600l, -EevTa. 
Tudveic, “ struck.” 
Singular. Dual. 
N. rv¢6-eic, -eloa, -év, N. rv¢6-évre, -eioa, 
G. rug6-évroc, -sionc, -évTos, G. rv¢6-évTowv, ~elOaly, - 
D. rvg6-évtt, -eion, -éVTL, D. rv¢6-évrowv, ~eioaty, 
A. Tugd-Evra, -eloav, -EV, - _ A. tvg60-évTe, ‘-eloa, 
V. rvg6-eic, -eioa, ~-év. V. rug0-évre, --eioa, 


~ 


> 


apiece, “ comely.” 








-EVTE, 
-éVTOL?, 
~EVTOL, 


4 ~-EVTE, 


-EVTE 


ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 53 


‘Plural. 
N. rvd6-évrec, -sioat, -évta, 
. TUOO-évTwY, -Etodv, -évTwr, 
. TvPO-eiot,  -eioalg, -sict, 
. Tu¢b-évtag, -sioac, -évTa, 
. TupO-évtec, -eioal, -évTa. 


<P OD 


The termination 7e1¢, belonging to this head, is often 
cuntracted. Thus, -7e¢, -yecoa, -nev, are contracted into 
“iC, ~j00a, Hv ; as, for example, 

N. Tip-7e, TUL-GOa, TUL-HV, 
G. Tiu-qYTOC, Tlu-hoons, TLy-RvToc, &e. 


6. Termination in nv. 


Adjectives in 7v have the feminine in ecva and the neu- 
ter in ev. Of these, however, we find only one form exist 
ing in Greek, namely, tépyv, Téperva, Tépev. 


Tépny, “ tender.” 





Singular. : Dual. 
N. tép-nv, -etva,.—-ev, ~ N. rép-eve,— -eiva, -eve, 
G. tép-evoc, -eivnc, -Eevoe, G. rep-évowv, -eivaty, -évowy, 
D. rép-evt, = -eivg, += -evt, = |S Ci. tep-évowy, -eivaiy, -évorr, - 
A. Tép-eva, -elvayv, -ér, A. tép-eve, -eiva, -eve, 
V. rép-ev, -Elva, EV. V. rép-eve, -eiva, Eve. 
Plural. 


N. rép-evec, -eival, -eva, 
G. rep-évav,. -ewvdv, -évor, 
Aten. 4 
D. tép-eol, -elvaic, -€01, 
A. Tép-evac, -eivac, -eva, 
V. rép-evec, -elvat, -eva. 


7. Termination in déetc, contracted ove. 


Adjectives in dete are contracted throughout, and form 
the feminine in deooa, contr. oveoa, and the neuter in dev, 


contr. ovv. 
E 2 


+ 


54. 


~ 


ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 


ueAtroetc, contracted pedttouc, “ made of honey.” 





Singular. ~ Dual. 
N. wedit-dere,  -decoa, -dev, |N.pedit-devte, ~deoca, -devre, 
ove, ovooa, ovr, ovvTe, ovoca, ovdrTe, 
G. pedtt-devtog, -ofc0n¢, -devtoc, |G. wedit-devrouy, -deocaLr, -devToLy, 
otvToc, ovconc, dvvToc, OVYTOLY, OVOOALY, ODYTOLY, 
D. yedit-devtt, -oboon, -devtt, |D. wedst-devroww,-decoawy, -devrowy, 
odvrt,  otocn, obvTt, odvTorv, odocaw, obvrov, 
A. pedit-devra, -decoav, -dev,  |A. pedcr-devre, -deooa, -O€VTe, 
oivTa, dvocay, ovr, odvTe, ovood, ovrTe, 
V. wedit-dev, -deooa, -dev, |V.pedtt-devte, -decoa, -derTe, 
ovr, ovooa, ovdpy. ovvTe, odvooa, odrTE. 
Plural. 
- N. pedtr-devrec, +eooat, ~devra, 
'  obdvTe¢, ovooat, obvTa, 
G. uelit-devtwv, -decowr, -devTur, 
OvYTHY, OVOOWY, odYTWD, 
D. pedtt-deot, — -decoatc, -deot, 
ovot, ovocaic, ovot, 
A. pedir-devrac, <6e00ac, -OevrTa, 
odvtac, ovoouc, odrTa, 
V. pedit-devrec, -deooal, -devTa, 
ovooa, ovvTa. 


ovvTEt, ~ 


8. Termination in ove uncontracted. 


This form belongs to participles, and makes the feminine 


in ovoa and the neuter in ov. 


dote, “ having given. | 





Singular. Dual. 
N. dove, dotc-a, ddr, N. dévt-e, doto-a, ddvt-e, 
G. dévt-o¢, dote-nc, dévt-oc, G, ddvr-orv, doto-aiv, dévt-orv, 
D. dévr-t, dovto-n,  débvt-t, D. dévr-ov, dodto-atv, dévr-orv, 
A. dévr-a, Jdotc-av, ddr, A. dévt-e, doto-a, dédrr-e, 
V. dotc, dotc-a, ddr. ®. dévt-e, dovo-a,  ddvt-e. 

j Plural. 

N. d6vt-e¢, dotic-ar, ddrr-a, 


G. dévr-wv, dovo-dv, ddvt-wy, 


D. doto-t,~ sdodtc-aic, dovo-t, 
A. dévt-ac, doto-ac, dért-a, 
V. dévt-e¢, dovo-a:, dévt-a. 


9. Termination in ve. 
1 Adjectives in ve make the feminine in sia and the 


¥ 
- ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 55 


neuter in v. 
into ec. 

2. Participles in v¢ make the feminine in boa and the 
neuter in Ov. 


They also contract ei into ez, and ée¢ and éa¢ 


700C, “ sweet.” 











Singular. Dual. 
N. 76-0¢, -eid, “0; N 70-ée, -eia, - ~é€, 
G. 70-éo¢, -eiac, -éo¢, G. 70-éow, -eiawv,, -éorv, 
e fad a fu 
D. 76-£i, ORR acre D. i-éowv, -ciawv, -éow, 
_ et, ei, 
A. 76-tv,  -eiav, -d, A: 70-ée, -eia, ~é¢, 
vV. 76-0, -cid, -0.. Vv. 70-é€, -cia, ~éé, 
Plural. 
N. #0-ée¢, -eiat, -éa, 
G. ef, | 
G. 70-éwy, -eidv, -éwv, 
D. 70-éo1, -eiaic, -éot, 
A. 76-éac¢, -tiag, -éa, 
ete, 
V. 90-€€C, -eial, ” -éa. 
ete, 
, t ‘ * ses + 99 
Cevyvic, “joining. 
_ Singular. : Dual. 
IN. Cevyv-tc, -tca, -bv, N. Cevyv-tyre, -tod, -vvTe, 
G. Cevyv-tvtoc, ~bans, -bVvTOC, G. Cevyv-tvToty, -toaly, -bvTowv, 
D. Gevyv-tvTt, -von, -vvTt, D. Cevyy-dyTouy, -boav, -bvToLr, 
A. Cevyv-tvra, -doav, -vv, A. Cevyv-ovTe, -jaa,  -ovTe, 
V. Gevyv-tc,, . -toa, ~-dyv. V. ik Wet. -toa, -ovTe. 
Plural. 
N. Cevyr-tvrec, -Voal, -vvTa; 
« G. Cevyv-vTar, -voav, -bvTur, 
D. Cevyr-bor, -boatc, -tct, 
A. Cevyv-dvrac, -tcac, -bvvTa, 
V. Cevyr-bvTec, -Doat, -vbvTa. 


10. Piernidationcs in WY. 

The termination in wv makes ovea in the fatnthine and 
ovin the neuter. There are but two adjectives of this ter- 
mination, namely, éx@v, with its compound déxwv, con- 
tracted by the Attics into dxwy. All the other forms in or 
are participles. 





ms 


s * 


56 ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 
io8 x ; . : “+. 
Ee Petes | Li PF) 
. EKoY, “ willing. 
Singular: Dual. 
N. éx-dy, -odoa,. -6v, N. ék-6vte, -otoa, -ovrTe, 
a. 4 4 4 
G. éx-6vtoc, -otonc, -dvToc, | G. éx-dyTow, -otoaty, -drToLv, 
7 a 4 
D. éx-dvti, -oton, -drTt, D. éx-6vtowv, -otcaiv, -dvTowv, 
4 ~ y > ~ 
A. éx-6vTa, -ovcav, -6r, A. ék-6vTe, -otoa, -dvTe, 
a s ~ ¢ 
V. éx-dy, -otoa, -dv. V. é&k-6vre,  -otoa, -dvTe. 
: Plural. ie 
N. éx-6vtec, -odeat, -6vTa, 
G. éx-dvTar, -ovody, -dvTwr, . 
D. éx-oio1, -odcaic, -ovo1, 
4 . iA oe i 
A. &k-6vrac, -oboas, -oyTa, é 
V. éx-6vTec, -otcat, -dvTa. 
~ 7 
4 : . . 
ae TOTNTaY, “ striking.” 
Singular. Dual. 
N. rinr-wv, -ovoa, -0r; N. rént-ovte, -ovca, -orTe, 
G. rint-ovro¢, -otons, -ovToe, G. rurr-dvTolr, -obcaty, -dvTory, 
D. rixr-ovti, -obon, -ovTt, D: turt-dvroty, -odcaiv, -6vToty, 
A. réint-ovta, -ovoay, -or, A. tint-ovte, -ovcoa, -ovTe, 
V. rint-wr, -ovod, -ov. V. rint-ovte, -oboa, -ovTe 
; Plural. 
NN. ront-ovrec, -ovoal, -ovTa, : 
G. rurt-6vTwv, -ovody, -dvTwr, 
D. rinr-ovot,  -oboaic, -ovot, ; 
my A. rinr-ovtac, -obcac, -ovrTa, ° : 
V. rinr-ovrec, -oveal, ~ovra. 


Some participles 


> 





feminine in 6oa and the neutér in v. Thus: 


Tisdwy, contracted Tivay, “ honouring.” 
: | Dual. 


Singular. 
4 iA = 
N. ty-Gwv,  -dovoa, 
Ov, od, 
G. tyu-dovtTog, -dovone, 
OvToOC, Gone, 
2 
D. tip-dovtt, -dovey, 
| GvTl, —s-« Won, . 
A. tit-dovta, -dovear, 
OvTa, 6car, 
Vitu-dov, -dovoa, 
Gy, Goa, 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
v. 





Tit-GOVTE, 
Gvte, 
TUL-GovToLy, 
OVTOLY, 
TLfl-GOVTOLY, 
GvToLy, 
Tiut-GOVTE, 
GvTe, 
TU-GOvTe, 


OVTE, 


-dovod, 
oa, 
-dovoaly, 

OOALY,, 
-Govoaly, 
Goaty,. 


'-Goved, 


Hoa, 
-Cov oa, 
Goa, . 


in 6y, contracted from éwy, make the 


-dovTe, 
- OVTE, 
-dOvToly, 
QVTOLY, 
-dOvTow, 
_ Gvrowy, 
-dovTe, 
VTE, 
-dovre, 
OvTe, 











ext 
‘ = 


» 


ADJECTIVES OF fRbi TERMINATIONS. 


This termination also belongs to participles. 
inine is in via and the neuter in 6¢._ 


Plural. 

N. tip-dovrec, -doveat, 
eee ay Se 
G. Ti-dovtwr, -aotowr, 
OVTWY, WOOY, 

D. ri-dovet, -dovoaic, 
 @01, | Cale, 
A. Tip-dovtac, -dovoac, 
Ovrac, Hoae, 

V. tiyu-dovtec, -dovoa, 
OVTES, oat, 


-dovTa, 
@VvTa, 
-a0vTw?”, 
— OYTO, 

-dovet, 

OL, 
-dovTa, 
OVTa, 
-dovTa, 
OvTa. 


11. Termination in we. 


TeTupee, “ having struck.” 


Singular. 


. TETUG-OC, 


“vi a, -6¢, 


. TETUg-6T0¢, -viac, -OTOE, 


. TETUG-OTA, 


N 
G 
D. tetvg-6Tt, 
A 
V. rervg-ae, 


-vig, -OTL, 
--viav, -6¢, 
-via, -6¢. 





Plural. — 
N. rervg-drec, -viat, 
G. retTvg-dTwY, -VvLOY, 


D. rervd-dor, 


-viale, 


A. tetud-dTac, ~-viac, 
V. rervg-dree, . -via, 


Dual. 


N. retug-6re, -via, 
G. rerud-drowv, 
D. tervd-drowv, 
A. tetug-6Te, -via, 
V. rerug-dTe, _ -via, 


-6Ta, 
-OTWY, 
-60l, 
-6Ta, 
-0Ta. 


57 


The fem- 


-OrTe, 
-viaty, -6TOLv 
-vialy, -dTOLV, 
~OTE, 
-OTe. 


* 
The syncopated forms of the perfect participle active, 
however, make the feminine in @oa and the neuter in oe. 


Thus: 


N. éor-de, 
G. éor-Groe, 
D: éor-Grt, 
A: éot-6ra, 
V: éat-Ge, 


y . 9 
_botee, “ having stood.” 


Singular. 


-Goad, OC, - 
-OOnl, -@TOC, 
-Oo7, “Or, 
-oav, -0¢, 


“soa, tae. 





Dual. 


N. éor-6te, — -doa, 
G. éor-drowv, -déoair, 
D. éor-Orowv, -doa, 
A. éot-GTe,  -0oa, 


Vv. EGT=OTE, j “004, 


-OTE, | 
-OTOLY, 
-OTOLY, 
-OTE, 
“OTE. 


58 


ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 


Plural. 
N. éoT-6rec, -oa, -dta, 
G. ésT-OTwy, -wodv, -dTwr, 
D, éor-Got, -@oatc, -dor, 
A. éot-6Tac, -Ooac, -dra, 
V. éoT-Orec, -Goal, -dTa.- 


2. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 


Sugular. 


1. Termination in oc. 


évdogoc,. * glorious.” 





Dual. 











Plural. 


N. &vdos-oc, -0¢; -OV, N. bvd6é-w, it OF) -W, N. évdoé-or, “Ol, -a, 
G. évdd6§-ov, -ov, -ov, | G. évdd§-o1v, -ovv, -ovv,| G. évdd§-wr, -aiv, -ov, 
D. évddg-w, -9, -, | D. &vdog-orv, -o1, -ov,| D. évdo§-or¢, -orc, -oug, 
A. évdo§-ov, -ov, -ov,| A. évdo§-w, -w, -w, |sA. évddé-ove, -ove, -a, 
vV. évdog-e, -€; -OV. V. évdoé- -O, -@ QO, =. V. Evdo§g-o1, -Ol,; =f. 
v vag 
2. Termination in ac. 
deivac, “ perpetual.” 
_ Singular. Dual. 
N. deiv-ac, -a¢, -aVv, N. Geiv-avte, -avTe, -arre, 
G. deiv-ayTog, -avToc, --avToe, G. dewv-dvToww, -GvTOLWV, -dvTowr, 
D. deiv-avti, -avtTi, -avTi, D. de evv-dyTow, -GvTolv, -dvTou, 
A. deiveavTa, -avTa, -av, | A. Geiv-avte, -avtTe, -arTe, 
V. deiv-av, = -av, -av. V. deiv-avre, -avte, -avte. 
Plural. 
. N. deiv-avtec, -avTec, -avra, 
G. aew-dvtwv, -dvTwv, -dvTar, 
D. deiv-act, -aclt, ~ -aor, 
A. deiv-avtat, -avtac, -arvra, 
V. deiv-avTec, -avTec, -avTa, 
3. Termination in nv. 
dppny, “ male.” 
! Singular Dual. - 
N. dpp-ny, -, —-8Y, N. Gfp-eve, -eve, --eve, 
G. app-evoc, -evoc, -evoc, G. app-évow, -évowv, >évowy, 
D. dpp-evit,  -evt, “Seve, D. dfp-évowv, -évowv, -évorv, 
A. Gpp-eva, -eva, -€v, A. Gpp-eve, -eve, -ev8, 
Vv. app-ev, -&V, “EY. V. have, “EVE, -EVE, 


J ae a i 
Ne 


Se = toes SS eee ee ee SS a eS SO! eee 


ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Plural. 
Gpp-eveg, -evec, -Eva, 
app-évav, -évav, ~évav, 
dpp-ect, -80t, + —--€0t, 
app- Evae, “EVAL, -EVA, 
dpp-evec, -evec, .-eva. 


4. Termination in y¢.° 


59 


Adjectives in y¢ of two terminations undergo contrac- 
tion, changing é0¢ into ov¢; ef into et; éa and ée into 








7, &c. | 
dAnone, * true.” 
Singular. Dual. © 
N. aAno-nhe, -1C; -é¢, N. GAn6-ée, ~ée, -ée, 
. ‘ 3 ‘ ae I UB 1s 
G. dAné-éoc, -éo¢, -éoe, G. GAnO-éowv, -éowv, -éowv, 
ovc, ov¢, ove, oiv, ov,  oiv, 
D. dano-éi, -éi, —~éi, D. dAnO-éowv, -éow, -éowv, 
el, él, el, oiv, ov, oiv, 
A. dAnO-éa, -éa, — -é, - A. GAnO-ée, -ée, -ée, 
1s UE } Ths Ty 1s 
V. GAn6-éc, -éc, ~~. V. GAnO-ée, -ée, -ée, 
: ho hh. 
Plural. 
N. GAn0-éec, -ée¢, -éa, 
: cig, lg, Ths 
G. GA7n6-éwv, -éwv, -éwy, é 
ov, OY, GY, . 
D. GAn6-éo1, -éo1, -éot, 5 
s. GAn6-éac, -éac, ~éa, 
3 ig, eit, = fy ms 
V. dAnO-éec, -éec, -éa, 
ec, él, jj 
5. Termination in tc. 
evyaptc, “ acceptable.” 
Singular. Dual. 
N. edxap-te, =, -t; N. ebydp-tre, -tTe, ~lTe, 
G. ebydp-ito¢, -tTo¢, -tTo¢, G. ebyap-irowv, -itow, -itoty, 
D. ebydp-itt, -tTl, = TL, D. ebyap-irow, -itow, -irow 
A. ebydp-ita, ) -(Ta, i 
or or > -t, A. ebydp-ire, -tTeé, -tT8, 
-LV,; “LV, Ss 
V. ebyap-t, - -t “ V. ebydp-ire, -ire, -tT es 


-. 
60  _ ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 


: Plural. 
- N. ebytip-tréc, -tTe¢, -tTa,. - 
G. ebyap-itoyv, -irav, -itav, 
D. edydp-tot, -10t, -10t, 
_ A. sbydp-.tac, -tTac, °-174,; 
V. ebydp-irec,  -cTee, : -tTQ. 


6. Termination in ove. 


_ Adjectives in ove of two terminations have the accu- 


. sative singular in -oda or -ovy, and the yocative in -ove 
or -ov. 
vasciiint dirrove, * two-footed.” .. 
te 
Singular. - Dual. 


N. dim-ove, -ove, -Ov?, N. dim-ode, -ode,  -o02, 
G. dim-odoc, --odoc,  -odog, G. din-édotv, .-6dorv, -bdorr, 
D. dim-o01,. ~ -001,,.. -0dt, D. dur-ddo.v, -ddory, -bdotv, 
A. dim-oda,) ~ -00a, % 
-ovv,. | <A. dim-ode, -ode, -ode, 





or or 
~OU); -OvY, : 
V. diz-ove, -0vC, ' 
- or t _ or -OUv. V. dim-ode, -ods, -ode 
-0v, | » -0v, * : ; 
Plural. 


N. dix-odec, ~-odec, -oda, 
G. din-ddav, -ddav, -ddar, 
D:! dim-oot, -061, -o0t, 
A. dim-odac, -odac, -oda, 
V.. dim-odec, -odec, | -oda. 
7%. Termination in ve. ~ 


Adjectives m v¢ of two terminations contract vee and vac 


into vc. 
| ddaxpve, “ tearless.” 
Singular. . Dual. 
N. d&daxp-ve,  -v¢, -¥, _ N. dddxp-ve; © -ve,  -v8, 
G. dddxp-voc, -voc, -vog, 2 G. ddaxp-bolv, .~bow, -borv, 
D. dddxp-vi,  -vi, vi, — D. ddakp-tory, -tow, -tbow, 
rar road “UV, =, Av d0dkp-ve,~ -vE,  -v8, 





ddakp-v, -v, Uv. — V. dddkp-ve, ve, = =v8. 


an ; 
Eee eae ae , 


eaiiaiahes Zl 


> 


& 


a 


ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 


Plural. 

LN. dddxp-vec, -vec, -va, 

. US, UL, . 
G. ddaxp-bwvy -vav, -ver, 
D. dddkp-vot, -vot, -vot, 
A. addKp-vac,* -vag, -va, : 

7 Wy.) WE | 
V. dddxp-vec, -vec, -va. 

ee 


8. Termination in wv. 


oddpar, As 


Singular. 


N. cdp-wv, -wv, -o7, 
G. cHgp-ovog, -ovoc, -ovoc, 
D. cégp-0v1, -ovt, -ove, 
A. od¢p-ova, -0va, -ov, 
Ls 


GGpp-0V,  -OV; 


Under this same head fall comparative 





--0Vv. 


discreet.” » 


Dual. 
N. oddp-ove, —_ -ove, 
G. cwdp-dvotv, -dvoy, 
D. cwdp-évowv, -dvotr, 
A. oddp-ove, —-dve, 
V. owgp-ove, -ove, 


Plural. 


N. oddp-ovec, 
G. owdp-dver, 
D. cddp-oot, . 
» A. odgp-ovac, 
-V. oddp-ovec, 


-OVEC, -Ova, 
-OVov, -OVOV, « 
-00l, 001, 


-OVaC, -OVa 
“OVE, - -Ova. 


> 


“OVE, 
-OVOLY, 
4 
-6vOLY, 
OVE, 
“OVE. 


s in wy, which 


are declined like oddpwy, except that they are syncopated 
and contracted in the accusative singular, and in the. nome 
inative, accusative, and vocative plural. Thus: 


Singular. 


N. peil-ov, “WV,  -O”, 
G. peil-ovoe, -OVv0C, -OVvOC, 
D. peif-ovt, -OVL, -OVL, 
A. peit-ova, -0va, his 
-0@ syncope, > -0a, 
-@ crasis, =, 
V peil-ov, -OV,  -OV. 





peicwy, “ greater.” 


- 


'. Dual. 
N. peil-ove,  -ove, 

“G. pel-dvolv, -dvoty,, 
D. pel-évow, -dvorv, 


A. peil-ove, -0ve, 
V.. peit-ove, “-0v8, 


F 


-OVE, 
-OvOLy, 
-6votr, 


rove, 





é Fd e e 


| ad 
62 Pe sardines OF Two. TERMINATIONS. = 
. bi “ ) Be « 


* a. 


~*~ 














: Plural ae , 
et 7 ON, petf-over, ). -ovee, 
: > -s086, syncope, b -0€C, t 
' ove, crasis, : ‘-0UC, . 
1G. ped-over, © ©» ~0var, | 
ba D. jetl-oot, ne Ota 
» A. pecl-ovac, ~~ ova, | 
. ~ 0a, syncope, 3 F Oat, 
. -ove, crasis, J ~ -ouc, ) 
* V.. pert-oves,” ">  _ soveg, 
" ; ~O8C, syncope, f “08, 
-0u¢, crasis, a 
| ** ‘ - 
eet 2 9. ‘Termination in wp. © 
a? a Myre. sf anerineiyt ‘ 
1 jad, ai a 1 2 re Da 2 | 
pey IT-()y, Et oo, g », *0pe, j 
G. peyaay rr-Op0C -opoc, *-0pog, 1: ithe 3 aay - it, ~Opot, ; 
D. peyadqropt, —-0pt, —-Oply. D. peyadnr-bpow,, ~dpowv, ~6pow, 7 
A. peyadgr-opa, -opa, -op, . | A, meyaAgr-ope, -ope, Ope; 
ee ee er a a, os “ 
" , te Pharal, | *. ey ae | 
4 ; ee A en 4 
N. peyangnr- Ph # SPREE. cone pis 
* G. peyadnt-dpov, -opwr, ~6 a “ : 
D. seponse-doiie, -OPol, -Opol, ‘a 
+ * A. peyadnr-opag, -opac, -0pa,” 7 of 
| V. peyaharr-opecy rope, -opa.: re ga 
. fs *y oe ‘i . - - p : 
10. Termination , ae “y ; 
Me *: Aa 
‘ 99 in o 2 a 
r Picks EvYEWC, fertile.” » ey 
. Singular. NONE | Dual. » 
N. ebye-at, OC, -WY, .* AN. ebye-@, -0, -0,. 
G, edye-t, Oy) Oy ; G. ebye-pr, -yv, -yr, iat 
Debye, -@ D. tiye-qr; -pr, -yr. 4 
| AL ebye-0.4y or, OM, 9. |. A ebye-dy “a, 0, 
Vv. Q ‘ “We; orf * ; Yv.z ‘ebye-o, 70, °). 
- eh, POA y ETT hoo. : slid 
* ea Plural. mos te 
~e © ON. ebyetp, 5-9, +0 2 ie oe 
: 3 ‘ Geeiye-on, tay, “cat, ie 
_ SE eS ae ose 
.. F me AS evye-Wly tac, -0, 4 
V. edye-q, “Y, "We 


wi 
rie 
- 2 
fA es 
ad 
+ 


_ ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. _ 63 
_. 3, ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. 


Adjectives of one termination, namely, which express 
the masculine, feminine, and neuter by one and the same 
ending, are the cardinal numbers from mévte, “five,” to . 
éxatov, “a hundred,” both inclusive. ; . 

Others” have indeed only one termination, but for the 
masculine and feminine merely, since they are not used 
with substantives of the neuter gender, at least in the nom- 
inative and. accusative singular and plural. They are 
properly of the common gender, wanting the neuter.’ . 
Such are, «ii 

1. Adjectives compounded of substantives whieh remain” 
unchanged jas, paxpdyerp, abtdyetp, evpry, pakpaiwy, ya- 
xpadyny, from xeip, piv, aidv, and aivynyv, except those 
compounded of rove and 7éAcc, which have two termina- 
‘ions. : : 

2. Adjectives in wp, which are partly derived from tarijp 
and piTnp; as,atdtwp, dujrwp, Swowhrwp ; and partly from 
verbs; as, tadoAétwp, duoyevéTop, pudoTwp. 

3. Adjectives in 7¢, genitive -7To¢, and in we, genitive 


-WTOG; as, Guns, NucOvic, dyva¢, auobpac. G 


4. Adjectives in my¢ and ty¢, according to the first de- 
clension; as, svaimnc, £0eAovrTic. | 

5. Adjectives in and 1, as, Az, poivee, aiyiAup, aidiow. 

6. Adjectives in a¢, genitive -adoc, and in tc, genitive 
100; as, duyac, avadkic. - 


ANOMALOUS ADJECTIVES. 


1. Originally some adjectives had two forms, of both of 
which certain cases have been retained in use, so that the 





LS 


1. Some of these, however, are also used as neuters, but only in the 
genitive and. dative singular and plural; as, dugctpitro¢ abAiov, Soph. 
Philoct. 19 ; év wévnre cjparty Eurip. El. 375 5 aarijoww réxeot, Euen. 
Epigr. 13.. In other words, the neuter, when necessary, is supplied by. 
derivative or kindred forms ; as, GAakindv, dpwaxriKdy, pavuxor, &e. 


64 nee ANOMALOUS ADJECTIVES. | 


cases hich are wanting in one form are supplied by those 
of the other. -Of this kind: are wéyac or SPeyaaos, and 7r6< 
. Avg or TrOAAGc. | 

2. From peyaAoc, the misine peydan has remained i in 
use throughout, as well as the entire dual and plural, and 
the genitive and dative masculine and neuter of the singu 
lar number. The remaining cases, the nominative and ac- 
cusative singular, masculine and neuter, are taken from pé- 
Y a . | ‘ ‘ “ 

3. In TOAVC, the feminine and the dual and plural num 
_ bers are entirely taken from TOAAGC. 


péyac, “great.” 
* Singular. | | Dual. 
N.péyac,  — peyddn, péya, N. peyddo, peydhay, peyiihe, 


G. weydhov, peydnc, peyddov, | G. neyddow, peyédaw, peydhoww 
D. peydrg, peyddn, eyed, D. peyaaow, peyahaty, peydhow, 





A. péyay, = peyddnv, péya, A. peyilo, peydda, peyddo, 
Ns HeyaE, peyaan, uéya. V..psydaw, peyana, peydhun 
* Plural. : 


RA. wei peydédar, , cAa, 

. G. pEeydhor, peydhor,. : nha, ; 
we D. peydAou,  peyddare, ms emagdl 
A. peydhouc, peyddac, peydda,. 

V. peyddot, peyada, - Ne, 


r 3 mode, much.” 
Singular. Dual. | 
N. xoAtc,  woraAg, word, — N. 70AAG, -roAaAd, oArd, 


G: roAAod, moAAje, moAAod, G. roAAoiv, rodAaiv, roAAoiv 
~ D. roars, mora, “w0AAd, “| D. woadoiv, roAAaiv, roAroty, 


A. rodiv,  wodAdagv, mort, A. 70AAG,” TOAAG,  TOAAG, 
V. moat, qmoAAn, oad. V. mwodAd, woAAd, moAAd 
Plural. 


“3 ' N. woAAoi, _ woAdAai, moAAd, 
“s 2  G, rOAAdy, OAAGy, TOAAGY, 
pe , oar Di sordoic, ToAAaic, moAAoic, 

A. moAdobe, TodAde,- road, 
V. moAdoi, moddai, moddd. 


a 





A Many 1 forms from 76/v¢ occur, however, in the poets. Thus, the | 
genitive monéoc, Tl: 4;244; the. nominative plural ge | TI. 2; 610; 
the gered plural monger Il. 5; 691; the mgr monary, ‘Ht 4; 388, &c 





REMARKS ON THE TRRMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 65 


The adjective dAoc is anomalous only.i in this, that it hee 
ido i in the neuter instead of éAAov. 


“REMARKS ON THE TERMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES - 


1. Adjectives in -aioc, having the vowel « before aioe, 
denote magnitude or value, and are derived from the names 


of measures, weights, coins, and denominations of money , 


as, Thyvlaloc, “a cubit long ;” trodtaioc, “a foot long ;” 
radavrtatod, “costing a talent ;” &c. ‘Those in atog¢, on 
the other hand, which have not ¢ before aioc, generally de- 
note the place where something has originated, or to which 
it belongs ; as, my aioe, “proceeding from,” or, * belonging 
to, a fountain ;” ;” adyedatoc, “ belonging to a herd ; 3” KOpU- 
gaioc, “one who is at the head.” Some, however; denote 
merely a quality ; ; as, oedqvatos, "i moon-shaped s ;” eipnvatoc, 
“* neaceable.” 

2. Adjectives in -dAeoc mostly express a fulness; as, 
Dappadeoc, “ full of confidence ;” detpareoc, “ full of fear.” 

3. Adjectives in -avo¢ mostly signify the possession’ of 
the quality expressed by the primitive; as, teveedavéc; 
“ bitter ;” pryedavec, “ that which causes shuddering.” 

4. Adjectives in -EL0¢ commonly express an origin or 
source ; 3 as, XAVvEeLoc, Bdetoc, imretoc, pndaetoc, &c., “ consist- 
ing of,” or, “derived from, geese, cattle, horses, sheep,” &e 
Others denote rather an agreement with, or resemblance to, 
a thing; as, dvdpeioc, “ becoming a man ° yvvatnetoc, “ ef- 
feminate,” or, “ becoming a woman.” 

5. Adjectives in -E06, contracted ovc¢, express the mate- 
rial; as, ypvaeoc, -ove, “ made of gold ;” Aiveoc, -ovc, “ made 
of ling” &c. 

6.. Adjectives in -epoc-and “106 signify quality general: 


ly; as, doAepdc, crafty 3” oKtepoc, “ shady,” &c. Some 


express a propensity; as, olvypéc, “ given to wine ;” ka- 
jatnpoc, “ laborious,” “ prone to labour.” Others, again, 
have an active signification ; as, vocepée, or voonpoc, ** cau- 
sing sickness ;” 6xAnpéc, “ causing disquiet ;” vyiMpes “con: 
tributing to health.” 

7. Adjectives in ~heee sionify fulness ; as, Sevdohire, 
“ full of trees ;” mrovhetc, “ full of grass ;” DAfjetc, om Bk of 
wood.” 

8. Adjectives in -7A0¢. signify a propensity to, and capa- 
bility or fitness for, anything; as, drrarnAd¢, * prone to de- 

F 2 


Fie 


66 REMARKS ON THE TERMINATIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 


ceit ;” umvnddc, “ prone to sleep” ‘To this the idea of ful- 
ness is nearly allied ; as, idp7Adc, “ watery.” | 

9. Adjectives in -tzo¢ most commonly denote fitness or 
eapability for anything ; as, 7yeuoviKdc, “ fit for command ;” 
cubsprntiKoc, “ fit for piloting,” &c.. Other meanings are, 
1. belonging to anything; as, owuatiKéc, “ corporeal ;” av- 

yKoc, “ spiritual ;” 2. coming from anything; as, trarpe- 
c6¢, “ derived from forefathers,” “ hereditary ;” Boixéc, made 
of ox’s hide.” | 

iv. Adjectives in -iuo¢ are of two classes, one derived 
irom nouns and the other from verbs. Those from verbs 
have soinetimes an active, sometimes a passive significa- 
tion , asy PvEtwoc, “ one who flees ;” GAdorpoc, “ pertaining 
to capture ;” dpa@owoc, “ arable ;” Bpdoiuoc, “ edible.” Other 
adjectives in -tuoc, however, express merely a quality ; as, 
TrEVGtwoc, ‘* mournful ;” ddKtpoc, “ celebrated,” &c. 

11. Adjectives in -cvo¢ and -ervo¢g signify, 1. a material 
of which anything is made ; as, yfivoc, “ made of earth ;” 
‘Kahdutvoc, “made of reeds ;” tAivOtvoc, “ made of tiles,” 
&c.;°2. a quality which arises from the magnitude or quan- 
tity of the thing expressed by the derivation ; as, medzvéc, 
“ level 3” dpervoc, “ mountainous ;” oKxotetvoc, “ dark,” &c. 

1%. Adjectives in -so¢ express a quality generally ; as, 
éoTréploc, “ pertaining to evening ;” Saddootoc, “ marine ;” 
owTnptoc, “ saving.” If two adjectives are derived from 
one substantive, one in zoc and the other in oc, the latter 
expresses a quality generally ; the former denotes a prone- 
ness or tendency to that quality; as, xaOapdc, “ pure ;” 
Kabdpioc, “ loving purity” 

13. Adjectives in -der¢ and -@e¢ signify a fulness ; as, 
pyrioetc, “ full of prudent counsels ;” durredderc, “ full of 
vines.” The termination @e¢ is used when the penult is 
long; as, enT@etc, @THELc, Ke. . 

14. Adjectives in -#dy¢ express, 1. a fulness; as, zrov- 
oone, * grassy ;” avbeuadne, “ flowery ;” 2. a resemblance ; 
as, obnk@dne, “ wasplike ;” ddoyadne, “ shining like fire ;” 
avdpadnc, “manly.” In this sense these adjectives coin- 
cide with those m -oedf#¢, and are probably formed from 
them. ; | 

15. Adjectives in -wAo¢ signify a propensity or tenden- 
ey to anything ; as, duapTwaAdc, “ prone to sin;” wpevdwadc, 

‘prone to lying.” — ¢ 








| Fe ee ee CO  * w-<, 


a 


DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 67 


DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

1. The property expressed by an adjective can usually 
be attributed to more objects than one. Yet it is seldom 
found exactly to the same extent in one as in-another, but 
it is possessed by one in an usual degree, by another 1 in a 
higher or in a pre-eminent degree. 

2. Now, if one and the same property be attributed to 
two different objects, and these be compared with each 
other in reference to the measure of this property, there 
arises a new form of adjective, namely, the comparative. 

3. But, if a property exists in many objects, and one of 
them is to be distinguished as possessing this property in 
the greatest degree, this is also” effected by a new form, 
called the superlative. | 

4. ‘These two forms are called degrees of comparison, 
and, for the sake of uniformity, a corresponding appella- 
tion has also been given to the simple form of the adjec- 
tive, namely, the positive. Strictly speaking, however, the 
positive is no degree of comparison, but merely the prani- 


_ tive form, on which the comparison is based. 


FORMATION OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 


I. The degrees of comparison are formed from the pos- 
itive ; namely, the comparative, by appending the termi- 
nati -TEpo¢, a, ov; and the superlative by appending -ra- 
TOC, 7], OV. | 

II. These terminations are appended to the root of the 
positive in the following manner : 

1. Adjectives in o¢ and v¢ throw away ¢; as, devvoc, 
devorepoc, devvétatoc ; ebpte, eiptrepoc, ebpiraroc. 

If the penultimate syllable of adjectives in o¢ is short in 
the positive, then o is changed into w in the comparative 
and superlative ; as, copdc, cop@tepoc, codwTtaroc ; uc 
poc, Kkabapedtepoc, Kabapararoc.' 





ne ‘This rule abext the penult of the positive appears to have been 


ee 


68 FORMATION OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 


2. Adjectives in €0¢, contracted ovc, form their compar 
ative tand superlative regularly: from the uncontracted pos 
itive, and then undergo. contraction ; as, top@ipéoc, contr 
Topoupevc, compar. TroppupewTepoc, contr. Toppupertepoc, 
superl. rop@upewtatoc, contr. top@vpétaroc. 


3. Adjectives:in o0¢, contracted ov¢, append -eorepoc, 


-eoTaToc, to the root, and always contract this termination 
with the syllable that precedes ; ; as, EVvooc, contr. evvovc, 
Eoampar (ebvoéorepoc) evvovoTeos ; : agtecs ese siete ) 
EVVOVOTATOC. 4 

4. Adjectives in -ac, ava, ay, appetid TEpOG and taTo¢ 
to the neuter; as, uéAac, wedadvrepoc, peddyraros. : 
 §. Adjectives in 7¢ and e¢ shorten these terminations 
into ec, and then append tepo¢ and tato¢; as, dAnOie, 


dAnbéortepoc, dAgGésraros ; xaptec, xapléorepoc, AOE 


TATOC. 

6. But adjectives in y¢, genitive ov; of the first ‘Hecld 
sion, annex corepo¢ and totatoc to the root; as, KAénrye, 
KAerrlotepoc, KAentloTaroc. 

» #8 Adjectives in wv append éatepo¢ and éoraro¢ to the 
root ; as, cHdpwr, genitive oadpov-oc, sae owdpovéo- 
TEpoc, super. owppovésraros. 

8. Adjprhyes in yv annex éoTepoc and éataroe to the 
neuter ; as, TEépynv, TEPEVEOTEPOC, TEPEVEOTATOS. 

9. Adjectives in § append éorepoc and fotaro¢ to the 
root, and sometimes éorepoc and éoTatoc ; as, dpTraz, gen- 
itive dpmay-o¢, compar. dprayiorepoc, superl. dptayiora- 
Toc; adnate, genitive abt Art- Of,, COMpar.. aéonatkéorepoc, 
superl. dondAkéoratoc. 

III. Some dissyllabic adjectives. in ve and po¢ reject 





caused by the conditions of hexameter verse, the oldest measure in the 
Greek language, and by which that language itself was first formed. 
Thus, for example, a _ comparative in 6Tépoc, with the preceding syllable 


short, consequently ~~~, would not have been admissible into the hexam- — 


eter. The same objection would apply to a comparative in Grépoc, with 
the preceding syllable long (except where another long yaya went be- 


ve = Ww 


_ fore the latter), since the result would be ; 








elm a coe ea eran) aa 


EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING RULES °* 69 


_ these terminations, and use, in their stead, Zwv (neuter Zov) 


for the comparative, and sotoc, 7, ov for the superlative. 
Thus, yAviic, yAvkiwv, yAvKiotog ; aloxypéc, aloxyiwy, 
aloxLoroc. 

1. The adjectives compared in the latter way are, how- 
ever, but few in number, neither is this mode of compar- 
ison exclusively used even in their case, since the com- 
mon terminations OTEpog and OTEPOS, Grete and vraroc, 
also occur. 

2. Generally speaking, of those -in pos, the formation 
éwy, toroc, predominates only in aioypd¢g and éyOpdc ; and 
of those in v¢, only in 7dv¢ and taytc¢. In all the others, 
the regular form must be regarded throughout as the more 
usual. .Thus Gpadvtepog is the more common form, where- 
as Bpadiwy occurs only in poetry. 


EXCEPTIONS TO THE PRECEDING RULES. 


1. Some adjectives in o¢ reject o before tepo¢ and Ta- 
TOC ; as, ‘YEpacoc, yepaitepoc, yepaitatoc ; TmEepatoc, trepat- 
tepoc, mepaitatoc, &c. The adjective @idoc has for its 
usual forms @iAtepoc, diAtato¢ ; besides which, however, 
dtAaitepoc, and even the regular prAwrepog and dudcrraroc. 
are also found.’ 

2. Other adjectives, instead of o and ®, have commonly 
al, or €¢, or 4¢; before the comparative and superlative ter- 
minations ; as, 


uéooe, peoaitepoc, peoaitatoc, 
idtoc, ldtatrepoc, idtaitaroc, 
mpwioc, TpwiatTEpos, | Tpwtaitaroc. 
Ebpapévoc,  eppayevréorepoc, Eppwpevéotaros, — 
adGovoe, adbovéotepog,  adOovéoraroc, 

| dopevoc, , dopevéarepos, dopevéotatoc. 





1. The three forms of the comparative and’ superlative of ¢iAo¢ appear 
to have been used by the ancients with a certain distinction in meaning. 
Thus, ¢iArepoc and ¢iAtaro¢g signified ‘more friendly,” ‘ dearest 
friend ;” $iAairepoc, “more dear,” “ more esteemed ;” and dtAdrepoc, 
*“ more beloved.” This distinction, however, has not, in general, been 
strictly observed. Rost, G. G. p. 169. 


y | aa IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


Aadioratte, 


AdAoc, _ Aadiorepoc, 
TTWYLOTATOS. 


TTWVOC, TTWYLOTEPOS, 


3. In some of the adjectives which make the compara- 
tive in ewy and the superlative in coroc, the z of the ending 
iWv is rejected, and the last letter of the root, if 6, 8, x, or y, 
changes into oo (Attic tr). Thus, tayic¢ (old form Oay- 
é¢), comparative tayiwy, changed to Sdcowy, Attic Sar- 
twv. So, also, éAaytic, comparative éAayiwv, changed to 


éAdoowyv, Attic éAdttrwyv. In the same manner, also, must © 


the comparative pdoowy, of waxpoc, be explained. 


IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


‘L The comparative and superlative remain in several 
adjectives, whose positive has grown into disuse. These 
are noted most easily in connexion with some extant posi- 
tive, to which they approximate the nearest in respect of 
signification. Hence the following list : 


Oc 





r apstvov, 
apelwr, aploroc. — 
BeaAtiov, BéATLOTOC. 
BéATEpOS, BeAtraroc. 
Kpeloowy, Yt 
? , 3 KPaTlto ° 
Good. ayabos, ‘ Oe pol bogies: 
| Awior, Awioroc. 
| Ado, A@oToc. 
_. o&pTaroe. 
péptepoc, péptoroc. 
e pépTioroc. 
im KQKOTEPOG, KAKWOTATOC. 
KAKiWyV, KGKLOTOC. 
Bad. naxos, xepelov, xeploroc. 
xeipwr, xelploroc. 
) a akpoTepoc, aKpoTarog. — 
Long. paxpos, | rep ant sors ch 
LECOOY, 
Great. péyac, LECwY, péyloros. 
pelo, 


en ee ee a ee 


ee ee ee Se ee ee ae on 


PS a ee a ee ee ae ee ee ee 








IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


Small. uikpos, 
(éAaxvc), | éAdoowy, 


Much. roric, 
Easy. padtoc, 


puLKpOTEpos, 
peLorepoc, 


id 
peta, 


HOOWY, 
TAEWY, 

TrAEio”, 
pawr, 


71 


peloroc. 
EAGKLOTOS. 


JKLOTOS. 


TwAEloTOC. © 


padaoros. 


1. That these various forms were not used in exactly 
the same signification is certain; but it is also equally cer- 
tain that no settled distinction between them was universal- 
ly observed. : 

2. The proper comparative and superlative of dya0dc, 
namely, dyaOartepog and dya0aratoc, occur only in later 
writers, and such as are not Attic ; as, for example, in Di 
odorus Siculus, 16. 86. 


II. Some comparatives and superlatives are evidently de- 


rived from substantives, adverbs, and prepositions. 


Compar. 
TpOTEpoC, 
UTEPTEPOC, 
GVOTEPOC, 
VOTEPOC, 


dovAdrepoc, 


_ BaotAcbrepoc, 


Superl. 
TOTO, 
omTépTaroc, 
GV@OTATOC, 
voratoc, 
KAETTioTaToc, 
ETALPOTATOS, 


66 


Thus: 


from 7796. 


OTrEp. 
ava. 
oT0. 
KAENTNG. 
ETaipoc. 
dovAoc » 
BaotAsciec 


To these may be added the following comparisons of ad- 


verbs. 


Thus: 
avo, 
KaTO) 
&o, 
E00), 
TrOPPo, 


Gvarépw, GVWTATO, 
 -KaT@TEépO, KATWTGTO, 
&fwtépw, &WTaTO, 
éowTépw, &0W@TETH, 
TOPPWTEPW, TOPPWTETO. 


Il]. A few instances occur, where, to express a stil] 


72 hy NUMERALS. 


higher gradation of an idea, a degree of comparison be- 
comes «he positive to a new formation ; as, éoyaToc, “last,” 
éoyatarepoc, éoxataératos, “last of all ;”- mparoc, “ first, 
mpwrtotos, “ first of all,” “ the very first.” } 

IV. In many adjectives in Greek, as in other languages, 
the formation of a comparative and superlative from the 
root of the positive was not usual, but the gradation of idea 
was expressed by adding the adverbs paAAov (“ more”) 
and pddALora (“ most”). ‘Thus, tpwrde, “ vulnerable,” tpw- 
r6¢ waAAov, * more vulnerable ;” Svnrdc, “ mortal,” Sunros 
udAdov, more mortal ;” djAo¢, “ evident,” waAdov d7ndAos, 
“ more evident,” OnAog padsota, most evident.” 


XXIII NUMERALS. 


1. Numerals are either Cardinal or Ordinal. 
2. The cardinal numbers answer to the question, “ how 
many ?” as, ei¢, “ one ;” dbo, “two ;” tpeic, “three,” &e. 
3. The ordinal numbers answer to the question, “ which 
in order ?” as, mp@Toc, “ first ;” debrEpoc, “ second ;” tpitoc, 
“ third,” &c. | | : 
4. For marks of number the Greeks employ the letters 
of their alphabet ; but, to make the number complete, they 
insert therein a ¢ after ¢, called érionuoy, or Fav,' and an- 
swering to our 6; and they also adopt two Oriental char- 
acters, namely, Koppa, G for 90; and Sampi, D for 900.’ 
7. When the letters are employed to denote numbers, a 
mark resembling an accent is placed over them ; but to des- 
ignate the thousands the same mark is placed below. Thus, 





1. The appellation oriyua is also sometimes given to. this character. 
The name Fav refers to the circumstance of its occupying the place of 
the digamma in the alphabetic order: ; 

2. The original ‘mark for the xémma was 9, whence comes the Latin 
Q. The Lauri is no doubt to be traced back in name to the old name 
for the letter ¢, namely odv, and. appears to have been formed from the 
union of this letter with a 7, the early form of the Greek S$ having been 
C. Buttman thinks that the earlier name of the numeral in question 
was Sav, and that SeurZ.came in as an appellation at a later period. 





NUMERALS. : 73 


@ is one, but @ one thousand. So x’ is twenty, but x twenty 
thousand. 

8. These marks above and below the letters are not ex- 
pressed in the case of every letter, when we have several 
letters placed side by side, and indicating a series of num- 
bers, but only over or below the last of each series. Thus 
we write vyx3 for 53,602 ; and awAf for 1838. 

9. The following combinations may serve as examples 
of the Greek < darniee of notation. 





wave, =—-«1 415. yous, 3846. 
wok, 9265. Kapa, 21,501. — 
yorO’, 3589. pveoy’, 155,203. 
S@A6’, ‘7832. : 700, 89,004. 


10. In place of this system of notation, the Athenians 
adopted the following, which is far more striking to the 
eye. Thus: 3 


is the mark of unity. 


nee 
2, 
lit, 2, express the other numbers below 5. 
4, 
5, 


II, 5, is tha initial of Iéyre. 

A, 10,. e Agka. . 
H, 100, 6 Hexarov, the old form for éxatdév. 
X,.1000,.. “.. » XéArou. : 

M, 10,000, “- Mvpzoe. 


The numbers between these are denoted partly by the 
combination of the above marks; as, AII for 12; AA for 
20; AAATITIT for 39 ; and partly by the multiplication of A, 
H, X, M, into five IT, these marks being placed within the IT; 
as, JA] for tevraxic déxa, five times ten, or 50; JAJA for 
60; JA for 500; fx] for 5000; XJBIHHHAAATIIII for — 
1838. This manner of notation is particularly to be marked, 

‘ G | 


a 


74. REMARKS. ON THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. 


since it has been preserved in many and important Attic in 


—— 


DECLENSION. OF THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. 


Singular. 





| Dual. 


dvo, two” 
N. dto and “dba, 
G. dvoiv and dveiv, 











D. dvoiv, 
_ Aga, piav, & A. dbo. 
Plural 
N. : 
G. dvév, 
. D. dvai, 
A. — 
Plural. Plural. 
_ TpEic, “ three.” téoaapec, “ four.” 
N.tpeic, pets,  tpta, N. réooapec, récoapec, Téocape, 
G. TpiGy, Tpldv, TpLdr, G. TEDOEPOY, Tecodpur, Tecoapuy, 
D. tpici, tpici, Tpidi, D. réooapot, Téooapol, réooapet, 
A. tpeic,  Tpeic, Tpia. A. récoapac, Técoapac, rtape. 


REMARKS ON THE FIRST FOUR NUMERALS. 
: Eic. | , 
1. In the epic writers the form /a is found for iia ; and 


only once i@ for évi. (Il. 6. 422.) 
3. From the composition of this numeral with ovdé and 


_ pdé arise the negative adjectives obdei¢ and pndete, which 


are declined in the same manner ; as, nom. ovdeic,,ovde- 
ula, obdév ; genitive obdevdc, obdemdc, obderdc, &e. The 
later Greek writers make it ovOeic and. unOeic, from ote 
and pire, which, however, is not considered genuine Attic 

3. Ovdeic and pnoeic are often separated, and writtep 
ovdé elc, and pndé sic, &c., and this separation, increases 
the negative signification. Thus, ovdé Bic, “ not even one ;’ 


3 cae Dp’ évog, ‘not even by one,” &c.: 





The nu vale, from its ve ery 1 nature, can ca no 


eee but. obdele and pndeic- have ovdéver and eyes 


the sense of “ insignificant,” “ of no value.” 





1. For an account of the arithmetic of the Greeks, consult Delamire 
Histoire de V Astronomie Aucienne, vol. ii., p..3, seg. 


Me 


t 
pe a ee 


aiceeie 








= a a oS i i 





SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. ay £3) 


Avo. 


1. Avo is the Attic mode of writing. In Homer and 
Herodotus it is often indeclinable. Avéiv is of more rare 
occurrence than dvoiv, and is only used in the genitive. 
Avéy is sometimes written dug@y, and regarded as Ionic for 
dvoiv. But dudv is preferable as a genitive plural.’ 

2. Avw appears to have been, in fact, the dual number of 
the old form dvé¢. “Auda accords in great measure with 
dvw. In the old poets it is frequently indeclinable. Oth- 
erwise dudoty is used in the genitive and dative. — 


Téooapec. 


1. Instead of tédoapes the Ionic dialect has TEOOEPES, 
the Holo-Doric térropec: Hesychie gives TECOUPES as 
. an AXolic form. - 

2. For téaaapot or térrapot in the dative, the form be 
pact occurs in the poets. 


SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. | 
Cardinal. Ordinal. 


1] a’, ec, - Ist] mpdroe, 

2| P| dto, | 2d) dedrepoc, 

3] | tpeic, © ' 3d} tpiroc, 

4| o0'| réccapec, 4th| réraproc, 

5] e| née, 5th] wéuntocg, — 

6) o| 8, 6th} &xroe, 

7| C| éxrd, 7th} 26douoc, 

8| 7°] oxTa, 8th} dydooe, 

9} &| évvéa, 9th} évvarog, | 

10} 4’| .déxa, 10th} déxaroc, 

11} 2a’| &vdexa, 11th} évdéxaroe, 

12} 68’) dddexa, el 12th} dwdéxaroc, - 

13] cy’| tptoxaidexa, 13th} tpsoxaidéxaroc, 

14| 1d’ Tecoapeckaidexa, 14th} reocapaxaidéxarog, 

15) ce’) wevrexaidexa, 15th] wevrexaidéxarog, 

16| ic’) éxxaidexa, 16th] éxxaidéxaroc, 

17| 0} éxraxaidexa, 17th) éxraxadéxaroc, 

18] c7’| dxrwxaidexa, 18th} dxtT@xacdéxarog, 

19| «| évveaxaidexa, 19th] évveaxaidéxatog, 
20} «| elxoot, 20th| eixcordc, Re, 
21] Ka’) etxoowy ele, Zlst| eixoordc mpOto¢, ~— 
22| x6’) elxoor dio, &c., 22d) eixooric dedrepos, 














30) A’| tpedKovra, 30th Tprakooroc, 





1. Passow, Lex. s. v. 





aa SYNOPSIS OF NUMERALS. 














31; Ad| tpidKovra éic, 31st] Tpraxooro¢ TpOTo¢, 
40) pw’ TecoapadxovTa, 40th) recoapaxoorog, 
» agg v'| WevTHKovTa, | 50th| zevryKxooréc, 
60) &| é&épxovra, 60th] *é=y7xooTéc, 
— 10) 0'| é6dougxovra, ' ~ 70th ebdounkooroc, 
80] x’| bydopKovra, - 80th bydonxocréc, 
90| G’| évergxovra, 90th| evernxooréc, 
100} p’| éxarév, 7 100th} éxarooréc, 
200) o'| draxdctor, | =: 200th| dcaxoatooréc, 
300}. 7’| tpcaxdovo1, 300th| tprakoctocTéc, 
400) | tecoapakdoior, | . 400th TEdCAapAKooLOOTOE, 
500) ¢’| mevtakéorol, | 500th] aevraxociocréc, 
600}. x’| éFaxdor01, . 600th| éaxoorooréc, 
700| a)’| éxraxéotor, ’ '700th| éxraxoctoorog, 
800} w’| dxraxéoror, _ 800th) dxraxoctooréc, 
900) D’| évvaxdoio, 900th| évyaxootooréc, 
1000; a} xiAzoz, ~ 1000th} yAcooric, 
2000) 8) dioxidto, ~ 2000th| dcoysArooréc, 
3000) y,| tproyxiAcoz, 3000th| tproyrArooréc, 
4000} 6 | retpaxicyitio, 4000th| retpaxioytALocrée, 
5000) «| wevraxioyidior, 5000th EDT ORAC SAE 
6000) ¢} &€axioyidAvor, | 6000th| éfaxroytAvooréc, ~ 
7000) ¢). émraxioyiruor, 7000th! éxraxioyiAtooréc, 
8000} 7) dxraxioxiduor, 8000th| dxTaxioyiALocroc, 
9000) 3 évvakioxiAcot, 9000th évvaxioxALooroc, 
10,000) | pdpzot, 10,000th| pvpiocréc, 
20,000) «x, Sropdprot, _ | 20,000th} dcouvpiocréc, 
100,000) p,| dexaxcopdpioc. 100,000th dekaxtopuptooros. 
Multiplicatives. 
 dtrAodc,! - Simple, 
. *  durrAodc, Double, 
 - TpirAodc, Treble, 
TeTparAoic, ~ Quadruple, 
TevrarAove, Five fold, 
&ec. See, 
- ts . 
Adverbs of Number. 
. Gag, Once, 
. dic, ; Twice, 
Tpi¢, Thrice, 
TeTpaKte, Four times, 
TEVTAKLE, Five times, 
&c. : ‘ 





1. For the declension of dxAotc, which wil, serve as a guide te that 
of the rest, see page 50. 


” 


a on 





REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 77 


REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 


1. In compound numbers, either the less are put after 
the greater without a conjunction; as, elxoar Tpelc, TpLd- 
KovTa TrévTe; Or, What is most usual, the less precede and 
are connected with the greater by kal; as, Tpei¢ Kal elKoot, 
TEVTE Kal TPLaKOVTG. 

2. So, also, in the more complicated numbers, the sev- 
eral parts are united in such a manner as to proceed from 
the less to the greater; as, rértapa Kai ébdouqKovra Kal 
évvakdota Kal TptoxyiAta Kal. éiaxtopipia, which express 
63,974. : 7 i 

3. For the greater numbers a numeral substantive is 
frequently used with the requisite cardinal number ; as, 
déxa pvpiddec, 100,000; tproyidAroe nai mévTe. prptddec, 
53,000, &c. ae we 

4. In the case of tens compounded with 8 or 9, the defi- 
nition is often given by subtraction ; as, tprdxovta dvoiv 
deévrov or déovta, 28; dydonkovta évdg déovToc, 79; or, 
if a substantive of the feminine gender stands therein, pd¢ 
deovone. 7 ? 

5. Of the cardinal numbers, the first four and the round 
numbers from 200 are alone declined. All the rest are 
indeclinable. | 
6. The Latin distributives are expressed in Greek by 
compounding the cardinal numbers with ody ; as, civdvo, 
“two by two ;” obvvtpetc, “ three by three,” &c. 

7. Besides the forms of ordinal numbers which have just 
been given in the synopsis, two ordinals are also frequently 
connected by kai; as, méumtog nal dékatoc; bydoo¢ Kal 
dékaroc, &c. er 

8. The smaller ordinal number is also sometimes pre- 
fixed to the greater cardinal or ordinal with xaé and a prep- 
osition ; as, TH Extn ent déxa, supply 7juépare, “ on the sixth 
in addition to ten days,” 1. e.,“ on the sixteenth.” So, also, 
TH ExTy per’ elndda, “ on the twenty-sixth,” &c. 

9. In order to express half or fractional numbers in mon- 
ey, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words com- 
pounded of the name of the weight, &c: (viz. urd, d60A6¢, 
TéAavrov), with the adjective termination ov, tov, aior, 
and ut, “ half,” and placed before them the ordinal number 
of which the half is taken. Thus, tétaproy quitddar- 
tov, ‘34 talents,” i. e., the ge a talent, the second a tal 

2 


78 : PRONOUNS. 


ent the third a talent, the fourth a half-talent. — So; also, 
tpitov pysvator, . Oh mine,” Ebdowov nuidpayyov, 63 
drachme.” 

10. From the foregoing, however, we must carefully 
‘distinguish such phrases as the following : Tpla ajpira- 
Aavra, “1% talents,” e., three half-talents ; mEVvTE 7)ptyl- 
at “21 mine,” &c. 

. From the ordinal numbers are aeityei, 1. Numerals 
in aoc which commonly answer to the question, “on what 
day 2” as, tortaioc, “ on the third day ;” dexaraioc, “ on the 
tenth day.” 2. Multiple numbers in -pdotog (besides those 
rigacd mentioned in -Aov¢); as, dipdotoc, tpipdotoc, 

c. %. Proportionals, answering to the question, “how 
much n.ore 2” as, dimAdovoc, TpiTAdoLoc, TéeTpaTAdotoc, 
* twice, thrice, four times as much.” | 


XXIV. PRONOUNS. 3 


All pronouns serve to supply the place of a noun, but, at 
the same time, they give different relations of the substan- 
tive which they represent. According to these relations 
so expressed by them, they are divided into the following 
classes : 

1. Personal Pronouns, which express the simple idea of 
person, and directly represent the same. These are, 


pty 

eyo, J, 

ov, thou, 
ov, of him. 


2. Possessive Pronouns, which are formed from the per- 
sonal, and indicate the property of an indiviaual ; as, 


 &l-og, -f], -OV,. mine, 
006,, of, ..o6v, — thine, 
5¢, : iti qh, oy, - his, 
TPETEP-0C, “a,  -OV, our, 
bpuérep-oc, -2,  -OV, your, 
opérep-0¢,  -a,  -ov, their, 
ValTEp-0C, ~<a, -0v, of us both, 


odbwitep-0¢, -a, -ov, of you both 


PRONOUNS. 79 


8 Definite Pronoun, for the nearer and stronger distinc- 
f:ga of one object from another ; as, avtéc, aiTH, abTd, “ he 
Aamsclf,” “ she herself,” “ ctself.” 

4. Reflexive Pronouns, for the more accurate indication 
and separation of a person; as, — 


éuauinv,  éeswavtie, of myself, 
OEAVIOV, ) — | 

or OaUTISC, of thyself, 
OavTov, we 
EQUTOD, 9 

or _ abting, abtov, of himself. 
QUTOv, | 


5. Demonstrative Pronouns, which distinctly point out 
the object of which we are discoursing, with the accessory 
idea of place. These are, 


ovroc, G@UTN,  TOUTO, 
éde, —° 08, TOOE, this 
éxeiv-0¢, =), -0, 


6. Relative Pronouns, which refer to an object already 
mentioned, and give ita nearer definition ;- as, 
6s, q, 6, who, ; 
dott¢,.  fric, _ bre, whoever. 


7. Indefinite Pronouns, which merely indicate an object 
generally, without farther definition; as, 


tic (enclitic), ue, Th, any, 
dciva, dsiva,  deiva, some one. 


8. Interrogative Pronoun ;. as, 
tic,’ tic, tt, . who? what? 


9. Reciprocal Pronoun, which designates the mutual ac- 
tion of different persons upon each other; as, dAAGAow, 
dual; dAAfAwy, plural, “ 0° each other.” 





80  _INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS. 


> 


INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS. 


1. Personal. 


Ryo, I. 
_ Singular. Week yi Dual. 

8 eee tts N. vi, contr. vd, we two, 
G. guod or pod . of me, G. vdiv, ~““ vey, of us two, - 
D. guot or pot ~. tome, D. viiv, “ voy, to us two, 
A. iué- or pé. . me - | A. vGi, “ vO, us two.” 

‘ . «Plural... 

. N. mete woe 
. G. judy . . of us, 


D. mui» . . tous, 
A. mdg . . Us 





sd, thou. * 
Singular. oA Dual. 
N. od - . « . thou, | N.oddi, contr.cdd, you two, 
G.cob. .. . . . of thee, | G.oddiv, “ ody, of you two, 
D. cot. . . . « tothee, | D. oddiv, “ - ogy, to you two, 
A. CE + 0 05 + thee. A. 097, “ o60, you two. 
Plural. 


N. tueig. 2. YOU 

G. tudv, . . of you, 
- D.ipiv . . . to you, 

A. tude. 2 1 YOU. 





Od, of him. 


] 


; 
Oe 


Singular. | wade? * 
N. Wanting. N. ofwé . they two, 
G.ob . . . of him, ~G. odoiv . of them two, 
D3. ss wm D. odwiv . to them two, - 
A.E 6°. « him. A. ogwé . themtwo. 
2 Plural. 

N. o¢ei¢, neuter oéa, they, 

G. oda, of them, a 

D. odio, to them, 


A. ogdc, neuter odea, them. . 





INFLEXION OF 


PRONOUNS. 8] 


2. Reflexive. 


*Epavtov, of myself. 


Singular . Plural. 
N., (éy@ atric), (ey adr), N. jyetc abrot, juetc abral, 
. éuavrod, éuavting, G. 7 nav abrav, Lov abrav, 
D. éuavTo, guaurh, ey. juiv avroic, juiv abraic, 
A. éuavtov, éuautTqy. A. hudg avTove, nae abrag. 


Leavtov, of 
3 Singula 
N. (cd airéc), 
G. ceavTod or cavTod, 


D. ceavré or cavto, 
A. ceavtév or cavTév, 


Plural. 


N, tuei¢ aitol, 
G. indy airéy, 
D. dui abroic, 
A. td abrove, 


thyself. 


rT. 
“ > Ld 

(od avn), 

CeavTyn¢ Or cavrT7e, 

CeavTH OF CavrTz, 

CEavTyy OY cavTHV 


tusi¢ abrat, , 
tov abrov, 
duty abraig, 
dpa¢g abrdac. 


‘Eavtov, of himself. ° 
Singular. | 


N. (abréc), (adn), 


(aid), 


G. éavtod or atroi, 
D. éavtG or avro, 
A. éavrov or av7ov, 


N. (o¢ei¢ adroit), 

G. éavrév or attéyv, 
D. éavtoic or avroic, 
A. éavtoic or aitodic,” 


3. Demonstrative. ' 
Odroe, this. 
Singular. 
iN. odro¢, airn, TobTo, N. TobTa, 
G. toirov, Tabrye, TovTOU, 
D. roite ratry, ” TobTY, 
A. toirov, tabTnv, ToiTo. A. TOOTH, 


éauti¢ or aortic, 

éauTyH or avrg, 

éavTnv or adityy, 
Plural. 

(odeic abrai), 

éavTav or avTor, 

éavtaic or avtaic, 


éavtd¢ or avrdc, 


éavtod or avrov, 
éavTd or avo, 
éavté or abté 


(agéa aid), 
éavTdv or atréy, 
éavtoic or avtoic, 
éavtd or aitré 


Dual. 


Tatra, 
G. Tobrow, Tatrawy, ToUTOW, 
_D. Tobrowy, Tabra.y, TOOTOLY, 
TabTa; 


Tobre, ‘ 


TOUTW 


82 INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS. 
: Plural. 
N. otto, atta, . ratra, 
G. rovtTwrv, TovTwY, TObTwY, 
D. robrowg, tavraic, Tobrore, 
: A. tobrove, rabrac, Taira. 
4. Relative. 
"Oc, who, which, what. ; 
_ Singular. Dual. : Plural. 
N. dc, 9, 8, WN. 6, | 16,2 Gj N. 0%, a, 4, 
G.ov, je, oD, G. oiv, aiv, olv, | G.dv, dy, dr, 
Dw h®, D. oly, alv, oly, | D.ole, alc, ols, 
A. by, by, 6. And>)~ & ~ bob AOR fc, > &. 
*OoTic, whoever. 
Singular. Dual. 
N. dor, HTL, rt, N. rive, drive, OTLVE, 


G. obtivoc, 7? 
D. ori, 3 
A. 6vtiwa, 7 


jortvoc, ovtivoc, | G. olvrivowy, alytivowy, olvrivory 





Singular. 


N. ric, 
G. rivéc, 
Trivi, 


TIC, 
TLvéc, 
Tivi, 


ITLVL, «IT LVL D. olvrivowy, alytivow,. olvrivow 

VTLVa, OTL. A. Grive, ative, OTLVE. 
Plural. 

N. ofrivec,  altivec, .  &riva, 

G. Ovtiwver, OrTiver, GvTivar, 

D. oloriot, aiorior,  olorior, 

A. ototiwvac, doriwac, dativa. 


5. Indefinite. 
TLC, any. 
| Dual. - Plural. - 
tl, |N.rivé, revé, rtivé, |N. trivéc, rivéc, Tid, 


tivoc,|G. Tivoty, tivoiv, Tivoiv,|G. Tivdv, Tidy, Tivdp 
tivi, |\D. rivoiv, tivoiv, rivoiv,|D. trict, riot,  rioi, 


A tid, tivd, ti. |A. tevé, Tevé, Tevé. IA. Tivdc, Tivde, Tiva. 


Aciva, a certain one, 


Singular. ' Duals | 

7, To Oeiva, N. 70," 74, - .F@}5, deive, 
Tie, Tov, deivoc; G. roiv, taiv, roiv, deivow, 
TH, TO, sive, - . D. roiv, raiv, roiv, deivory, 


TO. deiva, A. td, 7d, TO, Oeive. 


vy 


‘REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. 83. 


Plural. 


ae ol, al, deivec, 
G. Tay, tiv,  deivov, 
D. tote, _ taic, deiot, 
A. totic, Tdc, deivac. 


6. Interrogative. 


The interrogative differs from the indefinite t7¢ merely 
in the position of the accent. The indefinite is always en- 
clitic, and, in the oblique cases, takes the accent on its 
ending. On the contrary, the interrogative, even in’a con- 
nected discourse, remains always acuted in the nominative, 
and in the oblique cases preserves the accent on the radical 
syllable. 


tic, who? . 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 


N. tic, ric, th, N. tive, tive, tive,” \N.-tivec, rivec, tiva, 
G. tivoc, tivog, Tivoc, |G. tivow, Tivoty, Tivow,|G. Tivwr, Tivwr, Tivoer, 
D. tivt, rtivt, tivit, |D. tivowy, tivoty, rivow,|D. riot, tiot, Tiot, 
A. tiva, tiva, ti.. \A.tive, rive; tive. |Avtivac, tivag, tiva. 


} 


7. Reciprocal. 


Dual. Plural. 


N. Wanting. N. 
GAAHAOLW, GAAHAaLY, GAAHAoLW, |G. GAARAwY, GAARAwY, GAAHAwD, 
» GAARAOLY, GAARAaLW, GAAHAOLW, |\D. GAAHAoLc, GAAHAatC, LS in 
-GAAnAwW, GAAjAa, GAAnhw. IA. GAAROUE, GAAHAaC, aGAAHAa. 








>PUa 














REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. 
1. Personal. 


1. The forms éuov, éuol, éué, are employed whenever 
emphasis is required. On other occasions pov, pol, and 
yé are employed. 

2. In the dual number the forms VO, VOV ; OOO, OPO, 
are Attic. 

3. In the plural, jpeto and opetg appear to have come 
from 7uéec and % ups 5 ; while, i in the dative, quiv and tyiv 
are contracted from 7juéot, dyéot, and then the v ebetaee: | 
TROY is appended. 


- 


84 DIALECTS OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 


4, The pronoun ov is generally reflexive in the Attic 
_ writers. In Homer and Herodotus, on the contrary, it is 
more frequently a mere personal pronoun. 

5. Abtéc, aith, abvTo, was used for the third person, 
but with this distinction. In the nominative always, and 
in the oblique cases when these begin a clause, it has a 
reflexive signification, ‘ he himself,” “ she herself,’ “ of 
himself,” &c. But when the oblique cases do not begin a 
clause, they have merely the force of the personal pronoun, 
“him,” “ of him,” &ec. When the article precedes, as 6 
avroc, 7) avTh, &e., the meaning changes to “ the same,” 
&e. Thus, 6 avroc, “ the same man ;” 9 avTh, the same 
woman; TO avTdé (contracted | most commonly TavTo), * the 
same thing.” 


Dialects of the Personal Pronouns. 


1. The Molo-Doric had éyay, the Aolic re”, in the 
nominative. The Beotians said joy. 

2. Instead of od jhe olians and Dorians said rv 
(whence the Latin tu), and changed o into t throughout. 

3. In order to give more expression to the pronouns, the 
Dorians and A®olians annex 7 to the termination, through 
all the cases, and sometimes, also, v7; as, éy@vn, éuebvn, 
Tovn, &c. The Attics annex ye, throwing back the ac- 
cent; as, Eywye, ovye ; instead of which the Dorians use 
ya, as éy@vya. 

4. In the’ genitive only éwéo is found, not peo; and, in 
the lyric and epic poets, éweio and oeio ; as also buéBev 
and oéGev ; these latter, likewise, 1 in the tragic dialect. As 
the Attic dialect contracted é0 into ov, the lonic, Doric, 
and AXolic contracted the same into ev; as, EuEev, GEV. 

5. In the dative, the AXolians and Dorians said also 2 éuiv 
and tiv, whence tivy, and the Tarentine éuivy, arose. 
For the enclitic oor the epic poets and Herodotus use Tot. 

6. In the dual the forms VO, VOY 5 ooo, OGY, are Attic. 
In the plural, jpete and wpsi¢ come ’ from Tywéec and vpéec. 
Instead of jpyetc the Molians and Dorians said dec or dpec, 
and dupe; and for tuetc, buéc and tupec. - 

7. The genitive plural is lengthened by the poets into 
juciwv, tpelov. The AMolians and Dorians —* as 
usual the # into a; as, dvéwy, dudy, and & 

8 In the dative plural, the old dialect, a the ABolic 


REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. 85 


and Doric, had dpiv, duty, dulv, dupe; vurv, Yue, and 
Dye. 

“ In the accusative plural, the Dorians said apé, dé, 
and dupe, dpe; and also vpyé, Yupe, the latter being used 
likewise by the A®olians. 

10. Instead of the accusative aitéy, we find, particularly 
in. the poets, the form pcv of all three genders. Another 
form is viv, which occurs in Pindar, and is the only one 
employed by the tragedians. This form vv is also used 
for abrotc, abtdc; avTa. 

11..The dative ofé for o@iot occurs in Homer and else- - 
where. The tragedians appear to have used opi alone. 
Tho poets sometimes, though very rarely, employ it for the 
dative singular also. 

12. In the poets, too, the form ops. (abbreviated from 
odwé) occurs, which is sometimes used. as the accusative 
plural in all genders, for avTovs, avTd¢, abd ; and some- 
times, also, as the accusative singular, instded of abtér, 
avr hy; avTé; and also, again, as a pronoun reflexive for 
éavTov. 


2. Possessives. 


1. The form é6¢, £4, é6v, occurs only in the singular in 
the Ionic and Doric writers, and in the poets. Instead of 
this is used the abbreviated form 6¢. Neither é6c nor 6c is _ 
ever employed by the Attic prose writers ; but 6¢ for &6¢ 
occurs seyeral times in the tragedians. 

2. Instead of suérepoc, the Dorians employed dys. 
This same dud¢ was likewise used for Enos, as 7jpet¢ for, 
éy®. ‘The Aolians said dupog and dupérepos. 

3. The form odérepo¢ is used by the later Alexandrian 
poets for the pronoun possessive of the first and second 
person plural, and in one instance even for éuéc. 

4. The form opwitepoc occurs only once (Zi. 1, 216). 
er oe is ao only in the Ionic poets. 


3. Pronoun Definite. 


. This has already been considered in the remarks under 
the personal pronouns, } 5, dc. 
H 


86 REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. 


4. Ppedivse 


1. The reflexive pronouns are formed by ihe u union of 
the genitives éuéo, o€0, éo, with the pronoun nero in all 
coe cases except the nominative. | 

2, Strictly speaking, éuairov and ceairov have no ) plu- 
ral. A form for this umber, however, 1 is generally substi- 
tuted, consisting of pets avtoé and tyeic abroi, declined 
separately. 

3. The pronoun éavrov is declined throughout the plural 
as one word ; yet we also find odév aitay, odioty avtoic, 
abac avtotc, &c. 

4. Properly, according to the composition, only the gen- 
itive of these pronouns should have been in use; and it is 
owing to an arbitrary usage that é EEO, &c., are compounded 
with the dative, accusative, &c., of abrée:. 

5. Among the Attics, these pronouns are reflexive only, 
referring to the person implied in the verb, without any 
particular emphasis derived from avrog. Thus, éropa 
éuavtov, “I struck myself” (as, in English, “I wash my- 
self”). When the Attic writers, on the other hand, wish 
to make avToc emphatic, they separate the pronouns, and 
place airéc first. Thus, 7pd¢ aitév oe, “ against thee thy- 
self.” A similar usage prevails.in Homer and Herodotus. 


5. Demonstrative. 


1. Instead of 6de, 7d, T6de, where the enclitic de is an- 
nexed to the article, in order to give it greater force, the 
Attics say d6d¢, 70%, todé, which is Satyr to the Latin 
hicce. 

2. Homer annexes the termination “of the case to the de; 
as, TOLOJEL, Toiodeaot, &c. 

8. Instead of toiade, the form rovoide is common in the 
tragic writers, with the accent on the penult, because the 
enclitic de draws the accent of the principal word to itself. 

4. Ovroc is used as an emphatic mode of address, and, 
therefore, as a vocative, “ thou there,” like the Latin heus. 

5. The Attics annex ¢ to this pronoun in all cases and 
genders, to give a stronger emphasis, 1 in which case it re- 
ceives an accent; as, Tovrovi, ravTyl, &c. In the neuter 
this z takes the place of oand a; as, Tovri, ravTl. 

6. The Attics sometimes used Tovrov for TOUTO, TODOV- 


et 


“REMARKS ON THE PRONOUNS. | 87 
rov for trocovro, ToLovToy for roLovTo. This appears to 
have arisen from their attachment to the v épeAnvorixor. 
In the same way, the Atties frequently said tavTév for TO 
abo. ; 


6. Relative. 


1. Homer says 6 ti¢ for Saree, where 6 is'a pred sylla- 
ble, as in érrotoc, érr600¢,, &c., and he retains, with the rest 
of the Tonic writers, the 6 unchanged i in all the cases; as, 
érev for ovTivos, brew for oti, &c. The Attics retained 
similar forms in the genitive and dative singular, namely, 
6rov for ovttvoc, and 6T@ for @Tvvt. The full form is very 
rare in the Attic poets. | 

2. Instead of the plural atlva, Homer and Herodotus - 
have dooa, from the Doric od for td. The Attics, instead 
of this, say dra. , 


ie ae ndefinite. 


hy: The Ionians said for Twvdc, tivi, &c., TEo and Tew. 
The Attics contracted TOD, TQ), In all the genders, for TLvoc 
and tvi. 

2. Instead of the neuter plural tivd, the Attics said, in 
certain combinations, particularly with adjectives, érra : ; 
as, GAd’ atta; TolavT’ atta. 


88 IOS eee. 


* _ XXV. VERB. 

1. Greek verbs are of two kinds, those ending i in @ and 
‘hose in pl. ? 

2. Verbs in w are of two classes: 1. Those that have a 
consonant before w; as, TimTW, “I strike ;” Aéyo, “1 
say ;” and, 2. Those which have a vowel, a, ¢, 0, before 
it; as, Tydw, “I honour ;” didéw, “I love ;” ypvod6o, “I 
gild.” 

3. Verbs in o, aids: a consonant preceding the termina- 
non, are called Barytone Verbs, because, as they have the 
acute accent on the penult of the present, the grave accent 
{Bapd¢ tévoc) necessarily falls on the last syllable. 

4. Verbs in @, preceded by a vowel, are called Contract- 
ed. Verbs, because the @ is contracted by the Attics, to- 
~ gether with the preceding vowel, into one vowel; and as, 
after this contraction, a circumflex is placed over the o, 
they are also styled by some Circumflex Verbs. 

5. These contracted verbs, however, are not at all differ- 
ant from the barytones, since it is only necessary to con- 
tract them in the present and imperfect. 


PARTS OF _— VERB. 


1. The Greek verb has three voices, Active Passive, 
and Middle; and five moods, the Indicative, Imperative 
Optative, Suljunctive, and Infinitive. 

2. The tenses are nine in number, namely, the Present, | 
Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, First and Second Future, 
First and Second Aorist, and, in the passive, the Third 
Future, or, as it is less correctly styled, the Paulo-post- 
_ futurum. 

3. The numbers are three, Singular, Dual, and Plural. 


VERB. 89 . 


The Verb Eipé, to be. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. _. 


Present TENSE. 


Sing. eivi, I am, el¢ or el, thou art, éoti, he is. 
Dual. éoTov, you twoare,  éorov, they twa are 
Plur. éopév, we,are, - éoré, ye are, clot, they are.. 


7 


Imprerrect, 7, I was. 


S. 7, sli 4 ACs 7 or 7; 
D. . NTO, _ QTY, 
P. jer, qTE, WOaY. 


Futvre, écouaz, F will be. 


S. Foo at, &cet, “Eoerat, 
D. éodpefor, Eccobor, Ececbor, 
P 


; éoopeba, éceode, Ecovrat. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT AND ImreERFEct, loi, be thou. 


Ss. Toft or 200, = *-—s ora, 
D. éoTor, . &oTar, 
P: tore, EoTwoay. 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 
PreEsENnT AND Impzrrect, elqv, may I be. 
S. elnv, elgg, — ein, 
-D. elntov, elQTny, ; 
P. elquev,  \ elnte, eijoav or elep 
Future, éooiunyv, may I be about to be. : 
S. écotuny, foo.0, &c017T9, . 
D. éooipebor, Ecoobor, écoicbny, 
P. tooipeba, - Ecotobe, écowvTo. 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. oh 
PRESENT: AND ImpeRFEct, ©, I may be. 
S. 6 nC, Sg ire 
D Se ; eon) ae 


P. Ouev, Te, oe 
. 2 


90 : ‘VERB. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Present anp Imperrecr. 
elvat, to be. 


Forore. 
cecbat, to »¢ about to be. 


PARTICIPLES: | 
PRESENT. 
N dy, ovoa, ~ bv, 
G. dvrToe, , ovens, bvro¢, &e. 
| -Forore. 3 
N. &@6pevoc, Ecouévn, oduevoy, - 
G. éoopuévov, éoouévys, Eoouévon, &c 
VERBS IN «. 


1. There are four conjugations of verbs in , distin- 
guished from each other by the termination of the first fu- 
ture active.’ Thus: : 

- The First Conjugation makes the future in yw; as, 

TENTH, TOWW ; A€inw, Ashpw; PadrTH, pdrpw. 
The Second Conjugation makes the future in &@ ; as, 
‘Réyo, Aéw; Tdoow, TéEwW ; dipyw, dptw. 
The Third Conjugation makes the future in ow; as, 
Tid, Tiow ; TrEiOw, TELOW 5; OKEVESW, CKEVAOW. 
The Fourth Conjugation has a liquid before » in the 
termination of the future ; as, ~dAAw, ade ; omei- 
PW, OTEPW ; PLEVW, EVO. nigh 
-2. When the first person plural ends in pev, the. first 
person of the dual is wanting. In other words, the first 
person dual is wanting throughout the whole of the active 
‘orm, and in the aorists of the passive.” 





1. We have followed, for convenience’ sake, the common arrange- 
ment, by which verbs in are divided into four conjugations. The 
simplest and truest plan, however, is to divide all Greek verbs into 
merely two conjugations, namely, verbs in w and verbs in yt. 

2. Here, again, we have followed the ordinary phraseology. In truth, 


VERB. 9) 


3. In the present, perfect, and future of the indicative 
which are called primary tenses, and throughout the sub- 
junctive mood, the second and oe persons dual are the 
came, and end in ov. : 

4. But in the imperfect, pluperfect, and the two aorists 
of the indicative, which are called the historical tenses, as 
referring to what is past, and throughout all the optative 
mood, the third person dual ends always in 7. 

5. In the active the 3d. plur. of the primary tenses ends in 
ot with the moveable v3; as, -ovotyv, -aotv ; -ovot, -aor; but 
in the historical tenses the fortn always terminates in a 
fixed v; as, ov, av, ecoay, noav. 

6. In the passive, the primary and historical tenses are 
distinguished throughout the singular also, and in all the 
third persons plural. The primary tenses have waz in the 
first person of the singular, the historical always pny; and 
where the former have tas, the latter have always To 


ACTIVE VOICE. 
 téntTe, “I strike.” 
PRESENT, rites ; First Future, tio 5 PERFECT, TéTuga.* 


Moods and Tenses. 





























Indic. |. Kmper. | Optat. | Subj. | Infin, | Part. 
Present, TaT-0; , TUNT-e, | -0l @, | -elv, |-ar 
Imperfect, érunt-ov, He nel iat : , 

. s ‘ 

First Future, | Tip-o, 3 ~Olpll, | -ELV, |-WY, 
First Aorist, | Ervp-a, TbYp-ov, | -auul, | -@, | -at, — | -ac, 
Perfect, TéTUG-a, ' rérug-e, | -ouut bvadil.g 
Pluperfect, éTeTvg-ELV; dhiig dm saul ro OSs 
Second Aorist, | éruz-ov, TUT-e, | -ouul,|-@, | -elv, |-dv, 
Second Future,} ruz-é, ‘ -Oi[Lt, -eiv, |-Ov. 











however, the dual is the same in form with the plural, in the tenses re- 
ferred to ; for the dual itself is only an ancient plural. 

1. This is called conjugating, namely, giving the present, first future, 
and perfect of a verb ; or, in place of the perfect, the first aorist. 


92, 


VERB. 


Numbers and Persons, 
INDICATIVE MOOD, 


Present, I strike.. 


Sing. rirt-w, TONT-ELC; TONT-El, - 
Dual. TUNT-ETOV, TONT-ETOV, 
Plur. Tomr-ouev, =‘ TonT-ETe, | TUNT-OVOL. 


Imperrecr, I was siriking. 


S. érunt-or, érunt-ec,  &runr-e, 
dD. . érint-eTov, érunt-éryv 
P. érimr-opey, - érinr-ere, ‘érunt-ov. 


“First Forure, Ishall or will strike. | 


S. tiv-o, | rinp-elc, _ Ther, 

D. . . tinb-erov, > - -Tbhib-eror, 

P. ri-ouer, T-ETe, - THY-OVvOL. 
. First Aorist, I (once) struck. 

S. rvp-a, Eva,  Srup-e, 
D. érinp-arov, éruib-dryp, 
P. ériyp-auev, érbp-ate, érvp-av. 

Perrect, I have struck. 
S. réru¢-a, TéETUG-aC, TETUG-e, 
D. TETbg-aTOV, TETUG-ATOD - 
P. terid-aper, TEeTbo-aTE, TETbp-aOl. 


Puvurrrrect, I had struck. 


S. érerig-evy, éreTig-elc, érerdbd-et, 
D. > _ érerig-ettor, érervg-eitay 
P. érerig-eyev, — érerdo-erre, érerig-t1oc | 
SEcoNnD Aonisr, I (once) struck. 
S. érvz-ov, érvx-ec, érun-e, 
D. | érin-eror, ‘ érum-érny, 
> P. érin-oper, érim-eTe, érum-ov. 


Sucoxp ‘Furonr, J-shall or will strike: 


S. rur-6, tuT-eic, Tun-el, 
-D. TUT-EiTOV, © TUT-ELTOY, . 
P 


. TuN-obpev, —=s—«|-—seTUT-£LTE, _ ToT-o00t. 


_. VERB. 93° 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Present, be striking. - 


S. rinr-e,  _ TUNT-ETW, 

D. rinr-erov, TUNT-ETWY, 

P. rinr-ere, TUTT-ETWOOV, 
- ® 


First Aorist, strike. 


S. rinp-ov, | TU GTO, 
D. rip-arov, ; Tup-dTov, + 
P. tip-are, | Tup-dtwoay. 
PerFrect, have struck. 
—§. rérvg-e, ; TETug-éTO, 
D. terig-erov, TETUG-ETOV, 
' P. rervdg-ere, TETU-ETWOUY. 


Seconp Aorist, strike. 


S. Tv7-e, _ Tum-éTo, 
D. rix-erov, TUT-ETWY, 
P. rin-ere,  -Tur-éTwoav. 


OPTATIVE MOOD.! 
Present, may I be striking. 


S. rinr-owut, TUNT-0LC, TUNT-OL, 
; TUNT-OLTOY, TUNT-OLTNV, 
P. rint-ouper, TUNT-OLTE, TUNT-OLEV. 


First Fururs, may I hereafter strike. 


S. rinp-ouut, Tinp-ole, Tbp-0l, 

D. TUp-olTQy, Tuy-oiTny, 
_ P. rip-owper, _ Thp-ole, Tby-oLev. 

: First Aorist, may I have struck. 

S. rinp-art, Tby-arc, Tip-at, 

D. Tip-aLTov, Tup-airny, 

P. rip-aev, . rip-are, Tbyp-arev. 

_ Mouc First Aorist. 

S.. ri-era, * thip-evac, Thwp-eve, 

D. Tup-siarov, Tup-evdtyny 

P. tup-eiauev,  —-_ Turp-etaTe, Tinp-eLav. 





1. We have here given to the optative its genuine meaning, as indie 
cating a wish. ‘The other meanings, “ might,” “* could,” “would,” &e. 
are only attached to it when connected with the particle dv, &c 


VERB... 


Perrect, may I have struck. 


S. rerig-ouut, TETbO-0L¢, _ TeETvO-0l, 
D. E TETUP-OLTOV,  -——-_: TETUG-OLTHV, 
‘P. rerig-oev, TETUG-OlTE, .. -TeTbg-oLev. 


Seconp Aorist, may I have been striking. 


S. rim-ouut, .  Tbr-o1e, TUT-Ol, 
D. TUT-OLTOV, TUN-OiTHY, 
P. rim-oper, TUT-OLTE, - Tbm-olev. 


Seconp Furure, may I hereafter strike. 


S. rur-otut, TuT-oi¢, TUT-Ol, 

D. TUN-OiTOV, TUT-O1TNY, 

P. ret-oiuer, TUT-OiTEe, TUN-0iEV. 
‘ , 3 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


PrEsEnT, I may strike. 


S. tirt-o, _ tbnr-ge, «>. TORT, 
D. -  pOnT-NTOY, — TOUNT@NTOV, 
P. rinr-wper, ronr-nre, TONT=WOl. 


First Aorist, J may have struck. 


-S. rhy-o, | TUYp-n¢, — TOtp-ty 
TUY-NTOV, TUp-NTOVs 
P. ri-aper, TUW-NTey > Tiw-wor. 

Perrect, I may have been striking. 
S. rerv¢-w, TETUG-NC, TETUO-7, 
za. TETUG-NTOY, TETUG-TOB 
P. rerdg-cyer, TETUG-NTE, TETVG-WOE 


Seconp Aorist, I may have struck. 


S. riz-o, TUT-NC, TUT-1, 
ee TUT-TOV, TUN-4TOW 
P. rin-wpev, TUT-NTE, TUT-WOL. 


INFINITIVE MCOD. 


PRESENT, Tint-erv, to strike. | 

First Foture, riy-ecv, to be going to strike. 
First Aorist, tiw-at, to have struck. 
PerrFect, TeTv¢-évat, to have been striking. 
Seconp Aorist, Tu7-eiv, to have struck. 
Seconp Fourvurs, ruz-eiv, to be gomg to strike. 


N. rixr-wr, 
G. Tint-ovToe, 


N. rip-or, 
G. rinp-ovToe, 


N, Top-ae, 
G. rinp-avToe, 


N. rerv¢-ce, 
G. retug-dTo¢, 


VERB. 


PARTICIPLES. 


TUNT-OVEG, TONT-OV, 


TUNT-OVONC, 


First Fururn, going to strike. 


rbw-ovea, Tip-ov, 

Tup-ovons, ToY-ovTOg. 
First Aorist, having struck. 

Tip-aoa, Tiy-ay, 

Tvp-aone, - Tbp-avToe. 


Perrect, who has been striking. 


TETUG-VIA, 


TETVG-OC, 
_ TeTug-viac, 


Seconp Aorist, having struck. 


, * . 
N. tu-ov, TuT-odoa, TuT-6v, 
G. tun-d6yToe, Tun-ovo7c, TUT-OVvTOC. 


N. TUT-OV, 
G. run-otyToc, 


Szconp Furure, going to strike. 


TUT-0v0a, TUT-OvY, 


TUT-OVONC, 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


The Moods and Tenses. 


95 


ront-ovTor, &s. 


TEeTvg-OToE. 


TUN-OvYTOS. 
































Indie. Imper. Optat. Subj. | Infm. Part, 
Present, |rimroua, , p : , 
Imperfect, \ ance TomT-ov, |-olpinv, ~cpat, |-ecBat,|-uevoc, 
Perfect, TETULAL P -UpéVOC,|-UEvOS, 
Pluperfect, |érerd mit babe ey, 6, plat, |-H es si 
Ist Aorist, |érigOny, TbO-On 1,|-Beinv, |-86,  |-Ojvat, Geigy 
Ist Future,|rug6jo-opuat, -oiuny, . -ec8ar,|-Ouevoc, 
2d Aorist, |érirny, Tin-nht, \-einv, |-G, FAR Sts -elg, 
2d Future, |rumjo-ouat, -0iunv, eo0at,|-duevoc, 
3d Future, |TeTop-onac, saleaes |-eoGat, Ue amb 








~—696 VERB. 


Numbers and Persons. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Present, J am struck. 











| = : ‘ 
Ss rint-¢uat, Tonr-eL,) — _ rénr-erat, 
7 D. rurr-éuebor, TUnT-Ec00v, ~ Tint-eobov, 
. P. runt-bueba, Tint-eo0e, TURT-OVTUL. 
ImperFect, J was in the act of being struck. 
9 S. érurr-dunv,  _—-brérr-ov, érint-ero, 
D. érurr-dusbov, . érimr-ecfor, érunt-éoOnr, 
P. érunt-dueba, érint-eobe, érumT-cvTo. 
Perrect, J have been pirate: 
S. réruu-ua, . ‘rétvip-at, . + rérvmr-at, 
D. rerip-pebor, TéTug-Gov, térvg-Gor, 
P. reripy-peba, ag da TeTuu-pévol, lot. 
* s PLorerrxcr, I had. been struck. 
| S. éreriu-unv, © bréruyp-o, btivara” 
D. éreriu-uebov,  éretud-Oor, érerbg-Onv,~ 
P. érervp-peba, érétug-Oe, TETUM-LEVOL HOAY. 
’ First Aorist, I was struck. 
Ss. érbg-Oyy, érig-One, Ai ts 
D. érbg-Onrov, érvg-Onrqy, 
‘ P. érig-Onuer, érig-Oyre, érid-Oyoav. 
First Forore, J shall be struck. 
« S. rvd-Ojoopat _ tug-Ojoer : Tup-Ojoerat 
D. rv9-Onobebov, rv$-Opoecbor, rv9-Bjeabov, 
P. rv¢-Oycdue8a, tug-Ojoecbe, Tvg-Ojo00vTa. 
SEcoNnD ‘Aonisr, I was struck. 
S. érinnv, érin-ne, érin-7, 
. D:. érin-nrov, ETUT-HTNY, 
P. érin-nuev, érin-nre, érin-yoav. - 
.~ oe! GRR 
. vast band 4 Seconp Furure, I shall be struck. 
ie Tor-hoopat, TUT-HjOEL, TUM-OETAL, — 
D. rer-nobusbov,  _ run-joecbov, Tun-noecbor, 
mp, te 3 ep neonte, °3 TUTN-HOOVTAL. 
. 1. We have given in this, and the other second persons, the Attic ter- 
inination in €t, as more correct than the common termination in y. 
ea * 


VERB. 97 


Timp Furure, I shall continue to be struck. 


F S. rerty-ouat,  — terdty-él, rerinp-eral, 
D. rervy-duebor, TeTvyp-eobor, TeTip-eobor, 


P, 


won WOR 


ty me 


TeTup-oueba, TeTiy-eobe, ,  teTtyp-ovtau.. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


PrREsENT, be struck. 
TONT-ODv, ? Turt-E00u, 
. TUNT-ecbor, TurT-éobuy, 
. TUNT-e00e, Tunt-éolacav. * 


MOR, 


Prerrect, have been struck. 
TéTUp-o, 7 TETVG-Oe0, 
. TéTVG-Oor, . TeTbg-Oav, 
. téTvg-Oe, TeTbo-Owcar. 


mon 


First Aorist, be struck. . 
. THd-OyTL, f - 10¢-O7Ta, 


. TOg-OnTov, — - - tug-7Tar, 
. TOd-Onte, tug¢-O4Twcav. 


Wom 


Seconp Aorist, be struck. 
. THr-nOt; TUN-9TO; 
. TON-NTOYV, . ‘TUN-RTOY, 
. TUT-NTE, :  -TUN-ATwWOaY. 


won 


_OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Present, may I be in the act of being struck. 


. TUNT-Oiuny, TONT-0L0, TUNT-OLTO, 
F , 2 4 

. TUTT-oiuebov, TomT-o1obor, TurT-olcbny, 

. Tunt-oiueba, Tént-o1cbe, — TUNT-OLVTO. 


PERFEcT, may I have been struck. 
TeTuu-pwévoc elnv,  etye, ein, 


. TETUU-LEVO, elnroy, 3 ‘elarny, 
. TeTUU-wEvot elnuey, Elnre, eljoav.. 


_ First Aorist, may I have been struck. 


. Tvd-Oeinr, “tud-Oeine, tud-bein, 


tud-Geinror, tug-Detnrny, 


. THg-Geiner, wa . ne er 


ats 


98 


VERB. 4 


First Fururg, may I be struck hereafter. 
ny | 


S. Tug-Onooiunr, Tug-Oj0010, _ - tug-O70e%" » 
D. rvd-Onooipebov,  tvd-Oncorobor, Tvg-Onoor™ny, 
P. tvg-Oncoipzela,  Tuvd-Ojoorcbe, . tvg-Ojo0wre. 





Szconp Aorist, may I have been struck. 


S. rvz-einv, TUN-Eing, - tur-eln, 
D. TUN-ELNTOV, TVT@ELATHV 
P, trur-einuer, TUN-ELNTE, TuTn-einoar. 


Seconp Furure, may I be struck hereafter. 


S. rvn-nootuny, TUT-700L0, TUT-7O0LTO 
L..zvr-nooipebor, Tun-jaoto0or, Tor-nooicbp 
P. rur-nsoiueba, tun-joo.obe, TUN-HOOLVTO 


Tarp Forvrs, may I continue to be struck hereafter - 


S. TeTvp-oiuny, TETU-0L0, 7 TeTip-OLTO, 
D. retvyp-oiuebov, — TeTvp-oroBor, _ tervrp-oicbm 
P. rervp-oiuefa,  TeTbr)-o10be, TETUY-OLVTO. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present, I may be struck. 


S. rin-Topa, TOn-Ty, TONT-TAL, 
D. tun-Topebor, Tim-TyO000n, _ Toar-nabor, 
P. rum-rapeba, Tin-Ty00€, TUNT-WVTAL 


Perrect, I may have been struck. 


S. rervp-pévoce G, | eee | : 
D. retup-péva, TOV, | TOV, 
P. rervp-pévor Gpev, ATE, ~ Oot. 


‘First Aorist, I may have been struck. . 


S. rv¢g-06, Tug-Oie, Tvg-O9, 
D. Tug-O7 Tov, Tvg-O7T¢ - 
P. rug-Joper, tvd-OijTe, tvg-G60t. 


Seconp Aorist, I may have been struck. - 


S. tv7r-0, TUn-He, TUT-H, 
D. TUN-7TOV; TUN-9TO 
P. rum-Gper, TUN-HTE, TUn-OO5. 


VERB. 99 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT, tU7T-e00a1, to be struck. 

Perrect, tétv¢-Gat, to have been struck. _ 
‘First Aorist, rv¢-0jvat, to have been struck. 
First Future, tvd-Ojcec0at, to be going to be struck, 

Seconp Aorist, tuz-fvat, to'have been struck. ) 

Seconp Furvure, tum-7oe00at, to be going to be struck. ; 
Tuirp Future, tetip-ecbat, to be going to be continually struck. 


PARTICIPLES. 
- Present, being struck. 
N. tunt-duevoc, — Tunt-ouévn, TUNT-OMEVOD, 
G. rurt-ouévov, TUnT-omévnc, -  TumT-o“évov. 


Perrecr, having been struck. 


N. rerup-uévoc, TETUU-LEVN, TETUUL-LEVOY, 
G. reruu-pévov, _TETUUL-LEVNC, FETUU-ULEVOY, 
e es i 
First Aorist, having been struck. 
N. rv¢-Geic, tu¢-Beica, tug-bév, 
G. tug-bévToc, Tug-Oeions, tup-OévTog. 
First Furure, going to be struck. : 
N. tug-Onodpevoc,  tbo-Onoouévy, . Tud-Oncduevory 
G. rvg-Ojcouévov,  tuvd-Oncouévye, Tud-Onoouévon. 
Sreconp Aorist, having been struck. 
N. rvz-eic, -TUT-eiod, Tom-ev, 
G. Tur-évToe, Tur-elonc, ~ TuT-EVTOE. 
Seconp Future, going to be struck. 
N. run-noduevoe, run-noouevn, _ Tum-ngouevor, 
G. run-noopévov, TUT-NOOUEVNC, Tur-noomevov. - 


Tarp Fururs, going to be continually struck. 


N. rerup-duevoc, ——- rervp-opévn, TETUY)-OLLEVOY, 
G. retuyp-ouévov, _ TeTvp-ougvync, .  TEeTvy-opévov. 


- 





100 . ” VERB. 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
The Moods and Tenses. | 





Indié. | Imper. | Optat. | Subj. | Inf, | Part. 

Present, |rvmt-oudt, - , 

Imperfect, |érumr-ounr, 

Perfect, rérUT-a, } . . - 
ise T - -évat, |- 

Pluperfect, |éreriz-evv, er ehiie* Metical as win coe temiad 

Ist Future, THrp-opsat, é |-ofuny, -eo0aL, ~Opevor, 

Ist Aorist, |érvyp- auny, _[Tep-at, |-aluny,|-wuat,|-aobas, |-apuevog, 

2d Aorist, érun-6unv,  |Tvm-od, Be og -wuat,|-éo8at, -ouevoc, 

2d Future, |rvm-otpuat, , |-otun - |-eto8az, -obpmevoc. 





TOTT-OV,|-ofuNY, |-wuat,|-ec0ar, |-Ouevoc, 





























Mat Numbers: and Persons. 

The only tenses of the middle voice that differ from 
those of the active and passive of verbs in w are the first 
aorists of the indicative, imperative, and optative, and the 


second. future of the indicative. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 
First Aorist, I struck myself. 
. érvp-dunr, érinp-w, ériyp-aro, 


. érvrw-dpuebor, érinp-aobor, - érup-dabyy, 
. érvp-dueba, érinp-aobe, éritb-avro. 


won 


Seconp Future, I shall or will strike myself. 
. TUT-ovual, TUT-El, ; -TUT-ELTAL, 
. TuT-obpmebor, Tur-eiobor, TuT-elobov, 
. Tur-otueba, tur-siobe, TUT-ovvyTat, 


WOR 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
First Aorist, strike thyself. 
S. Tinp-at, ! rup-do0u, 


D. ri-achov, Tup-dobuv, 
PF. Top-aobe, _ Tup-dobwoay, 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


First Aorist, may I have struck myself. 
S. rvp-aiuny, Tbp-a10, | rtyp-alro, ; 
D. rop-aedon, Tip-aiolov, ~ ruy-aioOnv, 
P. rop-aipeda, riyp-atobe, Tby-alvTo. 





: VERB. 101 


PARTICIPLES. z 
First Aorist, having struck myself. 
N. tup-dyevoe, Tup-auévn,  Tup-apévov, 
G. Tup-apévor, TUY-apEevync, TuIp-apévov. ° 
First Furure, being about to strike myself. 
N. rop-duevoc, TUY-O[EeVvN, . _ Tuyp-ouévor, 
G. rvrp-ouévov, TUYp-OMEVNC, | Tuy opevoy. 
SEconp. Forure, being about to strike myself. 
N. rur-otuevoc, Tur-ouuérn, TUT-OMEVOY, 
G. rur-otpevov, — Toum-ovpévyc, TUT-OUVMLEVOV. : 


The Greek verb, of the class in , will 1 now be consid. 
ered under the following heads: 
1. AUGMENT. 
2. ForMATION OF THE TENSES. 
3. Force oF THE TENSES. ‘ 
4. Mippte Voice, 
5. Force or THE Moops. 


1. AUGMENT. 


1. The Augments are two in number, the Syllabic and 
Temporal. 

2. The soliaiis augment belongs to verbs that begin 
with a consonant, and.is so called because it adds a sylla- 
ble to the verb. } 

3. The temporal augment belongs to verbs that begin 
with a vowel, and is so called because it increases the time 
or quantity of the initial vewel. 

4. Three of the tenses have an-augment, which is con- 
tinued through all the moods, viz., the Perfect, Pluperfect, 
and Third Future; or Paulo-post-futurum. 

5. Three receive an augment in the indicative only, viz., 
the Imperfect and the two Aorists. 

6. Three receive no augment, viz., the Pre "ent and the 
First and Second Futures. 

12 


102 RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 


7. The true use of the augment is to mark an action 
Which is either completely or partially past. Hence it will 
appear why the present and the first and second futures 
have no augment; why the zmperfect and two aorists have 
an augment only in the indicative ; and why the perfect, 
pluperfect, and third future, all three of which refer to a con- 
tinued action, have an augment continued ibe si all the | 
moods of the verb. : 

8. The augment originally was the same in the case of 
all verbs, namely, an ¢ was prefixed, whether the verb be- 
gan with a vowel or a consonant. Traces of this old aug- 
ment are ‘tnd in the early Ionic. poets, and occasionally 
in Ionic prose ; as, é4@0n for 7607 ; édvdave for fvdave. 

9. Afterward the usage was thus determined, that ¢ 
was only prefixed.to verbs beginning with a consonant ; 
whereas, in others, it coalesced with the initial vowel, and 
became a long vowel or diphthong. ‘Thus, tvmrw has in 
the imperfect &-rurroy, but dyw has 7yov (from 2-ayov), 
and oixigw has @xigov (from é-ovKigov). 

10. The Attics retained this old augment in the follow 
ing cases: 1. In such words as fata, ééynv, éayoc, from 
dyw, “to break ;” to distinguish them from 7a, jya, &c., 
from ‘dyw, “I carry.” 2. In édAwna, &6Aw; Eorxa, ZoAra, 
* opya, in which the characteristic of the perfect middle (oz 
and.) could not be effaced. 3. In verbs which begin with 
a vowel not capable of being Joi: ppm bo as, €w0ovy, from 
dé ; ; éwowat, from the same ; seer from Qvéoriae 5 : 
éodpovy, from ovpéw. | 


_ RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 


1. The augment of the imperfect and the two aorists, in 
verbs beginning with a consonant, is formed by merely 
prefixing €; as, érunroy, érupa, érvrov. If, however, the 
verb begin woeith p, the p is doubled after the augment ; a8, 
Eppirrrov, from pintw; eppeov, fiom péo. 


RULES FOR THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 103 


2. The augment of the perfect is formed by repeating the 
initial consonant: of the verb, and annexing fo it an €; as, 
rétepa, TéeTUTA; AédouTTA, Kc. 

3.. This repetition of the initial consonant is called by 
t}-> grammarians Reduplication (duriaccacuéc), and i is sub- 
st to the following rules : 


(A.) If the verb begins with an aspirated consonant, 
then in the reduplication the corresponding smooth 
or lenis is put; as, drAéw, perfect mepiAnna ; ypv- 
a6, perfect KeyptowKa. 

(B.) If the verb begins with p, the perfect does not 
take the reduplication, but the p is doubled and € 
prefixed ; as, pinto, perfect Eppida. 

(C.) If the verb begin with a double consonant, Fs &} 
ab, or with two consonants, the latter of which is 
not a liquid, the perfect does not receive the redu- 
plication, but only the augment €; as, 6nTéEW, per- 
fect éarnna; Evpéw, perfect eévpjna; pddrro, 
perfect épadna; oreipw, perfect tomapka; oTéA- 

. A@, perfect EoraAxa. 

To this rule, however, there are the following 
exceptions: 1. The syncopated forms which be- 
gin with mr; as, wémtayac (for mevétapar) ; but 
not so the other verbs in rr ; as, wrepdw, érrepi= 
ka; TTHOOW, Extnya. 2%. The verb Krdouae, of 
which the pease Kéxtnwat is more used by the 
Attics, and éxtnwat by the Tonians rps older At 
tics. 

(D.) If the verb begins with a mute and liquid, the 
reduplication appears in some cases, but in others 
is omitted. Mvdw always makes péuvyjuae ; and 
verbs whose second initial consonant is p receive 
the reduplication regularly ; as, dpéuw, perfect de- 
dpounka; Spatvw, perfect téOpavea’; tpépw, per- 
fect tétpoda. On the other hand, it is generally 


104 RULES FOR THE” TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 


_ wanting in verbs whose second initial consonant 
is A; as, yAvmTo, perfect éyAvga. 


4. The augment of the pluperfect is formed by prefixing 
e to the reduplication of the ‘earat. as, TeTUpa, pluperfect 
éreTOgelv. 

5. The third future passive, being formed from the per- 
fect of the same voice, has, like that tense, the reduplica- 


tion; as, TeTopouar. — mt ov fe 


} 


RULES FOR THE TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 


1. By the contraction of the augment ¢ with the initiaj 
vowel of the verb, the following results are obtained - 


: : ‘ ae 
becomes 9}; a8, dkobw, imp. jneovov. 


a 
4 . 79 ‘ . 

& ‘ n; “ éyelpw, “ tyetpor. 

i « tt; “ tndvo, “  tkavov. 

0 “«  @; 6 bvopds@, “ wvduacor 
_v Lg o; “ wbpigw, “ Dbpigor. 

av ¢& nu; avédvo, “  hbgavov. 

6c ‘ - 6 ” 6c M 4 

ev NV; EVHOUAL, HUYOMNY. 

Ob) 9449 @;  olkifo, “. @Kigov. 


2. In. some verbs, however, ¢ becomes et; as, yw, el- 
vov; édw, eldy ; Edw, eidov, &c. | 

3. When a verb or verbal form begins with ¢0, the sec- 
ond vowel takes the augment; as, éoprd¢w, éwptagor. So, 
also, in the praporipets formed from the three perfects Zo:- 
Ka, €oATra, and eopya, ane, é@kev, EWArTrEetY, and édo- 
yelv. 

4. Of ‘ane which are already long in themselves, 
becomes 7, as already mentioned ; but the others, 7, @, 2, 
, are wholly incapable of being augmented; as, 77Tdopaz, 
imperfect ArTHuqY, perfect AtrTquat, pluperfect yrTHUHY. 


REMARKS ON THE TWO AUGMENTS.- 106 


REMARKS ON THE TWO AUGMENTS. 
i. Syllabie. 


1. The Attics prefix the tempcral instead of the syllabic 
augment to BobAopat, dvvapat, and pedro ; as, HbovAduny, 
jOvvaunv, jweddAov. Here a form é6ovAouas, édvvayat, 
éuéAA@, is assumed, like 0éA@ and é0éA0. 

2. The initial augment in the pluperfect is sometimes 
omitted by the Attics; as, mervOey for érendvOety ; ye-_ 
yevnuny for éyeyevfunr. 

3. In verbs beginning with A and p, the Ionians, Attics, 
and others are accustomed to put ev for Ae or pe; as, Aap- 
6évw, perfect elAnda, for AéAngha; Aayxavo, perfect él- 
Anxa. 

3 In Homer and Hesiod the second aorists often receive 
a reduplication ; as, Kéxayov for Exapyov, from Kaye ; mé- 
mov for Erion, from TrelOu),- &e. 

5. The augment of the historical tenses is very often 
omitted in poetry by writers not Attic ; as, GdAe for bade; | 
BH for. 6n; yévovto for éyévovro, &c. 


2. Temporal. 


1. Many | verbs beginning with a diphthong neglect | the 
augment. ‘Those in ov never take it; as, obTdca, ovTa- 
Cov. ‘Those in ez also have no augment ; as, ELKW, ELKOY, 
ela, with the single exception of elndZo, which is now 
and then augmented by the Attics ;. as, elkdgw, elxaoa, 
eixacpat, Attic qraoa, yxaowat. Verbs in ev have the aug- 
ment 7 with the Attics, . though the usage is variable. 
Thus we have ybyounv and ebxouny ; evpéOny, and very 
rarely 7bpéOnv. 

2. The verbs 0éH, @véoua, and ovpéw, not. being sus- 
ceptible of the temporal augment, take € before their initial 
vowel or diphthong. In other words, they retain the early 
augment ; as, @0éw, éOBovy ; @véowat, Ewvoduny ; ovpée, 
Eovpovv. 

3. As the syllabic augment in BotAouar, dvvayat, and 
uéAAw, is increased by the temporal, in the same manner 
the temporal augment in the verb dpdw is increased by the 
syllabic ; as, Opdw, imperfect EONwY, 


= 


106 AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 


ATTIC REDUPLICATION. 


. 1. Verbs beginning with a vowel, not being able to take 
a reduplication like that in verbs with the syllabic aug- 
ment, have in the perfect, occasionally, what i is called the 
Attic Reduplication. 

2. The Attic reduplication is when the first two letters 
of the root are repeated before the temporal augment, the 


“initial vowel remaining unchanged. Thus : 


- | = Gysipw, ifyepka, . Att. Red. dytyyepna. % 


éué@, « Teka, fs _ €unpena. 

CAA YL, @AEKG, x — OAGAEKa. 

(éAev9w) HAvOa, = éAnAvba. 
~ 600, -@da, 7 «  -  bdwda. 


3. The pluperfect sometimes prefixes to this reduplica- 
tion a new temporal augment; most commonly in d«fxoa, 
TKNKOELD. 

4, A similar reduplication is formed in some verbs in the 


» second aorist, so that here the temporal augment comes 


™~ 


first ; as, 7papov, @popov, iyyayov. 


AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 


1. When the verb is compounded with a preposition, the 
augment comes between the preposition and the verb; as 
Tmpoopépw, TPOGEPEpoOV. 

2. Verbs compounded with other words have the aug- 
ment usually at the beginning ; as, weAorroréw, éuedorotowy : 
TANUPLEAEW, TETTANUPEAHKA. 

3. Verbs compounded with ep and dic take the temporal 


augment in the middle when these verbs commence with 


a vowel-that admits of change; as, evepyeréw, -ebnpyé- 
Tovy ; dvoapeoTéw, dvonpéotovy. 

4. But when these particles are joined to verbs com- 
mencing with an immutable vowel or a consonant, they 


REMARKS ON THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 107 


take the augment at the beginning ; as, dvownéw, 2dvod- 
rovy ; dvotuyéw, edvoriynoa; edbdoKipéw, nbdonipovy. 
In compounds with ev, however, the augment in such ca- 
ses is commonly omitted ; as, evwyéouat, evwxotvuny; &e. 


REMARKS ON THE AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 


1. The prepositions, excepting epi, lose their final 
vowel before the syllabic augment; as, dmédwxe, dudébadr= 
Aev ; but mepréOnca, not tepéOnka. In the case of TPO, 
however, the o is usually contracted with e€; as, T™povbn, 
mpovOnka, &c. 

2. The prepositions ovv and év, whose final consonant 
is changed by the laws of euphony into y, A, p, p, 0, re- 
sume v before the syllabic augment ; as, éyylyvopat, éve- 
ytyvouny ; ovAdéyw, ovvédeyor ; éupéva, évépevor, &e. 

3. Strictly speaking, all those verbs have the augment 
at the beginning which are not so much themselves com- 
pounded. with another word.as derived from a compound 
one. Thus, decvorabéw, édervorrdbovy, from detyorrabfe ; 
olkodopéw, dxodéduovn, from oixodduoc, &e. 

4. Hence some verbs, apparently compounded with prep- 
ositions, take the augment at the beginning ; as, évavTLov- 
ual, nvavt.obuny, from évavrtos. So, also, dv7ib0de, qv- 
rLb6Aovv. 

5. Exceptions, however, to the rules just mentioned, are 
of no unfrequent occurrence, especially among the Attics, 
with whom we find the following forms: éEexAqotacar, 
évenwpiacov, mpoephrevoa, eniteTnoevka, &c., although in 
all these verbs ro simple form exists, but they are derived 
at once from éxxAnoia, éyx@ptoy, mpodArne, émitndjc. 

6. Some compound verbs take a double augment, name- 
ly, one before and one after the preposition ; as, dvop06u, 
nvapoovy, érnvapbwra; svoyAéw, HYOYAOvY ; avéxw, TV-. 
ELyounV ; Tapotvéw, Errap@vyoer, &c. Still more irregular 
are the following: dedigrnka, &edediqrnro, from drattdo ; 
dedtoKnka, édcaKnoa, from dtorxée); and, in later writers, 
qundAwoa, from dvadionw, and dedinnévnna, from dtakovéw. 


108 FORMATION OF THE.ACTIVE TENSES. 


3 _ 2. FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. 
"haa 4 The Imperfect. | 
is formed from the present by changing the termination w 
into ov, and prefixmg the augment; as, rémrw, érurrov 
Aéyw, Edeyov ; Gyo, iyyov. . 

. | The First Future 

- “is formed from the present by changing the last syllable im 


«% j 


a 
+s 


First conjugation into ww; as, ronTw, Tire , 
Second” conjugation “ fw; “ A€éyw, Aétw; 


Third conjugation “ ow; “ tiw,  Tiow; 
and in the fourth conjugation by circumflexing the last 
syllable, and shortening the penult; as, péAAw, para. 
“Verbs in é@ and é@ generally change a and « into 7, and 
verbs in 6 change 0 into @; as, Tiudw, Tishow; didréw, 
diAjow; OnAdw, OnAoow. Saeiancey 
Four verbs, commencing with a smooth syllable, change 
that smooth into an aspirate in the future ; as, 


Eve, Bw, pix, . Opa. - 
Tpé~w, — Hpépw. TIdO, Sipe. 
| The First Aorist ys 


is formed from the first future by prefixing the augment and 
changing @ into a; as, Tipe, Ervipa. 





1. These apparent anomalies admit of a very easy explanation, The 
old form of éy@ was yw, which was changed to éyw, because two suc- 
cessive syllables cannot well have each an aspiration. But in the future 
the aspirate reappears, in consequence of the v being removed, in order 
to make way for the termination of the future, @. In like manner, the 
old presents of tpédw, tpéyo, and rigw were respectively Jpégu, Spéya, 
and didw, changed to Trpédw, &c., in order that two successive syllabler 
might not each begin with an aspirate ; while in the future the first as 
pirate reappears, the latter having been changed. 


uk 

~ ’ 
- Ff 2 
& e 


2 
x 


° 


FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. 109 


_ In verbs of the-fourth conjugation, namely, those ending 
in Aw, po, vo, pw, the short vowel of the penult is again 
made long by changing 


@ into 7; as, dAdo, wparad, emda. 
A n; “« - gaivo,  davd, epnva. 
“« gg: “  gréddw, oTedd, #oretha. 

 Kpiv@, Kpived, éxptva. 

“ o; “© dutva, dpdve, “ipovea. 


ecm & 
rn 
nr 
™! 
Ne 
SS 


But verbs in -parvw and -cacyw have only a long a in th c 
penult of the first aorist, without changing it into 7; as, © 
mepaive, TEepava, émépava; Talivw, TLaVe, Eridva. 

Later writers form also many others with long a, where, 
according to the general rule, the 7 should be employed ; 
as, éofjwava, from onuaive ; éxotAdva, from KotAatve. 

Some verbs, which have o in the future, lose it in the 
first aorist; as, yé@, yetow, Eyeva; CebwW, devow, toeva ; 

, gS 
Kaiw, KavoW, EKA. 


The Perfect 


is formed from the first future by prefixing the continued 
augment, and changing, in the 


First conjugation, . yw into $a; as, TOpw, TéTvda. 
Second conjugation,  “ ya; “. Aé&w, AéAoya. 
Third conjugation, om “ Ka; “ Tiow, TétLKa. 
Fourth conjugation, 6 “ ka; “ Wadd, Epadxa. 


Dissyllables in -2w and -pw change the ¢ of the first fu- 
ture into @; as, oTéAAw, oTedAd, toradxa; oneipw, oTEpa, 
tonapka. But polysyllables, on the contrary, retain the ¢; 
as, ayyéAdw, dyyedo, ipyyedna. 

Verbs in -ivo, -dvw, and -eivw reject v before k, and retain 
the short vowel of the future; as, xpivw, Kpivé, KéKpiKa $ 
TAbVH, TADVG, TéTADKA ; but those in e(vw change the e of 
the future into @;.as, Te(vw, TEVO, TETAKA 

K 


ms 





110 MAT (ON OF THE ACTIVE TENSES. 


Verbs in -aivw en v before x into y; as, gaived, oan 3 


vO, mépayka ; paive, Wave, peptayKa. 


In some verbs the ¢ is changed into 0} as, Tpédw, Spbe: 
bo, TETpopa ; KAETTO, KAEPw, KEKAOpA, Aéyw, AéEW, Ab 


doya, &c., and even before two consonants ; as, Téu7rw, 
mépAbw, TETIOUDA. 

The Pluperfect 
is formed from the perfect by prefixing ¢ to the continued 


augment, if there be a reduplication, and changing the ter- _ 


- mination a@ into ery; as, rérvpa, ETETUDELY. - 


Ps The ‘Micon Aorist 


1s formed from the present by prefixing the augment, short. 
ening the penult, and changing © into ov ; as, TUTTW, ETD- 
Tov; Aegina, Eitov ; Kava, Exadpwov. 

Whe penult of the present is shortened for this purpose 
by the following changes :. 


Vowels. 
at -into a; as, mrTaipw, énrdpov. 
oo eo Anode, EXGBov. 
E “ @; “ cpémw,  erpamov. 
ev“ &;.: debyw, eddyor. 
“ 7; ~& YAeinw,  EAtmov. | 
Fe } “«  @ or a, in verbs ending in Ao, po, vo, pw. 
Consonants. . =» 
AX into 2; as, BérAw,  EbaAov. 
‘ars  rintw, erimov. 
mr “© ~B; “ Kptntw, Expvbor. 
6; “ pdénto, %ppdbor. 
00, 7T, ¥3. “> rhoo0, érdyorv. - 
A eta d;. “ paw, edpdidorv. » 
¢. y; “ -Kpdfw, Expdéyov. 
x * Ys © opiyw, Eopvyau. 


ae 


x 


4 


. 


REMARKS ON THE ACTIVE TENSES. 111 

Verbs in -w and -oow of the second conjugation form 
the second aorist in yov; as, Kpd¢w, éxpayov ; Tpdoow, 
Zyov ; but those of the third conjugation form it in dov , 


as, pdgw, edpadov. 


The verb 7Ajoow makes érAnyov in the second aorist ; 
but the a appears in the compounds that signify “ ‘to right 
en;” as, KaTémAayor, éséndayov. 


The Second Future 


is formed from the second aorist by dtoniite the aug- 
ment, and changing: ov into circumflexed 6; as, étvTor, 
TUTTO). 


The Attic Future 
is formed by throwing out o in -dow, -éow, and -d0w, of 
the future, and then contracting the vowels thus brought 


. into contact ; as, éeAd for éeAdow ; 2A@ for éAdow ; dta- 


axed for dtacKkeddow; Kadi for Kadéow; dwovuar for 
dudcowa ; payeioOa for paxéceoOa, &c. 


REMARKS on THE FORMATION OF THE ACTIVE 
TENSES. 


1. Future. 


1. The old future of all verbs ended originally i in €0W), 
and we still find éAéow from 6Aw, and dpéow from dpa: 

2. This primitive form in -eow was changed by the fEo- 
lians into ow by dropping the €; as, Gpw, dpow ; dpw, dp- 


00; Kipw,Ktpow. ‘The Ionians, on the other hand, changed 


the old form into ew by rejecting 0; as, dAéa, apéw, KUpew, 
&c., while the Attics contracted this form into @; as, UEVO, 
yEve 5 OTEAAW, OTEAG, KC. 

3. Thus, from the original form of the future in éow, 
which remained only in some verbs, two new forms arose, 
one in ow, and the other in éw, contracted . 

4. The future in ® was chiefly used in verbs whose 
characteristic was A, It, V5 P, that is, which ended in Aw, 
wo, vo, pw; the future in ow was, with a few exceptions, 
employed i in the rest. 


112 REMARKS ON “THE ACTIVE TENSES. 


5. This future in ow is generally denominated the first 
future, and the future in @ is also a first future in verbs 
which end in Aw, pw, vw, and po, but: in. other verbs it is 
ealled the second future. 

6. In strictness, therefore, the ee faturé is only.a 
dialect variation from the first, and does not exist at all in 
verbs ending in Aw, po, Vo, and po. 

7. In changing the termination -éow into ow, the ‘conso- 
nants immediately preceding it are also changed according 
to the , rules of euphony. . Thus : . 


S es: (A.) "The consonants 0, 0, Ty; z phe omitted before o, 
and the remaining consonants, 7, 6, ¢, Kk, Y, X, 
are united with the o that follows into the double 
» eousonants wp and £3; as, KpUTTW, KpuTTTEOW, KPV- 
be 5) dy@, ayéow, GEW 3 TAEKM, TAEKEOW, TAESO. 
. —((B. ,, _Double y makes ys ; as, Aiyyo, quyyéow, Aiy- 


(C. ‘ “tf v Preceded 6, 0, 7, , it is rig hia out ; but, in 
order that the syllable may remain long, an ¢ is in- 
serted after €; as, o7évdw, omreiow. ~ 

(D.) In other cases, however, particularly when 
the verb ends in 6@, oow, or TT@, usage must be 

es attended to, since many verbs of this kind are 

formed in a different manner in the future. Thus, 
¢ becomes € in some; as, Kpdcw, xpdéw, where 
the original form of the present was in yo; as, 
Kpayo, Kpayéow, Kpdg@; in others it- becomes 
yew; as, TAGCO, mhébyéa, where the original form 
of the present was in yya ; as, TAaYYO, TAayyé-: 
Ow, TAGYEw.” 

(E.) Verbs in oow and TT® are most of them derived 
_ from forms in kw and yw, and hence have the fu- 
“o» tureingw. Thus, dpicow, d Pplsa ; old form dpix, 
' ‘opliKéow, ppisa. And again, Tapdoow, Tapdgsw ; old 
form Tapax, tapayéow, tapdgw. Other verbs in 
ow and TT are considered merely as lengthened 
forms of verbs pure, or verbs in w with a vowel or 
diphthong preceding, and hence they make the fu- 

ture In oW; as, Gpudgw, apudoe. 





8. Verbs pure, whose final syllable is preceded by a 
diphthong, =e no change in the future except the as- 
bre? - 


% 


REMARKS ON THE ACTIVE TENSES. 113 


sumption of 0; as, dkovw, dKkovow; Tatw, ratow. In 
other verbs pure, where a vowel precedes the termination, 
the short vowel of the present becomes long before the o ; 

as, daxpow, daxpioo ; 3 Tl®, Tiow. Hence verbs in éw, dw, 
and 6@ have the long vowel in’ the: penult of the: future : 
as, piAéw, HiAjow; Tywdw, TihowW; Xpvodw, yevodow. 
The following exceptions, however, must be noted: rf 

(A.) The termination é makes éow in reAéw, dp- 
KEQ), VELKEQ), and’ some others ; as, TeAéow, dpKé- 
ow, vetkéow. These futures are very probably 
from old presents in @. 

(B.) Some verbs in é@ have ‘cow and NOW ; as, Ka- 
Aéw, KAAHIO, Attic Karsow ; alvéw, alvhow, Attic 
aivéow. Here two forms of the present appear 
to have been originally in use, one in o, making 
éow in the future, and another in é, making 7 700). 

(C.}. Verbs in aw, whose: final syllable is preceded 
by € or ¢, or by ‘the consonants A and p, have the 
future in dow. And this future is long if a vowel 
or the letter p precede aw in the present, but oth- 
erwise it isshort. Thus, édw, éaow; dpdw, dpa-. 
ow'; but yeAdo, yeAdow. 

(D.) But the following verbs in dw make fow in the 
future, namely, ovAdw and ypéw. Verbs which 
have o before the final dw have also generally 

~~ HOG); as; Boda, Bojow. 

(E.) The termination 6w makes 6c in verbs which 
are not derivative ; as, boss 6u60@ ; dpoa, apo- 
ow, &ec. : 

9. The verbs xaiw and KAaiw, in Attic Kd and KAde, 
make the future 1 in -avow ; as, Kavow, KAatow. 

10. Verbs in Ao, pO, v0, po, shorten the penult when 
forming the future ; as, dubvw, duvvd; Kpive, kpivd. ‘This 
arises from the circumstance of the tone in the future rest- 
ing on the last syllable. 

11. Many barytone verbs are frequently formed by the 
Attics and Ionians, like contracted verbs, by changing @ 
into HOO ; as, Béaro, BaraAjow ; Bock, cree ot TUNTW, 
TUTTI OW. 

K 2 


114 REMARKS ON THE ACTIVE TENSES. 


. i Perfect. 


1. Verbs in po and vw presuppose a future in 4ow ; as, 
- VEU, Vevéunka ; péve), weuévnka. In these perfects the fu- 
tures vewjow, jevqow are. presupposed, which, however, 
were hardly i in use any more than the forms of the present 
vepéw, pevdw, Se. 

2. Generally, 7 and ¢ in the future and perfect are fre- 
quently interchanged. ‘Thus dé@ has dow in the future, 
and dédexa in the perfect. On.the other hand, xcaAéw has 
commonly in the future caAéow, but in the perfect KEKANKG, - 
by syncope for kexdéAnna. 

3. Some verbs take w before « instead of 7; as, péu- 
6AwKa for wsoAnna, where B is put between p and A, as 
“im peonpbpia. So olywKa, from otyouat, instead of oiynka ; 
and réntwxa, from 7éTw or rinTw, instead of rénTyKA. 


8. Second Aorist. 


z As a short penult is required in the second aorist, it 
frequently happens that, when two consonants come together 
which lengthen the vowel, they are transposed ; as, dépxw, 
Edpakov ; TrépOW, Errpavoy ; where the origipal forms were 
Edapkov and érrapOov. 

2. Verbs pure have no second aorist, snd the forms 
which do occur comé from barytone verbs. Thus, éorepov 
comes from orép@, not oTEepéw ; edovmov from dovnw; not 
dovTréw. 

3. If the second aorist would only have been distinguished 
from the imperfect by a short penult, or if it would have 
differed in no respect, as to form and quantity, from that 
tense, the verb has no second aorist active. It may have, 
however, a second aorist passive. Thus, ypdow has no 
second aorist Bchre, but it has eypagny in the passive. 


FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE TENSES. 115 


2. FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE TENSES. 


The Present 
is formed from the present active st ithe ® into oat , 
as, TOTO, ee 


The £ mperfect 


is formed from the imperfect active by changing ov into 
Geryes as, ETUTTOV, érumrouny. 


The Perfect 
is formed from the perfect active by changing, i in the 


First conjugation, ; ga pure into mac; as, réruga, TéTUmpae. 


ga impure “ wat; ‘ Tétepda, TéTEpuar. 
Second conjugation, ya “yp; “ Aéhoxa, Aéheypae. 
Third conjugation, xa © ona; “* médpaxa, réppacuat. 
Fourth conjugation, ka. par; “ &padxa, Spahuat, 


In verbs of the third conjugation, however, xa is changed 
into wat when a long vowel or pa precedes the final sylla- 
ble ; as, orreupdw, orreipdow, éonetpaxa, éorrelpapat ; dpdw, 
dpdow, dédpaxa, dédpawar ; didAéw, drdhow, TreplAnka, Tepi- 
Anuat, &c. 

But there are exceptions: to this rule in the case of some 
verbs, which have a diphthong before the final » of the ac- 
tive, since EEN have arisen from the short vowel 
made long; as, dkobw, jkovopat ; TT ate, ETTQLOMAL ; Spavo, 
TéOpavopa, &e. 

Verbs in atvw, which make -yxa in the perfect active 
make, after rejecting y, the termination of the perfect pas- 
sive in oar; as, daivo, répayKa, népaouat. : 

In some verbs the quantity is changed ; as, mémwxa, 7é- 
mrouat, from trivw; and dédwxa, Sédowat, from didwpe. 

The vowel o in the perfect active, which was derived 
from e of the present, is again changed to e in the pesfert 
passive ; ; as, KAénTW, KéKAoda, Ken Agua ; ; TéuTW, TéTOp- 
pa, TETEUPAL. 


116 FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE TENSES. " 


But if p with another consonant precede the 0, it is 
changed in the perfect passive into a; as, orpédw, ZoTpo- 
pa, Eotpaywar ; tpérw, TéeTpoba, TéETPAappaL. 

The third person plural of the perfect is formed from the 
third person singular by inserting v before tas; as, Tedu- 
Ajvrat, from rediAqta. But if the first person of the per- 
fect passive end in uaz impure, that is, with a consonant 
preceding it, the third person plural is formed by a eke 
phrasis of the verb oe, and the perfect poten as, Té- 
TULPAL, TeTvppEVOL Eioi.' 

This same periphrasis is dnidlovedl’ in the optative and 
subjunctive moods, when the peers ends in pat impure ; 
as, TETYEVOS ElnY, TETLUpEVOS @. But not when the per- 
fect ends in paz pure ; as, TETYLGYNY, TETLUGUAL. 


The Pluperfect 


‘ i formed from the perfect by changing paz into pny, and 
> to the continued augment, if there be a redgpti- 

t es réTypyiar, EreTroppny. 

The third person plural of the pluperfect i is formed by a 

periphrasis of ciué and the perfect participle, whenever the 

perfect from which it is. derived ends in pat impure ; as 

TETULPEVOL NOAY. 





The ei Aorist 


is formed from the third person singular of the perfect by 
dropping the reduplication, changing Taz into @7y, and the 
preceding smooth into an nya mute; as, TéTuTTaL, 
Eropony. 

“Four verbs take o before the termination ony, although 
it is not found in the third person of the perfect ; as, wéu- 
vnTal, ee 5 KEXPNTAL, exphoony 5 Eppwrar, Eppaodyy ; 





1. This is done from a principle of euphony, since TéTumvTat would 
be too harsh for the ear. ‘The same remark applies to the pluperfect, 
and to the optative and subjunctive meods.- _ 


e 


= 
FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE TENSES. 117 
rénAnrat, énAnjoOnv. On the contrary, céoworat makes 
boOny. i | 
Some which have 7 in the perfect passive receive an e€ 
in the first aorist; as, evpytat, etpéOnv ; emqynrat, éryy- 
E0nv ; ddipntar, dbypéOnv. From elpyrar the aorist is é6- 
pnOnv and éppéOnv. si 
Verbs which change « of the future into o of the perfect 
active, and into @ in the perfect passive, take e again in the 
first aorist; as, Zorparrat, dorpEgOny ; rétpanrat, érpép- 
Ony ; relpania, E0péEpONV. 


* The First Future 
is formed from the first aorist by dropping the augment, 


and changing @7v into Ojoouat ; as, érvpOny, TuPOjcowat 


The Second Aorist 


is formed ftbin the second aorist active by changing ov into. e. 


qv ; as, ETuTroy, éroTryy. 
No second aorist_ passive occurs in dqy, On”, 
from verbs in w putes except sates éddnv, ‘em, disc. 





The Second Future 
is formed from the second aorist by dropping the augment, 
and changing 7 into joouar; as, érorgy, TUTTO, 

The Third Future, 
or Paiilo-post- faiurite,3 is formed. from the second person 
singular of the perfect by changing az into owat; as, TéTV- 
Wat, TeToPowaL. 

8. FORMATION OF THE MIDDLE TENSES. 
The Present and Imperfect 


are the same in form:as those of the passive Voice, and are 
similarly formed. . 


118 FORMATION OF THE MIDDLE TENSES. 


The Perfect 


is formed from the second aorist active by profixing the 
reduplication, and changing ov into a; as, érvTov, TéTUTG. 

If the second aorist has @ or ¢ in the Penylt, the perfect 
middle changes this into 0; as, en éoTrapor, ihe : 
éyeipw, TyEpov, 7yyopa. 

But if the @ in the penult of the second aorist comes 
from az or 7 in the present, or is long there by position, 
the perfect changes it into 7;-as, watvouat, gudvyy, péun- 
va; TAhoow, ExAayov, nénAnya; SdAAW, KOadov, > 
KAGCW, ExAayov, KEKANya. 

The exeeptions to this rule are the following : Kpasw, 
Expayov, Kékpaya ; . Tpdoow, Empayor, némpaya ; ppaca, 
Edpadov, réppaida ; Gdw, tida; Kyw, “ to break,” gaya. 

If the second aorist ‘has ¢ in the penult from a prvetnt 
in ez, the perfect middle changes it into o:; as, 7el0w, ém- 
Gov, nérrou0a ; ; Aeitw, EAitrov, AEAotTTA; Eeidw, idov, oida. 

_. But if t be already in the present, the perfect merely 
lengthens it after having been show i in the second aorist ; 
as, TpiGw, Etplyov, TETplya. 

In some verbs the penult of the perfect middle remains 
short; as, dkfjKoa, from dxotw; eAqrvOa, from éAcvbOw. 
On the other hand, we have mépevya, from detyo ; néxeva 
from Keto ; AETSEAM from Tevyo. 

The verb pjoow makes épwya; so, also, we have foA- 
ta, from éArrw ; Zopya, from épyw ; elwOa, from é6w. 

- Some perfects appear to be formed immediately from the 
present by changing into a, and prefixing the reduplica- 
tion; as, dot7w, dédovra ; diw, dédta; and so, also, dvwya, 


for 7jvwya. 


The Pluperfoct 


is formed from the perfect by prediting % is and changing @ 
into evy ; as, TéeTUTA, ETETOTELY.. ; 


< 


REMARKS ON THE. PASSIVE TENSES. 119 


_ The First Aorist 
is formed from the first aorist active a by adding UNV ; as, 


éruenpa, Erupauny. 


| The First Future 3 
is formed from the first future active by changing o into 


ouat ; as, Tbpw, THpouat. 
In verbs of the fourth conjugation @ is changed into ov- 
UGL ; as, pare, ahrovpa. 


The Second Aorist 


is formed from the second aorist active by Chanaing.¢ ov into 
opny ; as, ErbTToy, érunTouqy. 


The Second Future 


is formed from the second future active by changing @ inte 


aed > as, TUTTO, TVTOUUAL. " 
4 


eg 


REMARKS ON THE PASSIVE TENSES. 
1. Present: — 


1. The true Attic termination’ of the second person sin 
gular is e&. And this form is employed also to distinguish 
the subjunctive from the indicative. ‘The termination in 9 
for the second person of the present indicative belongs to 
the common dialect. 

2. The old form of the second person was in -eoas, from 
which -the Ionians made “eal, and the Attics -ez. .Thus, 
tonteoat; lon; tomreac; Att. TiTTEL ; common dialect 
TONT 

3. The old Oeik i in oat for the second person continued 
in use, I. In some contracted verbs ; as, ddvvdopat, édv- 
VAECAL ; Wavy dopat, kavydeoat. II. In verbs in we; &s, 





1. The old rule used to be, that only three verbs retained this ec in 
the second person, namely, Bovdopat, 6 énTouat, and olouat, making re- 
spectively BovAet, wer, and ofe. But the best editions now restore e 
to the second persons of all verbs. Compare Porson, Praf. ad Hez 
p. iv. 3 , . 


” 


- 


120 FORCE OF THE TENSES. 


~ 


lorapat; toraca, &c. III. In the perfect and pluperfect 
passive of all verbs; the ¢, however, before the o, being 
dropped; and the double consonant brought in; as, Téruibac 
for teturéoat; étérvipo for érerimeow. IV. In some ir- 
regular futures ; as, Edouat, édéoat; ddyoua, ddyeou. 


2. Imperfect. 


The old form of the second person singular of this tense 
was érimreoo, from which the Ionians made érimreo, and 
the Atties érimrov. 


3. First Future. oe 


The second person singular of this tense ended originat~ 
ly in coat, whence the Ionians formed ear, and the Attics 
et. The form 9 belongs to the common dialect. 


3. FORCE OF. THE TENSES. 


* ~ 


General Remarks. 


1. The time in which an action can take place is either 
present, past, or future. ‘There are thus in Greek, as in ev- 
ery language, three principal tenses, the Present (6 éveo- 
Tac), the Preterit, and the Kuture (6 péAdAwv). | 

2. Of the present there is only one simple form in Greek, 
but for the preterit there are more than in any other lan- 
guage. . 3 : vi 

3. An action, for instance, is represented as either in itself 
and absolutely past, or as relatively past In respect to an- 
other time expressed or conceived. ‘The aorist serves to 
denote the time entirely past ; the imperfect, the perfect, and 
the pluperfect, the relative time. vey 

4. The imperfect. (6 mapatattkoc) represents a past ac- 
tion as continuing during another past action, and accom- 
panying it ; the perfect (ypdvo¢ Tmapakeipevoc T@ TapovTt) 
and. pluperfect (6 UmepovyTeAtkoc) designate an action com- 
pleted, but continuing in its immediate consequences to an- 
other time ; the perfect to the present, the pluperfect to a 
time past......, )., cat | 

5. In the sathe way the future is-conceived under three 
modifications ; either as simply future, without reference 
to another action, as in the first and second futures active 


= 


FORCE .OF THE TENSES. ~12] 


and future middle; or as future and complete, as in the 
first and second futures passive ;- or as future and with refer- 
ence to an action to take place in a still more remote futu 
rity, as in the third future passive. 


Special Remarks. 


: Fy to what has just been remarked, the pres- 
ent, as in all languages, designates an action present. and. 
still incomplete ; ; while, of the three. tenses, of past time, 
the aorist marks a past action in itself, without any refer- 
ence to another action at.the same or a different time. 

2. The perfect, on the contrary, expresses an action 
which has taken place, indeed, at a previous time, but is 
connected, either in itself or its consequences, or its ac-. 
eompanying circumstances, with the present time. Thus, 
éypawa, “1 wrote,” signifies, indeed, the completion of the 
~ action; but it does not determine whether the consequen- 
ces of it, namely, the writing which I have written, be still 
existing or not. On the contrary, yéypada, “I have writ- 
ten,” besides indicating the fact of my having written, 
shows also the*continued existence of the writing. In the 
same manner, yeydunka, I am married ;” on the contrary, 
éyaunaa, “TI married.” Hence KéxTnuat signifies, “I pos- 
sess,” properly, “I have acquired unto myself, and the ac- 
quisition is still mine.’ 7 

3. The perfect retains its eronee toa continued. action 
through all the moods. ‘Thus, 6 pév Anorij¢ ovtoc é¢ TOV 
IlupipAcyéGovta éubebAjobe, « Let this robber be cast into 
Pyriphlegethon, and remain there.” And.again, éétdévTec, 
eitov THY Sipayv KexdAcio0a, “ On going out, they gave di- 
rections that the door should be shut, and kept so.” 

4. The imperfect expresses, 1. An action continuing du- 
ring another action which is past. It differs from the aorist 
in this, that the aorist marks an action past, but transient ; 
the imperfect an action past, but at. that time. continuing. 
Thus, Tov¢ TeATaoTas édéEavto (an immediate action) ob 
Bapbapor kal éudyovto (continued, action) é7el 0”. eyyv¢ 
noav (continued) of OrrAiras éTpatrovto (immediate); kal of 
uév TeATaoTal EvOic eirovto (continued). “ The barbari- 
ans received the targeteers and fought ; but when the heavy 
armed men were near they turned away in flight, and the 
targeteers immediately pursued them.” 


122 FORCE. OF THE: TENSES. 


5. The imperfect-also expresses, 2. An action continued 
by being frequently-repeated ; as, Tov oitov Tov év TH YO- 
pa OvedOeipete nal thy yiv étéuvere. “ You destroyed, 
from time to tune, the grain throughout the country, and you 
ravaged the land.” 7 

6. This same tense also expresses, on some occasions, - 
an action.begun or contemplated, but not completed ; or, in 


‘ other words, an attempt not brought to a successful conclu- 


sion. As, éutcOovTo, “ he wished to hire” (Herod. 1. 68) ; 
and again, Tau’ é0vnoxe Téxva, “my children were on the 
point of losing their lives.” ~ 

7. The third future passive refers to an action which 
will be permanent or continued in future time ; and it there- 
fore bears the same relation to the other futures as, among 
the tenses vf the past time, the perfect doés to the aorist. 
It is sometimes, therefore, in consequence of this, styled the 
Perfect’s Future. ‘Thus, éwot dé AcAeiiberar diyea Avypa, 
“while mournful woes shall continue to remain unto me.” 
And again, 6 7oAirne év Kataldyw obdsic peteyypadjoserat, 
GAi’, @oTEep Hv TO Tp@Tov, &yyeypadwera. “ No citizen 
shall become enrolled in another class, but shall remain en 
rolled in that in which he was at first.” e.5% 

8. Hence, of those verbs whose present marks only the 

beginning of an action, but the perfect the complete action, 
the third future is used in order to show that the perfect 
action is to happen in future ; as, xrdowar, * I acquire ;” 
KéxTnual, “I possess ;” Kexthoouat, “I shall possess.” 
Whereas xr#oova: means merely, “ I shall acquire for my- 
SHE ae * 
A The third future is therefore often used to express 
the rapidity of an action by taking, not the beginning of it, 
but its completion and the state resulting from it ; as, 7re7- 
avoetal, “he shall instantly cease ;” menmpagera, “it shall 
he immediately done.” It is this meaning which has ob- 
tained for it the less correct name of Paulo-post-futurum, 
namely, what will take place soon, or a little after the 
present. | Koga 

10. Besides the simple forms of the future, there is also 
a periphrastic future, made up of wéAAw and the infinitive 
of the present, the aorist, or the future, and corresponding 
with the Latin periphrastic future of the participle in urus 
andthe verb sum. It answers to the English, “ being about 
to do anything ;” “ intending to do a thing,” &e.. 


FORCE OF THE TENSES. 128 


11 The aorist not only refers to instantaneous action, 
but is.also frequently employed with the meaning, “to be 
wont.” Thus, iv ti¢ TobTwY Tt Trapabaivy Chia éErréOe- 
oav, “ If any person transgress any one of these, they inflict 
punishment upon him.” 

12. Thesecond aorist differs from the first in form alone, 
not in meaning. ‘Two modes of forming the past or his- 
torical tense got early into use in Greece ;' the one gave 
that which we call the first aorist, the other that which we 
call the second aorist. ‘The former, from its origin, was 
truly a distinct tense, having a system of terminations alto- 
gether peculiar to itself; but the latter is little else than a 
slight modification-of the ‘imperfect. Usage early declared 
itself in favour-of the former ; and, at the period when Greek 
literature began, the second form obtained only in a limited 
number of the more primitive verbs ; while every verb of 
more recent and derivative formation exhibited the first ex- 
clusively. Ina very few words only are both forms to be 
found; and.even in these, the duplicates, for the most part, 
belong to different dialects, ages, or styles. In import, these 
two forms of the aorist never differed. 

13. A satisfactory illustration of the. principle which has 
just been stated in relation to the second aorist may be 
’ found ‘in our own language. In English, also, there are 
two originally distinct modes of forming the common past 
tense: the first by adding the syllable ed, as in I killed; 
the other chiefly by certain changes in the vowels; as in I 
wrote, I saw, I knew, I ran, &c. Let the student call the 
former and regular form the first aorist, and the latter the 
second, and he will have a correct idea of the amount ‘of 
the distinction between those tenses in Greek. ‘The form 
érvia in Greek is what J killed is in English ; that is, the 
regular form of. the past tense, which obtains in a vast ma- 
jority of verbs: the form ZAabov, on the contrary, is alto- 
gether analogous to I took, or I saw, acknowledged by all 
grammarians not as a second or distinct preterit, but. as 
an instance of irregular variety of formation obtaining in 
certain verbs. 

14. It may be objected to this view of the subject, that 
there are verbs in Greek in which both forms of the aorist 
occur. A careful examination, however, will prove that 


os 








1. Philological Museum, No. iv.,p. 197.’ Cambridge, 1832. 


124 ¥ _ VoICEs. , 


the number of such verbs is extremely small compared ‘with 
that of those which have only the one or the other aorist. 
But even here the analogy is supported by the English 
verb, since we meet with many instances in which English 
verbs retain both forms of the preterit. Thus, for exam- 
ple, I hanged, or I hung ; I spit, or I spat; I awaked, or I 
awoke; I cleft, I clave, or I clove. Such duplicates in 
Greek verbs are extremely rare ; probably there is not one 
Greek verb in five hundred in which they can be met with. 
The form called the second aorist is, indeed, common 
enough ;»but, then, where it exists, that of the first aorist 
is almost always wanting. We have evpor, tAabor, eidor, 
qyayov, éAcrov, tdpayov ; but the regular form is as muck 
a nonentity in these verbs as it is in the English verbs I 
found, I t<3k, I saw, I led, I left, I ran, &c. The first 
aorist in these would be sheer vulgarity ; it would be par- 
allel to I finded, I taked, I seed. : 

15. In strictness, therefore, the-Greek verb has but one 
aorist active ; that aorist, when regular, following the model 
of érvypa, but being sometimes formed less regularly, in 
another manner, like €Aa6bov. Now and then, in the variety 
of dialects and styles, two forms appear in the same verb, 
as in érecoa and émi0ov ; one of these, however, as in this 
instance é7etoa, being that in ordinary use, the other rare,’ 
anomalous, and nearly. obsolete. | the . 

16. The second future, also; has only, in strictness, an 
existence in name, and the same principle may be applied 
to it as in the case.of the second aorist. Verbs in Ao, po, 
vq, pw, have no second future ; in other verbs the second 
future is only a dialect modification of the first. 


4.. VOICES. 4.) => 


The active and passive voices of the. Greek verb have 
nothing very peculiar in their signification when compared 
with the corresponding voices of the Latin verb. We shall 
therefore confine our remarks to | 


The ‘Middle Voice. 

1. The Middle Voice has been so called by grammarians, 
as having a middle signification between the active and 
passive, implying neither action nor passion ‘simply, but a 
tmion in some degree of both. ie , 


VOICES. . 125 


2. The principal usages of the middle voice are five in 
number. ‘The first four may be called usages of reflexive, 
the fifth the usage of reciprocal signification.’ 


I. Where A does the act on himself, or on what 
belongs to himself; or, in other words, is the ob- 
ject of his own action; as, dmfyyéaro, “he hung 
himself 3” Kedadiy seoyaro, “¢ he wounded his own 
head.” 

Il. Where A does the act on some other object M, 
relatively to himself, and not-for another person; 

- as, KaTeoTpéWato Tov M7jdov, “ he made the Median 
subject to himself.” — 

HI. Where A gets an act done for himself, or iby 

_. those belonging to him, by B. ‘Thus of Chryses 7 
it is said, in the Iliad, that he came to the Grecian 
camp, Avosuevoc Sdbyarpa, “to get his daughter 
released by Agamemnon, on the payment of a ran- 
som ;” that is, briefly, “‘ to ransom his daughter.” 
Whereas, of Agamemnon it is said, od’ dréAvoe 
dvyatpa, “he did not release her,” namely, to 
Chryses. Under this same head may be ranked 
the following instances: diddgac0at tov vidr, 
“to get one’s son instructed ;” daveiso, “ to lend ;” 
davetCouat, “ to get a loan for one’s self,” “ to bor- 
row.” 

IV. Where, in such verbs as xkérrouas, “ to mourn;” 
oebouat, “to urge one’s self on,” the direct action 
is done by A on himself, but an- accusative or 
other case follows of B, whom that action farther 
regards. ‘Thus, Exérpavro avtov, “ they mourned 
for him;” i. e., they cut or lacerated themselves 
for him. Sevovras avTov, “ they stir themselves 
in pursuit of him.” Bria AéoOny abtov, “ they 
tore their hair in mourning for. him.” So, also, 
govAdgat Tov traida, ‘ to guard the boy ; ;” but dv- 
Adsacbat Tov Aéovra, “to guard one’s self against 
the lion.” And again, where, in the Iliad, it is 
said of Hector, dc¢ eim@v, ob raidoc épéEarto, “ thus 
having spoken, he stretched out his arms to recetve 
his son.” 





= 


1. Mus. Crit. No. 1, p. 102, seq. 
L 2 






- 


126 VOICES. 
V. Where the action is reciprocal between two 
persons or parties, and A does to B what B does 
to A; as in verbs signifying to contract, quarrel, 
fight, converse, &c. ‘Thus, in Demosthenes, it is 


said, ed¢ dv dradvodpeba Tov méAEuov, “ until we - 


shall have put an end to the war, by treaty mutual- 
ly agreed upon.” - 'To this head belong such verbs 
as wayec0at, orévdeoOat, dradéyeoBat, &c. | 


_ 2. Though, on some occasions, the active voice is used 
where the middle would be proper, that is, where the act 
is denoted without relation to the agent, though there does 
exist a middle verb, so to denote it, yet where the two 


Voices exist in actual use, the middle denoting the action 
relatively to ihe agent, as in No. IL, is very seldom, if ever, 


in pure Attic, used to denote the action when it regards 
another person. Thus, iordvat tpématov may be said of 
an army who erect their own trophy; for it is true, as far 
as it goes, they do erect a trophy. But éorjoaro tpéraiov 
sannot be said of him who erected a trophy for others, but 
only gornoev. | | 
3. In many verbs, the perfect, pluperfect, and aorist pas- 
sive are used in a middle sense, besides the ordinary mean- 
ing of the passive. Thus, éndedevypévocg tiv rovnpiay, 
“having openly manifested his wickedness ;” peytoOwpévoc 
@pov, “having hired a piece of ground ;” kateKxAibn, “ he 
laid himself down ;” dmnAdayn, “ he departed.” The regu- 
lar middle ‘form of the aorist in such verbs is unusual or 
obsolete. In‘some it has a special signification ; as, orad- 
qvat, “to travel ;” but oretAacbar, “ to array one’s self.”! 





1. As regards the use of the perfect and pluperfect passive in a mid- 
ile sense, the opinion of Buttmann appears the most rational, that in all 
eases where a verb has.a regular middle voice, with its appropriate re- 
flex signification, the perfect and pluperfect passive, and they alone, are 
used as the perfect and pluperfect of that voice, and possess that signifi- 
cation along with their own. In conformity with this doctrine, the mid- 
dle voice would seem to be nothing else than the passive verb, used 
under a peculiar modification of its meaning, and illustrating the ten- 


dency of the Greeks in early times to look upon themselves in all reflex , 


acts, whether external or internal, as patients rather.than agents ; a ten- 
dency which is exemplified in every page of the Homeri¢e poems, and 
which belongs more or less to every people in an early stage of civiliza- 
tion, before the nation comes of age, and acquires the consciousness, 
along with the free use, of its powers. This seems to be the reason 


. ‘ * 
VOICES. 127 


4. With regard to the perfect middle it may be remarked, 
that this tense is of very rare occurrerice, so as to-have far 
more the character of an occasional redundancy than of a 
regular formation. In fact, when the preterit exists in this 
particular form, it very rarely exists In the-same verb in 
any other form; and where two forms do occur, it will gen- 
erally be found that-the one did not come into use till the 
other was growing obsolete. ‘The perfect middle, it is true, 
has undoubtedly some. degree of alliance with a neuter 
meaning, but then this alliance is very far from being con- 
stant. This form has often a truly active and transitive 
signification ; as, for example, AéAovra, “ I have left ;” &x- 
tova, “I have killed ;” while, on the other hand, the form 
considered as active is of frequent occurrence in a neuter 
or reflex sense ; as in kéxunka, “I am weary ;” éornna, “TL _ 
stand ;” pewévnka,.“ I remain ;” Bebioxa, “I have lived,” 
&c. These instances, which might be easily multiplied, 
are sufficient to prove that there is no good ground for as- 
signing to either of these forms of the perfect any determi- 
‘nate cast of signification, whether it be active or neuter. 
Some preference of what is called the middle form for the 
neuter sense is the utmost that can with truth be ascer- 
tained. In a few instances doth the forms certainly do ex- 
ist, and witha characteristic difference of signification ; as, 

- bA@AEKa, “ I have destroyed ;” and éAwda, “I am undone ;” 
mérretka, ‘I have persuaded ;” and réroOa, “I am confi- 
_ dent;” in others the two forms occur, indeed, but with little 








why so many of the verbs employed by the Greeks to denote states of 
mind or of feeling have a passive form, such as olopac (oiat), aic8dvo- 
at, oxérrouat, ériorauat, BotAouat, dyauat, foowar, paivopar. In 
some tenses, indeed, in which a variety of forms presented itself, one of 
them was allotted more peculiarly to the passive signification, another to 
the middle: that instinct which, in all-languages, is evermore silently at 
work in giving definiteness to the speech of a people, in proportion as 
its thoughts become more definite, manifested itself in assigning one 
form of the future,and aorist to the passive voice, another to. the middle ; 
the preference being perhaps determined by the affinity of the latter to 
the corresponding active tenses, of the former to the perfect passive. 
Instances, however, remain to show that, at the time when the Greek 
language comes first into view, the line of demarcation was not deemed 
quite impassable ; and the passive voice would not unfrequently assert 
its rights to its cast-off future, and now and then, though very rarely, 
even to the aorist. Philol. Museum, No. iv., p. 221, seq. 
“1 ~Philol. Museum, No. iv., p. 200. | 


‘ tao FORCE OF THE MOODS. 







iscrimination in sense ; as, nénpaxa and métpayu, OE00LKG 
nd dédia. . 

6. The future middle is often found in a passive sense, 
et e on of which appears to. be this. That form of the 
P future which, in the later-ages ofthe Greek language, 
e ¥: when the grammarians wrote, seems to have been used ex- 
' -clusively in a middle sense, had previously ‘a wider range 
eganey belonging to it. : 


>. 


ye 


‘3 


5. FORCE OF THE MOODS. 


I ndicative. 


asd he indicative i is used in Greek when anything is to be 

Tepresented-as.actually existing or happening, and as some- 

- thin o inderendent of the thought and conception of the 

“speaker.. Hence it is put in very many cases where, in 
. Latin, the subjunctive must be used. 

1. The indicative is put after relatives, both pronouns 

". and particles, where, in Latin, the dependance of this clause 

is expressed by the subjunctive ; the Greek often uses the 

future of the indicative to denote what shall or will happen, 

not what is merely conceived as such._ ‘Thus, Soph. Philoct. 

* 303, od yap tic Sppog éoriv, obd” brrot tAEwY, EFeuTrOAHoEL 

. népdoc, 7 } Eevdoerat, “ For there is: no Las bowe (here), nor 

any place unto which one sailing shall carry on therein gain- 
" re hee si or be hospitably sntareoaed ‘ 
: -2. The indicative is also used after negative propositions 
with the relative ; as, ap’ enol ovdsic piobodopet, dart¢ 412) 
ixavog éoTiv ica rroveiv éuol, “ No soldier serves for pay 
with me who is not able to endure equal toils with me.” 
Here the Latin idiom would require gui possit. 

3. The indicative is likewise used in indirect interroga- 
tions ; thus, 6pdre ti trocotpev, “* You see what we are act- 
ually doing.”. Whereas, dpate ti roi@pev means, “ You 
see what we are to do.” So, also, éxetvog olde Tiva TpdTroY 
of véor O1adbeipovTat, * He knows in what way the young. 
are actually destroyed.” Here dvapOcipovto av would 
mean, “ might have "been destroyed.” 







E mperative. 


"The imperative is used in Greek, as in oie languages 
in semecatitiess entreaties, commands, &e. The personal 


- FORCE OF THE MOODS. 129 


pronouns, as in other languages, are omitted, except when 
oe serve for distinction or have an emphasis. oi 

. The second person sometimes receives an indefini Je 
baajecs and thus stands, as it were, for the third; as, Tale, 


Tale TAC TU av, * siswtntens strike, every one, ihosaele thou © 


mayst be.” 

2. Sometimes the plural of the imperative is used, though 
only one person be addressed, whenever strength o of feeling 
is meant to be. expressed, or any other force is to be im- 
parted to the clause ; as, mpooéAOer’, @ rat, ratpi, * Come, 
oh my child, to thy father.” 

3. The negative 7 is joined in prohibitions, with the 
imperative, if the present tense be required ;-but, if t 
aorist be needed, the mood then changes to the subjun 


tive; as, Herod. 1, 155, od pévtot pi mavTa JYuue xpée 73 
undé sEavaarhons OAL dpxyainyv, ** Do not thou indeed — 


yield in all things to thy anger, nor have destroyed an ancient 
city.” So in Od. 16, 168, we have pid’ émixevOe, “ and 
be not concealing it ;” but_in Od. 15, 263, qd’ émixedoye, 
“ and do not have concealed it.”’ 

4. The imperative is used not unfrequently by the Attic 
poets in a dependant proposition after olo0’ we, or ota’ 6 ; 
as, Soph. id. T. 543, oi’ W¢ troinooy ; “ Knowest thou t in 
what way thou must act ! ?” (i. e., act, knowest thou in What 
way?) ; ola8’ ovv 6 dpaaov; “ knowest thou what to do?” 
(i. e., do, knowest thou what ?) 


5. “The imperative sometimes expresses not so much a - 


command as a declaration of what is proper to be done, 
according to the situation in which a person - is placed ; as, 
Eurip. Iph. T. 337, sbyov dé torad’ opayla Tapstvat, 
s thou shouldst wish, ‘therefore, for such victims to be pres- 
ent.” So, also, Aschyl.. Prom. 713, orely’ aynpdotoug 
ybac, “ thou must go over unploughed fields.” 

6. Hence the imperative is found also in interrogations, 
after "particles or the relative ; as, Plat. Leg. 7, p. 801, D., 
ti obv ; KeloOw vouoc ; “ what then ? shall ¢ a law exist ! ” 


Optative. 


The optative and subjunctive express, according to its 
different modifications and shades of meaning, that which 
in Latin can’ only be signified by the subjunctive. Both 
represent an action, not as something real, but rather as 






rr 
a 
on 


130 FORCE OF THE MOODS. 


something only conceived of. ‘That which is conceived of, 
hoy eyer, is either something merely possible, probable, de- 
ble, and, , consequently, uncertain, or something which, 
pends. on external circumstances, may be expected 
h some definiteness. ‘The former is expressed by the 
oftative, the latter by the subjunctive. Hence, 
The optative is used to indicate a wish, something mere- 
ly pa or probable, and, hy theron especially peomeyen 
nies past actions. 


- 







Optative in dependant propositions. 


1. The optative is used in the expression of a wish, and 

is then put without dy, or its equivalent the poetic ke; as, 

 thoevav Aavaoi éua Sdxpva. oioL Bédecow, : May the 

Greeks atone, for my tears by thy arrows.” And again, @ 

Tat yévoo Tatpo¢ evtvyéorepoc, ‘ Oh, my son, mayst thou 
be more fortunate than thy father.” 

2. In this case, ei, ei yap, or ele, utinam, or we, or else 
Tac av, are often used with the optative ; as, Od. 3, 205, 
ei yap “Euol Tooonvos Seot dvvamy Tapabeier, Would 
that the gods had bestowed upon me so great power.” And 
again, Callim. frag.'7, Xadvbwv w¢ a7r6AoTo yévoe, * Would 
that the race of the Chalybes might perish.” | 

3. On other occasions the optative is used in connexion 
with av, or its equivalent the poetic xe, in order to give to 
a proposition an expression of mere conjecture or bare pos- 
sibility, and hence of uncertainty or doubt. Thus, Plato, 
Leg. 3, p. 677, B., ol tote Trepipvysytec THY POopar aye- 
ddv Opetol TLvEC dv elev vouetc, ‘* They who on that occasion 
escaped destruction were, probably, with a few exceptions, 
mountain shepherds. ” ~So, also, Xenophon, Cyrop. 1, 2, 11, 
kal Onpa@vrec wev ov av dptornoater, * And while actually 
engaged in the hunt they hardly ever breakfast.” Hence it 

is employed 1 in a rough estimate ; as, Xen. Cyrop. 1, 2, 13, 
elnoav pev av ovToL TAELOY TE 7] TEVTHKOVTE ETH yeyovéorEs 
amd yevedc, “ These, on a rough estimate, are somewhat more 
than fifty years of age.” 

4. se dipstick ‘with dv is therefore employed also to 
denote an inclination, the indulgence of which depends on 
circumstances, and which is therefore only possible and 
contingent. Thus, Bovaoiuny dv, “I could wish ;” eova- 
éunv av, “I could have wished.” So, also, Plato, Crat. p- 


/ 


FORCE GF THE MOODS. 131 


411, A., 70éw¢ dv Oeacaiuny tavta Ta Kana dvouata, * I - 
would gladly contemplate those fine terms.” ce 

5. Hence the optative occurs in interrogations ; a8, Il 
3, 52, ove dv OF psiverac ’ApnidtAov Mevédaov; “ Couldst | 
thou not then await Menelaus dear-to-Mars ?” ‘Sambleo, 
Plato, Gorg., GA2d’ apa eednoeev dv jpiv duane ivan : 
But would he be willing to converse with us 2?” 

6. Very often, however, the optative serves to express 
even the most definite assertions with modesty and polite- 
ness, as a mere conjecture ; a moderation which, im conse- 
quence of their political equality, was-peculiar to all the 
Greeks, but particularly the Athenians, and which very 
seldom occurs in modern languages. Thus, Aristoph. 
Plut. 284, obKér’ av Kpvrpayu, “ I will no longer conceal tt | 
from you.” ; 


Of the “Optative in dependant propositions, or after~ con= 
junctions. 


_ 1. When the chief verb of the whole proposition, or, in 
other words, the leading verb in the sentence, expresses 
an action of past time, the following verb, which depends 
upon the conjunction, is put in the optative. If, on the 
other hand, the leading verb be in the present or the future 
tense, the following verb is put in the subjunctive. Thus, 
that which is in Latin the sequence of tenses, is in Greek 
the sequence of moods. ‘The subjunctive, therefore, in 
Greek, after a conjunction, answers to the Latin present of 
the subjunctive ; while the optative after a conjunction an- 
swers to the Latin imperfect of the subjunctive. 

2. The conjunctions and particles after which these 
moods are thus put are, 1. Those which express a -pur- 
pose ; as, iva, bdpa, OC, bre, and pi. 2. Particles of 
time ; as, ‘émel, érret0h, Ste, oc, and érAy, émevday, brary, 
mpiv, Ewe, &c. 3. Conditional particles ; as, ei, and éav, 
qv. 4. Relatives ; as, dc, oloc, dcoc, Brow, b0ev, &e. 


1. Optative after iva, dd¢pa, &c. 


1. Here, particularly, the rule just mentioned holds good, 
according to which the optative is put after verbs of i) po 
time ; as, Tvdetdn Nadia édwKe pévog kal Sdpooc, tv 
Snoc yévolito Kat KAéog apotto, “* Minerva gave sroigt 


* é A 
132 FORCE OF THE MOODS. 


and daring to Tydides, in order that he might become cone 
spiciotiy and might bear off renown.” 
2. The optative is also employed when the leading verb 
is in the present tense as used for the past. Thus, Luzi ip. 
. 10, ToAvY O& ODY enol xXprvoov ExTEWTEL. Ad9pa TAT, 
by , elmot’ "lAiov teiyn méool, Toc Gdowv sin TaLot 7) oTG- 
ue. Biov, “ And my father sends out secretly along with me a 
large quantity of gold, in order that, if the walls of Ilium 
should fall, there might be unto his suroiuing children no want 
of the means of subsistence.” 

3. Sometimes, also, the optative is used after a leading 
verb in the present or future, when the action. which fol- 
lows the conjunction is to be marked as only presumptive 
and probable. Thus, Od. 2, 52, TaT pos pev eg olkov amep- 
‘ ptyaot (present perfect) véeoOat "Ixapiov, @¢ x’ abtoc éed- 
vocato Svyatpa, “ They dread to go to the house of her 
Icarian father, that he may perhaps’ give some dowry to his 
daughter.” So, also, Soph. Gi'd. Col..11, orjodv pe naéi- 
Opvoor, O¢ mobioiseba, “ Place and seat me sere that we may 
perchance learn.” 

4. Very frenjierithy; whete the leading air # is in the past 
tense, the following verb is put after iva, oc, or w#,-in the 
indicative mood, to express an action which should have 
happened, but has not. Thus, Eurip. Phen. 213, Tiptoy 
oidua Airovo’ tbay...... iy? br detpdot Ilapvacov ka- 
tevaodny, “ Having left the Tyrian wave, I came hither 
-..... and should have been now dwelling beneath. the sum- 
mits of Parnassus.” : 


2. Optative after pavelabis of time. 


1. The optative is put with the particles ércel, imei, 
re, OnéTe, where the discourse is concerning a past action, 
which, however, was not limited to a precise point of time, 
but was often repeated by several persons or in several 
places.. Thus, £/. 3, 232, TOA AGEL py Eeivicoev ’Apnidi- 
Aoc Mevédaoc, brrbre KpArnbev txotTo, “ Menelaus, beloved 
of Mars, often entertained him when he came. from Crete.” 
So, also, Herod. 7, 6, 6xw¢ adrixorto é¢ biyiy tiv Bactajos 

_ earéAeye- THY xpnouay, As often as he came into 
the presence of the hing he mentioned some of the oracles.” 

2. With the remaining particles of time, which do not 
determine a space of time during which an action takes 





t 


2 


FORCE OF THE MOODS. 133 


place, but a point of time before or until which something 
takes place, ~as,° Ewe, gor’, av, mir, expec ov, the optative 
is used, for the most part, inthe same ‘cases as with { Lva 
and bppa. Thus, trepcepévopev Ewe avorxyOein TO deqpwrh- 
ovov, “ We Vertuined about the place until the prison was 
opened.” But Ewe, “ whilst,” “ as long-as,” has only the in 
dicative. # ays 


3. Optative after conditional particles. ~ 


1 The optative is used after -conditional particles when 
the reference is to something that is merely possible or 
contingent. In this construction the optative is employed 
with av in the apodosis, or second clause of the sentence, 
to show that a case is adduced which is merely problemat- 
ical, while in the protasis, or leading clause, the optative 
is used with ei, without dv,.as the condition itself is also 
only probleniatical. Thus, ef tic Tovg KpaTovYTag TOU 
TANOovs én’ dpeTiy TpoTpé peter, dudotépove av wpedAnoe- 
ev, “ If one would urge on to virtue those who control the 
niteltiteade he would benefit both.” . ~ 

2. But when the condition contains a determinately ex- 
pressed case, ez is used with the indicative in the. leading 
clause. “Thus, Soph. Antig. 925, aan’, eb pév ovv Tad” 
éoriv év Seoic pida, rabdvreg dv Evyyvoipuev TapTHKOTES, 
“ But.if, then, these things are approved of among the gods; 
we may, perhaps, by suffering, be made conscious that we have 
erred.” 

3. On the other hand, é is ised with the optative in the 
protasis, or leading clause, and the indicative in the apodo- 
sis, OF succeeding part of the sentence, when the latter as- 
serts something definitely, while the protasis conveys only 
a possible case. Thus, Thucyd. 2, 5, of GAdot Onbator, 
ov¢ det THS vuKToe Tapayevéodat Tavotpatid, si TL dpa wy 
Tpoxwpoln Toi¢ éceAnAvOoat, EreBonOovy, * The rest of the 
Thebans whom it behooved to be present during the night with. 
their full force, if, perchance, success should not attend those 
who had entered the city, etc.” 


4. Optative after the relatives 6¢, doTI¢, &c. 


1. If the relatives refer to definite persons or things, 
they are followed by the indicative; but if the person or 
M 


134 « FORCE OF THE MOODS. 


thing be indefmite, then the verb is in the optetive or sub 
junctive; in the optative with dy when the whole proposi 
tion affirms something of past time, and in the subjunctive 
with av when it. affirms something of present or future 
time. Thus, dvtiva pév Baovdja Kai ESoxov avopa Kuxein, 
Tov’ ayavoic éréeoow épnticacke rapactde, “ Whatever 
monarch and distinguished chieftain he found, this one, stand- 
ing by his side, he detained by bland words.” And again, 
mavTac OTw évTbyxotey, Kal Taidag Kal yuvaiKac, KTELVvoV- 
rec, ** Slaying all, whomsoever 6 might meet, both children 
and women.’ 

2. From these, hobo, are to be distinguished those 
passages in which the optative is put after the relatives, 
in the sense which it usually has in independent proposi- 
tions. Here it regularly takes dy, and is found even when 
a present action is spoken of. Thus, ov éort tovTor 6o- 
TiC av karauravot, 3 There is no one who might slay this 
person.” And again, ov yap gott, wept Srov obK av T10- 
avestepov eltrot 6 pytopiKoc 7) GAAoc dotLooby, “ For there 
is nothing about which the rhetorician would not speak in a 
more persuasive manner than any other person whatsoever ™ 


5. Optative in the “ oratio obliqua.” 


1. When anything that has been said or thought by an 
other is quoted as such, not as an idea or sentiment of the 
writer himself, and yet, not in the words of the speaker, 
but in narration (i. e., in oratione obliqua), the optative is 
frequently used and without ay. Thus, of ’Ayapvig éxd- 
KiCov Tov IlepexAéa, bTt OTpaTNyo¢ Ov obK érregdyor, “ The 
Acharnians reviled Pericles, because, being commander, he 
did not lead forth against the foe.” And again, Tro0a- 


dépyng pev @LOOEV "AynovaAdw, el oreloatto, Ewe EADoLEY, 


ode Tréprpere TPOG BaoLAéa dyyéAouc, “ Tissaphernes took an 


oath unto Agesilaus, that, if the latter will make a truce with | 


him until the messengers should return, whom he had sent to 
the king,”-&c. Here mréuapeve is used to indicate a mere 
assertion on the part of 'Tissaphernes, for the truth of which 
the writer does not mean to vouch. 

2. In particular, the optative is put in this case after dre 
or @¢, whether the action belongs to the present, past, or 
future-time. Thus, 77 dé borepaig nev Gyyedoc Aéywr, 
Bre Aedotac eln Xvévveoic ta dupa, “On the following 
day. however a messenger came with the intelligence that 


~ 


a FORCE OF THE MOODS. 135 


Syennesis had left the heights ;” 1. e., had left (AeAora¢ 
el) the heights, as the messenger said. And again, dy: 


yetAat, Ort. Papuakov Trav arrobavot, ** To announce that, 


having drunk poison, he had died.” 


. Subjunctive. 


The general distinction between the optative and sub- 
junctive has already been given, but may here be stated 
again. ‘These two moods both represent an action, not as 
something real, but rather as something only conceived of. 
That which is conceived of, however, is either something 
merely possible, probable, desirable, and, consequently, un- 
certain, or something which, as it depends on external-cir- 
cumstances, may be expected with ‘some definiteness. 
The former is oy. ere: by the optative, the latter by the 
subjunctive. 


1. Babjjociiis in independent premolihontie 


1. The subjunctive is used without dy or xe in exhorta- 
tions in the first person plural; as, taper, “let us go;” 
payoueda, “let us fight.” It indicates, therefore, that 
something ought to take place. But in the second and 
third persons the optative is used, as implying more of un- 
certainty, when the speaker refers not to himself along 
with others, but to others merely, ‘Thus, EMwpev ava do- 
TV, Kal ov yévou’ dv ov KkaKoc, “ Let us go throughout the 
city, and do thou become not cowardly.” ‘The first person 
singular of the subjunctive is often found in exhortations i in 
Homer ; as, idwuac, “ let me see 3” Aicowpy’ avépa TovTor, 
‘let me supplicate this man.” _ + 

2. The subjunctive is employed in questions of indecis- 
ion and doubt, when a person asks himself or another 
what he is todo. In these cases it occurs, as~in the pre- 
vious instances, without dv, and with or without an inter- 
rogative particle. Thus, adOt pév@ peta Toll, Hé YEW ue- 
Th Oo avrTtc, Shall I wait there with these, or shall I run 


back again unto thee?” And again, ré oe ; te dpa; “ what 


am I to say? what am I to do?” 

3. In a similar way, the aulijuictite is used without ‘a 
conjunction, and without dv after BodAec in interrogations. 
Thus, BotAe Adbwpat d7jTa Kat Biyw ti cov; Dost thou 
wish, then, that I take hold of thee, and touch thee ws 
aught ?” . 


« 


136 FORCE OF THE MOODS. 


. The subjunctive is also employed in questions of ims 
Sec with which a previous command or injunction is 
repeated. Thus, Aristoph. Ran., 1132, AION. Aloybde, 
TAPALVG) Gol owwrayv. AIUX. éy@ overt 7@0e; ‘ Bacch. 
Aischylus, I admonish you to be silent. ipa Am I to be 


silent before this man 2?” . 


5. In negative propositions, the subjunctive i is used after — 
4 or ov wf for the future ; but, usually, only the first aorist 
subjunctive passive, or the second aorist active and middle. » 
Instead of the first aorist active the future is employed. 
Thus, “isch. S§.¢c. Fh. 201, Aevorijpardjwov 8 ore pi pbyy 
wopor, “ And by no means shall any one escape death by sto- 
ning at the hands of the people.” And again, Soph. Electr. 
42, ov yap OE La) ynpa Te Kal xpdv@ praxp@ yvao’ ov’ 
bromTevoovaty @0’ jvOvopévor, “ For they shall not, through 
both thine*own age and the long lapse of time, recognise, or 
even suspect thee thus attired.” ‘This construction probably _ 
arose from ov dédotka pi yva@ot, “Lf am not afraid that 
they will not know thee ;” 1. e. , they certainly will not know 
thee. ‘This being stronger than ob yveoovrat, this ob ph 
was also prefixed, for the sake of a stronger negation, to 
the future tense.' 

6. From this case, however, we must distinguish pt) ov 
with the subjunctive, in which also dédouka is omitted. 
"Thus, Plato, Phed., p- 67, B., uh Kabap@ yap Kkabapov 
iddrrecbar pa} ov Seucrov F n, “ Since I fear it is not lawful 
for an impure person to touch one that is pure.” In Latin 
this would be vereor ne nefas sit, which is also a milder ex- 
pression for nefas est. 


2. Subjunctive in. dependant propositions. 


‘4. If the leading verb be in the present or future tense, 
the following verb is put in the subjunctive, with and with- 
out. dv, Thus, dad’ 10s, ph p’ épébice, OAWTEPOG OC KE 
vénat, “ But go, provoke me not, in order that thou mayst 
return in greater safety than otherwise.” And again, AéEO) 
iva eldje, “ I will speak, that thou mayst know.” 

_ 2. The subjunctive, moreover, is frequently used, although 
the preceding verb be in the perfect tense, when the verb 





1. Passages sometimes occur where od 7 appears with the first ao- 
rist subjunctive. - These are generally altered by critics, and the aorist 
is converted into a future. But consult Matthie, re G. vo) ii., p. 876, 
ed. 5. 


* » » 
a wth OT nde he AE, 





FORCE OF THE MOODS. 137 


which depends upon the conjunction denotes an action 
that is continued to the present time. Thus, Hom. Ii. 
5, 127, axhdy 0 av Tol aT’ dpbadparv EXov, i) Tpiv étrRev, 
bap" eb yvonne huey Sedv nde Kat dvdpa, «7 have, more- 
over, taken away from thy eyes the darkness that was previ- 
ously upon them, in order that thou mayst know well either a 
god ora man.” At the time at which Minerva is here rep- 
resented as speaking, yivywonxy¢ is a consequence still con- 
tinuing of the past action denoted by dyAvv sidov. 

3. ‘The future is often used instead of the subjunctive. 
In this case the future expresses a state that continues, or 
something that will occur at an indefinite future time. The 
aorist of the subjunctive, on the other hand, indicates a 
transient state occurring in particular cases, and then com- 
pletely concluded. Thus, dpdte wi) éxdorw tudor Kai 6d- 
Oadpav Kai xetp@v dejoer, “ See whether each one of us will 
not need both eyes and hands.” On the contrary, opa@te pa) 
Ta0epEV, “< See whether we shall not have suffered.” 


~ 


3. Subjunctive after particles of time. 


1. The subjunctive i is put with énqy, érerddy, brav, drro- 
tay, where the discourse is concerning an action belonging 
to present or future time. Thus, drep kal viv Ett TroLovowy 
ol Bapbapot Baordsic, orrdTav orparomnedebwvrat,. “< Which 
the. barbarian: monarchs do sttll, even at the present day, 
whenever they encamp.” 

2. Sometimes the subjunctive with these particles does 
not express an action frequently repeated at the present 
time, but merely a future action. ‘Thus, ob yap ét’ GAdn 
éotat Sadrwph érel dv ob ye TéTWOv ériomyc, “ For no 
longer will there be any other solace, when thou shalt have 
encountered thy destined end.” 


4. Subjunctive after conditional particles. 


When in the apodosis, or latter part of the sentence, the 
future, or the imperative, or an indicative is found, then the 
condition is expressed by ed with the future, or more mildly 
by édy, iv, dv (in the Ionic poets ef, Ke, or alike), with the 
subjunctive, and uncertainty is denoted with the prospect 
of decision. Thus, édy te Eyauer, dacoper, “Tf we have 
anything, we will give it.” And again, édv tig Tiva TOY 


DrapyovTov Vvouov ph Kaddc Exery HyHTaL, Migs tie e ste 
M 2 





138 DEPONENT VERBS. 


any one think any one of the existing laws unsuitable, let hem 
petition against it.” 


5. Subjunctive after the relatives bc, SoTic, otoc, &c. 


The subjunctive is employed with dy after relatives when 
the proposition affirms something of present or future time. 
Thus, éeo0e Orrot av Tg HyyTAat, “ Follow, whithersoever 
one may lead you,” And again, ov dé ie éyav andvev0e 
uaXnG E0EA0VTA VOHowW piace, od of dpKLov gooEiTaL pu- 
yéelv Kovac 40” olwvods, “ But whomsoever I shall perceive 
inclining to remain apart from the fight, it shall not be possi- 
ble Jor him # escape the dage and birds.” 


DEPONENT VERBS. 

1. Deponent verbs may be referred to the class of mid- 
dle ones. : : 

2. They have the middle form, except in the perfect, 
pluperfect, and third future, or paulo-post-futurum, of which 
the forms are passive. Their perfect has sometimes both 
an active and passive sense ; as, elpyacuas, from épydco- 

3: Some of these verbs have, besides a middle, a passive 
first aorist and first future, the signification of which is pas- 
sive. In the other tenses a middle meaning may generally 
be traced. : - 

. 4. ‘The following is a synopsis of their form. 


Moods and Tenses of Deponent Verbs. 


+ 





























: Indic. Imper. , Optat. Subj. Infin. Part. 
(Present déyouat 'e , 
Imperfect, Z So sun, ; déy-ov, |-oiunv, |-wuat, |-ecbat,|-duevoc, 
\Perfect, dédeyuat, seg. |-ypévoc,|-yyuévoc, : 
Pluperfect, |édedéyunv, ; déde-o, : th “ 0, 10a, [vHEves, 
lst Aorist M. aoe” — (d8G-at, |-aiuny, |-wuat, |-acbar,|-duevoc, 
ist Future M.|dé20 : j-Oipgy, | -ec0at,|-duevoc, 
fist Aorist P. |édéy0n déyO-nrt,|-€iny,  |-G, ~jvat, |-eic, 
1st Future P. Bsie-cpedi: -ofuny, |-ecbar, |-duevoc, 
Future P. \dedéé-onaz, . -oltuny, ecGat,|-duevoc 














5. A few of these et have a second aorist-middle ; as, 
seapPevopa, érvbbunv. 


CONTRACTED VERBS. 139 


CONTRACTED VERBS. 


lh. Verbs in aw, éw, and. 6w correspond entirely, in their 
general formation, to the rules and examples already given 
for verbs in o. 

2. But in the present and imperfect of the active and 
passive forms, where the vowels a, ¢, o stand immediately 
before the vowels. of the flexible endings, there arises in the 
- Attic and common Janguage a contraction, the rules for 
which are’as follows : 

3. Verbs in dw contract aw, ao, and aov into w; as, TUL 
GW, TIUG; TYLdOMEYV, TYL@pEV ; TYLdovoL, TYu@ot. -Other- 
wise they contract into a@; as, Tiwae, tiwa. ‘They also 
subscribe ¢; as, Tysdouue, TIUGpe ; TYderc, TLYLGC. 

_4, Verbs in é@ contract e€ into et, and_¢o into ov; as, 
pires, pire; grdéouerv, piAovpev. Otherwise they drop 
E; as, PLAEW, GiAW ; HidAéecc, peAcic. 

5. Verbs in éw contract 0, with a long vowel, into w; as, 
dnidw, OnA@® ; with a short vowel, or ov, into ov; as, n- 
Adete, OnAovTE ; OnAdovot, OnAovot. Otherwise into oz ;' 
as, OnAdye, aan 3 In the infinitive oezy is contracted into 
Ov”. 

6. Four verbs in de, agin Caw, Trelvaw, Oipdw, and 
xpaowat, contract ae into 7, and aez into 7; as, Caw, oye, 
CH, Sate, Sav; imperfect &wy, Ene, Cn. aa ssi TrELYHY, 
dupyy, xpyobal, ypnTat. 

7. Dissyllables in é@ are contracted in the imperative 
and infinitive only. Thus-we say, TED, TAEQ[ED, and ngs. 
rAd), sade : 








way 





CONTRACTED VERBS. 


140 


~ 


k- > 


6290 *20- ¢ ‘a 0 
‘ap0M1 13 ‘39 63) 22 
é ‘ . 
"PAN 
‘4a0 ‘ao0- ao ‘30 
‘ano ‘aoa | “94 99 - ‘29 
4m ‘aon- D ‘an- 
VIO i 
‘a0 ‘n00- | ‘ao ; *20- 
19 20 ‘a03- | 94 92 93- 
é ‘ te 6 
“9 “aon D ‘aD- 
po (Dn) J 
sd 


20°30 “a0. ‘20- 
‘AML 72 932 «| tagy 93. ‘33 
‘D  ‘an- ‘nD §3n- 
¢ ¢ - ~ 7 
TONG 
“TALLVUAIWI 
‘00- ‘ao *20- 
‘03- ‘ale ‘A0L 12 '33- 
‘on- s Dy ‘3D- 
ong: 
. ‘LOWMAAANT 
,? 
‘00- ‘ao 30- 
*03- _ aor ‘A0L 13 99- 
‘on- F ‘D ‘on. 
‘jong 


> 


SQ4I4 pajzoniquod fo sajduney, 


‘ASNT, INIsayg 











‘a0 ‘20- '30-000X 
‘ kaa toes 
OL #2 9 big ‘23-079 
D 2D- D 20-112 
“dan surg 
} 
\ 3 
‘a0 ‘30 | ‘Sao ‘Ja0- | ‘aao ‘a00-0ndX3 
"72 §9a~ | ‘Sng 459g ‘ano ‘a02-4763 
‘oD fap-'| - ‘Sp Gan- | ‘am ‘a0D hg 
‘Lon surgy 
"10 720- | ‘S20 ‘5730- ‘9 ‘mo-oadX 
we "1398 S92 . £5733- ‘0 = ‘3-76 
D aap 90 ‘Sran- ‘9 ‘opens 
wpynsury 


COOW SAILVOIGNI—AOIOA BALLON. 


‘20 





ay 





141 


CONTRACTED VERBS. 


“SoLago ‘SoLdov- 1 ‘Sono ‘Suoaoo- | ‘So1aao 
‘So1ago ‘Sotdo3- | ‘Slono ‘Sloaoe- ‘30100 
0149 ‘SoLA0n- ‘Slo ‘Slonon- 0140 
‘WON ead’ | it 
“aaipiuasyy 
‘an0-000N *az30-0adX *e 
‘9 ‘mMo0- ‘mM ‘lio- i) ‘M0- 
¢s 4 ~ ¢ 
10 9 ‘og- | ‘92 & * ‘gs | ‘aan @  'm3- 
‘ bar ‘ tha é bmmna 
a ee p ‘lp te 
"ANT 
70 "100- “0 ‘100- 70 *700- 
‘a2 20 ‘toa- | ‘32 20 ‘703- | ‘aan 20 ‘703- 
9 “10p- ‘9  “10p- ‘9 “op- 
Pd 


‘S02a00-0adX 


"aja-y1p = ‘a733-y1b *% 


‘HATLINIANI 
6@ P ‘lio- 

‘aon | ‘aon & ‘lig9 
‘D ‘up 

“ong 

‘MATLLONALENs 
‘20 . 100 
‘alt | ‘aot 20 ‘203- 
‘@ “10D- 

SS sd GOD 

WTAILVLIdO 


‘200-0ndX og 


*aao 
‘Joraog-y7d | ‘ago . ‘a03-y7¢ 
‘SoLaop-n11 “49 © ‘aop-ms 
‘sty "qONT 
‘SHTAIOILUVd 


= cae 
| *p0g0 ‘noa00-ond¥ | ‘am ‘amo-oadX °¢, 
“pono = ‘n 0203-47 0 «‘ama-yid °S 
‘99 =6‘ponop-rht | ‘am “amp-ms *t 
"W9,J . sey 
“91g DULUO AT 
apres tarap-ns + 
‘lo- | ‘S20 —‘Slto- ‘9 = «m0-020X%. *g3 
‘li3- ‘Sle ‘5li3- ‘™ ‘3-470 + 
‘ip- | ‘Sp ‘Slip-' ‘9 ‘op-nit °F 
‘UDInNsurgy 
‘709- | ‘520 ‘S200- 0 © 6‘2M00-900X  *g 
“703 | ‘520 ‘510g3- | “an go | ‘amh03-y79  °% 
“op- | S@ ‘Srop- ‘) ~ “mhon-nit "ft 
“UDINGUIY - 


aie 


142 


CONTRACTED VERBS. 


‘avompo 13 


‘ano ‘a00- 


‘DL ano ‘A03- 


‘am ‘aop- 


‘g0- | ‘a0 £20 ‘20 = §20- ‘a0 §30= 
i ‘299 43 633 ‘Ago 72 oe {a0go 312 ‘336 
- 6on- - - \ 
zo se oo 2 BPe 
"LNT “jong 
“LNGSAUT 
WAILLVUAd WI 
“a0 {20- ‘a0 ‘o0-] ‘a0 ‘20- ‘20 ‘o0- 
‘390 12. ‘39-| ‘nganl ‘ao “oa- | ‘aligo | ‘aogo 22 ‘33 | ‘aoganl ao ‘03- 
D ‘an “e ‘op- ‘Dp 9p “@ ‘op- 
br @ ¢ 4 : bad ¢ a @ 
Pad PAT 6 
*LOWAUTAW] 
‘a0 ‘a0-. ‘20 400- : ‘a0 ‘30- ‘a0 ! 00- 
‘299 12 ‘a3- ‘noanl 4 00 “93- ‘aogo | ‘a0go 32 ‘33- | ‘aogai! a0 ‘o3- 
bp ‘3p ‘9 ‘on- ‘n ‘gn-' %@ ‘Ons 
- , } [ ( 
(DMN T ’ 19UT 


‘ESNE], INAsaag 
< 


GOOW TALLVOIGNI—'SaOIOA AICGIN 











‘20, 20~ ‘a0 «= *n00-000X “g 
‘ogo 13 {3a ‘a0 = ‘no3-y7h °S 
‘D ‘an- ‘9 ‘nop-nis Tt 

- eoynduig, pace 
‘a0 ‘30- | ‘a0 ‘aoo- ‘a0 ‘00-0adX3 “g 
on Ja ‘ag- ‘ao ‘a03- | ‘alr! a0 ‘03-193 *% 
‘nap-'| “@ ‘nop-| fo ‘gn-rina3 ¥ 

~ , = + 
*LDInNgUurg : 
sage 

‘ao f20-) 90 ‘ho- ‘ao ‘o0-000X “g 
‘pe 12 '33-| “& g-| “mil ao “03-19 °g 


‘p ‘2D- 6 


; TAISSVd 


‘© ‘op-tha 3 


. 








=x | ‘Soaarigo ‘Soaano0-Owh “pgos0-ondk “g 
a toasn = ‘haan . ‘Soaanino ‘Soaanloa-y7d S "19033-Y1P °% 
‘Soagn Soasnon-ms  *t ; ““pgosp-mh, *T 
“INEST ; ENGST 
“WIdIOLLYVE “HATLLINIANI 
w “am ‘amg- ‘9 ‘ho-. ‘9 ‘0-! * ‘9 ‘lo-| - a) ‘m0- ‘9 ‘lo- | ‘0 ‘ho- ‘9 ‘mo-0ndX “g 
B ‘ML ag ‘ang- \tago & ‘u3- | vgarl (03- ‘ogo —- | ‘aogo. ‘lia ‘angen @ ‘ma- [pn bu ug-| & ‘Ug-| aor 'o3-y7 “Ge 
2) ‘acy ‘aenp- D ‘up- “ ‘one D ‘up- oe) ‘OD- ‘ ‘lip. 7) ‘lp “© ‘op-th L 1 Ps 
= ~ 
Q ‘Pin . yong . ang 
sa sue : ogy 
i : ° 
: INISTUT 
an é 
e MHATLONOLENS 
ei : 
. ae, 
‘ajo ‘a100- “10 “100- *70 ‘100- “70 ‘100~" “710 *100- 95 *700-} ‘70 “1700-| ‘70 ‘700- *10 “100-000X *g 
‘oa ayo “A103 ‘390 20 "703- ‘nganl 70 “joa- Kaligo 90 ‘703- ‘aogo 10 ‘703- |‘aogen 70 “03 |'02 20 ‘203- “o 30 ‘203-|‘alerl 70 ‘03-79 “Z, 
‘ag ‘a10D- ‘ry 900%}. | & “0D- w “0D- "  ‘& “op- i “o0- ‘a “0D- “ “on- io Sons t 
PMG “pong | samnSurg 
: ‘ INISEAg 


GTAILLV.IdO 


144 REMARKS ON VERBS. 


REMARKS ON VERBS IN @. 
Active Voice. 


1. In the third person plural of the imperativ e, in Attic, 
the termination -6vTwy is more usual than -érwoav. The 
former occurs ever in the Ionic writers ; as, JJ. 8, 517, 
ayyeddovtwv ; Od. 1, 340, mevdvTwv. The form -érwoar, 
however, is found in the older Attics occasionally ; as, 
_ Thucyd. 1, 34, wabérwoar ; Plat. Leg. 6, p. 759, D., depé- 


a av. 


Some Doric tribes omitted the v ; as, rorobvTw, drrooTerAdy- 
T@ ; whence the Latin imperative in the third person plural, 
cmanto, d-¢ento, 

. ‘The optative in OL, particularly in Y the contracted 
“ial has also in Attic the termination -olqY ; 5; as, Trooiny, 
dcdoinr, duepwronrv, &c. This form oi7y is also found 
in ig and Doric writers. ‘The termination in -orqy oc- 
curs less frequently in the barytone verbs than in iitcon- 
tracted ones ; yet still we er in Attic, dcabadoiny, pa- 
voiny, weTrotOoin, &c. 

4. In some perfects in nia the Ionians rejected the let- 
ters 7 in the dual and plural, not, however, in the singu- 
lar; as, réOvaror, TEOvapEY, rébatore, teOvact. Besides 
zéOvnka and éornka, the form Bé6nKa is also syncopated 
in this way by the Attic writers; as, Gébayev, Bebdor, &c. 


5. The primitive form of the pluperfect, which occurs in | 


| Ho omer and Herodotus, was -ea, in the third person -ce; 
, Byeyovec, atrobebjkee. Hence arose, on the one hand, 
the Doric form -ea; as, ovvayayoxela, and, on the other, by 
. Beeson, the Attic form -n in the first person ; as, 707. 
- 6. Instead of the termination -evoay for the pluperfect, 
the form écav is almost universal in Ionic and Attic ; as, 
- dnnkosoay, &yeyovecay. 

7. Instead of the form -ouuz, in the first aorist of the Op- 
tative, the Attics chiefly use the primitive AZolic form -sva, 
-elac, -éle, after the example of the Ionians and Dorians, 
but only in the second and third persons singular and third 
‘person plural. 








. The form in évrwy was also used by the Dorians. 


) 
4 


i Cl i 





REMARKS ON VERBS. 145 


‘ ~ Passive. Voice. 


1. In the perfect optative the z fs subscribed under the n 
or @; as, TETUUAENY, TETYLQO, TeTLUATO, &c. Instead of 
weuviunr, kekThpny, &c., there was another form with . 
It seems, therefore, as if to the roots PELVN-, KEKTN-, the 
form of the optative present had been appended, peuviotro, 
kekThotto, whence came peuvéwTo and KexTé@To, con- 
tracted peuv@to. So péuvoto (wepurqo) is found in Xen. 
Anab. 1, 7,5 

2. The sae subjunctive is exactly like the present of 


the same mood, -@yat, -7; -7jTat; as, TeptA@pat, TEpLAG, - 


TEplAnra. But it seldom occurs, and, instead of it, the 
circumlocution trepiAnuévoc @ is used. 

3. In the third person plural of the perfect and pluper- 
fect, the Ionians and Dorians change the v before raz and 
To into a, in which case the original aspirated consonant 


again enters before the*a; as, te0ddarat, from TEC appa . 


(Sarre), for TeBappévoe elot ; ; kexptoatat, from KEKpUMLAL 
(xpérrw), for KEKPULLEVOL.. elot.. So, also, xatetAtyaro for 
karetAtypevot HOA ; éosodyaro for cecaypévot joav. 

4. If a o, arising from the linguals d; 6, 7, 6, precedes 
the termination of the perfect_passive -waz, -oas, -Tat, it is 
changed into d before the termination -atat, -ato. , Thus, 
éoxevddaro for é EOKEVAOLEVOL noav, from oKevdsa ; atoll 
dato for éorodropévot joav, from oToAiso. 

5. In a similar way, the termination -avrat of the per- 
fect is changed into -éaTaz ; as, avarertéatat for cogs 
tavrTat; émetetpéarto for é émensipavro. 

6. In the same way ¥, in the third person of the present 


and aorist, optative passive and middle, of the imperfect 


passive sind middle, and even of the present, in, some 
words, is changed into @. In the optative this is very. 
frequent, even in the Attic poets; «s, tevOoiato, dtodepol- 
aro, aio@avoiaro, for TrevOotvto, &e. Tn the imperfect we 
find ErelpOaro for ére_p@vTo; in the second aorist, dmKé- 
ato for drixovro; 3, StepOapéaro for dtepOdpovro. In the 
present we have, in Herodotus, & Kiara, Ovvéatat. — 








146 DIALECTS OF VERBS. 


DIALECTS OF VERBS IN @. ; . 
Active. * 


1. In the old Homeric language, and generally in the 
lonic and Doric dialects, the termination cxoy is annexed 
to the historical tenses of the indicative active, passive, 


and middle. In barytones, and those whose characteristic. 


is €, él, or 7, this termination succeeds ¢ in the imperfect 
and second aorist ; as, wéwmeoxe for Ereumte ; hdveokn for 
épdvn. “Where two «’s come together, one is often re- 
jected; as, mwAéoxero for émwAéeto; Kadéonero. for éxa- 
Aéeto. If @ is the radical vowel, then a comes before the 
termination ; as, Eaoxeg for eiacg; abdfqoaone for abdfoe. 
These forias are never mere imperfects or aorists, but have 
always the force of an action repeated in past time. The 
frequentatives in oxw are probably derived from this source. 
The augment is usually, but not always, wanting. . , 

2. The termination é¢ (second person singular present) 
and ecy (infinitive) were, in Doric, sometimes e¢ and é€y re- 
spectively ; as, ovpiadec for ovpigerc ; ovpiodey for ovpi- 
Celv. cz} 
3: In verbs pure in d@ the: Afolians pronounced sep- 
arately the «subscribed in the second. and third persons 
singular of the present; as, Godic, yeAdi, for Boac, yeAd. 

4. The Dorians make the first person plural of all tenses 
- end in peg instead of pev ; as, épiodouec for épigower; ddu- 
kovpec for adtkovpev ; dedotxapec for dedoikayer. 

_ §. The third person plural in -o« ends in Doric in -71; 
and-before this final syllable, instead of the long vowel or 
diphthong in the barytones, the short vowel with vis placed, 
in a manner analogous to the dative plural of the third de- 
clension, and tothe participles in a¢; as, dvarAéxovts for 
dvarrAékovot ; pwoxOigevrt for woyOicovot. From this ter- 
mination comes the Latin termination in nt. In the com- 
mon dialect, and afterward in the Alexandrian, from -ayts 
in-the perfect arose the termination -av; as, éopyay, zép- 
play. | . TAL. ivedt se 
6. In Doric, particularly, verbs pure in dw have, ¢fter 
contraction, 7 for @; as, powTtg¢ for dorac. The Aitics 
retain this in the vérbs ¢éw, rervdw, dipaw, and ypdouat. 
In the imperfect the Dorians contract ae, not into a, but inte 
A; as, Epoityn, ETPOTH. 


“-_ si 





-- 


reg 


DIALECTS OF VERBS. | 147 


7. The termination ov of the third person plural of the 
imperfect and second aorist was in some of the ccammon 
dialects -ooay, and remained also in the Alexandrian -dia- 
lect; as, soy dcooay: This is particularly the case in the 
Greek version of the Old ‘Testament, and also in the New. 

8. The second person in -7¢, both i in the subjunctive and 
indicative, was often lengthened in the old language by the 
addition of the syllable @a, which has remained» in the 
folic, Doric, Ionic, and in some words in the Attic dialect. 
Thus: we find: s0éAqa0a for e0éAge. In Attic, 700a for 7¢ ; 
Epnoda for pn¢ ; oicOa for oidac. 

9. The third person singular of the subjunctive i in Ionic 
received the addition of the syllable oz; as, €A@you for éA- 
09; Adbyot for Ad6y, &c. ‘This oc the Dorians changed 
into TL; as, EBeAgrt. 

10. In the old poets, the subjunctive active, if the penult - 

be long, has, for the most part, in the first. and second per- 
sons plural, the short vowel instead of the long one, name- 
ly,o for. Thus we have, I/. 2, 72, dwphgowey ; Od. 15, 
297, épviouer ; I]. 21, 443, Grrodbaouer, &c. ‘These must 
not be mistaken for futures. 
11. In the infinitive, instead of the form ecy and iv, the 
termination pevat, and shortened pev, was frequently used 
in the old: language, as, for example, by Homer and He- 
siod, and in the AMolic and Doric dialects. Thus, EA OEpE- 
vat and éAOéuev for EA ELY 5 muevéwevat for mivery ; ovTa- 
ev for ovtayv, &c. - 

12. Hence, from such a form as TUNTELED, we obtain, 
by syncope, the lonic turtéev, and from this. latter, by cra- 
sis, the Attic TUmtery. From tumtéev comes also, by con- 
traction, the Doric timrer.. - 

13. In the participle, the Dorians used in the feminine, 
instead of ovoa, the form ovoa, not only in the present, as, 
KayAdgotoa, éxotoad, but also in the second aorist; as, Aa- 
botoa, Atroica. ‘They employed also the form’ evoa in 
verbs pure for éovea; as, Carevoas for Cnrovoat ; ~yeAeioa 
for yeA@oa, &c. The FEolians and some Dorians used 
for the circumflexed ovoa the form @oa; as, AliT@oat. 
Hence arose the Laconian form @a@; as, Trarddaray for 7ral~ 
Covoay. 

14. ‘The olians formed the termination of the partici-. 
ples -@v and wy in eic, because they formed the verbs in 
ém and dw in qu; thus they said, dpeis, otouxeic, from 


Spy, OToiy ne. . 


a 





fon 
ZS 
cd 


148 DIALECTS OF VERBS. 


‘1b. The termination of the first ‘aorist active, ac, acu, 
av, was, in pee aC, aLOa 5 as, TAaVvvoale, Pipatseae 
oatc, &e. ) ee 

16. Instead of wcoay in hs third person plural of the im: 
perative, the termination wy was very much used in [onic 







Doric, and particularly Attic ; as, énéo0wv, rqebsabon, pas 


age &c. 


. Passive. 


I. In verbs pure an ¢ is inserted before eas, which the 
[onic prose writers preserve unchanged ; as, dsatpéear, ho- 
béeat. 

2. The termination e0, which in the ‘Attic dialect was 


contracted *fto ov, is in Doric, and semetimes in Ionic, . 


contracted into ev; as, érAev, payer, &xéAev, 


3. Instead of the termination of the first person plural in — 
_ pea, the Aolians said peOev ; as, run TépeOev. 


4. Instead of 7» in the first person singular of the second 
aorist, av is found; as, érivayv, Theocr. 4,53. In the first 
person plural of the aorists the Dorians said NEC for NEV 5 
as, ExAivOnuec. : 

5. In the third person 1 plural of the aorists thie fEolians 
and Dorians said ev for yoav; as was the case, also, in the 
old Ionic. Thus we have épianver, Il. 2, 668 ; aver, 


Pind. Ol. 10, 101. 


6. The infinitive of the aorists is in Doric ~jyev for -7vaL, 
abbreviated from the old form in “neva, which form is fre- 
quent, particularly in Homer ; as, CorOundiineral, Wh 2. 
124 ; pies ka re Il. 1, 187. 


Middle. 


1. The form ao of the second person, first aorist middle, 
occurs frequently 1 in the Ionic and Doric writers ; as, Il. 5, 
88, eyelvao; Theocrit. 29, 18, 20fjKa0. 

2. Hence arose, in the Syracusan dialect, the form -a, 
the o being omitted; as, @voaytec for g@vodortec, Theocr. 
4,28. 

3. In the third person of the optative, first aorist middle, 
-aiaro for -atvto is very frequent in the Ionic and Attic 


poets; as, Od. 1, 164, apnoaiato; Herod. 3, 75, dvaxrn- 


saiato ; Aischyl. Pers. 360, éxowoalato, &e. 


&, 





‘ 
; 
A 

1 





VERBS. 149 


VERBS IN mu. 


“1, Verbs in pt are formed from verbs of the third conju 
‘gation in dw, éw, 6w, and vw, 





iy 
*i, . 


’ ey. - 
er 1. By prefixing the reduplication with ¢ i. 
~~ _ 2. By changing w into jit. 
oe 3. By lengthening the penult. 
2. In this way are formed the following : 
tornut, from  ordo. 
TtOnut,' ti). ea 
Site SS eee 
Ocikvim, * OELKVvdw. 


3. If the verb begin with a vowel, with mr or or, then 
é aspirated is alone prefixed ; as, @, (nut; mrdw, imrnu. 
This is called the Improper Reduplication. . 

4, The reduplication takes place in the present and in- 
perfect merely. 

5. Verbs in vt have no reduplication ; neither is it found 
in those verbs in pz which are formed from verbs of three 
syllables; as, xpeuvdw, Kpéurvgu. It is also. wanting in 
~ from odo. 

. Verbs in pt have only three’ tenses of that form, name- 

AY a present, imperfect, and second aorist. They take 

the other tenses from verbs in w. Thus, dédwpt makes d6- 
ow and dédwxa from déw. , 

7. Verbs in vue have no second aorist, nor the optative 
or subjunctive mood. When these moods are needed they 
are borrowed from forms in 0. 

8. Verbs in pt have no second future, second aorist pas 
sive, nor perfect middle. 





1. Old form IO, changed to riOnut, in order to i dei an aspi- 
rate from beginning two successive syilables. 


N 2 


150 VERB. 


. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 
















































































Jeixv-vut, ve, vol. UToV,. © VTOV. wuev, VTE, 





Te: . . Moods and Tenses. = 
Indie, inp. Ope Subj. inf, | | oPart | 
tor-njLl, -a0i, | -ayv, | -6, | -dvar, || -de¢, 
TiO-nu, «|, --eTL, «| -elnv, | -6,. | -évat, -ei¢, 
Present, 6i6-wytt, -of, -OLnr, -6, | '-6vat, | -ov¢, 
deixv-vut, | -vOes vat, | -v¢. 
torny, 
, ériOnv ASS “ 
Imperfect ak The rest like the present. 
P : édidar, ‘ = 

édeixvvur, : 
éorny, ott, | orainv, | ord, | orfvat, | orde, 

2d Aorist, , 0nv, ——«| Ee, Seinn;s | 8G, | Belvas, | Feic,| 

_ | sor, déc, . | Soinr, 66, | dodvat, | dodc. 

The other tenses are regularly formed from verbs in 
Thus : taupe, batty 
; Indic. : Imper. Opt. Subj. | | Infin. Part. 
| oTHo-a, . ee fot, | 2.4 seep, | -an, 
; P70-0, s+ + | Out, | . «1 rely, | -wr, 
ist F weure; 000-u, - © = | Out, | . ~. | -ety, | -ar, 
deig-w,” » + 6 | Ott, |. . | Hetyy | -or. 
éoTynoa, OT7}O-0”, : -QUll, | -@, | Ql, -ae, 
P . &6: Ka ° © « ° . fe «ji e@ ie . ° 
ist Aorist, EAL ee a 
e 9 . e ee e e . o . ay e . 
édevéa, Oeif-ov, | -ayst, | -w, | -at, -ac. 
Eornk-a, “€, “Out, | -W, | -éval, | -e, 
Té0ek-a, -€, -Oull, | -0, | -éval, | -OC, 
Perfect, dédok-a, -é, -Ollll, | --W, | -éval, -O¢, 
— dédety-a, -e, “Olt, | -@, | -évat, | -O¢. 
Pluperfect. 
. * | 
éorjkety or eiornKery, éreOeixery, Ededdxerv, Ededetyetv. 
Numbers and Persons, 
PRESENT. 

Singular. ‘Dual. ~ _ Plural. 
loT-nl, NC, 70t, arov, ~.arov, dev, are, Gor, 
TiO-nut, == NC, NOL, eTov, ETOV, ‘Elev, €Te, elot, 
Sid-wut, we, Ot, oTov,  — oTo?, omev, OTe, « Odst, 

dou. 


ty 


a 


Singular. 


tor-my, = 0% 
ériO-nv, 1¢, —0, 
édid-wv, We, + @, 
édeixv-uv; ve, 2, 


Singular. 


goT-4V, | 1%, 
&6-nv, NS, ls 


&6-wy,, @t; ~ a, 


Singular. 


tord-01, 
Th, 


Tide-Tt, 
dido-0, 
Singular. 


deixvd-6t, 


ory-0, OTHTO, 

6éc, béra, 

d6¢, © d6Tw, 
Singular. 

torai-nv, 

Tibei-nv, no, 2 

didoi-nv, 
Singular. 

oTai-nv, 

Gei-nv, a, ”, 

doi-nV, 





VERB. 151 
IMPERFECT. 

Dual. Plural. 3 
dtov, arny, dev, ate, acay, 
ETOV, ETNY, EuEV, ETE, ECaY, 
oTov, OTNY, ouev, OTe, ocay, 
trov,  wvryr, duev, ute, voarv. 
Seconp Aorist. 

Dual. . * Plural. 

TOV, QTNY, HEV, TE, NOay, 

eTOV, étnv, euev, eT&, €00Y, 

oro”, OTnV, OMEVv, . OTE, ocay. 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Dual. Plural. 

Tov, TOV, - TE}. TWOaY. 
Skconp Aorist. 
Dual. Plural. 
OTHTOV, OTHTAY, OTHTE,  OTHTWOAY, 
Gérov, . Oétwr, bére, bérwoar, 
dérov,  ddtwr, déte, déTwoav 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 Presenr. 
Dual. Plural. 
| nrov, rnv NLEV, mre an and 
Sreconp Aorist. J 
Dual. Plural. 


ee 





152 } 


VERB. 
ad - 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
| Present. 
: Singular. sag os Dual, ac 
lor-6, Hh tov, — prow, 
710-6, NS, M, 770V, TOY, 
~ 616-0, QC, Q,; OTov, OTOr, 
| Seconp Aorist. 
Singular. Dual. J 
__OTO, OTHC, OTF, OTHTOV, OTHTOY, 
G6, Oye, OH, Oyrov,  Oyrov,. - 
6,  Od@¢, 00, _Oérov, ddrov, | 





INFINITIVE MOOD. 


Firal. 
Gpev, fre, Got, 
QUEV, TE, Odtl, 
GEev, ATE, GOOt. 


OTOWLEV, OTHTE OTWOE, 
OGuev, 
Odusv, OTe dddt. 


Ojre, Odor, 




















PRESENT. 
forévat. ribévat. O.ddvas. Oelkyn tu. 
Seconp Aorist. 

OTHvat. Seivat. dotvat. - 

PARTICIPLES. 

: PRESENT. Seconp Aorist. - 
ior-de, doa, ay, | ord, ordoa, oTay 
T16-zic, eioa, év, ; Veic, Seioa, SE 
610-ovc, ovca, év, | dove, dodoa, ddéy. 
Setxy-tc, doa, oy. : 

PASSIVE VOICE. " 
The Moods and Tenses. 
Indic. Imp. Opt. Subj. Inf, | Part. 
tor-aual, | -aoo, | -aiunv, | -Guat, | -aobat, | -dyevoc, 
Pp TiO-euat, -£00, | -eluny, | -Guat, | -ecBar, | -éuevoc, 
resent, did-ouat, | -aa0, | -oiuny, | -Gpat, | -oobat, | -duevoc, 
deikv-vuat, | -voo, | -vobat, | -vjpevos. 
loraunv, 
, éribéuny, . ' 
Imperfect, Fl 288 by ge ‘The reat like the present. " 
édetkviuny, 

















VERB. 153 


Tenses formed from Verbs in w. 





Indic. Imp. Opt. .| Subj. Infin. Part. 



























































EoT-apat, -a00, |-aiunv,|-Guat,| -dobaz, -apévoc, 
ré0-eyat, | -eto0, |-eiunv,|-@pyar,| -eioGat, ~E4uEVOE, 
Perfect, ; déd-opat, -000, |-olunv,|-@pat,| -do0a, _|-oévoc, 
dé6-erypat, =: -elxOat, |-erypévoc. 
éoTauny, 
érebeiuny, beet oe ‘ 
Plup., | adedduny, The rest like the perfect. . 
édedetyuny, 
éoTdo-ouat,|. . . -otuny, . . | -ec8ar, ~OMEvOE, 
3d Fut. ; TeOsia-opat,| . . « |-oiunr,|. .| -ec8az, ~Ouevog, 
| dedda-oua, |. . . j-oiunr,| . . | -eo8a, -Ouevoc. 
éorabnyv, |ardb-nre,| -einv,| +6, “vat, -ei¢, 
tot A éréOnv, _|réO-ntt, | -einy,| -6, -valt, | -éic, 
StAOF.-¢ | 2560nv,  660-nrt, | -eigv,| -6, | -prat, “|. -el¢, 
EdeixOny, | duane ~ei¢. 
oTabjo-opat, | . é -oinV, . «| -eadas, | -omevoc, |. 
Ist F t. |reOjo-owat, |. . « |-oiunr,|. .| -e0at, | -omevoc, 
ma an doOyo-ouat, |. . « |-olunv, . .| -eobat, | -ouevoc, 
devyOjo-owat,). . - . «| -eo0ar, | -ouevog. 
Numbers and Persons. ! 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
| PRESENT. 
Singular. — Dual. . Plural. 
ioTa- 
Tibe- | 
bido- ta oat, Tat,| pelov, a0ov, aor, pela, ofe, vra 
Oeixvu- er 
- Imperrect. 
Singular Dual. | Plural. 
lord-— 
éribé- 


251d6- nv, oo, T0, | peor, abov, obyy, peba, ofc, vte 
bdecv0- 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


. PRESENT. aN 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 
lorda- 
yg > G0, 06w,|  cBov, cbr, offe, oOucay 


Oeikvvu- 





+154 | VERB. ee 


OPTATIVE MOOD 





oe PRESENT. | =~ 

Singular. - Dual. Fi iets o —neaa, 
lora: + [ee =) : 
Tibet. am 0, To, | Yebov, cOov, oOyv, | eda, obe, vrto, 
61008 - a ; | 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT. 
Singular. ~ “Dual. + ok Plural. 


lor-Guar, %, Fras, 
TiO-Guat, 7, Tat, 
§id-Gual, @, @Tat, 


Guebov, jo8ov jobov,} usa, Hobe, Gvrat, 


GueOov, Fobov jobov, |. aueOa, Fobe, Gvrat, 
Gueloy, Gobov Gobov, | Gyeba, Goble, Gra 





INFINITIVE... ~~. ~~ ~PARTICIPLE. 

- PRESENT. .. PREsENT. 3 
ioracbat, lorduev-oc, 

. tiBec8at, ; - TiOéuEv-o¢, ee 

. didocPat, d1dduev-oc, Ms 


Ocixvvcba. _. deikvbuev-oc, 


_- MIDDLE’ VOICE. _. 
The Moods and Tenses. 


The present and imperfect are the same as in the pas- 
sive. | : 
The Second Aorist. 

















Indic, | Imp. | opt |. Subs. | tnfin, «| Part, 
éoTdunv, | ordoo, | oraiunv, | oTdua, | ordoba, | orduevoc, 
&0éunr, Béoo, Veiunv, | Youa, | Béoba, | Séuevoc, 
édouny, dd00, doiunv, dpa, ddc8ar, - Sopevoc,. 





- Tenses formed from Verbs in . 














oe ~ gornoduny, | orjo-at,| -aiuny, | -wpar, | -acBat, | -duevoe, 

Ist Aorist, C7 rs cc ce 

édwxauny, |. + +|- pero lice sips ode es 
éderEajnr, | dei§-at, | -atunr, | -wpat, | -acbat, | ~dyevog. 
OTHO-O"dl, |. . . ‘ 
Sno-owat, |}. . .C vs 

Ist Future, Bsaaouss, 22, CT -e00al, | -duevog. 
 Oeig-oumt, [2 . .F - ( : 





VERB. 155 


Numbers and Persons 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 
seg Szconp Aorist. 
Singular. -. ° Dual. 




















' ordéobat, 
Fécbat, 
ddobat. 


: 7 
| oTa- 


' Plural. 
tord- ; - ‘ 
&0é- ae go, To, | peGov, obov; cOyv, | pela, abe, ro. 
&d6- ! 
¢ IMPERATIVE MOOD. i 
Szconp AoRIsT. 

Singular. » Dual. Plural. 

oTd- — , 7 : 
Gé- co, 30a, obov, cur, abe, clucap 
66- ; 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 
Seconp Aorist. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 
OTa- tae 
og t pny, 0, T0,| peBov, aborv, abny, pea, , ofc, vrTo. 
of- 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Seconp Aorist. 

Singular. Dual. Plural. 
oT-Gual, 7, grat, | duebov, Fobov, jobov, | Gueba, Fobe, Grras, 
F-auat, 7, _qTat, | OueOov, Foor, HoBov, | GueOa, Hobe, Gvrrat, 
d-Guat, @,° Tat, | Guebov, Goov, Gobov, | Gueba, Gobe, Grrat. 

INFINITIV E MOOD. PARTICIPLE. 

SECOND Aorist. Seconp Aorist. - 


ms pevoc, pévy, mevon 
*: : 


3 


156 REMARKS ON VERBS. | 


FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
ACTIVE VOICE, 
The Imperfect 


is formed from the present by prefixing the augment and 
changing pt into v ; as, TOnul, ériOny. 


The Second Aorist } ° 


1S formed from the imperfect by dropping the iedicateins 
as, ETLOny, EOnv ;. or by! changing the improper tigi ra ce 
into thé augment; as, loryy; Eorny. 


“ pilinte VOICE. 


The Present 


is formed from the present active by shortening the penult 
and changing pz into par; as, lorque, lordpas. 


The Imperfect 


18 fornied from the present by prefixing the augment. and 
changing reid into inv ; as, pepe drial 


- MIDDLE VOICE. 


The Second Aorist 


is formed from the. imperfect by dropping the reduplication - 
as, ériOéunv, 20éunv ; lorduny, ge w 


REMARKS ON VERBS IN pe. 


1. The number of verbs in ji, in the Attic and common 
dialects, is very small, and among these few are only four 
which have a complete conjugation peculiar to themselves, 
namely, téOnyt, tnt, lornut, and did. — 

2. These verbs were chiefly used in the Eolo-Doric 
dialect; and in the writers of that dialect verbs very fre- 
quently occur in the form jz, which in other dialects termi. 
nate In dw, éw ; as, viKnut, Popnut, for ViKEW, Hopes. 

8. These forms in ju. are to be regarded as among the 


REMARKS ON VERBS. 157 


oldest in the Samneab: and occur frequently in the poems 
of Homer and Hesiod. After the dialects arose, the Ionic 
and Attic retained some of these verbs, namely, those above 
given (§ 1) and those in vt, instead of which they very 
seldom use the forms in jw. - The Aolic, however, which 
retained the most of the ancient language, continued to use 
the greater part of them. 

4. Historically considered, then, the verb in ye must have 
been .at least as old as those in w, and of more extensive 
‘use than appears in the works which have come down 
to us. 

5. The first aorists in xa, of vorba 3 in pl, are thought to 
have been originally perfects, and to have been subsequent- 
ly used as aorists, when u peculiar form was introduced for 
the perfect.. 

6. The aorists in «a have not the rest of the moods after 
the indicative ; and, therefore, in giving the moods and 
tenses, we cannot say é0jKa, Onkoy, Onrayu, &c., but must 
pass to the second aorist ; as, éOnka, dEC, veiny, &e. 

7. In Ionic and Doric the forms EW, G0), OW, often occur 
in the present and imperfect singular, with the reduplication ; ; 
as, TLOsic, étiTiOEic, Otdoic, édidove, &e. 

8. In the third person plural the form doz is used by the 
Attics, which occurs also frequently in Ionic, and hence is 
called Ionic; as, TLOEGoL, dwddaot, &e. 

9. The first aorist in ka occurs in good writers almost 
exclusively in the singular and in the third person plural. 
In the rest of the persons the second aorist is more used, 
which, again, hardly ever occurs in the singular. 

10. The optative present and second aorist, as in the 
aorist passive of verbs in w, have in the plural, in the 
poets as well as prose writers, more commonly elev, etre, 
elev ; alwey, alte, aiev; oiper, ote, olev; instead of eiquer, 

elnre, &c. 

11. In the verb éornut, the perfect, pluperfect, and sec- 
ond aorist have an intransitive meaning, “to stand ;” the 
rest of the tenses a transitive one, “ to place.” Thus, £ Eo- 
THKG signifies “ I stand ;” eloricecy, “I was standing.” 
But Eorny, “ F stood, ” as a transient action. 

12. The form EOT aKa, which is found in the common 
‘grammars, occurs in later writers only, and i in a transitive 
sense, “I have placed.” ‘The Doric form éord«a, with the 
long penult, is distinct from this. 

QO 


158 - IRREGULAR OR pum Tye VERBS. 


IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS IN pt 


may be divided into three classes, each containing three 
verbs. 

I. From &@ are ‘ouvea elul, to Be ; elu and inut, to go. 

II. From &@ are derived (nu, to send ; quat, to sit; eipac, 
to clothe one’s self. : 

Ill. Keipas, t to lie down s ; lone, to’ hin 9 dni, to, say. 


CLASS I. 
cas Eli, to be, 
has been before conjugated, as it is used in some of its tenses 
as an auwiliory to the passive voice of verbs in @. 
2. Eis, to go. 
INDICATIVE MOOD, _ 


PRESENT. 
a ged SE Dual. Plural, 
eiut, ele or el, elot. troy, trop. lev, i elot, tot or 
IMPERFECT. » 


jew, he, et. | getrov,  getrgv. | Heyer, jerte, Hecoav. 
; e ; 
Future, eiow, First Aorist, eloa. PERFECT, eka, 


: -PLupERrFEct. | 
elk-erv, etc, et. | ectov, _eitgr. | exper, exte, evcav. 
| Szconp Aorist. 
tov, ec, te. |  terov,  lérgv. | louev, tere, tov. 
| IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
| PRESENT. 
tc oret = tra. ze trov, trwv. | tre, trecav. 


- Szconp Aonisr. ; ) 
fe, léra. | terov, leur. | tere, téraoay 


boo 

= 4) 
t 
le 


SLA 


IRREGULAR OR: DEFECTIVE’ VERBS. ~ 259 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


Seconp Aorist. 


Singular. Dual. _ Plural. 
Youur, low, tor. | torrov, idirgv. | tourer, torre, lovey 


i 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Seconp Aorist. 


iw, ine, in. | inrov,  iyrov. | taper, inte, twor 
INFINITIVE. - PARTICIPLE. 
' PRESENT. .  Seconp Aorist. 
levat. | | idv, todoa, idv. 
REMARKS, — 


1. The Attics regularly use the present tense of eiye in 
a future sense, ‘ I will go.” ‘This usage occurs also in 
Jonic.. The form efoouaz occurs in Attic only as the future 
of oida. 

2. The form ef is more used in Attic than cic. Homer 
has also eio@a; Il. 10, 450, &c. 

3. In the imperative, the form 10: is more used than el. 
For itwoay we have occasionally, in Attic, itwy. 

4. The imperfect 7ecy is nothing more than the form eiv 
with 7 as a prefix, analogous to which are the forms 7ef- 
dev and jjiov. The form 7ia, Attic 7a, also occurs, and is 
erroneously regarded by some as the perfect middle, just 
as 7jeLv is sometimes miscalled the pluperfect middle. The 
best grammarians regard 7ia as merely an Jonic form for 
qetv ; just as in TiOnue, the Ionic ériea is the same as 
br tOny ; and in elt, I am, the Ionic ja is the same as 7jv._ 

5. The form } qa never has the signification of the perfect, 
and jecv never that of the pluperfect; but both forms agree 
in this respect, and designate generally a time past, either 
absolutely, or with reference to another time ; that is, they 
stand for the aorist and imperfect. 

6. From what has been said respecting /evy, it will be 
seen at once how erroneous it is to subscribe the ¢ under 
the 7. This mistake arose from the tense in question 


being regarded as a pluperfect, and deduced from 7a. In 


~ 


160° IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


qa the subscript ¢ is correct, since this form is contracted 


from 7jia. 

7. We have, called léy the second aorist participle, 
since it follows the analogy of the aorist participle in hav- 
ing the accent on the ending. Others make it a present 


participle. 
3. "Int, to go. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 





PRESENT. 
Singular. Dual. — Plural. 
Inut, tye, Igor | terov, lerov. | ewer, tere, letor. 
’ IMPERFECT. 
. iecay. 
OPTATIVE MOOD. 
_ PRESENT. 
iein. 
INFINITIVE. '  PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT. . PRESENT. 
iévat. oe } ieic, iévroc. 
“MIDDLE VOICE. 
- "INDICATIVE MOOD. 
i} st PRESENT. ys: 
om . Singular. ~ Dual... *~ Plural. 
fepor, cat, tat. »| pebov, cOov,° obov. | peba, oOe, vrat 
3 IMPERFECT. me. 


‘tepqv, _ 00, 70. | pebov, obov, cOnv. |  peba, é o8e, vTo 


IMPERATIVE. ~ PARTICIPLE, 
PRESENT. r: Present. 
teoo, téobw. Th léuev-oc, 1, OV 
INFINITIVE. 


leobau. 


IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 161 


CLASS II. 
1. “Inut, to send. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. . 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 
‘mut, tye, igor. | terov, tetov. | “emer, ‘ere, lecoe 
ImpERFECT. 


inv, ing im | terov, lernyv. | tewev, tete, teoay. 


First Future. 


HO-W, El, ~ el. | ETOV, ° &éTOV. | Oey, ere, over. 
J 
First Aorist. PERFECT. ~ ’ PLuPERFECT. 
7Ka. | ela. |... elec. 


Seconp Aorist. 


hv, = fe, ih. | &rop, Ernv. | fuev,- Ere, Eoav 
IMPERATIVE MOOD.’ 
PRESENT. 
tet, | léro. | | terov, lérav: -| tare, lérwoar. 


- Seconp Aorist. 5. 
xe 
&, —s -: Et. | €rov, ~ Erov. | . &e, Erwcar. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT, 


fei-nv, 65 Qe | ~ QTOV, ATHY. | apres QTE, moar. 


First Future. PERFECT. 
HOO. Bar, elxoupe. 


4 


mee ik SEconD Aorist. 
el-nv, 1% 7. | Tov, Arn. 41 per, Te, noav. 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Tees, | PRESENT. j 
46, ine, i. | ijrov, —lijrov. | layer, igre, loot. 
O2 - 


| ae IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


> 


PERFECT. . 
Singular. Pe” a Plural. 
BIK-@, 0% | aro», NTOV. | @pev, re, wot. 


" > 
Seconp Aorist. 
, Mi, |. rov,  yrov. | duev, jre, oe 


INFINITIVE MOOD. | 


PRESENT. First Furursg. 
lévat. bey Roe. 
PERFECT. | Srconp Aorist. 
el: vat. | _. elvas, 
PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT, . First Forors. 
leic, beioa, bév. | HOWV, hoovoa, oor. 
PERFECT. : SEconD Aorist, 
elxéc, elxvia, elie. . | el, eloa, Ey. 


PASSIVE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


hid . = 3 PRESENT. . 

Smgular. Dual. Plural. 
fe-wat; oat, Tat. | pebov, obov, ofov. | peba, ofe, vrae. 
& : 

od IMPERFECT. — 
ié-unv, 0, To. | pedov, odor, obmv. | jueOa, obe, vro 
| ~ Psrrscr. gs * 
el-uat, oat, tat. | pebov, abov, ofov. | eba, ofe, vrat. 
PLUPERFECT. ; ' 


el-uny oo, 0. | peGov, obov, obyr. | | pela, ofe, vo. 


Pie Peruse: - “‘Fiper Aorist. First Forore. 
eloopat. | 80yv andvelOnv. =| EOjoopar, 


IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 163 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
Present and imperfect like the Passive.’ 


First Aorist. 


Singular. Dual. _. Plural. 
hK-apnv, @,--ato. | dueCov, acbov, doOnv.| dusba, acbe, arto. 


’ Firsr Forure. 
fo-ouat, ei, etat. | duefov, eofov, eobov.| duela, ecbe, ovrat. 
ees ' 
SEeconp Aorist. 


Eunv, Eco, Ero. | EueBov, Ecbov, EcOnv. | Eusba, Eobe, eto 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
PERFECT. 


eloo, — eau. | elcBov, elodwv. | lobe, sicbwoar. 


| > Seconp Aorist. 
foo and od, of. |  Fobov, Eobuv. | oe, Ecbwoav 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


° Frest Furvre. 
jyooi-unv, 0, 0. | pedov, cOov, oOmv. | peba,. obe, vro. 


Sreconp Aorist. ee 
el-uny, 0, To. |. weBov, cbov, obyv. | peba, oe,  vro. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Seconp Aorist. 
Guat, 4%, grat. | dueov, jobov, jobov. | SneGcy, ‘ole, Ovra | 


INFINITIVE MOOD. 


First Furure. ‘ Sxconp Aorist. 
foccbar, {> / &oOat. 
PARTICIPLES. | 
First Furvre. » ; Stconp Aorist, 
foopev-oc, % ov, - sf Euev-o¢, ov. 





1. The middle form Zeuaz is used in the sense of “to hasten ;” lit- — 
erally, ‘‘to send one’s self on.” Hence arises the kindred meaning of 
‘to desire ;” i. e., to send one’s self after anything, in which sense it is 
the root of iuepog, ‘* desire.” | 


164 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


2. "Huan, to sit." 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 
: PRESENT. 
Singular. ‘ Dual. Plural: 
nat, joa, Arar | juelov, jobor, Robov. | jueba, joe, wins 8 


< 


> 


thick iba: 


funy, 00, To. | fuebov, jo0ov, hoOnr. | jeda, yo0e, VvTO 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


7 . PRESENT. 
(00, jos. | Hobor, joluv. | Hobe, jodwoar 
INFINITIVE. | PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT. PRESENT. 
qo0at. | . qpev-os, Ny ov. 


3. Elwat, to clothe one’s self. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 








¢ PrerFecr. ‘ 6 
Singular. Duakiisr Plural. 
eluat, eloat, eirat, and ef . , 
A rts elyrat. 
PLUPERFECT. 
- mv, eico, and &c00, . 
To, eloTo, Eearo, and —-  - ielpre. 
| Koro. 
First Aorist. 
tio- 
éoo- > auyr, w, ato. | duefov, acbov, dobnv.| duce acbe, arto 
éeto- ) - prt 











1. This verb is considered, by many grammarians, as * perfect pas 
sive from &#, I-set, being for “I at, elcat, &c. . The compovad «é0qua 
is more common than the sete verb. 

2. For #vraz the Ionians used fara, and for #VvTO, in the pluperfect, 
_ €aro; for which the poets.said clara and eiaro. 

3. "The accent is on the antepenult, on account of the present signifi- 
cation.. The true accentuation, if #itevoc be regarded ds a perfet par- 
ticiple, is on the penult, 7uévo¢ 


IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 165 
PARTICIPLES. 
Present anp Perrecr. First Aorist. 
elusvog. ae éooduevoc, 
CLASS III. e 
hs 


1. Keiwae, to lie down. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 
Singular. js alge aretha Plural. 
kei-pat, oat, Tat.| pelov, obov, ofov. | peba, be, vTat. 
' IMPERFECT. 
éxei-unv, co, To. | peOov, obov, obyv. .| peba, obe, vro. 
First Furure. | 2 


Keio-ouat, et, etal. |-dueBov, eoOov, ecdov. | dueOa, eofe, ovras. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


keioo, ksio0w. | xeicbov, Kxeicbwrv. | xkeiobe, KeicOwoav. 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


acoi-ugv 0, to. | pelov, odor, obyv. | peba, ofe, yo 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


PREsEnNT. : First Aorist. 
kKéwuat. | kelowpat. 
INFINITIVE. _ _ PARTICIPLE. 
PrEsEnv. : _- Presenr. 


netoOat. ~ ry oad keluev-oc, n; ov. - 


6 


« 


166 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 


2. "Ton, to know." 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 





Presenv. ve 
Singular. Dual. ’ Plura. - 
< auev, are, and } q 
“Met, MS, Ot. | : arov, arov. | nev and te, ¢ aot. 
ns ae | IMPERFECT. 


auev, are, aoav, and 
av. 





io-nv, n¢ 7. | arov, arn. 


“IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
, PresEnv. 
lo-a0t and G1, dtw and 


TQ). 


aTov and Tov, arav 


are.and Te, 4. woay, 
and -Twr. 


ee and Te. 








INFINITIVE. PARTI CIPLE. 
PRESENT. ‘ PRESENT. 


iodvax, | ioa-¢, 0, 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 
: PRESENT. 
_ Singular. Dual. Plural. 
toa-war, cat, tat. | peor, obov,: cfov. | peba, be, vrat. 
IMPERFECT. 
iod-unv, co, to, | pebov, oOov, ofyv. | peba, obe, Ta. 


INFINITIVE... —~—_- PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT. PRESENT. 
icacOat. |. ° bodpev-oc, 4, ov. 





1. The yerb fonuc occurs in the singular only in Doric writers; as, 
ioaut, Theocrit. 5,119. According to the grammarians, oldapev, the 
first person plural of olda, was changed by- the Ionic writers. into iduey, 
which the Attics softened into Zouev, and from this last y was formed a 
new present, namely, the verb tone. | 

2. In common use, the dual and plural of the present tense alone oc- 

ur. _For the singular olda is employed. Thus, olda, oloOa, olde ; dual, 
orov, lorov ; plural, topev, tore, toaor. 

3. The passive Zoayaz is not in use \ 


IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 167 


3. Dyul, to say. 


INDICATIVE MOOD. 


Singular. 
oni, dnc, dnoi. | 


Fo-7, 7¢; 2. 


$70-W, el, et. | 


édyo-a, at, 2 | 


PRESENT. 
Dual. 


garév, gardv. 


IMPERFECT. 


~ 


arov, arn. 


First Furvre. 


eTOV, ETOV. 


First Aorist.. 


arov, arn. 


Plural. 


| gayér, garé, age: 


apev, are, aoay, and 
av. 


| quer, are, av. 


IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


960, ddr. | 


PRESENT. 


gdrov, g$dTwr. 


| $date, ¢dérwcay 


OPTATIVE MOOD. | 


gai-nv, NS Ns 


pyo-ayst, ai, a. | 


PRESENT. 


NTOV, HTNV. 


First Aorist. 
QiTov, aiTnr. 


_  QPEV, TE, joa, 
| wey, Te, 


| ayer, aite, avev. 


SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


9o, $n¢, $7. | 


INFINITIVE. 


PRESENT. 


pavat. 


First Aorist. 


o7oat. 


PRESENT. — 


O7TOY, ORTOV- 


| ¢Guer, dire, déor. 
PARTICIPLES. ~ 


Present. 


. das, paca, pay. 


First Future. ©. 


168 IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

a Seconp Aorist. ay First Aorist. 
ojvat. | _ dhoag. 
PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE. - IMPERATIVE. 

. Peerzcr. xépayar, — régarau. | weddéo0w. 
| INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

wepaobat. | ~ wepaopév-oc,, 4, ov. 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 


. PRESENT. : 
Singular. Dual. — Plurat. 
papal, cal, tai. | pebov, obov, obov. | pela, ofe,, vrat 
IMPERFECT. ’ 


E@G-unv, co, to. | pebov, obov, aOnv. | peOa, ofc, vTa .- 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


* Pasian 
gdo-0, Go. | Gov, — Gav. | 62 Owoav. 
*~ INFINITIVE. ~ - PARTICIPLE. » 
rye! PRESENT. Rebs, PRESENT. ‘ 
gaobat. ee ry) | Papev-0c, yO 
REMARKS. 


1. The present indicative of @qjui, with the exception of 
ne second person singular, is enclitic ; 1. e., throws back 
its accent upon the preceding word.- 

2. The imperfect %nv, &c., is generally placed after 
one or more words of the speaker, as an aorist, like the 
Latin inguit; even when another word of the. same signifi 
cation precedes. “Edn, oo, and the infinitive ddvat, are 
always used of past time ; as, pdvat sede zaeety “ that 
Socrates has said.” 

3. In the language of common life 7 iy, ACs Ws 1S : frequently | 


o + 


<= s 


except in the sense of “to maintain; 


DEFECTIVE VERBS. ~ 169 


put for édny, EDNS, eb. Thus, 40’ 6 6¢, “ said he ; *§ # 8’ 
éyé, “ said I.” 
4, The aorist 70a is hardly used in the Attic dialect, 


;” as} anépnoe, f she. 
refused ;” Xen. Cyrop. 6, 1, 32. The optative poate 


and subjunctive d7j0w often sted: in this same sense. 


DEFECTIVE VERBS.! 


1. From irregular verbs must be distinguished the dew 
fectives, of which a considerable number occur in the Greek’ 
language. _'These exhibit no deviation in the formation of 
tenses, like the irregular verbs, but are characterized by 
the following peculiarities : 

2. From the. great copiousness of the Greek language ; 
from the diversity of its dialects, of which several attained 
a high.cultivation, and were established in written produc- 
tions; and from the particular attention continually bestowed, 
by the Greeks in general, upon the harmony and improve- 
ment of their language, it could not fail to happen that a 
multitude of old forms gradually declined in use, and were, 
at length, entirely supplanted by others of more modern 
date. ‘Thus the simplest form, the present of many verbs, 
has become obsolete, and is no longer to be met with im the 
writings of the Greeks ; while individual forms, chiefly for 
the narrative tense, the aorist, are still 1 in use. 

3. Every such relic of an old verb is now associated 
with the more modern present form to which it belongs in 
signification, although the two frequently possess no resem- * 
blance to each other. Thus we say, that to the present 


aipéw belongs the aorist elAov, although it isimpossible for _ 


the latter form to be deduced in any way from the former, 
but. the two are allied together solely by the common sig- 
nification, “ to take away.” The same is the case with re- 
spect to éAedcouar and 7A8or, both being associated with 





1, Rost, G. G. p. 289, seg. 
P | 


: 4 - 
te: : 
— aan 


s 


; . 4 
170 CATALOGUE OF 


the Reobont épxouat, and to others enumerated i in the fol- 
jowing catalogue. 


| CATALOGUE OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. , 
Observations. 


1, The forms ‘distinguished by capitals are all: obsolete 
roots, which are requisite for the deduction of irregular 
_ forms still in use, but must no longer be used themselves. 

2. To avoid unnecessary prolixity, the extant forms of 
an irregular verb are often not completely enumerated. 
These, however, are merely forms which continue in the 
analogy, and can be formed easily and regularly, and the 
omission is always indicated by &c. ‘Thus, for pone, 
in aivéw, after assigning the future aivéow, the aorist jveca 
can be formed at once, and, therefore, has not been received 
into the catalogue. 

3. Where the signification is not spacthicaliy given, the 
natural one, such as is clear from the signification of the 
present, must be understood to remain. 

4. Forms which are usual only with the poets and in 
the older language are designated by an * at the begin- 
ning. : | 

A. 

Ada, “I hurt,” of which the aorist daca or doa, in the active; 
da@rat, the third person singular of the present ; déo@7y, in the passive 
aorist, and dacduyyv, in the middle aorist, are alone used. | 

*Ayeipw, “I assemble,” future, ayepa, poeeti BY epRty both regular. 
The pluperfect, with the Attic reduplication, ayjyepxa; third person 
pluperfect passive, *dynyépato ; third person plural, second aorist mid- 
dle, *pyepovTo, besides its participle *aypduevoc. 

*Ayayat, “I admire,” present and imperfect’ like torapat ; ; future, 
dydooua ; first aorist passive, 7yacOnv ; first aorist middle, 7yaoduny. 

"Ayvuut, “I break,” from *ATQ, future, GF ; first aorist, éaga (with 
the old form of the augment), in the epic dialect also 7a; perfect mid- 
dle, @ya (with an intransitive signification, “I am broken’) ; second 


aorist passive, é@y7v. 
“Ayo, “I lead,” future, df, &c. ; second aorist, Hyayov ; balers 





IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 171 


of the second aorist, dyayeZv ; second aorist midd’e, 7yayduny (all these 
three with the Attic reduplication) ; perfect, 7a, Doric ayqoxe. 

- phsipa, “ T raise up,” used only in the particip’ e, Geipwy ; participle 
| passive, derpduevoc ; participie of the first aorist active, deipac; of the 
first aorist middle, detpduevoc ;of the first aorist passive, depbeic ; and 
in the third person singular of the first. aorist passive, dé67 ; the third 
person plural of the same tense, dep8ev; the third person singular of the 
pluperfect passive, dwpro. All its remaining forms are deduced from 
aipw. : : 

* AEQ, infinitive, d7vase or dnuévat, “ to blow,” retains the long char- 
acteristic vowel also in the dual and plural, as well as in the passive. 
Present passive, déyjuac; first aorist active, deoa; first aorist infinitive 
active, déoat, “to sleep.” 

Aivéw, “I praise,” future, aivéow, &c. ; perfect passive, #vyjpuat ; ; but 
first aorist passive, 7vé0qv. 

Aipéw, “I take,” future, alpgow; perfect, fonna, Ionic, dpaipyxa ; 
perfect passive, #pyuac ; first aorist passive, #pé0nv. The second aorist 
is borrowed from the obsolete root ‘EAQ, and makes eiAov, infinitive 
éAciv, for the active ; and iA, infinitive eteodat, for the middle. 

Aipw, “ I raise,” future, ap, &c. 


Aicbavouat, “I feel,” future, eens &c. ; second aorist, no06~ 


pay ; perfect, 7oOnuat. 


*Axaypévoc, “ pointed,” perfect participle passive, from an unusual 


root, which may be "AKAZQ or ’AKQ, according as a reduplication is 
assumed.or not in dxaypévoc. 

PAKAXQ, “TJ afflict,” second aorist, ixayov ; first aorist, NKAXnOa 
or dxdxnoa; second aorist middle, 7xayxounv or dxayounv ; perfect 
passive, dnayapae and dxjyeuat; third person plural perfect passive, 
dxnyédarar for axnyevrat ; third person plural pluperfect passive, aKax- 
eiato for axdaynvro. 

* Aeciva, “ I avoid,” to which the epic forms of the first aorist mid- 
dle are, 7Aebato or ddAevaro ; participle, dAevduevoc ; infinitive, dAéao- 
Gat and dAetacba, deduced Rash a root “AAE without o. 

"AdéEo, “I avert,” future, GAeEjow ; and, from ’AAEKQ, the sist ao- 
rist middle infinitive, dAéFac@az. From the syncopated form "AAKQ, 
and by reduplication, are formed the epic second aorist infinitive, d4a- 
keiv, &c. 

*ANMaiva, “ I heal,” future, bia ; ; second aorist middle, *éBbumy, 
with an intransitive signification. 

‘Adioxouat, ‘Iam caught,” from ‘AAOQ, future, dAdécouar; second 
aorist active (with a passive signification, “‘ I was caught’), 7Awr, Attie 
édAwv ; second aorist infinitive, dAdvar ; second aorist subjunctive, dad 


“ 


v 


‘= 


172 CATALOGUE OF — 


dAgc, &e.; second aorist optative, dAoiny; participle of second aorist, 
dAode ; perfect, fAwxa, Attic éddwxa (in a passive pigmiieatian, “ T have 
been, caught’’). . 

*ARiraive, “ I sin,” Fotos aAtthow ; second aorist, 7ALTOY 5 secoril 
aorist middle, 7AcTéunv. Also dAtriyuevoc, as gear: participle middle, 
from an accessory form, dAirnut. 

“AAAouat, ‘ “ T spring,” future, dAoduat ; first aorist, Hany ; second 
aorist middle, #Adunv ; epic, in the second and third persons, syncopated 
and without aspiration, dAco, dAro. 

Atoka, “I shun,” future, GAvfo ; first aorist, pavéa. 

‘Auaptava, “ J err,” future, duaptyoouar ; par § jedprnna ; second 
aorist, fuaptov, epic jubpoTov. © 

"Aubdioxw, “I miscarry,” future, du6AGow, &c., from ’AMBAOQ. 

Auréxo aud dunioxvotuat, see under “Exo. 

*Aurdakioxo, “ I err” or “ miss,” future, durtAaxjow ; second ao 
rist, #uxAaxov ; second aorist infinitive, dutAaxeiy. 

’"Audtévvum, ‘I dress,” "AMOIEQ, future, dudiécw, Attic, dugid ; 
first aorist, Zudieca ; perfect passive, 7udiecuar, Gupieipar. 

"Avadrioxw, “ I consume” or “ spend,” forms from dvaddo the future, 
dvaAdow ; first aorist, dvddwoa; perfect,-dvddwxa, both unaugmented 
with the Attics ; but in Ionic with the augment 7vdéAxa or dvqjAwxa. 

‘Avddva, * I please,” imperfect, 7vdavov, andédvdavov epic, also é7v- 
davov ; second aorist, doy epic, and also ddov, besides the third per- 
son, evdde ; second aorist infinitive, ddeiv ; perfect, ada and éada; fu- 


jure, dd70W. 


__*Avpvober, third person singular of the perfect middle, to denote a 
aénished action, “ gushes forth,” “rises up ;” to be derived from ’ANOQ, 

lied to dvOéw, “ I flower,” : 

‘Avotyw or dvoiyvuut, see Otyo. 

*"Avwya, an old perfect form of uncertain dezivation, and with a pres- 
ent meaning, “I command” or “ commission.” First person plural in a 
syncopated form, 4 GVOY[ED ; imperative, avwx6, besides 7vdyea as a plu- 
perfect. Hence a new present, dvoyw 3. imperfect, 7 qayov and 7% VOYEOY ; 
future, dvéfw ; first aorist, 7v@fa. 

**’ Anntpor, as first person singular and third person plural of the im. 
perfect, with also an aorist signification, “ I took away ;’’ second person, 
axnbpac ; third person, dr7tpa, from an assumed radical form, dzavpdo, 
of which, however, nothing occurs besides the forms just enumerated. 
To it drodpac belongs as a participle, although their connexion does not 
admit of being clearly pointed out. 

*Aradioxw, “ I deceive,” second aorist, aRager 5 second aorist infin- 
itive, dradgeiv ; future, aragjow. 


- 


pl.” “eet. 


~~, 


4 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 173 


"ArexOdvouat, “ I am hated,” future, derexShoopae ; ; ie annxOn- 
pat ; second aorist, danyOdunv. : 

*Apapioka, “ I fit,” second aorist, 7papor ; future, Gpow ; ‘ten aorist, 

jpoa ; first aorist middle, jpoduyjv. The perfect middle, papa or dpypa, 
has an intransitive signification, as also the perfect passive, apyjpsyac. 

*Aptoxw, “I make favourable” or “ pleasing,” also intransitive “ 1 
please, ” future, apéow, &c. ; perfect passive, 7peouaz ; first aorist Re 
sive, npéaOnv. 

"APQ, radical form to dpapioxw and dps <w ; also to aipw. 

Avidva, ‘I increase,” second aorist, gvgov ; future, adgjow ; first 
aorist, 7vénxa; perfect passive, yiEnuar; first aorist passive, 7v7Onv ; 
first future middle, adgjoouat, as future passive, “T shall grow,” i. e., 
be increased. 

"AxOouct, “ I am vexed,” future, axGéoouar ; first aorist passive, NX= 
BécOnr. 

*AXQ, radical form to dyvvyas and "AKAXQ. 


. : BR. f 

Baivo, “ Igo,” primitive form BAQ, by reduplication BuBdw, Bibnuc, 
or, by the insertion of ox, Bdoxw ;-future, Byoouac ; perfect, Bébnxa ; 
second aorist, 67v ; second aorist subjunctive, BG; second aorist op- 
tative, Bainv ; imperative, (70:; infinitive, Pyvar; participle, Bde. 
Some compounds take a transitive signification, and therefore form 
also the passive forms, perfect, Gé6ayar; first aorist, é6d0@yv. In the 
Tonic dialect the simple verb is also used in the transitive sense, “to 
lead,” “‘ to bring,” and the future Byow and first aorist é6y0a stand ex- 
clusively in this signification. The following accessory forms, from the 
dialects, must also be observed. 1. Of the third person present, Bv6d, 
participle, @:6dv, formed from Gibdw, and Bibd¢ from Bibnuw. 2. Of the 
second aorist, third person dual, Gdrnv, besides BArnv ; third person 
plural, é6av, besides é6yoav ; subjunctive, 86, lengthened into 6éw and 
6eiw, plural, Beiowev. 3. The syncopated accessory forms of the perfect, 


first person plural, Bé6ayev, third person plural, Beééacc ;- third person 


plural of the pluperfect, Gé6acav ; participle of the perfect, Re6badc, ~ 


avia, contracted Bebdc, ebaoa, &c. All these forms belong.to, the » : 


* 


poets, and particularly to the epic poets, with whom an aorist middle,» afer 


Byoeto, and an imperative, Byoeo, also Occur. 

BdArw, “I throw,” future, 8aA6, Ionic and with later writers, BadIop 
ow; second aorist, é6aAov; perfect, BébAnka ; perfect passive, Bé6Aquar ; 
first aorist passive, 26A70nv ; second aorist. middle, é6aZduny. There 
are also formed in epic, from an assumed farm BAHMI, a third -person 


dual, GAjrny, either of the imperfect or seca id aorist; and a third per: | 
P2 ie 


Sas 
+ > 
we je 


. 


*, 


7 _. GATALOGUE. OF 


son singwar of the scion aorist middle, &6AqTo, with a passive signifi- 
cation ; besides the infinitive, BAjoGa:; participle, BAnwevoc ; optative, 
BAsinny, Bieto. Epic writers also form PeboAjaro, as a third person 
singular of the pluperfect passive ; and be6oAnuévog, as a periers Pur 
ciple passive, from an accessory form BOAEQ. 

*BAPEQ, usual present, Bapive, “ I load ;” from the old htc! form 
comés the epic perfect participle Bebapnoc. 

Baordlo, “ I bear,” future, Baordow, &c.; adopts in the passive'the 
other mode of formation, according to the characteristic ¥3 as, first ao- 
 tist passive, é6aoTdxOnv. 

Béoxw, BAQ, BIBHMI, see Baivo. ae 

BiBpaoxe, ** I eat,” from BPOQ, future,. Ppdcw and Bpaooua, &c. ; 


._ second aorist, 6pwv. 


Biéa, “ I live,” future, Bidcouar ; first aorist, é6iwoa, besides the sec- 
.- ond aorist, 26iwv, of wich the remaining moods are chiefly used ; .as, 
subjunctive, 616, Bidc, &c. ; optative, Bioyv; imperative, BiwG ; ffi 
itive, Gidvar ; participle, Biodc. 

BAaordve, “I sprout,” otis BAacrhow, &e..4 : rae aorist, £6- 
Aaorov. 

BAHMI and BOAEQ, see Bddiuw. 

Béokw, “ I feed,” future, Bookgoo, &c. 

BotdAouar, .** I will,” imperfect, ébovAdunv and nbovaduny ; future, 


Bovdgjoouat ; perfect, BebodAnuar ; “tyst aorist, é6ovAZOnv and 760vAROnv. 
BPOQ, see Bibpookw. 


| igi 
Tapéo, “I marry,” future, yapéow, Attic, yaué, also yaujow ; per- 
fect, yeydunxa ; first aorist, Zynua ; first aorist infinitive, yjuac ; future 
middle, yayotuaz ; first aorist middle, éynuduyy, from the root TAMQ. 
_ *Téyova, a form for the perfect, similar to dv@ya, used also in the 
signification of the imperfect and aorist, ‘‘ I cried aloud ;’” participle, ye- 
yovec; infinitive, yeyoveiy and yeywréuev. Also a new imperfect, 
éyeyovevy, contracted from éyeydveov. 2 
TENQ, the obsolete root of yeivoyaz (a purely soaihe form) and yivo- 
yi: or yeyvopat, which transitively signifies, “ I beget ;” intransitively, 
am born,” “arise,” “become.” The transitive signification, how- 
ever, belongs only to the aorist éyecvauny, “ I begat.” All the remain- 
ing forms in use, namely, future, yevfoouar ; second aorist, éyevduny ; 
perfect, yéyova and .yeyévyyat,; haye the intransitive signification alone. 
In epic, and with the poets, perfect, yéyaa; third person plural, yeydaor ; 


first person plural, yéyavev ; infinitive, yeydyev ; participle, Yeyainc, ye= 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 175 


yavia, contracted yeyéc, yeyGoa; which forms are all to be deduced 
from the simple root TE, and by change of sound TA. 

TyGéo, “I rejoice,” future, ynOjow, &c.; perfect middle, yéynba, in 
the signification of the present. 

Tvyvéoxw (Attic, besides yivdéoxa), “ I know,” root, TNOQ, future, 
yvaoouat ; perfect, éyvwxa ; perfect passive, éyy@opar ; first aorist pas- 
sive, éyvoo0yv. ‘The second aorist, formed according to the conjuga- 
tion in yw, is éyywy; plural, éyvwper,' &c. ; infinitive, yvGvat ; impera- 
tive, yvO01, yvarw, &c.; optative, yvoiny ; participle, yvodc. | 


i cee = 

Aajjvat, see AAQ. sb 

- Adkva, “ I bite,” from AHKQ, future, d7fouar ; ‘peckiel: amen, ii 
second aorist, &daxov. “ 

Aaudw, “ I tame” or * subdue,” simple toot, AAMQ, whence second 
aorist, édduov ; subjunctive, dad, lengthened into dauéw and dayeia ; 
verfect, dédunka ; perfect passive, dédunuat ; first aorist passive, édu7Onv. 

AapOava, “ I sleep,” future, dapOycouat ; perfect, deddpOnxa ; second 
aorist, édapGov, by transposition, édpafoy ; and, with a passive — but 
an active signification, éddp077v. 


*AAQ, primitive to diddoxw, “ I teach,” from which, with an active - 


signification only, second aorist, daov or déddov. The most usual forms 
are, the second aorist passive, éddnyv, “ I was taught ;” infinitive, dafvat ; 
subjunctive, daeéw (by an epic prolongation for dad); future, dajoouat. 
The passive signification belongs also to the perfect, deddnxa, débaa, 
deddnuat. Of the middle, the epic infinitive, deddacOaz, “to become ac- 
quainted with,” “inquire into,” is alone extant. | 

Aci, see Aéa. 

Acidw, see Aiw. 

Aerkvipt, “ I show,” future, deifu, &e. The Toditink make the de- 


_ rivative forms without 2, thus, dé, édefa, &c. The epic form of the ~ 


verfect passive, deideyuatz, is irregular. 


Aéuo, “ I build,” first aorist, idea; perfect, dédunka ; to be distin- 


guished from the like forms of the verb daydw. 

Aégpkw, usually dépkojeat, “ T see,” perfect, dédopxa, with a vitiolint 
signification; second aorist, éépaxov (by transposition from édapxoy), 
also édpdxnyy and édépx6nyv, all with an active signification. 

Aéxoua, I receive,” future, défouat, &c. ‘The epic forms of the 
second aorist, without a connective vowel, édéyunyv, third person singu- 
lar, déxto and édexro; imperative, déo ; gr ig déxOaz ; participle, 
déypevog, are to be observed. 

Aéw, “ F bind,” future, d700 ; first aorist, &dnoa ; ; perfect, dédexa ; 


176 tarTaLocus OF 


‘panioct passive, dédewat ; first aorist passive, édé6yv. The third future 


passive, ded7oouat, has the signification of the simple future passive. 

Aéa, “ rT want,” “am deficient, ” passive, déouat, “I have need of,” 
“ beg ;” future, dejow, &c. In general, the active occurs only as an im- 
personal ; present, deZ ; subjunctive, déy ; optative, déoz ; infinitive, dezy ; 
participle, déov ; imperfect, édes ; first aorist, eee future, deqoer. 

AHKQ, see Adkva. 

Aiddokw, “ I teach,” future, 3d6E 0: first aorist, bdidaka ; perfect 
dedidaya, &e. 

Adpacke, * Irun away,” usually occurring only in compounds, bor- 
rows, from the root APAQ, the future, dpdcopa: ; perfect, dédpaxa ; sec- 
ond aorist, édpay, ac, a; subjunctive, dpG, dpdc, dpd, dic. ; optative, 
Opainv; imperative, dpaOc; infinitive, dpavar ; participle, pas, all 
formed accordin, to the conjugation in ju. 

_ Ain, “I ek: ” retains the long characteristic vowel’t in the passive 
form, contrary to the analogy of the conjugation in yu. 

Aio, “I fear,” “ fly ;” diouat, “ I scare,” “ terrify,” both in use only 
w.th epic writers. Hence are deduced the perfect, dédva, “I fear,” in 
epic also deidia ; plural, without a connecting vowel, deidiuev, deidite, 
desdiacr; innperative, deid.O: ; infinitive, devdiévar, epic deidimev ; parti- 
ciple, devdid¢, genitive, -6ro¢ and -Grog ; third person plural of the imper- 
fect, edeidicav. The common language has the present, deidw ; future, 
Jeioouat; first aorist, &devca, epic éddevoa ; perfect, dédorxa, with a 


> present signification, 


Aoxéw, “I appear,” “ seem,” from AOKQ, fature, d0&w, &c. ; per- 


fect, with a passive form, dédoyua, “ Ihave appeared.” The regular 


formation, doxjow, &c., is more rare. 

- APAQ, see Acdpdoxw. 

Abvapua., “ I am able,” second person, Béwicdad (not dbvy) 5 imperfect, 
idvvdunv, conjugated like iorayar ; future, dvv#oouar; first aorist, édvv 
HOnv and édvvdobnv ; perfect, dedivyuat. 

Adu, “I cover,” future, dtcw ; first aorist, Edvoa 5: first aorist passive, 
éd00nv. The perfect, déddxKa, and the second aorist, édvy; infinitive, 
divat, epic dtiuevar.; participle, dé, have, like the middle, whose forms 
are regular, the signification, ‘“ to immerse one’s self,” * ta sts one’s 
self. ° 

-* Bi 

Eyeipo, “ T wake” or * soca regular in most of its forms, perfect, 

tyfyepxa (with the Attic reduplication). The middle, éyeipoya:, “ 1 


_ awake,” syncopates the second aorist, 7ypduny (for 7yepouny) ;' infinitive, 
éypécGat. To this middle the perfect éypjyopa (for éy7yopa) belongs 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 177 


in signification, besidés the epic accessory forms éypyyopfe and éypnyép- 
@acx (ae the second and third persons plural), and the infinitive, éyp7- 
yopbac. 

*Edw, ‘ I eat,” used in this form only with the epic writers and Ioni- 
ans, besides the perfect, édyda (with the Attic reduplication), and the 
future, édouaz (for édotuar). Prose writers make use of éoiw as a pres- 
ent, and attach to it forms from édw, EAEQ: perfect, éd7doxa (jdexa, 
by change of vowel #doxa, with the Attic reduplication éd7doxa) ; per- 
fect passive, éd7decuac ; first aorist passive, 7déo07v.. As second a? 
rist active, é¢ayov ; infinitive, ¢ayetv. 

"Rlouat, ** I sit,” future, édoduar. ie 

’"E6é20 and édo, “I am willing,” future, MeAacs and #eAjow, &e. 

"Eda, “ Iam wont,” only with epic writers, together with the Lavte 
middle elwOa, Ionic wa, in the same signification. 

EIAQ, an obsolete form with the signification “ I see,” “ srebion" in 
epic yet used as a Paenere, eidognt, “ IT am seen,” * appear,” “ seem,” 
besides the aorist eloduny or éevodunv. The primitive form is IAQ; 
second aorist, eldov, epic also without augment, idov ; subjunctive, idw ; 
optative, idovue; imperative, ide; infinitive, ideZy; participle, idév; 
second aorist middle, eiddunv, idduny, in the same signification. The 
perfect oida (“I have perceived” or “ seen into,” i. e., “ I know”), which 
belongs thereto, is anomalous in formation and conjugation (vid. page 
166); second aorist subjunctive, eidw; optative, eideiny ; imperative, 
to@ ; infinitive, eidévar, epic, Ionic iduévar ; participle, eiddc, via, 6¢, 
&c.; pluperfect, jdecy, epic 7dea, Attic 707 (formed from the root ed 
with an augment) ; second person, noete and #deic0a, also 7dyo00a ;_ third 
person, #0et, epic #dee and #deev ; dual, #decTov or Soror ; third person, 
gdeiray or goTnv ; plural, 7deqwev or jouer; Hdecte or Hote; Bdecay or 
yoay. Epic collateral forms of this pluperfect are, first person, 7eidecy ; 
second persons, neidere or Heide ; third person, feider, Heidy, or Herde. 
As future to olda stands elcouat, * I shall know.” 

Eixa, “I am like,” besides the future effw,.usual only in the older . 
language. | The common language has the perfect middle, Zocxa, Ionic 
olxa ; first person plural, poner and ve gel in the present significa- 
tion ; participle, éovcdc, Ionic olxdc, Attic eixO¢ (which is always used 
by the Attics for the signification probable, reasonable ; while éotxé¢ in 
Attic only signifies similar) ; pluperfect, ééxecv. Epic collateral forms 
without a connecting vowel are éixrov and éixryy, as third person dual 
of the perfect and pluperfect, and #ixrTo or we as third person singu- 
lar of the pluperfect with a passive form.. 

*ElAo and cidéw, Attic elAéa, “ I press,” future, eiAjow, &c. Epic 
writers adopt forms from the root “EAQ, as, first aorist 24ca; infinitive, 


178 CATALOGUE OF 


Acai or éeAoat ; participle, fag ; perfect passive, %eAuai; second a0o- 
rist passive, éaAqv or é4Anv, and as third person singular a a pase 
sive, 20AnTO. 

Eiuapra:, see MEIPOMAL ~Ne 

Eixeiv, “ to say,” used only as an aorist ; indicative, elrov ; subjunct- 
ive, clmw; optative, efmoiue ; iperatitny eirré, in the plural, besides eiz- 
ete, also éorere; participle, elroy. Besides these a first aorist also 
el7a, particularly usual in the imperative, elroy, eimato, &c. 

Elpa, “I say,” as a present only in-epic; future, épéw, Attic éd ; 
perfect, efpnxa; perfect passive, elpyuar; future; eipyoouar (with a mid- 
die form and a passive signification) ; first aorist passive, eip74nv Ionic, 
éppnOnv Attic ; infinitive, pnGijvat ; ; participle, pyGeic ; future, py0y00- 
uat ; from a root PEQ. 

Kipa, ‘I connect sogether,"* perfect OS Eeouat ; pluperfect pas- 
sive, éépuqv. - 

Eia6a, see iu. 

"EAatvw and de, ade § deve.” future, éAdow, Attie 16, éAde, ig, 
&c.; infinitive, éAdy; first aorist, 7Adoa; perfect, 2AjAdka; perfect 
passive, £A#Aduaz, third person plural epic, éAjAddarat for ss : 
first aorist passive, 7AGOnv. 

» EAEYOG, EAYOQ, EAQQ, see "Epyouat. 

*EAroua, “I hope; perfect middle, EoAra ; pluperfect, ihacsty 

"EAQ, see Aipéa. 

ENETKQ, ENEIKQ, see Sépw. | 

*Evérw, also évvéro, “I relate,” “tell,” second aorist, éviorov.; 
subjunctive, éviomw ; optative, éviororus ; imperative, éviore ;. infini- 
tive, évioreiv ; future, éviomjow and éviw. From it-must be distin- 
guished idee or évioow, “ I chide,” “ address harshly,” to which the 
double form of the second aorist belongs, namely, #virarov and évévirrov. 

_ *Evivole, “is or lies thereon,” an old perfect form, with the signifi- 
cation of the present and aorist, used only in composition, as, érevyvobe 
and the like, formed from an obsolete root, "ENO, by the insertion of 
0, or from ’ENE@Q by change of the vowel, and in both cases with the 
Attic reduplication. ; 

*Evirto, see under "Evérw. 

*"Evyvut, “ I dress,” in the present formed regularly like Selicsaies, 
takes an augment only in the perfect ; future, fow and £o0w ; first ao- 
rist, Soca ; infinitive, foac ; perfect passive, elyar, and in carole 
also Eouaz; pluperfect passive, eluyv'; second person, elco and fo00 ; 
third person, oro and éeoro (from founy, ééouny). oT 

*Eravpeip, “ to enjoy,” as second, aorist infinitive, from the indice 
tive, érnipov ; subjunctive, éxadpw; second aorist middle, érgv20uqv 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. : 179 


first aorist middle, éxryupdunv ; future, éxavpqoozar. The present is 
éravpiond, of rare occurrence. — ' 

“Balorapat, “I know,” imperfect, #xvordéuny (like Luana future, 
Priotypoopat ; ; first aorist, Amrior7|Onv. 

*Eno, “ I am occupied,” “ am about. something,” takes ec in prefixing 
the augment of the imperfect, elzov ; second aorist, Zorov; subjunctive, 
ond ; infinitive, oreiy (used only in compounds)... The middle &ozaz, 
“T follow,” is also much used in prose ; imperfect, eizduny ; future, 
Epouat ; second aorist, Eorrouny ; ‘ subjunctive, | onapat and gorwpat ; 
optative, ootunv and éoroiuny ; imperative, ood, epic oxéo and oreio ; 
infinitive, oxéofac and éoréoOat ; participle, omduevog and éordpevoc. 
The forms of the moods of this second aorist, with e prefixed, are pecu- 
liar to the poets alone, and can never be used in composition. 

’"Epdw, “‘ I love,” has, besides the present, only the-imperfect, jpwv, 
with an active form. The remaining tenses have a passive form, but 
are used in an active sense, as, first aorist, 7pdo0qv; future, épacOjc0- 
‘pa. The present épGuaz alone has also _a-passive signification. A po- 
etic collateral form with an active signification is &pauaz; first aorist, 
npacauny. ae 

"EPTQ and épda, see ‘Pélw. 

es ca ‘‘ I ask,” occurs in the general language only as-an aorist, 
namely, #pdunv, ApeTo, to which the remaining moods must also. be 
added, although the infinitive is accented EpeoGat as well as épéoat. 
Future, éofcouac. All deficiency is supplied by spuneek The Ionians 

have, instead of it, the present elgopat, a eipouny, future eip7Z- 
coma. 

"Eppa, “ I go away,” future, épéjow ; first aorist, 7Apyoa. : 

’Epv0aiva, also épevdw, “ I make red,” fature, EpbOnow ; first aorist, 
npv0nva and #pevoa ; perfect, 7pb0nxa. 

*Eptco, “I keep back,” future, goto ; first acrist, épvga (rare) ; 
more usual, second aorist, RpvKkaKkov. 

"Epyouat, I go,” forms from "EAEY@Q the future éAevoouat or gA- 
evootuwat ; second aorist, /Avfov, Attic 7Aov, Doric jor ; infinitive, 
éAOeiv ; imperative, éAGé, &c.; perfect, pas epic also eiAjAovia. 

"Eofiw, “I eat,” see "Edw. 

Efdo, xabetda, “I sleep,” future, eddjow, xabevdjow ; imperfect, 
éxGOevdov, more rarely kaOnddov and xabeddov. 

Evpicxo, “I find,” from EYPQ; second aorist, edpovr ; imperative, 
evpé ; future, etpjow ; perfect, eipyxa; perfect passive, ebpyuar ; first 
aorist passive, etpéOnr ; aorist middle, sdpouny and evtpduny. , 

"ExOouar, “Iam hated,” future, éy6jaouat; perfect, #yOnuac. 

"Exe, “I have,” future, &o ‘and oxfow ; second acrist, éoyou ; infin 


180 — : CATALOGUE oF 


itive, oxelv ; ; subjunctive, oy ; -optative, oxoiny; imperative,. oxé, Hs . 


“also oyéc (for oxé6t, according to the conjugation.in yt); perfect, toynna. 
Passive future, oye@joouar. Middle, future, &ouar and oxnoouab 3 sec- 
ond aorist, éoyéuqv. From the root 2XQ, whence the aorist is bor- 
rowed, a new present 1s formed, with the prefix z, namely, love, “ I hold 
or keep,” to which also the future oy7ow belongs in signification. 
The following, as compounds of éy#, must be adduced on. account of 
certain irregularities : 
1. Gvexopat, * I endure,” takes a double augment; as, pes 
fect, #verxouny ; second aorist, 7vecxyounr. 


second aorist, Zumicyov ; infinitive, Gumioyetv. Middle, ay 
wéxouae OF auxvaxrodpat, “© T have on 3 future, Gppésopac ; ; 
second aorist, NUT LoXOUNY. 

_ 8. brioxvotpuar, “ I promise,” future, brooxynoopa 5 : ‘second ao- 
rist, DrEoXOUNY 5 ; imperative, from the passive, vrooxéOyte- 
perfect, dréoynpat. 

‘Eva, “ I boil,” future, épjoa, &c. ; verbal sdigctive, &$06¢ and én 
Tic, épyréoc. * 
Z. 


Zdo, «] live,” takes, in contraction, 7 instead of a, as, second persons 
Che; third person, (7, &c. ; infinitive, jv. Imperative, C78e (according 
to the conjugati8n in pt); imperfect, &av, enc, &c. 

Zetyvuut, “I join,” future, CevSo, &e. 5 second aorist passive, étynyv 

Zovyvut, “I gird,” future, Coow, &c.; perfect passive, ic 
first aorist passive, 2{éc0nv. 


Hua, “I sit.”. In prose, the compound dOnt, which generally 
takes the augment in the preposition, is more usual; imperfect, éxa67- 
uny, and also forms peculiar moods ; as, subjunctive, xaQapar ; opta- 


tive, xa0otuny ; imperative, xa0nc0 (also xdOov, for xd8eco, with the a 


dropped). As varieties of dialect, the collateral forms of the third per- 
son plural, 7vTas and 7To, are to be observed, which in Ionic are araz, 
faro, and in epic eZarat, claro. 


8. 


OAN Q, see Svioke. 
Odénrw, “I bury,” forms, from the root OAGQ, future, Sapo ; first 
-aorist, 2arpa; perfect, rétapa ; perfect passive, TéB apa ; ; first aorist 
passive, 204¢07v ; second aorist penis, érégny, and so on, ee this 





2. dunéxo, “I wrap up,” imperfect, dumezzyov ; future, qudéta, _ 


* ei : 
a 


i 
Zw 
- 


ever IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 181 


is to be distinguished the’obsolete form OA®Q, “ I am astonished,” trom 
which ré@y7a, as a perfect middle, with a present signification, and éras* 
gov, as a second aorist, occur in the poets. 
Oéw, “I run,” future, Vevoouar or Sevooduar ; the remaining tenses 
are supplied by the forms of rpéyw. 
Oryydéve, “I touch,” forms, from iyo, patie ae and difouats ; 
second aorist, 26vyov. 
 Ovgacko, “I die,’ forms, from OANQ, second aorist, favor ; future, . 
Savotua ; perfect, réOvyjxa (by transposition of the radical letters), be- 
sides the syncopated forms, first person plural, ré0vayev; third person ~ 
plural, re$vaor; optative, teOvainy ; imperative, té@va6c; infinitive, 
Tebvavat ; participle, TeOvnKec, together with reOvedc, TeOvndc, TePver- 
wg. From the perfect is formed a future, reOv7go and reereD in 
frequent use with the Attics. 
Oopéw and OOPQ, see Vpackw. 
Opéga, see Tpéga. 
 Opéva, see Tpéxo. 
Opinra, “ F bruise,” future, Iptypa, &c. ; second aorist passive, érpv- 


pny. \ 
*OpdoKw, “I spring,” forms, from OOPQ, second aorist, éopov ; 


future, Vopodya. 


OTSQ, see Tiga. 
Oba, “EF pista Ad future, dicw, ihe ; first aorist passive, pe 


] 


"IAQ, see Eidw. 

"Ifa, Kabila, “T seat,” * make to sit,” future, iljou, caren or 
ka0G (for kabiow) ; first aorist, éxdfca. 

‘Ixvéouat, more’ rarely ixw, “I come,” future, fw; usual, towat ; . 
first aorist, /§a; usual, first aorist, ifov; second aorist middle, ixé- 


| pny ; perfect, Iywat. In prose, the compound dudcxvéouar is alone used. 


‘TAdoxoua, ‘ E propitiate,” “ appease,” future, ‘Adoouat, epic iAdoco- 
pat (from the rootiAdoyac or Aquat, which are still used in single forms 
with the epic writers); first aorist, iAacdunv. . Of the active, iAdw and 
iAnut, “I am propitious,” an imperative, tAn6c; and of the perfect a 
subjunctive, AjKw ; optative, LAgKoyue; occur with the epic writers. 

“‘Inrapat, see TETOUAL. ye 


é K. 
*KAAQ, a primitive for the derivation of several verbal forms: 1. for 
caivvpat, “ I am distinguished,” “ excel,” perfect, xéxaowac ; pluperfect, 
éxexdopnv: 2. for Kjdw, “I trouble,” future, xexadjow ; second aorist 


182, CATALOGUE -OF 


infinitive, kexadety ; participle, xecadév. Middle, x sdlopas “ Tam troub- 
_ led,” future, kexadjoouat; perfect, xéxyda, with a present signification. 
3. For xdlo or xalouar, “ I giv: way,” second aorist, xexadduny, be- 
sides the regular éyacdunyv or éxeoodunv. 

Kabélouat, xabevdw, xd0nuat, xabifw, see Boal, eidu, mea, ite. 

Kaivuya, see KAAQ. 

Kaiw, “I burn,” Attic xéo, with long a, and without contraction ; 
future, xatow ; first aorist, Zxavoa; perfect, xéxavxa ; perfect passive, 
xéxavuae ; first aorist passive, éxav0qv; second aorist passive, édyv. 
Besides the given form of the first aorist, must be observed the double 
epic form éxya and éxeva, and the Attic &xea, all formed without o; sub 
junctive, KRO ; optative, x7atuc; imperative, Keiov ; infinitive, ‘Kjat ; 
participle, keiac. Also in epic éxndunv and éxecduay occur in the mid- 
dle form. | 

Karka, “T cally’ future, kaAéow, Attic KQAG ; first sire po ee 
perfect, xéxAnxa ; first aorist passive, &A76nv ; perfect passive, KéxAn- 
pat, “I am named,” “ am called ;” optative, xexAgunv, xéxAgo, &c. ; 
future passive, xAn@joouat ; third future passive, kexAjoouat. Middle, 
in the same signification with the active, future, xaAoduar (for Kanéoo- 
vat); first aorist, éxadecduny. 

Kduvo, “I grow weary,” from KAMQ ; - second aorist, éxayov; fu- 
ture, caywotua:; perfect, xéxunna; participle, KexunKac, epic Kexugoc. 

Keiua, “ I lie,” second -person, xetoar, &c.; subjunctive, - xéwpar, 
kén, &c.; optative, xeoiunv ; imperative, xeioo; infinitive, Keio@az ; 
participle, xeiuevog ; imperfect, éxeiunv, Execoo, &c.; future, Keioopat ; 
epic and onic collateral forms of the third person plural present are Keé- 
arat and xéaraz for xetvrac. In composition with prepositions, the ac- 
cent recedes in the indicative to the preposition ; but in the infinitive it 
remains on the root; as, kardxeiyat, but xaraxetobat. 

Kepdvvvut, mingle,” from xepdw, which is still found in ‘the epic 
language ; future, xepdow, Attic Kepd ; first aorist, &xepdca, epic Kép- 
acca, also &xpyoa; perfect, Kexpaxa; perfect passive, xéxpauar and 
kexépacpat ; first aorist passive, éxpa@yv and exepaoOny. 

Kepdaiva, ‘sI gain,” future, kepdévd and Kepdfico ; first aorist, beep 
Onva, éxépdaua, and éxépdyca.. 

K7da, see KAAQ. 

Kipynut, an epic collateral form of kepavvvut, wien: see. 

Kiyavo, “I reach,” “ overtake,” subjunctive, xiyG, epic xiyeiw; op- 
tative, xvyeinv; infinitive, xixypvar; participle, xyeic; third person 
dual of the imperfect, x.y#r77, all formed from KIXHMI ; future, xey7- 
ow and Kuynoouat ; second aorist, éxzyov. 

Kixpnyt, see Xpdo. | 


yO Sa 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 183 


KAdtw, “ I sound,” future, cAdy§@; first. aorist, iedoret; perfect 
middle, KéKAnya ; ‘ second aorist, éAayov. 

KAaio, “ I weep,” Attic xAdw, with long a, and without contraction ss 
future, KAadcouar or KAavooduar ; first aorist, éxAavoa ; perfect, Kéx- 
Aavea. -The future xAaijow or KAajow is more rare. 

*KAvo, “ I hear,” imperative, cA00c and KéxAvie. 

Kopévvvpt, “I satisfy,” future, xopéow ; first aorist, éxdpeca ; per- 
fect, xexdpyxa; perfect passive, xexdpecuat, Ionic and epic Kexdpnuat. 

*Kopioow, “ I arm,” perfect passive, xexdpvOuar. - ? 

Kpdlw, “I cry,” perfect middle, xexpa@ya ; first person plural, xéxpay- . 
uev ; imperative, xéxpayOc; third future passive, kexpdfouar ; second 
aorist, éxpdyov. : 

Kpeudvvupe, “ I suspend,” passive, xpeudvveuat, “ I am suspended,” 
and as a middle, “ I suspend myself ;” xpéwayuac (like torapaz), “ I 
hang,” to which are joined, subjunctive, xpéuwpat ; optative, kpeyatuny ; 
future active, Kpeutiow; Attic KEG, de, d, ‘&c. The aorist passive éx- 
peudcOnv is common to the passive, middle, and intransitive; but the 
future passive xpeuacOjoouat belongs only to xpeydvvvpat, since Kpéua- 
wat has a peculiar future, cpeujoouat, “ I shall hang,” “ hover.” 

Kreiva, “ I kill,” root KTE, and, by changing the vowel, KTA ; fu- 
ture, cTevd, Ionic xravéw ; first aorist, écrecva ; second aorist, éxravor, 
besides epic éxrav, ac, a (formed according to the conjugation in pz, as, 
Edpav, from didpdoxw) ; third person plural, xray for éxtacay ; sub- 
iunctive, kT ; infinitive, xrdva., xrdwevat, KTduev; participle, Krde ; 
perfect, éxraxa; perfect middle, éxtova ; first aorist passive, éxrdOnv or 
éxravOnv, besides the Beets form aia as passive to the second a0o- 
rist éxTav. - 

‘Kuvéo, “I kiss,” future, kuvyoouat or (from KYQ) KUO ; first aorist, 
Exdoa. mee 


. A. 

Aayxdva, “ I receive by lot” or “ fate,” root AAXQ and AHXQ, fu 
ture, AjFopat 5 ; second aorist, éAayov ; perfect, elAnya or Méhoyxa (some- 
times called a perfect middle), as from AETXQ. 

Aaubava, “ I take,” root AABQ and AHBQ, future, Ajpoyac ; secon 
aorist, EAabov ; perfect, elAnda; perfect passive, elAnuyac; first aorist 
passive, e/A7¢0nv ; second aorist middle; éAa6dunv. ‘The Ionians form 
AeAdénxa, and, from AAMBQ, the future Adxpouat, first aorist passive 

eAdudOnv, perfect passive AéAappar, first aorist middle éAaupduny. 

_  Aav@dva, moré rarely 1700, “ I am concealed,” future, Anow ; second 
aorist, fAafov; perfect middle, AéA76a. Middle, AavOévouat, more - 
rarely AjOouar, “I forget,” future, Ajoowa: ; second panels a il : 
perfect passive, AéAjopac. ' 


184 -”" GATALOGUE OF 


- Adkéw or Adoxa, “ I resound,” second aorist, 2Aaxov ; future, Adxy- 
Sopa ; Bt Aéhaxa and AéAna. 
Aéyw: 1. “I say,” forms no perfect active in this signification, but 
uses ial of it elpnxa (see efpw), otherwise wholly regular ; future, 
Aé&w ; first aorist, Aefa ; perfect passive, AéAeypar ; first aorist passive, 


; érévOnv. 2. “I gather,” future, Aéw, &c. ; perfect, etAoya ; perfect 


passive, elAeywat; second aorist passive, Aéyyv ; second future passive, 
Aéynooua. 3. Middle, “ I lay myself down,” future, Agsouar ; first 
aorist, éAefdunv ; third person singular, second aorist, AéxTo, without a 


connecting vowel. Araréyowat, “I converse,” perfect, dievAeyyar ; 


first aorist, deAéyOnv.. Hence it unites in itself the forms given under 
1 and 2. Sie 
AHBQ, see Aayubavo. 
AfOw, see AurBave. 
' AHXQ, see Aayydvo. 
Aotw, “ I wash.” In this verb the Attics almost invariably contrac 
the connecting vowel of the termination with the ov; as, éAov, third 


person singular of the imperfect ; EAouyey, first person plural. Present. 


passive, Aovpat, &e. ; infinitive, Aotcbat. 


M. 

*Maioua:, see MAQ. ; 

MAKQ, “I bleat,’” From this obsolete primitive form there remain 
only the second aorist uaxov, and the perfect yéunxa, participle pep- 
axvia, which are associated with the common present pnkGouar. 

Mav6déve, “ I learn,” ftom MAO@Q, second aorist, eta future, 
uabjoouat ; perfect, weudOnKa. 

“Mapvqnat, “TI fight,” nsual a in the present and imperfect ; op- 
tative, wapvoiuny. 

Méyoua, “ I fight,” future, naxéoouat and payjoouat, Attic payod- 
pac; first aorist, iuayeoduny ; perfect, usuayéowar and weudynua. 

*MAQ, an obsolete primitive form, signifying, 1. ‘* F desire,” “ strive,” 
and has in this signification only the perfect, uéuaa ; first person plural, 
pépapev ; participle, weuadc; genitive, -droc and Gro¢; third person 
plural pluperfect, uéuacay. 2. “I taste,” “ feel,” in which the present 
paiowat is usual ; future, wdcouat; first aorist, fuacdunv. 

*Mecpouat, “ I obtain,” from the rogt MEPQ, perfect middle, &wopa ; 
perfect passive, euapuat. Hence eiyapraz, “ it is ordained by fate.” 

MéAAw, “ Iam about,” “am to come,” imperfect, jpeddor, with the 
temporal augment ; future, peraAgjow, &c. 


MéAw, “ I concern,” « give concern to,” “lie at the heart of,” is mostly » 


used in the active form only, as an impersonal, péder; future, werjoes, 


si 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 185 


&c.* perfect epic, wéunde; middle, péhouat, ** Tam concerned ;” future, 
ueAgoouat ; first aorist, iueAnOnv. 

MéubAwxa, see MOAQ, 

Mévo, “ I remain,” perfect, weuévna ; perfect middle, _péeuova. 

Miyvout, also picyw, “ I mix,” future, pigw ; first aorist, fea ; per- 
fect passive, wéuypyat ; first aorist passive, éuixOnv ; second a aorist pas 
sive, éuiynv. 

Miuvgoxa, “I remind,” from MNAQ, future, prgocw, &c. Middle, 
piuvqjoKopat, “ I remember,’ mention ;”? first aorist, éuvnoOny ; future, 
prnoOfoouat ; perfect, wéuvnuat, “ I am mindful of,” “ think of,’ “re- 
member ;” subjunctive, yéuvapat ; optative, BEB aENY and peyvouny ; 
to which is joined the bie future passive, peuvpoouat, I shall ever 
bear in mind.” 

*MOAQ, “TI go,” future, woAodua: ; second aorist, oka perfect, | 
péubAwxa (formed from MOAQ by a transposition of the radical letters, 
therefore properly néuAwxa, and by the insertion of 8). The usual pres- 
ent thereto is BAdoka. 

*Mvxdouat, “I bellow,” second aorist, guixov ; perfect, éveice ° 
from MYKQ. i . % 


N. 

*Naiw, “I dwell,” future, vdccouar; first aorist middle, évacoduny , 
first aorist passive, évdoOnv ; perfect passive, vévacuat. The first ao- 
rist active, vaca, has the transitive signification, “I bring into a 
dwelling.” 

Ndoow, “I stuff,” Stee, vase ; first aorist, évasa 3 perfect rca 
- pévaouat. 

Néuo, “ I distribute,” future, veu and vephon 3 first aorist, Everua ; ; 
perfect, vevéunxa ; first aorist passive, éveu7Onv and éveuédny. 

Néw, “ I swim,” fature, vedcouat and vevootpac ; first aorist, Evevoa, 


Nie, “ I wash,” borrows its tenses from virrw, future, vino, &c 
. ~ - 


O. 

"Oa, “ I smell,” “ emit an odour,” future, d¢jo ; perfect. middle, 
5dwda, with the reduplication, and a present meaning. 

Clyw and otyvupt, usually avotyvuus, “ I open,” imperfect, dvégyov ; 
first aorist, dvéyéa; infinitive, dvoitac ; perfect, dvéwya ; perfect ‘mid- 
dle, dvéquya, with an intransitive signification, “I stand open.” Epic 
writers generally use only the temporal, not the syllabic, augment, and 
@ is then changed into wi; thus, first aorist, diga. 

Oida, see Eido. 

Q2 


yay 


186 _ CATALOGUE OF 


Ofouat or otua, “ I think,” second person, ole: ; imperfect, ddunv 
also Gunv ; future, oifoouac ; first aorist, O7Onv ; infinitive, olnOijva. 
Epic writers lengthen the diphthong, and say étowaz, or, with an active 
form, d¢w, and form the remaining tenses to it regularly ; as, first aorist 
middle, Gicduny ;° first aorist passive, GloOnv. 

Oiyouar, I depart, ” or “am gone,” future, cals pel - igeicoy OXN- 
uat; or, in an active form with w, o/yoxa. 

OIQ, see ofowa: and dépw. 

’OAtcGaivw or epee y: “ T slide,” future, dAcc070w ; second aorist, 
bAtoOor. 

"OAAvmt, “I destroy,” from OAQ, future, eléou, Attic 646 ; first av 
rist, OAeca ; perfect, dA@Aexa. Middle, dAAvuaz, “ I perish ” future, 
oAotuat ; second aorist, GAduyv. The perfect middle 6Aw2a has the 
reduplication. i. 

be aa “ T swear,” future: dpodpat; first aorist, Guoca; perfect, 
duepoka ; perfect passive, Oueuoopuat, but in the third person also 6 Oue- 
uoral. 

’'Oudpyvout, “ I wipe off,” future, dudpfo, &e 

’Ovivnut, “7 am of use,” forms the present and imperfect like fornuz, 
but the remaining tenses from the primitive ONAQ ; future, dvjow ; first 


-aorist, Ovyca. Middle, dvivaua, I have advantage ;”’ second aorist, 


dvauny, epic and Ionic Gvjuny ; optative, dvaiuny ; infinitive, dvacbar. 
~ *Ovouat, “ I revile,” present and imperfect like didouat, the rest from 


ONOQ ; future, dvocouar 5 first aorist, Ovooduny ; first aorist passive, 


avocbnv. 

OTIQ, “I see,” perfect, drw7a ; future, épouat; first aorist passive, 
&oOnyv (with an active as well as a passive signification) ; perfect pen, 
Gupat ; future, opOyoopac. 

‘Opda, “ I see,” imperfect, é6pwv, Ionic’ Bpeiy ; perfect, édpaxa ; per- 
fect passive, éOpayar; first aorist passive, éapdOyv. All the remaining 


~ forms are wanting to this verb, and are supplied by those given esi 


OTQ and eidw. 

“Opvopt, “J excite,” from OPQ, future, dpca , first aorist, Gpea ; : 
second aorist, Gpopov, with the reduplication. Middle, dpvvpjas, “ I 
arise ;” seccnd aorist, Gpduyy, or, by rejecting the connecting vowel, 
&punv ; second person, Gpco ; imperative, a or dpo0 ; ee dpo- 
oeuat ; perfect middle, dpapa. 

’Oodgpaivoua, “ I smell,’ * future, badphaapas ; : second aorist, dogpd 
unv, also Go¢pdunv. 

’Odeiia, “ I am indebted,” “ am obliged: ” & ought,” future, dperdjow, 
&c.. The second aor st OdeAov is used merely to designate a wish, “ oh 
that!’ “ would that * and the more usual present is dgpeanave 5 future, 
dGAfow, &e. 


Pee) ae 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 187 


II. 


TIA9Q, see IIdoyo. 

- Tluifa, “ I jest,’ future, maifouar and margodua 5 ‘first aorist, Eracoa ; 
perfect, wémarxa; perfect passive, mémacopat and wérarypat, 

Ilaiw, “I strike,” future, usually zwacgow, but the remaining tenses 
regular; first aorist, éraoa ; perfect, wéxacxa ;_ first aorist passive, 
éraicOyv. 

Iidoyo, “I suffer,” from TIA@Q, second aorist, éxaOov. Perfect 
middle, zézov@a, from ITENOQ. The form nénnia for the perfect, 
-éxnoca for the first aorist, and myoouac for the future, are more rare, and 
are proper to the poetic language‘alone. A peculiar Homeric form is 
xérroo0e, as second person plural of the perfect. 

TefOw, * I persuade,” proceeds regularly 1 in the active, but forms, be-. 
sides the first aorist éevoa, a second aorist, érifov (with the epic re- 
duplication nériOov), and likewise an epic future, terOjow. Passive © 
and middle, wei@ouat, the latter voice with the meaning, “I believe,” 
“¢ follow,” “ obey ; second aorist middle, éxv@duny, with reduplication 
metOounv ; perfect middle, érrowOd,, “* I trust.” 

TleAdlo, ‘‘ I make to approach,” * bring near,” regi up to the epic 
forms of the. second aorist, éAjunv (as middle, according to the conju- 
gation in yt), and the first aorist passive, meAdoOyv. 

Tlérpwrat, see ILOPQ. | 

Tléxraw, see Tlécow. aa 

*Ilép0, “I lay waste,” second aorist, erxpabor, by transposition of - 
the radical letters, from érapfov. 

Tlécow, wérta, * I boil,” future, nrépw, &c., from mento. 

Ileceiv, see rixTo. 

Ilerévvvut, “ I spread,” future, rerdow, Attic werd ; perfect passive, 
nénrapat (for rerétracuat) ; first aorist passive, éretdoOnv. 

Tlérouat, “I fly.’ From this primitive form, by syncope, we have 
the second aorist érréyunyv, infinittve mrécOaz, future wer#oouas (usual 
form rjoowa). According to the conjugation in ws are formed the 
present, wérayat and imrayat; first aorist, éxrdunv ; second aorist, 
éxrny; infinitive, mr7vat; participle, mrda¢; perfect, wéxrnxa. Be- 
sides these, epic writers use the lengthened forms rotdoya:, rwTdouat, 
and also motéowat, the tenses of which are formed regularly ; as, perfect, 
meToTn ual, Se. 

TIETQ, see Ilinro. 

TedOouar, see MuvOdvopat. 

Ijyveu, “I fix,” future, 7§a, &c. ; first aorist passive, briny aX 
second aorist passive, émdynv ; perfect middle, xérnya, “ I stand fast.” 


188 a CATALOGUE OF 


TliuraAnut, “I fill,” infinitive, ryxAdvar, formed by reduplication 
from the root ILAAQ, wherein yu is inserted to strengthen the syllable. 
This is frequently rejected by the poets, and also in prose, when in com- 
position an additional x happens to stand immediately before the redu- 
plication (as, for example, éurinAnut). Future, rAjow, &c.; perfect 
passive, téxAnopat ; first aorist »éxAnoOnv. Besides these are to be ob- 
served an epic second aorist middle, éxAjunv or xAjunv ; optative, 
mAeiuny, with an intransitive signification, “I am full,” and a perfect 
middle, éAn@a, likewise with an intransitive present signification, and 
derived from an accessory form wAGBe, which is also not unusual ¢ as a 
present. 

Tliumpnyt, “I set on fire,” infinitive, myumpévat, proceeds in the pres- 
ent ari imperfect like Zornuc ; the remaining forms are from TIPAQ or 
ap70w ; thus, future, tp7ow, &c.; first aorist passive, éxpyoOyv. Here, 
also, the inserted to strengthen the syllable is omitted when an addi- 
tional ~ stands immediately before the reduplication ; ; as, éumimpnue. 

Tlivs, “I drink,” from THQ, future, wiovar; second aorist, ézuov ; 
infinitive, weZv, &c. ; imperative, 770i. All the rest are formed from 
TIOQ ; perfect, aérwxa; perfect passive, wérouac ; first aorist passive, 
éxdOnv ; future passive, robjoouat. The forms iow, érioa, have the 
transitive signification, ‘ to give to drink,” to which miioxe is usual as 
a present. 

Tluxpdoxo, “ I sell,” from mepda, future, repdow ; first aorist, gre 
paca. Then from IIPAQ, perfect, rémpdxa ; perfect passive, mémpa- 
pat ; first aorist passive, éxpaOnv ; third future passive, tempacouar. 

Ilirtw, ‘I fall,” forms from ILETQ the future, Teovpeds ; second 
aorist, recov ; and from IITO® the perfect, rémruxa. 

TQ, see Ilivw. ee 

TIAdlw, * I cause to wander,” “ drive poe ” future, mddySer, &ce. 

TIAAQ, 7A700, see TiurAnu. 

WAéw, “I sail,” fature active, wAetow; future middle, rAeboouar 
and zAevooiua: ; first aorist active, bikes, &c. ; poner passive, 
. mérAevopat ; first aorist passive, éxAevobnr. 

Wgjoow, “ I strike,” future, TAnEW, &c. ; “second aorist passive, éz- 
Anynv, but in the compounds érAdynv. An epic form is the second ao- 
rist active, némdmyov, with the reduplication. 

TIAd, an Tonic accessory form of 7Aéw#, whence a second noiiet; in 
Aw, according to the conjugation in jz ; participle, Adc. 

IIvéa, “ I breathe,” future, rvevow or mvevoodpuar, &c. ; first aorist 


passive, exvebabny ; ; perfect passive, *némvyuat, “I possess spirit,” 


“am wise. - + 


ope 


Mobéw, * 1 long for,” fature, roOjow and rrobéow, usually robécopuac ; 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 189 


perfect, sem66nxa ; perfect passive, mem6Onuat ; first aorist passive; 
ércobécOnv. 

Ilopeiv, Exopov, “7 gave,” a defective second aorist with the poets. 
~ To the same theme (in the sense of “ to distribute’’) belongs the perfect 
passive wémpwrat, “it ts ordained by Sag ;” participle, Ben pUeyes, 

ILOQ, see ive. ° 

TIPOQ, see ILopety. 

ITAQ, see ILetdvvupt, Iérouar. 

Ilr#oow, “I cower down,” future, x7#w, and the remaining forms 
regular ; perfect participle, exryéc. 

IITOQ, see Iirrw. . 

Tlvv@dvoua:, “ I learn,” from nesOouat (poetic), future, TEVOOMAL ; 
second aorist, érv0duny ; perfect, TETVOUAL. 


FP: 

‘Péa, “ I do,” fiber: pé&a, or, from EPTQ, state, épsu, &c. ; per- 
fect middle, gopya. 

‘Péw, “ I-flow,” future, pevow,; future middle, petooua ; first aorist 
active, é/pevoa. In the same signification, however, the second aorist 
é6pinv (formed according to the conjugation pt, from a root ‘PYEQ), 
with the future pujoozac and perfect éApiyxa, is more usual. 

‘Péw, “ I say,” see Eipo. 

‘Pyyvoue, “ I rend,” future, Aygo, oohe ° second aorist passive, éppd- 
ynv ; perfect middle, 3pwya, with an intransitive signification, “ I am 
rent.” ‘ 

‘Pryéw, “ I shudder,” future, pryjow,-&c. ; perfect middle, *%pzya. 

‘Pinto and pirtéw, “I throw,” both forms usual in the present and | 
imperfect ; all the rest from the first only ; ; ee, pio, &c. ; second 
aorist passive, ppigyy. 

‘Pvéw, see ‘Péw. 

. ‘Povvvut, ‘I strengthen,” future, om &e. ; ‘ perfect passive, /pwo- 
pac ; imperative, &/pwoo, “ farewell ;” first aorist passive, é/pd00nv. 


6 


2. 


Laarivo, “ I sound a trumpet,” future, cadattyzo, &c. 

LBévvept, “I extinguish,” future, obéow, &c.; perfect passive, éo- 
beopuat 5 ; first aorist passive, éobécOnv.. The perfect fobnxa, and the sec- 
ond aorist éo6yy, infinitive o6jvaz, have the intransitive signification, 
‘‘ to be extinguished,” like the passive. 

*Zevw, “I put in motion,” first aorist, oceva, formed without « Co; a 
by doubling the o in annexing the augment, eet passive, srekand 7% 
first aorist pes Eoovdyv. - 


‘ 


190 | CATALOGUE OF 


* Sxeddvveut, “ I scatter,” future, oxeddow, Attic oxedd, &c. 3 perfect 
passive, éoxédacyas. 

EKéAdw, “I dry up,” first éorist: foxnaadan epic form, as from a root 
ZKAAQ). Middle, oxéArowat, “I am dried up ;” future, SKAgooat. 
To these, on account of a sijpmncetion likewise intransitive, thé active 
forms, perfect éoxAyxa and Second aorist LoxAgv, infinitive oxAqvas 
(formed according to the conjugation in ut), also belong. 

Zude, “ I smear,” second person, duge, &c. ; infinitive, oujv; fu- 
tire, oujow, &e. ; first aorist passive, éouyyOnv, from opjyo. 

Lxeiv, oméobat, see "Ew. a 

2mévow, “I make a libation,” future, oreiow ; first aorist, Zoreica ; 
perfect, fo7recxa ; perfect passive, ait teh ; first eorist passive, éo7- 
eicOnv. — i - 

Zrepéw, “I deprive,” proceeds regularly, but in the passive is the 
more simple form orépoyat, to which mh et aorist éorépyv, participle 
orepei¢, and future oTEppoouat belongs | 

SIO oTépyuut, and oTpevyups, * “ T spread,” future, oropéow 
and orpdéow; first aorist, éoropeca and éotpwoa; perfect, éorpwxa ; 
perfect passive, oTpwpyar, more prey kargonet ; first aorist passive, 
éroopécOny and éorpabyy. 

*=Irvyéw, “I abhor,” -“ I hate, ” Fata; otvynow, &e. The second 
aorist orvyov is formed from a root ZTYTQ, as also a first aorist, go- 
rvéa, with a transitive Rees “© T make to yet " 

axeiv, see "Eyw. 

Lolo, “ Lf save,” future, cdo ; "perfor passive céowopat 3 ‘ but first 
aorist Pageive, éoaOnv 


» ie - 
Taddo, “I endure,” used only in the first aorist, érd”aca, epic érd/- 


aooa. ‘The-perfect, ‘térAnka (in the plural, by syncope, réTAayuev); im-— 


perative, térAa& ; infinitive, teTAdvat, epic TretAdyev ; future, TAgoo- 
pat, and second aorist, érAmy (according to the conjugation in pz); in- 
finitive, rAjvar ; imperative, TA7O:; optative, ssapohl partic. meh TAGS. 
TA®Q, see Odrrw. 
TAQ, see Teivo. ‘ ; ; 
Teivo, “ I stretch,” future, tevd ; first aorist, €recva. From the rad- 


“ical form TE come the perfect réraxa, perfect pageive rérapat, first ao- 


rist passive érdé0nyv, future rabioopal. 

TEKQ, see Tixto. | “gt 

Téuva, I cut,” forms from ‘TEM the future reud, s second aorist 
Erepov, perfect rétunKa, perfect arise rérunpat,, first aorist passive 


A 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 191 


etunOnv.. In Ionic this verb is téuve, from which comes the second 
aorist érayov, a form used also with the Attics. 

*Terayév, “ reaching,” “ seizing,” a second aorist participle, from 
the same root with reive. 

~ Tedyw. In this form two kindred verbs must be accurately distin- 
guished. 
1. Tedyo, “ I make,” “ fabricate,” regular future, Tev&e ; first 

aorist, érevéa ; perfect, Tétevya ; perfect passive, Térvypyat ; 

first aorist passive, ériy@nv. Epic forms of the second aorist 
are TéTuKov, active, and TetuKduny, middle, both by redupli- 
cation. 
2. Tvyydve, “ I happen,” “ acquire,” future, redSouar ; sécdhd 
aorist, rvyov ; perfect, reriynka. r 

Tixto, “I bring forth,” from TEKQ, future, ré@ ; future middle, 
réSouat ; second aorist, érexov; perfect, téroxa. 

Titpdo, “I bore,” from TPAQ, future, tpjow, &e. An accessory 
formmore usual with the Attics is rvtpaivw, to which belong the future 
ritpave and the first aorist érérpyva. The perfect always from the rad- 
ical form, tétpyxa ; perfect passive, rérpyua. : 

Titpocky, “ F wound,” epic Tpde» future, TPOTW, &e. : perfect pas- 
kive, Térpwpat ; first aorist passive, érpoOny ; future, tpwO7couar, and 
also rpécouat, with the form of the middle, but the x Rae of the | 
passive. 2 

Tiw, “I honour,” is histely poetical, and forms regularly the future, 
tiow, &c. ; perfect passive, Tétiyzar. At the same ge eas os: it 
furnishes the derivative tenses also to 

Tive, “I pay,” * atone for,” future, ticw ; perfect passive, TéT- 
topuat ; first aorist pasigve, éric@nv. ‘The middle rivoyat, fa- 
ture ricouat, first aorist €rvoduny, has the signification, “to re- 

 venge,” “ punish. 7 

TAHMI, radical form assumed for the formation of some tenses of 
TaAdw, which see. < 

Tpédw, “I nourish,” future, Spépu ; ane middle, rérpoga; per- 
fect passive, Té@payyat; infinitive, Tebpagbat ; ; second aorist passive, 
érpdénv ; more rarely, first aorist passive, 20pébOnv. 

Tpéxo, “I run,” future, Ypétw ; future middle, Opéfouar ; first ao- 


rist active, 20pega. More usually, from APEMQ, second aorist, édpa- ~~ 


pov; future, mn arigeet ; perfect mee Er Parnes 5 ; perfect oe 
dédpoua. 

Tpoyw, “I eat,’ future, tpdfomar ; “second aorist, Bhaceal : from 
TPATQ. ‘<a 

_ Teyxave, see Vebyu. 





i 
= Pe 
~ 


192 _. CATALOGUE OF oo 


Torro, “ I strike,” has commonly, with the Attics, future, TunTioo ; ‘ 
second aorist passive, érdanv. 
Tide, “I fumigate,” “ burn,” future, a ae ; second aorist passive, 


re : | ; 


a. | eg ae 
reas see under “Exo. 
ae 
Paya, see "Edu. ite a ae 
oR Paiva, at cause to appear,” future, ava ; first aorist, épyia: sec- 
e ond aorist, Egavon ; perfect middle, TEgnVG 3 perfect passive, 7épacpat 5 
», first aorist persire, épavOnv ; second aorist passive, Epavny ; second fu- 
« passive, ¢ WHTouat. The passive has an intransitive signification, 
“< I appear,” which properly belongs to the middle. | : 
Peidoua, “I spare,” future, geicopat, &c. Epic forms are, perfect, 
mepidnuat, usual form médecopat 5 ‘third future, megidnooudat, in the sig- 
nification of the et future ; ; second ty mepidouny, PY reduplica- | 
* tion. ° 
‘. dépa, “I bear,” Biverfect, Ede, eee es passive, pence” ; imper- 
tect, édepdunv.. All the other. tenses are formed partly from O1Q, partly 
_ Yom ENETK®Q. ‘Thus, future, olow ; first aorist, jveyka (Ionic qv- 
a “ene Kea) ; second aorist, AveyKov ; periect, EVIVOXG 5 perfect passive, évjv- 
Yo -eyyae (Ionic évyvecywar) 3 first aorist passive, igor (Ionic qvetyOnv) ; 
~ - future, évexOjoouar and oicbjoouat ; future middle, oicopat; first aorist 
~~ middle, qveyeauny. In epic, several other forms are derived from O1@, 
besides these a: duced ; as, imperative of the aorist, mee, oicétu, &c. ; 
subjunctive of the aorist, third person singular, oic7. 
P6drva, “I am beforehand, ” “ anticipate,” forms from 0AQ, future, 
) GOjou ; future middle, ¢9jc00ua: ; first aorist active, t¢0aca; second 
norist, £p0yv ; subjunctive, $06 ; optative, d0ainv, &c.; perfect, ’Odxa. 
bia, “I beget,” ‘future, gicw ; first aorist, épvoa; middle, dvouat, ’ 
“I arise,” “am born,” &c.; perfect active, répdxa, “ am by na- 
ture ;” second aorist, Epur, “ I am,” &c. 







x. | 
Xaipu, “ I rejoice,” future, yaipyow ; future middle, xalpjoouat, Tm 
epic also Keyapjow and Keyapyoouar ; oe aorist, éydpnv (according 
to the conjugation in 2); subjunctive, XapG ; optative, xapeiqy, &c. 
_ Besides these are to be observed the forms of the aorist : — éyaipnoa 
with later writers ; éxnpduny ‘and «exapouqy in epic.’ Perfect active.. 
texapnka; perfect passive, eexapnua, poetic Keyapia. f 


IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 193 


Xiu,  T stool,” future, xéoo, more usual than yeooiuat; perfect 
middle, «éyoda. | 
Kia, J pour, future, Kero ; first dorist, évea, epic Exeva (formed 
without the characteristic of the tense, by merely annexing the termina- 
tion) ; infinitive of the first aorist, yéaz; imperative, yéov, yedrw, &c. ; 
perfect, xeyUxa ; perfect Art Kéxtuat; first aorist passive, éyvOnv, ‘ 
&c. 
Xpdw. Of this verb must be distinguishes different forms of in- 
flection; with their significations. a 
1. Xpdu, “I give a resfonse,” proceeds eatilite] ; infinitive, 
‘wodv ; future, ypjow, &c. ;) first aorist passive, ian : 
2. Kixvpnut, “I lend,” Eeecess like fornus (yet without a sec- » 
_ ond aorist); future, ypyow ; first aorist, Exoyoa, &c. ; vidilld e 
Spats “¢ T borrow ;” future, XeAe HGS 5 first aorist, evon- 
oan. f 
3. Xpdouat, “I use,” takes 7 instead of @ in contraction ; sec- 
_- ond person, yp#, &c. ; infinitive, xpHooas ; ; future, Xohoopar ; ; 
first aorist, Siniiedull 3 perfect, Kéxpmpstt (usually in the sig- 
nification, “ J Be _It is remarkable that the Ionians, when 
they contract, take @ here as the mingled sound ; thus, infini- 
tive, Tonic ypicba. Generally, however, instead of ‘Xpaopar, s 
they use the form xpéouat, which is regularly conjugated wits 
throughout; they also change 0 after ¢ into @ ; as, ypéwurat. _* 
4, ‘Xi, ‘Cat 48, incumbent ay one ought,” &c., infinitive, xpiivae , » 
optative, xpetn ; subjunctive, xp#; participle, Xpsar 5 imper- * ra 
* fect, éxpiv or xpijv, never éypy ; future, ypjcer. ' 
5. ’"Aréypn, ‘it is sufficient,” third person plural, @roypact ; ; in- 
finitive, aroypqv ; participle, advoypév,- doa, Ov; imperfect, 
aréxypn; future, dxoypyoet. Here also the Ionians usually . 
take @ instead of 7 ; as, enperect, aréxypa. 
| Xodvvny, “FT colour,” future, ypdow, &c. ; perfect passive, Kéypwo- 
pat; first aorist passive, éypdo0nv. "ie a 
Xovyvm, I heap up,” “dam.” ‘The radical form vow is usual as a . 
_ present with the older writers. To this belong the infinitive, yoiv ; fu- 
ture, YOow, &er5 perfect passive, xéyopar+ first aorist passive, éyoo 
Onv. . ip . 






Q. 
20é0,.% I push,” imperfect, 60ovv ; future, O6jow and dow ; first 
aorist, woa ; perfect, xa; perfect passive, wouat ; first aorist pas- 
1a 


sive, sma all from the radical form ’00Q, 
R / 


~ 


- 


194 _. PARTICLES. ‘te 


XXVI. PARTICLES. 
© The Particles are Adverbs, Conjunctions, and Preposi- 


_ tions, the Interjections being: ranked in Greek under Ad- 
verbs. ; 


a 


“+ ADVERBS. 

1. The most usual termination of an adverb is in WC. 

2. If the adjective from whieh the adverb is derived be 
one that ends in o¢, the adverb is formed by merely ap- 


pending the termination w¢ to the root as indicated by the 


nominative. ‘Thus, from aodéc (root cob); we have sodéic ; 
from Kaddc (root kad), Kade ; from KatpLog (root Kaspt), 
Katpiwe, &c. 

3. In the case of other adjectives the root will be rec- 
ognised most clearly in the genitive ; and to the root thus 


_ found the termination we is in like manner annexed. Thus, 


from péyac (root pew we have peydAwe ; from yaplete 


(root yaptevT), xaptévTws ; from GAnOA¢ (root dAnGe), wie 
_ Géwe, contracted dAnOac, &e. . 


4. In many cases the adverb has no particular form, but 
is expressed by some part of an adjective. Thus: 


1. Theneuter of the adjective, singular and plural, 
is used for an adverb chiefly by the poets; as, xa- 
Rov deiderv, “to sing beautifully ;” Bpaxyéa der 
Osiv, “ to recount briefly.” 

_ 2. In like manner, also, the dative singular femi- 

” nine occurs instead- of an adverb ; as, Snuwooia, 
“ publicly 3” Ldia, “privately ;” Kkowvq, “in com- 
mon ;°? treo, “ on foot ;” Tavry, thus,” ‘in this 
manner,” &c. But, strictly speaking, in such con- 
structions a substantive is always to be supplied, 
usually 680. 


5. Adverbs are also formed from substantives, and that 
im various ways. ‘Thus: 


: ADVERBS. . 195 


S 7 
‘, 


1. Certain forms of substantives are used in the 
signification of adverbs ; as, dpyfjyv (in the begin- 
ning), “ entirely ;” dxuhv (at the point), “ scarce ;” 
Koud (with diligence), “very much ;” onovd7G 
(with zeal or pains), “with trouble or difficulty,” 
“scarce,” “hardly.” In all these, and others of 
the kind, there is an ellipsis of a preposition. 

2. Some substantives furnish an adverbial sense 
when combined into one word with prepositions. 
Thus, tapaypjua (with the thing), ‘ immediately ;” 
mpovpyov (mpd épyov, for the thing, to the pur- 
pose), “serving the purpose,” “ serviceable,” * re- 
quisite,” “useful ;” éxmodéyv (from before the feet), 

~ “out of the way,” “ aside ;” gurodwv, “ tn the 
way,” impeding.” were 

3. Adverbs are derived from pibettintiviéd by inthesks 
ing certain syllables. ‘Thus, the terminations 0a, 

- Ot, ot, ot, yn, and you, signify “in a@ place ;” the 
terminations Je and Oey, * from.a@ place ;” and ds, 
oe, Ce,' * to a place ;” as, 


EVTaVOG we ww we where. 
ovpavodt . « « « « « « « tm heaven. 
OLKOL e 2 . e ° es ac e ° at home. 
"AGINOE na 6 on gs.) «Gb AER 
. a 
gi kee t | ele ehlhverye wy ex,.0: y OCF YMRENEs 
TAVTAXOV Y 
GAAGYOU | 5 6) 4 e',:0 , 0. 0 OLSBWNET Cs 


eas 
ovpaved_e 
OleODED. OEE OPEN TREO | From homes 


ta eet ele, «Prom heaven. 





a 


1. The termination fe is nothing more than ode, the deuble letter be- 
mg put for the od. This change, however, ceccurs merely in some names 
of places, and in a few other words ; “ch as, Jvpace, for Iipacde, “ to 
the door,” ** out.” 


196 ADVERBS. 
-ovpaveve . | | 
ee ° ¢: os Ee te wee. £0, Reawem, 
- ovpavice se ES 


OAbaGE SE PR! OE 3 te Thebes: 
AOjvace . eae es tO Athens. 


4. Adverbs are also formed from, substantives by an 
nexing the syllables dév and sori, and those thus 
produced express-comparison ; as, Botpudor, “ clus- 
ter-wise ;” kvvnddv, “after the manner of dogs ;” 
‘EAAnviort, “after the manner of the Greeks ,” 
dvdptoti, “ after the manner of men.” 

5. Adverbs derived from substantives sometimes end 
in ddénv, and then denote that something takes 
place by the application of the idea which is con- 
tained in the substantive ; as, Aoyddny (from A6- 
yoc), “ by selection ;” dpbodadny (from angela, 
“ by delay.” 


6 Adverbs are also formed from verbs, and have the ter- 


mination in d7v, which termination is annexed immediate- 


ly to the root. A preceding soft or aspirate, however, must 
change at the same time into the corresponding middle let- 
ter. Thus we have xpv6dnv, from xptrrTw (root Kpv6), “ se- 
cretly ;? 7A&éydny, from TAéKw (root TAEK), “in a twisted 
manner or form ;” ovAAgbony, from ovAAapbdvw (root.ovA- 
46), * taken together.” 

7. Lastly, from’ some ‘prepositions, also, adverbs are 
formed, which serve to denote place, and which all. termi- 
“nate in @; as, dvw (from dvd), “ above ;” Kato, “ below 3” 
iw, “ without ;” elow, “ within ;” pbc, “ onward.” ‘This 
@ belongs also to some other adverbs; as, dv, ‘ sudden- 
ly ;” obTw, “ thus ;” drriow, “ behind ;” r6ppw, * far.” 

8. Besides these there are yet many adverbs whose der- 
fvation does not admit of being accurately poirited out, and 


which are partly obsolete adjective forms; as, mAgoiov, 


“near ;” onepov, ** to- -day ;” aiptov, ‘ to-morrow ;” ayxov, 


NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 197 


“near ;” dwov, * at the same time ;” eixi, “ in vain ;” dixn, 
“in a twofold manner ;” and partly genuine adverbs, with 
the terminations a, a¢, l, &, Ol, OV, TE; as, KapTa, * very ;” 
médac, “near ;” peyadwoti, “ greatly 3” éxet, “ there ;” 
mol, ** whither ;” mote, “ when,” &c. wae 

9. Under the head of adverbial particles, the @ (before a 
vowel av) must be especially noticed. It is of three kinds: 
1. @ privative, which carries with it the force of a nega- 
tion ; as, doodoc, * unwise ;”? advvdpoc, “ without water ;” 2. 
a intensive, which strengthens the. meaning; as, adévAoc, 


much wooded ;” 3. a@ denoting union; as, dAovoc, “a 


consort.”  “ 
10. The following also occur frequently in the poets, and 


denote increase, &c. 


apt; as,  dpidndoc, very conspicuous. 
Bov; *  obtBpwotic, voracious. 
Bp;  “ Bpthrrvoc, shouting aloud. 
da ; “« — déoxtoc, thickly shaded. 
ent; “ éptb6peuhe, loud roaring. 
Ca ; “ = GakorTor, furious. 
Aa; “  Jdpayoc, valiant. 
As AtAaiopnar, I desire earnestty. 


“NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


1. There are in Greek two simple negative particles, with 
which all other negations are compounded, ov and p7. 
The former of these becomes ov« before a vowel that has 
the soft breathing, and oi before a vowel that is aspirated 
The Attics, dtso, for greater emphasis, sometimes write ovyé. 

_ 2. From these two negatives, ov and yf, are formed all 
the other modes of negation in Greek ; such as ovdé, obte, 
ovdsic, oboe, ovT@TOTE, OvdaUaC, obdapov, undé, ENTE 
undeic, &c. 

3. Although the English language possesses only one ex: 

R2 


~ . 


Le ; Ae Se ae ae ae 
We. We ; 


298 “NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


Pression for both of these particles, yet between the use of 


ov and pf in Greek, a definite and important CSetiiection ob- 
tains. 

4. In general, this distinction is correctly idighated by 
saying that ob denies positively and directly, but that uj, on 
the contrary, denies conditionally or ‘prohibitively. Hence 
od is used to deny a thing itself; 7, on the contrary, to 
deny the supposition of a thing. | 

5. Hereupon is founded the following general rule: od 
stands as a negative particle in an independent proposition, 
and in all cases, likewise, where an idea is negatived in. 
and by itself: 7, on the contrary, denies in conditional 
propositions, whether they appear as really dependant, or 
the dependance lies merely in the imagination, as in con- 
ditional and assumed cases. 

6. The following remarks will lead to a right application 
of this rule in single cases. 


1. A whole and independent proposition, whether 
pronounced as an absolute assertion or as an opin- 
ion and view, or as a question, can be negatived 
only by the particle ov. Thus, ov« dyaov 7) 0- 
Avkolpavia, “ The government of the many is not a 
good thing.” Ovx dv dyanonv KareioOa amto- 
toc, “ I would not like to be called faithless.” Ti 
yap ob tdpeotiv ; “ Why, then, is he not present ?” 

- %. Mf, on the contrary, appears as a negation after 
all particles expressing condition, supposition, and 
intention ; as, ei uf) dpOdc¢ Aéyw, adv Epyov éréy- 
xewv, * If I do not speak correctly, wt ws £33" part 
to prove wt.” 

3. M7 is used after relatives, and with participles 
when. these likewise CXPKEEAS condition ; as, Tle 
68 Sovvas Sévarat érép@ & ph abrog Eyer; “ Who 
can give a sane to another, if he has it not himself?” 
Here & ovx abtocg &yer would mean, “ that which 





NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 199 


he has not himself.” So, also, 6 pa) miorebwv, “ If 
a person does not believe.” But 6 ob morebwr, 
“ One who does not believe.” , 
4. Mf is used with infinitives, whether they be de~ 
pendant upon a verb or accompanied by the ar- 
‘ticle ; as, dvdyxn TovTo pi Trocety, “ It is neces- 
sary not to do this.” Td pH recoOjvat por al- 
ribv oot THY KaKeyv, “ Your not being persuaded by 
me is to you the source of these evils.” 

5. My always stands with the imperative, as also 
with the subjunctive when it is used instead of the 
imperative, and with the optative when it indicates 
a wish; as, pj) mpdtte TovTo, “ Do not do this 3? 
pn TovTO dpdoyc ; and again, pj TovTO yévotTo 
“ May this never be.” 

6. Every purpose implies a Ponceptiont in the mind 
of some one or other, and therefore 74, not ov, fol- 
lows Iva, bra¢, dopa; as, Lé6Awy arredhunoe Etea 
déxa iva J wh Twa TOY vouwr dvayKkacOn AvoaL, 
Tov &OeTo : “* Solon absented himself from home for 

. the space of ten years, in order that he may not be 

compelled to rescind any one of the laws which he 
had enacted.” 


7. Two negatives generally strengthen the aaa and 
do not destroy each other, as in Latin. 

8. This rule may be expressed more fully as follows : 
When to a sentence already made negative, other qualifica- 
tions of a more general kind are to be added, such as some- 
times, some one, somewhere, &c., these are all commonly sub- 
joined in the form of words compounded with the same 
negative particles ; as, ob« éroinoe TovTo ovdapov ovderc, 
‘‘ No one anywhere did this.” And in the same manner, to 
the negation of the whole ! is subjoined the rig gation of the 
parts ; as, ob dévatat ovr’ eb Aéyety, ot’ ev ToLeiv ToVEG 
oiirove, “ He can neither speak well of, nor do good to, has 
friends.” 


: 


* 


200 © NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 


9. In some phrases both the particles ov and unare united; 
as,ov wy and yw, ov. In this combination, as in all other 
cases, ov denies objectively and pq subjectively. Hence 


_ ob pf implies the idea of no apprehension being entertained 
‘that a thing will take place; 7). od, on the. contrary, the 


idea of an apprehension being entertained that a thing will 
not take place. Hence are derived the following observa- 
tions : bay 3 
1. Ov pa is an-intensive: and emphatical negation, 
and indicates the imagination of a thing which 
should 6 and must not take place; as, ov 7 
dvopevijc & éon pidotc, “That thou wilt not (I expect) 
be ill-inclined towards thy friends ;” that is, “be noi 
ill-inclined towards ‘thy friends.” And again, add’ 
ovrror’ && éwov ye pi) wa0ye TOde, “ Yet never (must 
thou expect) that thou wouldst learn this from me ;” 
that is, “ yet never shouldst thou learn this from me.” 
2. Mj) ov, in. dependant propositions, when the verb 
of the principal proposition is either accompanied 
by a negation or contains a negative idea in itself, 
. destroy each other, and are often to be translated 
--by “ that.” Thus, ob% dpvovpat pi) ob yevéobat, 
“I do not deny that it has taken place ;” and again, 
mreiOowat yap ob TooovTOY obdév Gare pj ov KAAGS 
 Caveiv, “« For I am persuaded that there will nothing 
happen to me so bad but that. I shall die nobly.” 
3. In independent. propositions, on the contrary, 27) 
~ ov is used in combination with the subjunctive to 
express negative assertions with less positiveness 
and strength, and is to be translated by “‘ zndeed 
not,” “ perhaps not,” and explained by the addition 
of an omitted verb, as dpa, or the like.. Thus, dA- 
A pip obn. | OtdaKroy H apeTh, “ But virtue may, 
_ perhaps, be a thing not to be taught.” Literally, 
_& But see whether virtue may not be,” &c., the verb 
Spa being supplied. 





NEGATIVE. PARTICLES. " «@OT 


10. Besides the case of 17) ov mentioned above, two neg- 
atives also destroy each other when they belong to differ- 
ent verbs ; as, ovdév éorty Ort ob bréoxeTo, “ He promised 
prenyching ;” literally, ‘“ There ts nothing that he did not 
promise.” | ~ 

11. As compounded with the ficestintl ovk, the particle 
ovxovy may also find a place here. This particle, used by 
the Greeks both in questions and in direct propositions, ad- © 
mits of different translations, and is also differently accent- 
ed, being sometimes written obxovv and sometimes ovKovy. 
The following is to be remarked as essential concerning it. 


1. In interrogative propositions, when the particle 
signifies not therefore ? is it not so? not ?. it is al- 
ways to be accented odxovy, because ode must 
here be Lah ip peer and emphatically heightened. — 
Thus, oveovy yéAwe qdtoro¢g sic éyOpovs yeday ; 
“Is it not, then, the sweetest laughter to laugh at 
one’s enemies 2” 

2. In direct propositions odxovy is either to be trans- 
lated “therefore not,” “ yet not,” or else it stands 
at the beginning of the proposition as a mere em- 
phatical expression for the simple ody, and is to 
be translated by “ therefore,” “ consequently ;” as, 
ov TovTO érroinoac, ovKovY éywye, “ thou hast done 
this, therefore not I.” In this case the accentua- 
tion is generally given as ovxovy. Strictly con- 
sidered, however, the idea of negation does not 
vanish in obxovy even where it is to be translated 
by therefore, but the particle is there, also, proper 
ly an interrogative one. Thus the following sen 
tence, ovKodyv, bray 67 pi o0évw, TeTvadboouat 
“ Therefore, when I am unable, I shall desist,” i 
equivalent to “Is it not so? when I am unable, 
shall desist ?” z 


202 - CONJUNCTIONS. 


CONJUNCTIONS, &c. 
Dew ery 


. "AAAG is an adversative conjunction, and answers generally to the 
Sa. “ but2? From. this: meaning arise others, however, such as, 
‘well, then,” ‘‘ therefore,” in which case dAAd is generally elliptical. 
Thus, aad’ iofi, dre &Fer TOOP obtwe- “ Well, then, know that this will 
be so.” Supply od« avtiorqow, or the like ; “ I will not oppose, but, on 
the contrary, know,” &c. So, in the following passage of Xenophon, it 
occurs in four different senses, all of which may be traced by means of 
ellipses to the prapitive meaning of but.” ’AAAG wa Av’, &bn, obk ab- 
To¢ EAxecbar mpd¢ oe BovAopmat, dAAG ce mpd sue rapereriah "AANG 
TopEevoouat, &on, [dvov omodéyou. *AAD’ vrodésouat oe, bn: Edy pH TU 
gidwrépa cov Evduug. ** Nay, indeed,’ vepiie Socrates, ‘ I do not wish 
to be dragged unio you, but you-to.come to me.’ ‘Weil, then,’ said The- 
odota, ‘I will come ; do you only receive me.’ ‘ Why, I will receive 
you, replied Socrates, ‘if there be not some one dearer than you within.’ ” 

2. ’AAAG yap. In this combination ydp introduces a reason for the 
opposition, &c., expressed by dAAd. Thus, cA2a yap ‘Kpéovra Aevoow, 
Tavow Tove mapeoT@rac Adyouc.  “ But I will check what I am at pres- 
ent saying, for I sce Creon.”” Sometimes, however, the reference is 
more latent, and a clause is to be supplied between G@AAd and ydp from 
what precedes. Thus, in Plato, Rep. 2, p. 336, we have, dAAd yap ép 
Gdov dixny ddcouev, where we must repeat from the previous clause, 
obk athusoe drarAdzouev. But we shall not escape unharmed, for we 
shall render atonement in Hades.” In many instances the reference 
in GA2a-ydép is to be supplied by some general remark, such as, “ but 
‘this was not at all surprising, for ;” “ but this was impossible, for,” &c. 

3. ’AA2’ obv ye. These particles are often joined together, inasmuch 
as, along with the opposition, a consequence of what has preceded is 
also expressed., Thus, 421’ ob todrév ye Tov xXpbvov hrrov andye éao- 
war. “ Yet (GAAd) I will, for this reason (ovv), nop at least (7) be less 
disagreeable.” 

4. When joined with obdé it sib cigihjiid the sense; as, dA’ oddé 
Tespagey “ Nay, LI will not eveniry.” Frequently, in this construc- 
tion, od udvor ov is to be supplied in what precedes ; ; as, in the present 
instance, we my s8Ys “J will not only not do so, but I will not even 
try.” 998 
* 0: In GAAd TOL the particle rox widteigtachs the force of GAG; “ but, 
indeed,” “why, that, indeed,” “why, as for that,” &e. Thus, Gaz 
306 to. * Why, that is a pleasant thing enough. ” 


CONJUNCTIONS. 203 


AN. 


1. The particle dv, for which the epic writers use xé or xév, cannot 
well be expressed by any corresponding particle in ‘English, but only 
gives to a sentence an air of uncertainty and mere possibility. It is em- 
ployed, therefore, to modify or strengthen the subjunctive and optative ; - 
and is also employed with the indicative, in order to impart to it more 
or less. of uncertainty. 

2. This: particle commonly stands ati one or more words in a clause, 
and is thus distinguished from the év which is formed by contraction 
from éév. This latter particle dv usually begins a clause, and has the 
meaning of “if,” &c. The Attic prose writers usually change it into 
jv, the Attic poets always. 

3. The particle édv, “ if,” is compounded of the conditional &i and 

the dv mentioned in the first paragraph. 
_ 4. The ay first mentioned is frequently put twice, sometimes’ even’ 
‘thrice, in a clause or sentence. In some cases, where the Gy occurs. 
twice, one of these particles attaches itself to a finite verb and the other 
’ to a participle or infinitive ; as, dpdvte¢ dv éypjoavto ay: “ If they had 
seen they would have used.” Many cases occur, however, where this 
explanation will not answer, and where the second or repeated dy must 
be regarded as brought in merely to indicate more plainly the idea of 
uncertainty intended to be expressed? Thus, dAAd xdv ebfatvto av -ye- 
véobat- “ But they might, perhaps, have wished it to happen.” 


APA. 


1. The primary power of dpa is that of deducing consequences from 
premises, and hence it has usually the signification of “ therefore.” It 
.s regularly employed, therefore, in the conclusion of syllogisms ; as, e 
ydp eiot Bapoi, cici kat eoi- aAAd wHv eiot Bwpot eiciv dpa Kat Feot. 
| « For if there are altars, there are also gods. But there certainly are 
altars ; therefore there are gods too.” When joined with ei, et m7, or 
édy, it signifies “if, then,” “if, indeed,” or, more probably, “‘ conse- 
quently. ” Hence it serves for an emphatic OMT as if founded 
on an inference. 

2. Different from this is s the adverb dpa, which is an fntiebopatieg pare 
ticle, like the Latin nwm or utrum. Thus, dpa xatdédniov 6 BovAouae 
Aéyerv; “Is, then, what I wish to say evident?” When a negative 
answer is expected, it has generally the particle 7 attached to it? Thus, 
éav dé cov Hpoakara yopToe, bre did TO Gyacba aditod, Kal ebvoikdc 
Exeue mpc abtov, dpa phy diabdArAecbar ddgerg Im’ suod; But if I 
shall still farther allege against you, that, in consequence of your admi- 


/ 


Tae 


ww 


204 | CONJUNCTIONS. 


ration of him, you feel also well disposed towards him, will you on that 
account think that you are slandered, by me? If we wish to express 
the Latin nonne, it is done by dp’ od, and sometimes even by dpa alone. 

3. The interrogative dpa is placed first in a clause or sentence ;. but 
the dpa first mentioned stands always after one or several words, and 
even at the close of a proposition. 


PAP. 
1. Tdp, “for,” never stands at the beginning of a proposition or 
clause, but, instead of it, xa? ydp is used at. the beginning; like e¢enim in 
Latin. In Greek, the proposition of which that with ydp assigns the 


cause is often omitted, inasmuch as it is easily understood, and is passed’ 


over by the speaker in the vivacity of discourse. ‘Thus, in the answer 
so common in Plato, we have gor yap obra, ‘ (Certainly) for so tt is.” 
So-it is often used in questions, because an additional member may al- 
ways easily be supposed; as, for example, “T know,” “I believe,” * I 


cannot do it,” &e. Thus, Hom. Od. 10, 501, 7Q Kipxy, tic yap rabryp 


éddv yyenovetoer; ‘‘ Oh Circe (I cannot go thither), for who will guide 


me on this way?” By the frequency of this kind of interr6gative use, . 


it gradually lost its proper force, and came to be employed simply to 
strengthen a question, like the Latin nam in irae 

2. In such expressions as kai yap, GAAa yap, &c., the former particle 
indicates an omission of something, for which ydp assigns a cause; and 
hence cai ydép, when closely translated, means, “and (no LIS for,” 
‘cand (this was natural,) for,” &c. So in dda ydp, we must say, 
when rendering literally, “‘ but (this was impossible,) for,” ‘ but (this 
happened otherwise,) for,” &c. The context will always, of course, 
suggest the proper ellipsis. : 
' rE. 

1. Te, an enclitie particle, emphatically heightens the word which it 
follows above the’rest of the’clause, and thus strengthens the idea of the 
same. It is frequently joined to pronouns, particularly personal ones ; 
as, éywye,“ T, at least,” “I, for my part.” It is often, too, put in com 
bination with other particles, from which it usually stands separated by 
one or more words ; as, ye on, “ ree as; a a | i yé TOL, “a, 
feast,” “ however.””. . 

2. Generally, also, ye | is. used in rejoinders and answers, either to 
confirm or restrict ; _and likewise in exhortations, to render them more 
impressive. Buti in English it often happens that the sense of ye, in its 
various combinations, can only be indicated by pelehtoune the tone o 
the word to which it refers. ; : 


€ 


” 


CONJUNCTIONS.* | 264 


AE. : 

1. The particle dé is always placed after one or more words in 4 
clause, and properly signifies “ but,” both as distinguishing and opposing. 
_ Very often, however,-it serves to mark a transition from-vne proposition 
to another; and, generally speaking, every proposition which has no 

other conjunctiort at its commencement takes this dé, whether it be fe- 
ally opposed to the preceding or not, particularly in enumerations. In 
such cases, therefore, it generally remains untranslated in English. In 
vhe ancient form of the language, especially in Homer, it often stands for 

‘and ;” and it is also used on some occasions, in the old poets, to ex- 
_ plain what goes before, in which cases it answers to yép, ‘ for.” 

2. The principal use of dé, however, is its opposition to. uév. The 
opposition in which one member of a sentence stands to another can-be 
stronger or slighter. The Greeks in both cases use pév and dé for con- 
nexion ; but in English we can only employ the particles “‘ indeed” and 
“but” to designate the stronger opposition ; and hence we are often de- 
ficient in definite expressions for the Greek yév and dé, which we then 
translate sometimes by “and,” “ also ;” sometimes by ‘ partly—parily,’ 
“as well—as also,” &c. hs 

3. When yév is put in the first member of a sentence, the thought 
necessarily turns to an opposite member with dé. Several cases never 
theless occur where, with yév preceding, the expected dé does not actu- 
ally occur. Namely, either (1.) the antithesis to the member formed 
with yév expressly exists, but declares itself so‘ clearly by the position 
and subject that dé can be omitted. .This is chiefly the case when tem- 


poral and local adverbs are used, which stand in a natural opposition be- 


tween themselves; as, évrad@a and éxei, tparov and érecta, &c. Or 
(2.) the antithesis lies only in the mind, but is not expressly assigned in 
the discourse. This is chiefly the case when personal and demonstrative 
pronouns aré used at the beginning of a proposition, in combination with 
uév; as, éy@ per mpogpnua, “I have formed the resolution” (another 
probably not). Kai ratra puév 67 tovaira, “ These things are so circum- 
stanced” (but others differently). .Or (3.) the antithesis is indicated by 
another particle ; as, dAAd, abrdp, aire, Kc. 


id: B 
1. The primary use of 7 is disjunctive, and its sense is “ or. ” Next 
to its disjunctive use is.that connected with doubt or deliberation, where 
it has the meaning of “ whether—or ;” as, wepunpiter 7 bye ’Atpetdnv 
évapitor, née xorov mavoerev.. * He pondered whether he should slay 
Aitrides or calm his wrath.” . 


-_s 


206 - CONJUNCTIONS. : 


2. The particle 7 is also frequently used in a question, when a prece- 
ding and indefinite question is made more definite ; as, ti¢ obv put Gro- 
Kptveirat ; 7} 6 vedtatoc; Who, then, will answer me? the young 
est?” Even in its interrogative sense, however, this particle still re- 
tains, in fact, its disjunctive meaning; as will be apparent if we supply 
as an ellipsis before it, “ Am I wrong in. my conjecture?” Thus, in the 
passage just quoted, we may say, “* Am I wrong in my surmise, or is if 
the youngest 2” | 


"H. 

1. The primary Piatl true sense of 7 is that of ‘affirmation, It is ex- 
plained, therefore, by dvrwc, dAnOdc, “in reality,” “in truth. ” Its af- 
firmation, however, affects whole sentences or propositions ; ; as, 7 péya 
Saipa TOe ima épOpat. “ Assuredly, I see in this a great won- 
der for the eyes.” ' | 

-2. In the combination # ydp it is remarkable that the former particle 
affects the latter. This happens because ydp is always a subjunctive 
particle ; and thus 7 is confirmatory of the causal signification of ydo ; 
as in Priam’s words (Jl. 22, 532), where, after giving- orders to keep 
the city gates open for the reception of his routed forces, he adds the 
reason, 7 yap ’AyiAAeic éyyd¢ bde KAovéwv' “ for see; too surely is 
Achilles. near throwing all things into confusion.” So Calchas (Il. 1, 
78) gives a reason for bespeaking the protection of Achilles ; 7 yap dio- 
‘uat Gvdpa yodwotuer, x. Tt, A. “ for I neweer do think that : will 
make that man angry,” &c. 

3. In the combination 7 7rov the particle 7 is ennai and zrov con- 
jectural, and hence the two, when combined, express a degree of proba- 
bility bordering on certainty. “They’do not however, coalesce’ into one 
word, for, if they did, 7 would have the acute accent. We must render 
q Tov by “in all probabiliay a doublons’ “ unless I am very much 
mistaken,” &e. 

| KAT. 

1. As particles for uniting together the members of a proposition, the 
Greeks make use of xaé and the enclitic re,-the use and distinction of 
which are pointed out in the following observations : 

2. Kai and re serve for the simple union both of single ideas and of 
entire parts of a sentence. The connexion by re is more usual in the 
elder and poetic language than in Attic prose, and generally this particle 
is not merely put once between the two ideas to be connected, but j join- 
ed to each of the connected parts; as, marhp dvioay te Yer Te, “ the | 
father of both gods and men.” This connexion by re—re occurs with 


CONJUNCTIONS. e 207 


Attic prose writers only in the union of strongly opposed ideas; as, é- 

“pew Xp Ta Te datmovia avayKaing Té te dnd Tov ToAEuin avdpeiwe. 
“ We must bear the dispensations of the gods as a matter of necessity, 
and the inflictions of our foes with a spirit of manly resistance.” With 

. Homer, ‘however, frequently, and With the Attic poets rarely, re—re- 
are used in the union of kindred ideas. If more than two ideas are con: 
nected, Homer proceeds with the repetition of re; as, in JJ. 1, 177, 
alel ydp roe Epic re Gidn, wéAEuot Te, uGYat Te; OF, after having several 
times repeated re, then uses kai; as, Od. 3, 413, seqg., "Exédpay Te, 
Ztpariog re, Ilepoeic 7’, ’Apytoc Te, kai GvTibeog OpacvuRdne ; or in- 
terchangeably Te, Kai, re. . 

3. The particles te xai connect more closely than the simple xa/, and 
are chiefly used when ideas are to be represented as united in one sup- 
position. Hence this kind of combination is also chiefly used, when op- 
posite ideas are to be assigned as closely connected ; as, ypyorot te al 
Tovnpot.—ayabd te kai kaxé. For this reason we say GAAwe Te Kai 
(both in other respects and also), “ particularly also,” “ especially,” be- 
cause GAAwe already expresses a natural and strong antithesis to that 
which follows. 

4. The combination xai—xai, “ as well—as,” “ both—and,” can only 
be adopted when the combined ideas are of different kinds, but never in 
those which are perfectly homogeneous. Hence several substantives 
can always be connected by xai—xai; as, Gréxrewav Kal waidac Kat 
yuvatkac. But, in the case of adjectives, only those which contain no- 
thing homogeneous in their idea; as, dvOpdrove etpfoeic Kat dyabove, 
kai kaxove, or Kal révytac Kal rAovotove, and the like ; not méAug Kad 
ueyaAy Kai roAvavOpwroc, but peydAy Te Kai ToAvdvOpuroc. 


TiEP. Hal ha 


Ilep is an enclitic, and in signification closely allied to ye. It denotes, 
conformably to its derivation from zrepé, comprehension or inclusion, and 
hence, like ye, it is employed to strengthen single ideas. It very fre- 
quently enters into combination with relative pronouns, as also with tem-_ 
poral, causal, and conditional particles, to confirm their signification. 
The sense of this particle is generally, as in the case of ye, indicated in 
English merely by a stronger intonation of the word, although it may 
frequently also, be translated by “very,” “ever.” In combination with 
a participle we often translate it by “although” or “ how much soever.” 
Thus, Aégyet, dxep Aéyet, dixaca maya, ‘he says all, whatever he does 
say, justly ;” unre od Tovd’", ayabéc rep Ewy, drroaipeo Kodpyy, * Nor do 
thou, excellent though thou art, deprive him of the virgin ;” i. ¢.; be thou 
never so excellent, however excellent thou art; etOi¢ wopeverat mpd¢ 


208 |  CONJUNCTIONS. 


Kipov grep. take “ He ocnes straightway unto Cyrus, jusi as hs 
was.” 
. . ’ 
1b * pti 

1. The particle méc, when circgmflexed, is interrogative, and signi- 
fies how?” ‘The combination ric yap is smployed as an emphatic neg- 
ative, “not at all.” Thus, é¢ yap rocgow, “ I will not do it at all,” 
literally, “ for how shall I do it? ?” In the same way kai 7c is used; 
as, Kal THE own ; ‘I cannot be silent,” literally, “and how am I to be 
silent?? 

2. As an enclitic, xwe signifies “ somehow,” “in some degree,” &c. ; 
as, GAAwse wwe, “in some other way 3” dde we, “ somehow thus,” &c. 


(QS. 

1. The pafticle &¢ is sometimes used for iva, to denote a purpose , 
as, Oc deifauev, “in order that we may show.” Occasionally, as in the 
case of iva, the word is omitted, the purpose of which is to be expressed ; 
as, O¢ 0 GAnOi Aéyw, KaAeL por Tod wdptupac. “ But that thou mayst 
sce that I speak the truth, call for me the witnesses.” 

_2. It is also used for-671, with the meaning of “ that ;” as, Aéyovrec, 
_ @¢ éxeivdg ye. od renal TH mode. ‘* Saying, that he does not make 

war upon the city.” 

3. It is also used with the meaning of “as,” which is its more ordi- 
nary acceptation. Sometimes the tragic writers repeat the word that 
precedes &¢ when signifying “ as,” and this is done when the speaker, 
from unpleasant recollections, does not choose to be more: precise. 
Thus, dAwder d¢ dAwder, “ He has perished as he has perished ;” i. e., 
he has perished ; no matter how. 

4. With the acute accent, it is used in the sense of ofrwc, and then 
stands at the beginning of propositions.. This usage is very frequent in 
‘Homer ; as, O¢ eizov. We must be careful, however, not to confound 
&¢ for obtwe, with o¢ changed to &¢ because followed by an enclitic, nor 
with ¢ placed after a word on which it depends, and receiving in con- 
sequence the tone or accent ; as, tedc Os, “asa god.” 

5. It is often used in exclamations, with the signification of ‘ how ;” 
as, Oc ce uaxapiCouer ! “‘ How happy we deem you !”’ Bporoic Epwtec d¢ 
xaxov péya! “ How great an evil is love to mortals !_ On this is found- 
ed the use of d¢ with optatives, in the sense of the Latin utinam, “1 
wish ;” as, &¢ w’ ded "Extwp xretvar! “ Would that Hector had slain 

me ! y literally, “ how Hector ought to have slain me!? 

ee is put, like 672, before superlative adjectives and adverbs, and 
strengthens the meaning as, o¢ rdyvora, “as quickly as possible.” 


CONJUNCTIONS. 209 


7. In many cases ¢ came to be regarded as nothing more than a mere 
atrengthening particle, and hence we have the idioms, d¢ dAnOéc, “ tru- 
ly 3”. O¢ arexvac, $4 entirely,” &e. 

8. It is often used in limiting propositions with the infinitive ; as, d¢ 
eixaoa, “as far as one wing conjecture ;” d¢ uorye doxeiv, “as far as 
appears to me.at least ;” o¢ eixacat, “ as fares as one may conjecture ;” 
a¢ eitelv, “ so to speak.” 

9: It is frequently found in this same sense with prepositions follow- 
ing ; as, O¢ dm’ ouudrur, “ to judge by the eye ;” we éxt 70 ToAd, “ for 
the most part.” Hence it is often used in comparisons ; as, dmvoTov 
TO TAROOG AéyeTat GrroAécOal, WE Tpdg TO péyebog THe TOAEwc. ‘ Anin- 
credible number are said to have perished, in proportion to the size of the 
cuty.” 

10. It is elegantly joined to saiticiples in the genitive absolute, and 
the participle must then be rendered, in English, by a tense of the verb ; 
as, O¢ TavTne THe XOpac ExvpwoTarne ovange “ Because this place was the 
most secure.’’ Sometimes, also, it is connected with the accusative or 
dative of the participle. In these constructions with the participle, 
whether in the genitive, dative, or accusative, it has, the force of as, 
since, because, inasmuch as, as if, &c. 

11. It also has the meaning of ‘ when,” as a particle of past time ; 
as, oc 6& 7A0e, “but when he came.” And sometimes, also, the force of 
“ awhile.” 

12. With numerals it signifies “ about ;” as, O¢ TecoapdKovTa, “ about 
forty 3? O¢ tpia } tétrapa ordd.a, “about three or four stadia.” 

13. It is sometimes put, especially by Attic writers, instead of the 
preposition cic, mpoc¢, or éxi. In truth, however, the preposition in such 
instances must always be regarded as understood, while o¢ retains in 
translation nothing of its original meaning. It must be remarked, how- 
ever, that &¢, when put for ei¢, mpdc, or émi, is generally found with per- 
sons, and seldom with inanimate things. The primitive meaning of dc 
mpoc, O¢ cic, &c., is “as towards,” ‘as to,” and the particle serves to 
indicate that the preposition must not be taken in a strict and definite 
sense. Hence, when og¢ alone appears, with the preposition understood, 
it always implies that the approach i is made with some degree of timidity: 
ar reverence. ‘Thus, d¢ rode Seote, “ unto the gods ;” a¢ tov Baothéa, 
“‘ to the king.”’ In this lies the reason why @¢ is seldom ever construed 
in this way with the names of places or things, but generally with ané - 


mate objects. 
S82 


-210 PREPOSITIONS 


PREPOSITIONS 


_ I. Prepositions, in Greek, govern the genitive, dative, or 
accusative. Some govern only one case, others two cases 
and others, again, three ; as follows: 


GENITIVE ONLY. 
*"Avti, ’Am6, ’Ex or ’Eé, and Tipo. 


DaTIvE ONLY. c 


"Ev and dvr. 


ra ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 
Eic or ’Ec. 


GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
Aud, Kard, and ‘Yrép. 


DaTIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
: "Ava. 
Genitive, Dative, anp AccusATIVE. 
"Audi, "Eni, Mera, ILapa, Ilepi, Ipoc, ‘Yr6. 


II. We will now proceed to illustrate by examples the 
force ofeach, arranging them according to the cases which 
they respectively govern. : 


I. Prepositions governing the 
* | GENITIVE, _ 
1. The fundamental idea of the genitive is that of sep- 
aration or abstraction, of going forth, from, or out of any- 
thing. 
2. The prepositions, therefore, that are combined with 


_ the genitive, carry with them the general meaning of pro- 


ceeding from something ; though, strictly speaking, the ideas 
of, out of, and from, lie primarily in the genitive case itself. 


PREPOSITIONS. 911 


’Artl. 

1. The primitive meaning of this preposition was “ against,” “ con- 
trary to.” It has lost, however, its original signification, except in the 
case of compounds ; as, dyritarrey, * to _— over against ;’ :? avtiné- 
yew, * to contradict.” 

2. The secondary meanings of dyri, deducible from the primitive 
meaning, are “‘ instead of,” “‘ for,’ and refer to the relations of exchange, 
purchase, value, &c., where the objects referred to are supposed to be 
set opposite ot over against each other, and their respective value thus 
estimated. Hence we have the ieesing examples : dotAog dvi Baoid- 
éwc, “a slave instead of a king ” av? ov, * for which reasons” (on which 
account). 


= 


"Ad. 
1. The leading meaning of this preposition is “from,” and it has ret- 
erence either to place, time, or the assigning of the origin or cause of a 
thing. I. The relation of place; as, dd yOovdc, “from the ground ;” 
ay’ ixrwy, “ from on horseback.” II. The relation of time ; as, yevéo- 
Oa ard deirvon, “ to have done supper’ (to be from supper) ; wivery dd 
row ottiov, “to drink just after eating” (to drink from eating). III. 
The assigning of the origin or cause ;.as, ard dixavootyne, “from a 
love of justice ;’’ negrey aw apyvpéoto Buoio, “he slew him by means of 
a silver bow;’? of Gxd tie oTodc, “the Stoics’’ (the philosophers from 
the porch) ; of amo TlAdrwvee, “ the Platonics,” &c. 
2. It must be borne in mind, that, when dé refers to place, it denotes 
the place at or near which any one was; whereas the place within is ex- 
pressed by éx. 


"Ex or ’EE. 
1. Ex (before a vowel 2£) has for its leading signification “ owt of,’ 
** from,” and serves to indicate a choice out of several objects, or to de- 
note a whole consisting of many parts. It may be viewed, like d7é, 
under the three relations of place, time, and the assigning of origin and 
cause. I. The relation of place ; as, é« tij¢ médewe, “ out of the city,” 
which presupposes that one has been in the city, whereas d76 Tic 76- 
Aewe merely implies that one has been near the city. II. The relation 


} 


of time; as, é« tivoc ypdvov, “ since a certain time ;” && ov, “ since” . 
(supply ypévov).- III. The origin or cause ; as, 7a éx watpd¢ mpooray= 


Gévra, “ the things commanded by a father 3” && éuéo, “ through me” 
(by my means or authority). 


2. The following examples, falling under some one or other of the 


t4 


ra 


212 PREPOSITIONS. 


three relations to which we have just referred, dese1ve to be noticed ; 
éx Sadarryc, “ on the side towards the sea ;” 2& &w, at dawn ;” && myé- 
pac, “ since it became day ;” éx tOv Cworhnpwr gopeiv piddac, “to carry 
cups suspended to the girdles” (the point of suspension commencing 
with or arising out of the girdles); &« rod modo Kpemdoar Twd, “ te 
hang one by the foot ;” x oxixtpwv ddorropeiv, * to travel by means of 
staves ;” AauBavery tmmov x Tie obpac, “ to take a horse by the tail ;” 

yeddy ix Tév mpdobev daxptbav, “to laugh after tears ;” é« Tod tupa- 
vows, “ openly ;” &x Tod apavodc, “unawares;” é&& epepsenten ‘Sawn 
expectedly.” 

hte Ips. * 

'1. The primitive meaning of zp is “ before,” and it may be consid- 
cred under the three relations of place, time, and preference. I. The 

“relation of place; as, pd GA2wy,,“ before others ;” xpd roAEwe, “ before 
the city.” -II. The relation of time; as, radra “apo THE Tlevovotparov 
qatxiac éyéveto. ‘ These things happened before Pisistratus came of 
age.” III. The relation of preference ; as, oddei¢ ob tw dvdyric éoriv, 
dotic TéAEuOv mpd eipnvnc aipeirat, ‘* No one is so foolish as to prefer 
war to peace’? (literally, “who makes choice to himself of war before 
peace); mpd moAAod moreioba, “to value highly” (to value before 
much), &c. 

2. Hence arise the following examples: udyeoGar mpd Toe, “ to fight 
for one,” because he who fights for one places himself before him. So 
vavwaxéery mpd Tic Tledorovyqaov, “to fight a naval batile for the Pel- 
oponnesus ;” éOhebew mp0 GvaKtog $ iacalgo, “ to ai on account of a 
oruel king.” 7 

II. Prepositions governing the 
- Dative. 

1. The fundamental idea of the dative is directly.opposed 
to that of the genitive, since in the dative the idea of ap- 
proach lies at the basis ; or, in other words, it serves to in- 
dicate’ the more remote object. | 7 

2. This general idea of approach branches off into the 
kindred ideas, 1, of union or coming hagether 3 32. of like 

ness; 3. of advantage or disadvantage. 
3. The dative also denotes, as consequences of the same 


general idea, 1. the instrument or means for effecting any- 


PREPOSITIONS. 213 
thing ; 2. the manner; 3. the cause; 4.a particular or def- 
inite time. i en 


"Ev. 

The primary meaning of this preposition is “ in,’ as indicative of 
place; as, éy tai¢ ’AOjvaic, “in Athens ;” .év ‘Péun, “in Rome.” 
From this primary use in definitions of places, the following construc- 
tions are derived, which accord in part with the English or, Latin idiom > 
I. To denote the person or thing on which, as its substratum, the ac- 
tion is performed ; as, émideixvvobac év tiv, “to show in the case of a 
certain one.” II. Among several; as, év ’Apyeioic, “ among the Ar- 
gives; év dOavarow, “among the immortals.” ILL. éy 966 elvat, 
“to be in fear; év.opyq sivat, ‘to be in a-rage with any one; év 
aisyivaic éxew, “to be ashamed ;” év tAagdpd roreicba, “ to make 
light of.’ IV. Referring to clothing, array, &c. ; as, év pliv@ A€ovToc, 
“in the skin of a hon;’? év wéAraic, Gxovtiore, rétouc dtaywvilecbat,. 
‘““to contend, equipped with shields, spears, bows ;” éy oreddvoic, 
“adorned with chaplets.”” V. Denoting a means or cause on which 
something depends; as, Ta pév mpotepov mpayOévta tv dAAace ToAAai¢ 
éxtotodaic tore, “ Ye know the things previously done through many 
other letters ;” év vowobéraic Séo0at vouov, ‘to enact. a@ law. by means 


of the nomothete,” &c. ‘ 


Lov. 

1. The primary meaning of this preposition is “with,” denoting ac. 
companiment ; as, TéTu@ ovv evdaiovt, “ with a happy lot ; odv rue 
elvat, “to be in company with any one ;” odvv toig “EAAgot waAdAov 7 
' obv TO Bapbdpy elvat, “to be on the side of the Greeks rather than of 
the barbarian ;” ovv TH 0G ayabG, “so thy advantage 3? ovv TH Oeq, 
“6 qwith the assistance of the Deity.” 

2. Hence it also expresses a mean, which, as it were, accompanies 
the effect; as, Tol cal obv udyatc dic réAiv Tpdav xpabov, “Who twue, 
by means of battles, sacked the city of the Trojans.” 


Til. Preposition governing the 
AccusaTIVE. 


1, The accusative denotes the immediate object upon 
which the action of a transitive verb is directed. 
2. All prepositions connected with the accusative denote 


e 


214 _ PREPOSITIONS. 


a direction or extension to some point, a stretching, reach- 
ing, finishing, completing. Hence they designate particu- 
lar parts of the general relation expressed by the accusa- 
tive, and are added to the same for greater a Ed and 
distinctness. 


Hic. % 

: The primitive meaning of this preposition is “into ” as, slo#ABov 
ei¢ THY. TOALY, “ they entered into the city.” - With this-is connected the 
meaning of “to ;” as, ixerevewy eic —_ “to come as a suppliant to any 
one. ” 

2. With the verbs “ to say,” “to Hows” the Yesseatiie or divection to 

the persons, to whom anything is said or shown, is sometimes considered 
as analogous to an actual motion, and this analogy is expressed by ei¢ ; 
as, ol marépec ToAAG dn Kal Kala épya aredHvarto sic mdvrTac avOpd- 
moug. ‘ Your fathers exhibited many and honourable deeds before all 
men.” Hence it frequently signifies * with respect to,” a general refer- 
ence, which in English is often expressed by the more definite “on ac- 
count of,” “in consequence of ;” as, pobeiobar ele 71, “ to be alarmed on 
account of anything ;” dvorvyeiv ele TL, “to be unfortunate on any ac- 
count ;” Aoidopsiv teva eic¢ TL, ‘to blame one on any account.” 
_ 3. The idea of a direction or relation lies also at the foundation of the 
following combinations ; as, ei¢ dmadAayd¢g KdKxwr, “ for a deliverance 
from evils ;” &noav & avdpsiov, “ they displayed valour ;” ei¢ tabtov 
hey; “ to be in the same circumstances ;” é¢ toootrov, “ so far” or “ so 
much,” &c. 

4. In definitions of time ei¢ has sever meanings. Pee ‘ Towards 
as, ele éonépav, “ towards evening.” II. Duration; as, ei¢ éviavrov, 
“for a year.” III. A. point of time; as, é¢ 76, “at dawn. ” . Tt is 
joined also frequently with adverbs of time’; as, cic amaég, * once ; -”” sic 
Gei, “for ever,” &c. 

5. With numerals. cic sometimés signifies * about ;” as, vaic é¢ Ta¢ 
tetpaxociac, * about four hundred vessels 3”? and sometimes it makes 
them distributive ; as, el¢ dvo, “ bint.” 

6. Frequently the noun which is governed by ei¢ is understood, and — 
it is then put with the genitive which is dependant upon that noun; as, 
ei¢ Aiyénrovo (supply poor) ; eic didacKadwv (supply oanaree This is 
especially the case with the names of deities ; as, ei¢ ’Apteuidoc, “to 
Diana’s’ (supply iepév). So in Latin, ventwm est ad Cereris, scil, tem- 
plum. a 2 


PREPOSITIONS. 215. 


IV. Prepositions governing the 
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
: Aid. 

1. The primitive meaning of did is “ through.” With the genitive 
this meaning may be considered under two relations: I. Of space and 
time ; II. Of cause and means. 

2. I. The relation of space and time; as, Td éyyoc 7AGe did tod BH- 
paxoc, “the spear went through the insta 3” dv ddAiyovu elvat, “to be. 
within a little distance of ;? motayd¢ did xévte oradinv dvagatvopevog, 
““@ river appearing five stadia off ;” dvd waxpod xpdvov, “ after a long 
time ;” dv évdexdrov Ereoc, “ eleven years after.”” But frequently, with 
ordinals, it expresses the recurrence of an action after a certain period of 
time ; as, dd Tpirov ére0¢, “ every third year ;” dv évarov Ereoc, “ every 
ninth year.” 

3. II: The relation of cause and means ; 3 as, 0v’ ink ‘by his own 
means ;” dv dyyéhwy Aéyewv, “ to announce by means of messengers ;”” 
Oud THY O¢0aAuGy dpdv, “to see by means of the eyes,” &c. 

4. Wirn tHe Accusative did is again to be considered under two 
relations : I. The relation of place; II. 'The relation of cause. 

5. I. The relation of place ; as, ded révttov kiua ropeveobat, “to go 
through the ocean wave ;” dud ddpara, “ throughout the mansion.” II. 
The relation of cause ; as, did trodro, “on this’ account ;” did Tove ed 
uaxouévoug Kpivovtat at HEXGt, “‘ battles are decided by those who fight 
bravely.” 


Karé. 


1. The primitive meaning of this preposition denotes a downward di- 
rection towards an object. . Hence we have, in the genitive, katd oxo- 
mod Togevetv, ‘10 shoot at a mark,” because the arrow, proceeding in a 
curve, descends to the mark; xara Képpn¢ tintewy, “to strike at the 
head,” i. e., down against. Hence is deduced the signification ‘with 
respect to,” which frequently, however, may be rendered “ against.” 
Thus, card tivog eimeiv, “ to say something with respect to any one,” 
or, if this be prejudicial, “‘ to say something against one.” . So also wed-. 
decbat kata Tov Oeod, ‘ to say something falsely of the Deity,” or “to 
speak falsely against the Deity.” On the contrary, uéyiotov xa? tyuav 
éyxdutov, ‘ the greatest compliment paid you,” literally, ‘ with i 
to you,” “upon you.” 

2. Kard is used, especially with the genitive, to denote motion from 
‘above downward, and then answers to the Latin de. Thus, 8% d2 car’ 


216 | _ PREPOSITIONS. 


OvAtjuroio Kappvav, “he went down from the summits of Olympus ;” 
Kar Opbadudy Kéyur adyAic, “darkness was poured down over his 
eyes ;” Kat’ axpac, “from the top downward,” speaking of the destruc- 
tion of cities, whereas the Latins say “ funditus delere.” Hence xara 
xetpoc tdwp diddvat, “to pour water upon the hands ; 3” Kata yij¢ lévat, 
_“to zo beneath the earth.” * 

3. The following phrusés are to be abiicaa ebyée bat: Kara + poor, $“-t0 
vow anox ;” edyecbar Kal? éxardubye, ‘to vow a hecatomb.” In such 
constructions as these the idea is implied of a vow offered down upon 
(i. e., resting upon) something as its basis. ‘In the following, kal’ lepév 
“Spécat, “ to swear by the victim,” the reference is plainer, for the party 
is supposed, according to the Grecian custom, to touch the victim at the 
time of making the oath. 

4. Witn tre Accusative Kkaré chiefly indicates “as relates to,” 
“according to.” Thus, xara Tod pavrgtov aroxpiowv, “ as regards the 
answer Of the oracle ;” Ta kata Ilavoaviay kai Dguariness, + the things 
relating to Pausanias and Themistocles.” 

5. From this general meaning several others arededuced. ‘Thus, “on 
account of ;” as, Kata TO ExOo¢ TO Aakedaioviny, “on account of his 
hatred towards the Lacedemonians,” literally, ‘‘in accordance with.” 
Hence it is often put with verbs of motion, in order to show the object 
of them # as, xara Aninv éxrAdoavrec, “ having sailed out in quest of 
plunder,” literally, “‘ with reference to.” 

6. Kard is also joined with the accusative to denote similitude, cor- 
respondence, suitableness, &c.; as, marépa - ‘TE Kal pnrtépa evphoete ob 
Kata Mibpadarny kat tv yovaixa abrod, You will find your father as 
well as ‘mother very different people from Mithradates and his wife,” lit- 
erally, * not in accordance with.” So also xar éuavrév, “ of the same 
kind as myself ;”” ot ka? jude, “men of our station,” “‘of our charac- 


— 


ter,” and also “ our contemporaries.”” And again, with comparatives: 
aye : ’ ip 3 


as, peilov, 7 Kat’ GvOpwrov, voceic, “ You are labouring under a mal- 
ady worse than man can bear.” 

7. Kard is likewise joined with the accusative in definitions of place ; 
as, KaTa otparév, “in the army ;” Kar’ “Apyoc, “in Argos ;” Kara yi, 
“by land ;” xara tov rAody, “on the voyage ;” Kata Saxainv rodw 
“near the city of Phocea. ” Hence in Homer, a ee Kata. Svuov, 
“ enraged in soul.” 

8. It also appears in definitions of time; as, xara Tov elaion, “at 
the time of (or during) the-war ;”? kata Tov Kata Kpoicov Xpovor, “in 
the time of Cresus.” Hence ol xa? quae, “ our contepigneinee”: ”* men- 
tioned in § 6. 


9 With numerals, card serves to express the same as the Latin dis 


: 


PREPOSITIONS. 217 


tributives. Thus, ca éva, “ one by one,” “singly ;” kal irra, “ seven 


at a &ime;’’ and without numerals; as, cata piva, “ every month ;” Kar’ 
éviautov, “every year ;” Kata wodetc, “by cities;” Kata Kopac, “by 
villages,” &c. - 

10. It is often with its case expressed by an adverb in English; as, 
kata: poipay, properly, » « fitly 3? Kata puKpdv, ner anally ;? Kata 
Kpatoc, “vehemently,” with all one’s might ; 3; KaTa Earns. ay quickly, ” 
“immediately,” &c. - } 


wnép. 

1. The primitive snoqning of this preposition is ‘ dive, 7”. $4 owen,” 
“beyond.” Thus, 6 RAvo¢ drip Rudy Kal tév ortyav Topevowevoc, ** the 
sun moving above us and our dwellings ;” wxép moAAGy, “‘ beyond many.” 
Hence also it is employed in speaking of the sites of towns and places 
on rivers or the sea, because they are higher than it; as, Acujy nai woAug 
orép adtod, “a harbour, and a city upon it.” 

2. From the primitive meaning is deduced that of “ for,” “in behalf 
of,” when a person.is supposed to go, as it were, in front of or beyond 
another, and occupy a place which the latter would otherwise have been 
compelled to fill; and in this way to act for or in behalf of that one. 
Thus, die irép tio TOAEws, “ to sacrifice 1 mM behalf of the state ;” udy- 
eodarurép Tivos, “to fight for one ;” Tiyswpetv wrép Tivoc, “to punish 
for one.” Hence dedtévar drrép Tevos, “‘ to fear for one.” 

3. Connected with this is the meaning “ on account of ;” as, koudog 
anes, ‘on account of ate ;? ddyéwv irep, “ on account of sorrows ;” 

imép TOO pH ToLEiv TO opareconnrees ‘“‘on order not to do what was 
ordered.” ‘ 

4. From the same soutce arises also the meaning “ ihe the sake of,” 
as used in prayers. Thus, xai wiv vmip matpd¢-Kal untépog Kal Téxeog 


Aioceo, “ and entreat him for the sake of his father, and mother, and off- 


spring.” : 

5. With the accusative, d7ép has the meaning of “ over,” as in the 
genitive ; as, purréovot brép Tov ess aptghl “se they fling it over the house ;” 
and also the force of “above ;” as, iép Ta TecoepyKovta éry, “ above 
forty years.” _ So, also, xép yopor, “more than destiny requires,” liter- 
ie above eae} ;” brép Adyonv, * ee all description.” 


V. Preposition governing the wiih Ay 
; ‘Genrrive AND AcCUSATIVE. | 


’Avd. 
1. The primitive meaning of this preposition is directly opposite to 
that of card, and denotes motion Cota Hence its original significe: 


218 . PREPOSITIONS. 


-tion is “up,” “up on,” &c. This, however, seldom oceurs, and deriv: 
ative meanings are more commonly found. 

2. ’Avé governs a dative in the epic and lyric poets only ; as, ypvoé@ 
ava oxnrtoy, “on the top of a golden sceptre ; xpvoéae dy’ imrote, 
“in a golden chariot,” carrying with it the idea*of being mounted on 
high ; evdec 0 dvd oxdrtw Atog dere, “ the eagle sleeps on the sceptre- 
of Jove,” i. e., on the top of the sceptre; dvd vavoiv, “in Lane? i. e@., 
up on ships. a 

3. Elsewhere it governs the accusative, and expresses, 1. A duration 
or continuance, both of time and space; as, ava rov seas aor TOUTOY, 
“‘ throughout this whole war,” i. e., up along this whole war ; dvd maoav 
nuépav, “ daily ;” ava déua, “ throughout the mansion.” 

4, With numerals it makes them distributive ; as, dvd évre, “‘ five 
at a time ;” dva mévte paaaen Ae: THE nuépac, * five | re each 
: day. P] alt 


VI. Prepositions governing the 
GENITIVE, DaTIvE, AND ACCUSATIVE. 


*Apdi. 

1. The primitive meaning: of this prepegieb is ¢ around, ” « about,” 
“round about.” 

2. Wira THE GENITIVE, audi has its primitive meaning ; ; as, of 
Gugi tairne oixotor Tig woALog, ‘who dwell around this city ;’’ with 
this same case also it has the signification of “ concerning,” which it 
shares with Tepi; as, aroméuToua Evvuxov briiv, Gy wept: mado¢ émod, 
augi Toavgeivnc TE giAne Suyarpoc, Ov’ dveipwv eldov: “I turn me with 
horror from the nocturnal vision, which I saw in dreams ssastes od my 
son, and concerning my beloved daughter Polyxena.”” 

3. Wirs rue Darivs it signifies ‘* about,” in answer to the question 
“ where?” even when the whole thing is not covered ; as, didi zAevpai¢ 
pacxyadlotipac Bade, * fling the broad bands of iron around his sides ;” 
idpdcer pév Tev TeAauov dpugl orpbecotv, “ the strap shall be moist with 
perspiration around the breast of each one.” : 

4. Sometimes the case which is governed by the fmepositid does not 
express the thing alout-which something else is, but that whichis about 
the latter ; as, dudi xupi orjoat tpiroda, ‘to set the tripod on the fire, 
so that the latter blazes around it ;” audi KAddore eobat, “to sit sur- 
rounded wrth boughs.” Hence, when a place is only generally expressed ; 
as, Rpie & dud’ abt@, * he fell beside him ;” audi tparétare xpéa dedd- 
oavio, ‘they divided the flesh around the table,” i. e., the ‘table where 
several gat, consequently in different places ; aug divare Eipirov, near 

the eddies of the Euripus” 


PREPOSITIONS. | , 219 


5. It has also with the dative the signification of ‘‘concerning,” whence 
ere deduced the kindred meanings, “on account of,” ** about,” “ through,” 
&c. Thus, rode piv ’Arpeddv xara, tore 0 dud’ ’Odvacei, “ some 
against the Atride, and some about Ulysses ;” toigd’ dudt yuvatki ro- 
Adv xpovoy Gryea méoyxeww, “to suffer woes for a long time about such 
a woman.” Hence audi répber, * through fear.” 

6. Wirn tHE Accusative dugi denotes “ about,” in answer to the 
questions “ where 2” and “ whither 2” as, aonid’ G, i Bpaxiova kovdilan, 
“wielding lightly the shield about his arm ;” Gugi paypaborv ExBebaia- 
Oat, ‘* to be cast out into the sand,” so that the sand surrounds the vody ; 
“ tu Exerv, “ to concern one’s self about anything.” 

7. "Audi frequently stands in this sense with the accusative, not. to 
Bekins a surrounding, but only to denote a place generally. Thus, dude 
te dotv Epdopev ipa Seoioww, “ we offer sacrifices to the gods throughout 
the whole city,” i. e., all around throughout. the city. So dud¢i Opgxyy, 
“anywhere in Thrace,” i. e., in the whole of Thrace, round about. 

8. To this head belongs the phrase ob agi or wept Tiva. It means, 

I. The person signified by the proper name, with his companions, 
followers, &c. ; as, kai of audi Tleceiotparov amixvéovra ént 
Tie’ AOnvaing lepdv, “and Pisistratus, with his troops, comes to 
the temple of Minerva.” So oi rept Opacvbovdov, “ Thrasy- 
bulus with his followers ;” ot ie: ’Opdéa, * Poh ¥ with his 
scholars,” &c. . 

II. Sometimes this phrase signifies merely the person whom the 
proper name expresses, but only in later writers. Thus, Ar- 
rian, Exp. Al. p. 385, of dugdi Kparepov, * Craterus ;” and 
again, lian, V. H. 1, 16, of audi tov Kpirwva cat Soupiav 
kat baidwva, “* Crito, and Simmias, and Phedo.” 'This usage 

- occurs particularly in the later grammarians. 

III. Sometimes the phrase denotes principally the companions 
or followers of the person indicated by the proper name, the 
latter being merely mentioned in order to express the former 
more definitely. Thus, Xen. Hist. Gr. 7, 5, 12, of repi “Ao 
_xidapor, ‘ the companions of Archidamus.”? 


"Eri. 


1. The primitive meaning of ézi is “ < upon,” whence various kindred 
meanings arise. 

2. With tHE Genitive it signifies a on,” “ at,” “in,” or “ nears” 
as, éxl TOv Kowway tig TéAEwe Bwpdy, “upon the public altars of ie 
city 3” ent kpard¢ Aruévoc, “ at the head of the haven;” éoredrec én tis 


220 | PREPOSITIONS. 


Supéwy, “ standing near the door.” Hence the phrase éxi rév Touiav 
ouvivat, “to stand near and swear by the’entrails.” 

3. It is also used in answer to the question “whither ?” as, rAeiv éxi 

Zdpuov, “to sail towards Samos” (i. e., literally, “to sail upon Samos”) ; 
éxt Lapdewv gevyery, “ to flee towards Sardis.” Hence 606¢ 7 éxt Ka- 
oing gépovoa, ‘the road that leads to Caria.” 
' 4. In definitions of time é7i has the meaning of “ during,” “ wnder,” 
&c. ; “as, éxt Kéxporoc, * during the time of Cecrops”’ (i. e., resting 
upon this period as a species of base) ; én’ elpfvnc, “in time of peace ;” 
éxt tiv quetépwv mpoyover, “ in the days of our forefathers.” - 

5. It has frequently also the force of the Latin de, and denotes * of,” 
** concerning,” &c. ; as, Srep ént Tv dovAwy édéyouev, * what we were 
remarking concerning the slaves” (literally, ‘“‘ were speaking upon the 
subject of the slaves’). 

6. With the verbs “to name,” “ to be named,” &c., it has the mean-, 
ing of “ after,” “ from ;” as, dvoudlecbar ext tivoc, “to be named after 
one”? (literally, “* to be named upon one”). 

7. It often expresses a connexion, accompaniment, provision, &c., 
either with things or with persons ; as, ém/ opixpdv Adywr, “with a few 
words ;” xabjoro Kdduov Aadc doridwr éri, “ the people of Cadmus had 
sat down arrayed with shields ;” éxi xpoorédov pide xopeiv, “to go 
accompanied by a single maid-servant.” Hence is deduced the mean- 
ing of “* before ;” as, éxi paptipwr, “ before witnesses ;” ér@pooavTo 
int trav otparnyav, “ they swore in the presence of the generals,” &c. 

8. In this way the following phrases appear to have originated: é¢’ 
éavtod, “ by himself,” “ peculiarly 3? éxt odGv abray, “ by themselves,” 
“unmixed with others,’ &c. Hence é¢’ éavtod oixeiv, whén. said of 
states, means “‘ to live by themselves, not dependant upon others, but hav- 
ing a constitution of their own.” 

9. ’Exi is also used in the genitive with numerals ; : as, étt-  TpLiy 
ornvat, “to stand three deep ;” xi Tecodpuy, ** four deep ;” é’ éEvoc f 
KataBaoce Hv, “ the descent was by one at a time.” 

10. Wira tar Dative éxi denotes, in particular, subordination, 
the being in the oR: of any one, &c. Thus, rov dvtwr ra pev éotiv 
é@’ juiv, ra 0” obk b¢’ juiv, “of the things that are, some are in our 
power (under our control), others are not in our power é& ént pdyteow 
elvat, ** to be dependant upon soothéayers 3” moveiy te ext Tit, “ to sub- 
mit a eo toany one’s judgment ;” TO én’ épol, * as far as depends 2 
wpon me:’ 

11. With the dative émi also denotes condition, sauczeiie in the phrase 
és’ @ or 2@’ Gre, “upon condition.” ‘That also is regarded as a condi- 

tion, on account of which, in order to obtain it, something is done which 


PREPOSITIONS. 221 


.s the price or the foreseen result of the action. Thus, émi ddpoie, “on 
account of promised gifts ;’ dépw ént weyddy, “ for a large gift ;” én 
uboxy ddewv, “to sing for the price of a calf ;” éni robroue pdvore Civ, 
“to live upon condition of having this only ;” XOpav avabcivar ’ArdA- 
Awe ext mdon depyia, “to consecrate a territory to Apollo, on condition 
of its remaining entirely uncultivated.” 

12. Hence it frequently expresses an 1 object or aim, inasmuch as this 
1s the condition upon which the action is performed. Thus, wf xAdre¢ 
ént dnAnoes davéwor tyiv, “lest thieves appear to you in order to do you 
mischief ;” ob« éxi-réxvy Euabec, “you have not learned it in order to | 
exercise it as @ mentee 3” dyew twa éni Savdry, “ to lead one away 
io execution.” 

13. From this is deduced the meaning “‘on account of ;” as, dpoveiv 
éritiv, * to pride one’s self on account of anything i Sarpdtecdat eri 
tiv, “ to wonder on any account,” &c. 

_14. Sometimes, also, it signifies “ at,” as a definition of place ; aa, 
ini tO "AAnks rotau, “at the river Alex ;” and sometimes it is em- 
ployed to express generally a combination or coexistence. To this lat- 
ter head belong the phrases ¢jv éxt maoiv, “ to live, having children ;” 
Cay én’ icorow, “ to live upon a footing of equal rights with others ;” ént 
dvokrcia, “ with disgrace ;” KabgoGat éxit ddxpvot, “to sit down in 
tears,” &c. ati 

15. Frequently éx?, when thus construed, signifies not so much a be- 
ing together as an immediate following upon, or connexion of time and 
space ; as, dvéatyn én’. ait Sepadiac, “ Pheraulas arose Seuncenee 
after him ;” dyxvn iv oyxvn ynpaoket, ‘ pear after pear ‘grows ripe.” 

16. In many cases é7i with the dative has the same or a similar sig- 
nification with the genitive; as, ém? yOovi, “ on the earth ;” éni vuxti, 
“on the night,” &c. 

17. Wirn tae Accusative ézi signifies particularly. “ upon,” 
“ against,” in answer to the question “ whither ?” in those cases where, 
in Latin, 7z is put with the accusative ; as, dvabaivery é¢’ imrov, “ to 
mount upon horseback ;” dvabaiverv éxi Spévor, to ascend a throne ;” 
éri tiva unxavdcbat, ‘to contrive against one.” So in ént wéda dvay- 
wpeiv, “to retreat,” where the Greeks seem to have had in view the re- 
turn into the place which the foot previously occupied. Hence ézi is 
often put after verbs of motion with substantives which do not denote a 
place, but an action, which is the end of one’s going ; as, lévae éri OA- 
pav, “to go upon a hunt ;” iévar ext Bdwp, “to go in quest of water ;” 
ént ti, “to what end?” “ wherefore?’ Sometimes, however, we find 
én? with the accusative after verbs of rest, but then motion is always im 
plied with the preposition. ee éxt tt, “to go anywhere in 


222 





order to seat one’s self there ;” xeiobar ént cpiorepa, “to be carried to 


the left and lie there ;” ént ta tetyn dvtimaperdooovto, “ they were drawn 
up against them on the walls,” where the idea of dvabdytec, Writes, 
ascended,” is implied in éxt ré& reiyn. ; 

18, With definitions of time it answers to the question “ how long ?” 
as, éxi ypévor, * for some time ;” éxi dvo juépac, ** for iwo days.” It 
is also used with definitions of space; as, éxi tecoapdxovta orddua, 
“for the space of forty stadia.” With numerals it denotes “ about ;” 
as, él tpaxdo.a, “ about three hundred.” 


Meré. 
1. The leading idea in this preposition is connexion, either in a greater 
‘or less degree. It is weaker, however, in this respect than ody. _ 

2. With THeGENITIVE: “etd signifies “ with,” “ together with ;”’ 
as, xalugpas peta TOV GAAwy, ‘to sit down along with the rest.” Hence 
ued tevoe elvat, “ to be on any one’s side.” With the words “ to con- 
tend, fight, carry on war,” peta enone the side which is favoured ; 
as, éroAéunoay peta TOY orupdxyov mpoc adAjAouc, “ they waged war 
along. with their allies against one another.” 


3. Hence arise various constructions, the basis of which is the idea 


of a connexion, which in other languages is differently expressed. Thus, 
peta modureiag elvat, “to have a regular government ;” peta Tov Adyov, 
“under the guidance of reason ;” pera Tov vouwv, eoecaicy. to the 
laws ;” peta kivdvvear, “in the midst of dangers ;” pera mawdua¢ Kat 
. oivev, “in jest and drunkenness.” - 

4, Wirn tHe Dative it occurs in the poets only, with the meaning 
of “among,” “with ;” as, weta O& TpLTaToLoLy Gvaccer, “and he was 
reigning among. the third (generation) ;” peta orpaté, “among the 
army ;” viv 62 we? buerépn &yoph quar, “and now I am sitting amid 


your assembly.” Hence arises the general meaning of “in ;” as, 7- 


ddAov pera xepolv éxovra, “ holding the rudder in his hands ;” GAAqv 
uiTiv doave peta dpéory, “ he wove another plan in mind.” 

5. Wita tHe Accusative it denotes “after,” of which instances 
_ everywhere occur. . Thus, pera tatra, ‘after these things ;” wera tov 
ivOporor, “ after the man,” &c. Hence also &reoGar peré teva, “ to 
follow after one.” This literal following was transferred to a figurative 
following, or guiding one’s self by the example of another. Thus, pe ‘a 
cov Kal éudv Kip, “agreeably to thy sentiment and mine ;” peta KAéc¢ 
Epyechat, “ to go for glory,” i. e., where glory called him (Jl. 20, 227). 


6. It is likewise joined, by the Attics particularly, with 7épa alone, — 


_ or with an ordinal number ; as, wel” 7uépav, “ in the daytime 7? weTa 
tpitny juépay, “on the third day.” ; 


“* 
‘fT 


PREPOSITIONS. 225 


7. In Homériespecially it i. “ among” several, with plural or col- 
ective words, both where motion and rest are rec ary Thus, peta ~ 
mavrTac ougatkac, “among all his companions in yrars 3” we? bptdrov, 
“among the throng.” 


Ilapd. 
1. The primitive meaning of zapé is “‘ by the side of,” a signification 
_ which lies at the basis of all the other meanings assigned to this prepo- 
sition. : | 

2. Wirn tHe GeniTivE it signifies “from” (i. e., from the side of), 
and expresses motion from a place; as, ddoyavoy épvocato mapa pnpor, 
“he drew his sword from his thigh; nap’ Aijrao niéovoa, “ sailing 
from ZEetes.” Hence it denotes what originates and ,proceeds from — 
something ; ; as, wabeiv rapa Tivoc, * to sete from any oné ;” ayyéAdew 
“qapa Tivoc, “to announce from any one.’ 

3. So also in the expressions, wap’ éavTod diddvat, to Zive some- 
thing from his own substance ;” rap’ abrod, ‘“ by his command” (Xen. 
H G. 2, 1, 27), &c. 

4. Wirn tHE Dative it signifies ‘ “ with,” “at,? in answer to the 
question “ where?’ Thus, Onyiog d¢ pf’ Heide mapa pvynorijpoty avayky, 
“ Phemius, who sang with the suiters (i. e., among them) eouek com- 
_ pulsion ;” napa Seoig Kai rap’ avOparoce, “ with gods and men.’ 

5. Wirn tue Accusative it signifies “ to,” ‘“ towards” (i. e., to the 
side of); as, apd vipac "Ayatdv, “towards the ships of the Greeks ;” 
napa Kapubtcea, “ to Cambyses ; napa tiv Babviéva, “ to Babylon.” 
“It is frequently used thus in answer to the question “where?” but then 
the idea of motion is always implied in the preposition. Thus, of pév 
KolunoavTo Tapa mpuuvyata vydc, “they on their part lay down. to rest 
by the stern-fasts of the ship,” i. e., they went to and lay down by them. 
, 6. It often occurs with the meaning “in comparison with,” “ by the 
side of,” “for.” Thus, dpdv ra énirndeipara abtév éyyibev rapa Ta 
tiv GAdwy, “ seeing their objects of sods from near at hand in com- 
parison with those of the rest; &v map’ éoddv mhuata obvdvo daiovtat 
Bpotoic Gbdvarot, “ for one piece of good fortune the gods bestow upon 
mortals a pair of evils; mapa Ta GAAa fda, “in comparison with the 
other animals” (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 14). 

7. From the primitive meaning “ by the side of” are derived the fol- 
lowing phrases : apd. wcKpdv, ‘* almost” (by the side of little) ; rapa 
moa, “by far” (by the side of much), &c. 

8. It has also the meaning of ‘ along,” which results directly from 
the meaning “by the side of ;” as, mapa Siva Saddoonc, “ along the 
shore of the sea ;” rapa vijac iévat, * to go alongside the ships” (Eurtp. 


224 






go t . ‘Hence also 
of nis: * deren’. 19 ee ‘aroughna a Tap’ Y ho -Biov, “ through 
one’s whole life.” Especially when a ‘definite point of time is a: 
as, Tapa THY méoLv, “in drinking ;” rap’ abra ta dixhuara, § 
very moment of the unjust transaction.” eae 

9. It has also the meaning of ‘“‘ against,” “ tyeecaicd to,” # otherwise” 
than ;”” as, rapa ddgay, * courary to opinion ;” mapa pba, “contrary 
o nature,” &c. 


Tlepé.” 

1, The primitive meaning of this preposition is “ about,” « around,” 
any which are deduced various other significations, 

. Wirn tae Genitive it answers most nearly to the Latin de, and 
gle “of,” “ concerning,” &c.; as, mepi Tivo¢g Aéyery, “to speak 
concerning any one.” The most universal sense, however, is “ with re- 
spect to,” “as regards,” ¢ “in point of,” &c. Thus, sept pév 6n Bpa- 
cewe Kal TOcEws, “ as regards, then, eating and drinking ;” obdeic ab- 
Trav wAROeo¢ répt dEtoc orubAnOivat éoTL, “no one of them is worthy of 
being compared with it in point of size.” 

8. The following phrases serve to express value; as, moveiobat Ts 
rept ToAAob, “ to value a thing highly,” i. e., in, respect of much; 7yeto- 
Oat Tt rept tieiotov, to regard a thing as of the greatest value,” i. e., 
_ in respect of very much. So, also, woveioOas te rept pixpod, * to set 

hittie value upon a thing ;” 7yetoOa tt epi oddevéc, * to regard a thing 
as of no value.” 

4. In Homer zepé often carries with it the mneabing of aiparierity; 
and has the meaning of ‘“ above,” &c. ; as, é0éAer wept maévrwv Eupevae 
GAnwv, “ he wishes to be above all others ;” of mepi wiv Bovany Aavady, 
mept 0 gor? udxeobat, “ ye who are superior to the rest of the Greeks in 
council, and superior in the fight. ” Here peer is governed, not by 

_ mept, but by card understood. 
5. Wirn tue Darive it signifies “about,” “ Sack 92.68 ong?! ‘ an- 


.swer to the question “ aphere { 2” as, mepl Th xErpl xpvoowy daxriAsoy ~ 


géperv, “to wear a golden ring on the hand: :” often when something 
surrounds that which is in the dative ; as, Tepl doupt 7 heraipe, “ he pant- 
ed around his lance,” i. e., on his lance ; temtGra r@de wept veopparte 
Sider, “ having fallen on this sword Pee, sprinkled with blood.”’ So in 
the general designation of a place ; rept Zxavgor mvAnot, “in the neigh- 
bourhood of the Scean gate.” -Tence probably m Herodotus (9, 101), 
un cept Mapdoviy mraion 7 “EAAds, ‘lest Greece strike on Mardonius, 
gs on a shoal.” 

6. With the poets mept with, the dative siguitis also “ for,” answer- 


™ 


the 


a, 
= 





EPOSITIONS. (225 






$06, * for fear,” i. e., from fear, pra 
met. 4 : 

7%. Wirn tux Accusative it signifies particularly “ rownd about,” in 
adswér to the. questions “‘ where?” and “ whither?” as, Sépaé rept ra 
orépva, “a corslet round about the breast.” It is here also used like 


_. Gudi, to denote not so much a surrounding as a place or. region gen 
~ erally. Thus, sepi Oecoadinv, “ somewhere in Thessaly,” not “around — 


Thessaly.” . LS * 

8. It is often put also with definitions’of time; as, wept Todtove Tove 
xpovoue, * about this same time ;” wept wAg@ovoay ayopav, “ about the 
time when the market-place fills.” With numerals also it signifies 
“ about,” “nearly 3” as, wept TproxtAiove, “ about three thousand.” 

9. It signifies ‘also “ with regard to,” when it may be rendered “in,” 
“ of,” “against ;” as, duaptavery tepi tiva, “to offend against any 
one; ddukoc mept tiva, “unjust towards one ;” owdpoveiv mepl Tov' 
eovc, “ to be sound in one’s belief as regards the gods.” 


: IIpéc. 
1, The primitive idea expressed by this preposition is that of some- 
thing proceeding from one thing towards another. 
2. Wirn THe Genitive it denotes “ from,” “ of,” “by ;” as, mpoe¢ 
yap Acéc eiow &raytec Fevoi, “ for all guests are from Jove,” i. e., are 
protected by Jove; mpd¢ Duuod, “ of one’s free will,” i. e., cordially ; reé 


moevevov Tpoc Aakedatpoviwr, ‘what was done by the Lacedemonians.” — 


3. Hence result the following phrases: eivac xpd¢ Tivoc, “ to be on 
any one’s sidé,” like the Latin stare ab aliquo; 6 éori xpd¢ tv HdcKn- 
KOTWY UGAAov, “ which is to the advantage rather of those who have acted 
wrongfully ;” Td mpo¢ Keivov, “ that which speaks for him,” i. e., serves 
for his exculpation. Hence mpo¢ dixne tw éyecv, for dixatov elvar. So, 


_also,.mpo¢ marpoc, “on the father’s side ;” ot mpd¢ aluaroc, “the rela- 


tions by blood.” - 
4, It is often used with the genitive in entreaties and protestations ; 


_ as, 7pd¢ Tod ood Téxvov Kat Gedy ixvedtuar, “I supplicate thee by thy 


child and by the gods,” i. e., by every consideration proceeding -from 
them. ot 

5. It has also the meaning of “ towards ;” as, mpo¢ wéALoc, * towards 
the city” (Il. 22, 198); mpo¢ neonubpinc, ‘towards the South” (Herod. 
2, 99); mpo¢ yAcov dvopuéwy, “ towards the setting of the-sun” (Id. 7%, 
115)... | 3 . 

6. Wirs tue Dative it signifies chiefly either “ at,” “ with,” in an. 
ewer to the question “where?” as, xpo¢ TobTw bAog eit, * I am wholly 
at this,” i. e., wholly occupied with this ; mpdg tive elvat, “ to ponder on 


* 


“ 


* 


“226 PREPOSITIONS 
anything :” or else it has the meaning of “besides,” “in addition to Fad 
as, mpo¢ Tovrcic, ‘in addition to these things ;” mpo¢ uot Kal ool, * be- 
sides thee and me.” 7 | 

%. Wirn rue Accusative it has the signification of “ 10," i in answer 
to the pueegen “ whither 2?” as, aré6y mpoc paxpdv "OAvuror, “ he de- 
parted to lofty Olympus ;” mpo¢ matépa Tov ody, “ to thy father.” Fre- 
quently, however, it expresses, generally, a direction to an object, with 
the meaning of “towards,” “after ;” as, mpog 76 7 HéALov Te, “ towards 
Aurora and the sun,” i. e., towards the rising sun (Jl. 12, 239); mpds 
Cogov heodevra, “ towards the dark West” (Ib. 240): Herodotus, in this 
sense, often puts the genitive, as above, §'5. 

8. Sometimes it has the meaning of “ on account of ;” as, mpog Gv THV 
div tadtnv, “on account, then, of this vision” (Herod. 1 38); Aéyere 
6& 67 Ti kal mpoc Ti ¥ “ you say, then, what, and on what account?” i.e., 
with what view (Plat. Eiip. Min. p. 370, extr.). So, dobeiobat spo rt, 
“to be afraid on any account” (Soph. Trach.1211); Savudve mpoe 

“to wonder on any account” (Id. id. C. 1119); mpdc oddév, “ on 
no y ee ;” apoc Tavta, “on this account,” &c. 

9. It has-also, with the accusative, the meaning of “ for,” «with re- 
spect to ;” as, Kadoc mpd¢ Spdpuor, “ fair for running ;” Tédeo¢ mpod¢ dp- 
evyv, “ matured for virtue.” Hence it is particularly used in compari- 
sons ; as, Gmiotov TAHO0¢ We mpd¢ TO uéyeoe Tig TbAewe, “an incred- 
ible number for the size of the city,” literally, “‘in comparison with ;” 
Twepl THY codiar gavioug mpoc tudc, “unfit for wisdom in comparison 
with you.” 

10. It also signifies “‘ according to,” “ conformable Tat after ; ;? as, 
_mpoe Ta Tod Babvawviov phuyara, “ according to the words of the Baby- 
" lonian ;” mpo¢ Tabryy Thy ohuny, “in accordance with this prediction ;” 
ob mpo¢ Tove tperépove Adyove, “ not taking your words for a pattern.” 

11. The idea of direction towards some mane object is the ground- 
work also of the following phrases: opdiar mpd dp0dv yaw’ ’AyiAAEiov 
- tégov, “to immolate, turning towards the lofty mound of Achilles’ tomb ;”” 
texpiOnoay mpd¢ te ’AOnvaiove nai Aaxedamoviove of “EAAnvec, “the . 
Greeks separated, and went over, some to the Athenians, others to the 
Lacedemonians.” 

12. It has also, with the accusative, an adverbial sense; as, mpd¢ Td 
Sewov, * cruelly 3” mpoc Td Kaprepov, “violently ;” pic eboéberar, 
“ piously ;” mpo¢ Biav, “ perforce ;” xpo¢ ndovqy, “ willingly.” 

13. With numerals it denotes “ about,” “nearly ;” as, mpog TeTpaKa 
siovc, “about fow hundred ;” mpo¢ éxaréy, ‘nearly one hundred.” 


PREPOSITIONS. — 227 
BP, | i 
e si PRE tin 50 

1. The primitive meaning of this preposition is “‘wnder,” a significa- 
vion which it often has with the genitive; as, dd ye; “under the 
earth ;” and often it signifies “from under ;” as, 07d xOoveg jKe b6ws- 
de, “he sent it from beneath the earth into the light.” 

2. Like the Latin sud, it sometimes expresses proxi with a higher 
place; as, 0@’ apuaroc, ‘near the chariot,” where the reference is to 
one who is standing on the ground, with the chariot erect by his side. 
Hence, figuratively, ‘‘ below the chariot.” 

3. From the meaning of “under” is deduced that of “ by, especially 
with passive verbs, the reference being to something under the influence 
of which a certain act is performed or result brought about. Thus, 
ératvetobar br TLvoc, “ to be praised by any one ;” ofayeic tr’ Aiyio- 
Gov, “immolated by Aigisthus ;” aroBaveiv ix6 twvoc, “to die by the 
hands of one;” vn’ ayyéAwy tropetecbat, “ to go by reason of messen- 
gers ;” GedAa bd boovrig matpo¢ Avo¢ eiot rédovde, “ the Sig: oy by 
the thunder of father Jove, descends to the plain; txd tév tpidkovra — 
KOvetov miovtec, “having drunk hemlock by command of the thirty.” 

4. From the two meanings of “under” and “by” combined seem to 
‘have arisen such phrases as the following : id dopuiyywr yopevtery, “to 
dance to the music of harps ;” tn’ avAov Kapdlety, “ to revel to the flute.” 
For here the preposition with its case appears to express, on the one 
hand, a kind of subordination, inasmuch as the subject of the action con- 
forms itself to the substantive which is governed by the preposition ; and, 
on the other hand, the action is effected, or at least defined, by the sub- 
stantive in the genitive, as in the construction of the passive with td 
and the genitive. 

5. Witn tHe Dative it has often the same signification as with the 
genitive, as, for example, with passives in the sense of a or ab. Thus, 
| & brvoxvod arotetédeorat cot On, “what you promised have been now 
done by you ;” mpoorddAote dvAdocerat, “he is guarded by his attend- 
ants.”” So, also, as with the genitive, id 6apbitw yopevery, “ to dance 
to the lyre,” &c. 

6. It often, in particular, when joined with this ease, signifies “‘ unde~,” 
‘with the idea of subordination ; as, i716 tive sivas, “to be under one,” 
1. e., obedient to one ; moceiv Te dd Tevet, “to submit ange to any 

C,” &ec. 

ag WirTH THE Abcoairive it signifies * Syeilty “ gi,” analogous to 
the Latin sub, in answer to the question “ whither?” as, b76 “Wsov 7A- 
ev, “he came beneath Ilium,” i. 'e., under the walls of Troy. It is 
iikewine employed with this case in definitions of time; as, 6x0 Tove 
abrove xpévouc, “ about the same time.” 


228 © PREPOSITIONS. 


8. Sometimes it is found with the piasative. in answer to the ques: 
tion “where?” as, obre breort oiknwata vo yiv, “nor are there © ny 
. chambers under grownd’ (Herod. 2,127); et tiwag &yaivto rév b¢’ tav- 
Tove, ** in-case they thought ingly of any of those under them’ (Xen. 
Cyrop. 3, 3, 6). ‘Hence, ia’ abyde dpay r1, “to examine anything by 
the light,” i. €.. under the light ; with) th ale streaming down upon it , 
m6 TL, “in some m easure,? &c. 

9. With names of places it expresses proximity, like the Latin sub, 
but refers to some elevated object. . Hence, perhaps, the expression, 
bm0 OixacrhpLov ayetv Tivd, “to lead a person to the tribunal of judges,” 
the judges sittmg on elevated seats. 


e 









GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 


1. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, without a case, espécially 
év_in thé Ionic and Attic poets. . Thus, év 62 67 Kai Aeobiovg elde, 
‘among others, then, he took the Leshans” (Herod. 3, 39); év. & 6 
TupHopoc Sede oxppac éAadvver, Aowude ExOcoroc, w6ALv, “* while within 
the fiery god, in the shape of a most odious pestilence, having descended 
like a thunderbolt, ravages the city.” Among the Attie writers mpdéc¢ 
especially is thus used, with the meaning of ‘‘ besides ;” as, Mevédae, 
oot 08 Tade Aéyw, dpdow Te mpdc, “ Menelaus, I say these things unto 
thee, and besides I will do them” (Eurip. Orest. 615). 

2. Hence in Ionic writers they are often put twice, once without. a 
case adverbially, and again with a case or in cgmposition with averb. | 
Thus, dy 0 Odvaeie. roabpnruc é aviotato, “up thereupon arose the sa: 
~ gacious Ulysses” (Il. 23, 709) ; év dé Kai dv Méugu, fs in Memphis also” | 
(Herod. 2, 176), &c. 

3. In composition with verbs the prepositions are cmt used adver- 
bially. Hence, in the older state of the language, in Homer and Herod- 
otus, if is customary to find the preposition and verb separated. by other 
words, and the former coming sometimes, immediately after the verb ; 
as, quiv aro Aocyov déivar (Il. 1, 67); évdpilov aw évrea (Il. 12, 195) ; 
ard piv cewitov OAeoac (Herod. 3, 36), &ci Hence, when the verb 
is to be repeated several times, after the first time the preposition only 
is often used; GroAez rod, Grd 08 warépa (Eurip. Herc. F. 1056) ; 
kaTa-pév Exavoav Apyyov moar, kata dé Xapddpav (Herod. 8, 33), &c. 

4. In the cases mentioned under § 3 there i is properly no émesis, i. €., 
the separation of a word used at that period of the language in its com- 
pounded form; but the prepositions at that time served really as adverbs, 
which were put either immediately before or after the verbs. At a later 
period, howeyer, particularly in Attic, the composition ‘became. more 
firmly established, and the prepositions were considered as a part of 
the verb. In Attic writers the proper ¢mesis is extremely rare 





PREPOSITIONS. ¥ 229 


5. The prepositions are often separated, from theirvcase. ‘Thus, év 
yep ce tH vexti tabty avarpéouar (Herod. 6, 69); especially when a 
word is repeated in two opamp cases ; as, tap’ ovK 20éAwv eGedoveg 
(Od. 5, 155), &c. 


- Prepositions: likewise a are often put after theiz case ; 3, 8; veGv amo 





This takes place in the Attic prose writers only in qe 
tive, of which the instances are frequent. 

7. When a preposition should stand twice with two different nougs, 
itis often put only once by the poets, and that, too, with the second 
noun ; as, 7 Gdad¢ } éri yc (Od. 12, 27); ébddue Kat ov ore yeveg 
( Pind. zt ana 16), &c 


- r s 





SYNTAX! - * 





THE ARTICLE. 


1. The article 6, 776, is properly a demonstrative pro- 
noun, and is used’ as such, in the elder language, by Ho- 
mer, and, in imitation of him, by the Tater epic poets; as, 
5 yap BaoraHi yvorwbeic, “for this (deity) being incensed 
cs gene = king ;? ta 0° drrowva déyeobe, and receive this 
ransom.’ 

2. But in later Greek, and especially among the prose 
writers, the article is generally employed to mark emphasis 
or distinction, and loses its demonstrative force ;? as, 6 76A- 
Euog ovK avev Kivdovwy, 7) dé eiphvn aKivdvvoc, “ war is 
not free from dangers, but peace is without danger” (here the 
article -_ put on account of the opposition of war and 





1. The greater part of the rules which are common to'the Greek and 
Latin languages are here omitted. 

2. But the prose usage: it must. be. remembered, is derived from the 
original demonstrative force of the article. . Thus, 6 méA€uor is strictly 
“that state of things called war,” and 7 sipyvn, “that state of affairs 
termed peace.” So 6 Kipog is literally “ that igi Cyrus.” 

| U 


— 


230 THE ARTICLE. 


peace) ; 6 Kipog mroAAd &0vn Kateotpétparo, “ the celebra- 
ted Cyrus. subdued many nations” (here the article is em 
phatic).. 

_ 3. When a proper name first occurs in prose, it is with- 
out the article (unless meant to be emphatic) ; but when it 
occurs the second time it generally has the article.! This 
is called the usage of renewed mention. ‘Thus, 7jv Zevodav 
"AOnvatog...... Opévror ZevooOv dvakowvovtar Lwxpa- 
Te. .... kal 6 Swxpdtne ovubovieier aitw, “ there was 
Xenophon, an Athenian .... this Xenophon, however, con- 
fers with Socrates .... and he, Socrates, advises him.” 

4. But the article must always be omitted before a proper 
“name when an additional substantive, with the article, is 
subjoined to the same for nearer definition; as, Kipoc, 6 
Ta@Y Ilepoav Baotdretvc, * Cyrus, the king of the Persians ;” 
O7nb6at, ai év Bowwria, “Thebes, the city in Beotia.” 

5. Every expression which does not merely indicate an 
object generally, but represents it as existing in a particular 
state or in a peculiar relation, is accompanied in Greek by 
the definite article; as, tov yépovra aldeioOat yph, “ one 
pught to reverence an old man;” t&v Tov Biov ayabeyv peET- 
Eyey Sei kat Tov dovAor, “even a slave ought to participate 
in the good things of tfe,’” Ley 

6. The article is used in prose with the demonstratives 
ovTo¢ and éxeivoc, in which case the pronoun either pre- 
cedes the article or follows the substantive; as, ovtoc¢ 6 
Gvip, or 6 Gvip ovtog (not 6 ovTo¢ avip), “ this same man.” 

7. The article is also added to the possessive pronoun, 
for the pirpow of giving a more precise definition. Thus, 
éudc vid¢g is merely a “ son of mine;” but 6 éud¢ vide is 
“ my son,” who is already known from the context. 

8. Adverbial expressions become adjectives by the ac 





1. Unless the interval be so extensive a one that the mind does nov 
readily recur to the individual as having been before mentioned. ‘T’o 
shis, however, there are several exceptions. 

2. Literally, “ the one that is old ;” ** the one that is a slave” 


a 


THE NOMINATIVE AND VERB. 231 


cession of the article; as, of méAac dvOparrot, “the early 
race of men;” 6 petasd ypovoc, “ the intervening time.”' 

9. The neuter of the article 76 is joined also to infini- 
tives, and forms in this way a species of verbal noun ; as, 
TO TpatTeLy, * the doing 3? TO Kadw@e Aéyev, “ae speaking 
well,”? 

.10. The article is also combined with pév and dé, and 
then has in some degree the force of a pronoun ; as, 9/ 
uév &¢ hvyiy étpdtovto, of dé Euervav, “ these, indeed, 
turned themselves to flight, but those remained ;” todo pév 
émgvet, Tovc 0” éxddacer, “the former he pravsed, but the 
vse he punished.” 


THE NOMINATIVE AND VERB. 7 

1. A verb agrees with its nominative in number and per- 
son ; as, éy@ Aéyw, “I say ;” todtw TH avdpe rrynodoOny, 
** these two men thought ;” és VJeot Koddcovot, “ the gods 
punish.” 

2. A neuter rene however, is genera joined with a 
singular verb ;* as, dotpa paiverat, “ stars appear ;” Tavita 
éotiv ayabd, * these things are good.” 

3. But when the neuter plural refers to living persons, 
the verb is often put in the plural also, because persons are 


for the most part considered separately by the mind, but 


things as forming a class.2 . Thus, ta téAn wtréoyorTo, 





A? When a substantive is omitted, they supply. the place of substan-" 
tives ; as, 7 avpov, * the morrow,” ‘supply quépa ; and again, of mAy- 
ciov, “ neighbours,” supply dvOpwrot. 

2. Sometimes the article 1 is joined to an entire clause ; as, éav TobTO 
Bebding onapen, Tote Kal Tepl TOU Tiva TLmWpHoETAaL TLC exetvov TpOTrOY 
écéotat oxoreiv, “tf this be firmly established, then will it be allowed us 
also to consider in what manner one shall punish that monarch.” 

3. So in the neuter, ra wév—ra dé, * partly—partly, ? &e: 

4. This-usage is more observed by the Attics than by the older wri- 
ters in the Ionic and Doric dialects, and is frequently neglected by the 


Attics themselves. 


5. Sometimes we find even a singular verb following a masculine or 
feminine plural ; as, tuvor téAXetat, ‘ hymns arise,” Pind. Ol. 11, 4; 
dyeirat ougat uédewn, “ the voices of song resound,” Id. fragm. In the 
Attic writers, however, this takes place only. where the verb precedes, 


- 


232 » THE NOMINATIVE AND. VERB. 


“the magistrates promised ;” toodde ev pera ’AOnvatan 
£0vn éotpatevor, “ so many nations served along with the 
Athenians.” > . . ve. 

4. When the subject consists of several persons or things 


“singly specified, and which follow the verb, the latter.often 


stands in the singular; as, ore Kai év GAAac TréA€awv dp- 
Kovres TE Kai Onuoc, “ there are in other cities also both ma- 
gistrates and a commons.” Here, if dpyoevtec stood alone, 


‘the verb would necessarily be eioi. 


5. Collective nouns, on the contrary, that is, nouns sin- 


gular which express multitude:or number, have often their 


verb in the~plural;' as, 7d otparémedov dvexapour, “ the 
army retired ;” ToAd yévog GvOpéTwY ypGvTat TObT®, “a 
large class of men use this.” . | 
6. A dual nominative is sometimes joined with a plural 
verb ;? as, T@ dé Tay’ éyybOev HAOov, “ they two quickly 
drew near ;” Gudw Aéyovot, “ both say.” — : 
7. The nominative is often omitted when the verb itself 


expresses the 





customary action of the subject ; as, oaAricer, 


the trumpeter sounds his trumpet,” where 6 oaAmuKrig is 


implied ; éxjpvse, “the herald made proclamation,” where 
6 xnjpvéisimplied. * + | 7 
8. When two or more substantives are connected by a 


4 conjunction, the verb which belongs to all, instead of being 


in the plural, is sometimes found to agree with one of these 
substantives, and usually with that one which is nearest to 
it, and the most important in the sentence; as, gol ydp éd- 





-in-which case probably the author had the whole in his mind, and ex- 


plained or defined it afterward by the substantive in the plural. Thus, 


- dédoxrat dvyai, “exiles are decreed,” Eurip: Bacch. 1340. 


1. This construction occurs even in the genitive absolute; as, Tod 
atéAov rAedvTav, Demosth. in Mid. 45. , 

2. Sometimes, on the other hand, the dual of the verb is put with the 
plural nominative, even when-more than two persons are signified. This 
occurs chiefly in the earlier epic poets, and is uot found. in the tragedians 
and prose writers. -Many. scholars considér thé passages in question 
corrupt, or think that they must be explained otherwise. The whole 
difficulty is removed, however, by regarding the dual as originally an 
old form of the plural, limited subsequently to the expression of two. 


‘ 


2 


THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 233 


exe vienv Lede Kpovidne kal ’ArrdAA wy, “ for unto thee has 
Jove, the son of Saturn, given victory, and Apollo.” 

9. Sometimes a nominative is put without a verb follow- 
ing, and is then called the nominative absolute ; as, éxetvor 
dé sloeAOdytec, elnev 6 Kpetiag, “ they MYNS £8 anittts, Crit- 
tas said.” 


THE SUBSTANTIVE AND ADJECTIVE. 

1. An adjective is often put in the neuter gender, with- 
out regard to,the gender of the substantive which stands 
with it in’ the sentence, XPT ‘ being understood, and re- 
mains in the —n even when the substantive, is in the 
plural ;' as, ox dyabdv 1) TroAvKoipavia, “the government 
of the many is not a good thing ;” wetabodai gioi bey at 
“ changes are a sad thing.” ; 

2. An adjective of the masculine gender is often found 
with a feminine noun of the dual number, and under this 
rule are also included the. ‘pronoun, ‘participle, and article ;? 
as, dupa) TOOTW TO TrOAEE, “ both these eitie 5” Ovo yuvaike 
épivovte, “two women quarrelling ;” ro) “xelpe, “ the two 
hands.” ea 

3. An adjective is often put ina different gender Erith 
the substantive with which it stands, as pesigarpe to the 
person or persons implied by that substantive ;? as, ide 
réxvov, “ dear child” (Il. 22, 84), spoken of Hector; téxo¢ 
atputavn, “ indefatigable i aa (Ii. 2, 157), spoken of 
Minerva. 

4. Hence a collective noun in the singular aint and . 
of the feminine or neuter gender, is often accompanied by 
the adjective in the plural and masculine ; as, EYOMEV THY 








1. In all such constructions as these: the substantive is regarded by 
the mind as representing merely some general class of things, and. hence 
the adjective is putin the néuter gender. 

2. Hence it has been inferred that the dual of the adjective, pronoun, 
pees and article had originally only one form, namely, the mascu- 

ne 

3. Grammarians call this synesis (obvecic), i. €., an understanding ol 
the person implied by the substantive. . 


U2 





ih waa 


234 -  ~ PRONOUNS. 


| eDigy % brnpeciav TrAeiove Kai duetvove, * we had the rest 
e crews more numerous and skilful.” | 

“5. Among the tragic writers, when a woman speaks of 
herself in the plural number, she uses the rhasculine ; and 
the masculine is also employed when a chorus of women are 
speaking of themselves. ‘Thus, of mpoOvjoxovtec (Eurip.), 
where Alcestis speaks of herself; @xretp’ dxoboac (Eurip. 
Androm.), “I pitied, on having heard,’ where the chorus 
speak. : 

6. A substantive is often used as an adjective ;' ;' as, yA@o- 
oav ‘EAAdOa édidake, “he taught the Greek tongue.” 

7. The substantive is often changed into a genitive plu- 
’ ral;? as, ol ypnotol Téy advOparwy, “ tycmadoca ones among 
men,” for of ypnotol GvOpwrot, “ worthy men.’ 

8. This construction takes place also inthe singular, es- 
pecially in Attic ; as, tv mAeiorny Tij¢ oTpatiag (Thucyd.), 
“the greatest part of the ee aled 3” TOV TOADY TOV. yYpdvov, 
“@ great part of the time.” 

9. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substan- 
tive, governs the genitive; as, wéoov nuépac, “ the middle 
of the day ;” tT6o0v optdov, “ so great a throng.” 

10. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter singular © 
and plural, with and without an article, for adverbs; as, 
mp@Tov, ‘ in the first place ;” td mpGrov, “ at first ;” Kpv- 

gaia, “ secretly ;” padpd, “ cheerfully.” 


_ PRONOUNS. 


1. The noun to which the relative refers is often omitted 
in the antecedent proposition, and joined to the relative in 
the same case with it; as, pints éotiv, by sides avdpa, 
“this is the man whom you saws” ovk &YW, OTLVL TLOTEVOAL 
dv dvvaipny didw, “I have no friend on whom I might rely.” 





1. This is of very ordinary occurrence in our own language ; as, sea- 
water, house-dog, &c. ! 

2. The substantive is here considered asa whole, and the adjective as 
a part. 


PRONOUNS. 235 


2. The relative often agrees with its antecedent in case, 
by what is called attraction ; as, obv toig Jnoavpotc, ole % 
6 tatip KatéAttev, “ with the treasures which his father left 
behind ;” dywv amd TéY TéAEwWY, OV ErELoE, OTPATLGY, ” 
leading a body of se i from the cities which he had per- 
suaded.” 

3. If, in this aside the word to which the relative 
refers be a.demonstrative pronoun, this pronoun is generally 
_ omitted, and the relative takes its ease; as, ody oi¢ pdd- 
LOT, eneng “with those whom you most love,” for ovv Tov- 
TOLG ove padALoTta dtAéic. ; 

4. Sometimes the antecedent takes the case of the rela- 
tive ; as, dAAov ob« olda, ob dv tevyea Ovw, “I know not 
any other whose arms I may put on.” 

5. The nominative of the personal pronoun is usually 
omitted with the personal terminations of verbs, as in 
Latin, except where there is an emphasis ; as, dAAd tdév- 
TW Kal od Owet abriy, * but you, by all means, shall even 
see Aap 

6. The possessive pronouns are only employed when an 
emphasis is required ; in all other cases the personal pro- 
nouns are used in their stead; as, ratip quay, “ our fa- 
ther” (literally, “the father of us”); but tar7p TIMETEpOS,, 
“our own father.” 

7. A substantive is, sometimes put in . the genitive, as In 
opener with another genitive implied in a possessive 
pronoun ;' as, Exnorpere Képag Tov ye adv dpOadudy Tov 
mpéabewe, “ mayo raven strike out the eye of you the ambas- 
sador.” 

8. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used pi 
tively ;? as, od¢.1600¢, not “thy regret,” but “ regret for 





1. So in Latin, mea ipseus causa, where ipsius is in apposition with 
the genitive implied i in mea. So, also, nomen meum a meas pre- 
sentis preces” (Circ. Planc. 10, 26). 

2. This is called by the older’ grammarians the passive use of the pos- 
sessive. Consult Ruddiman, Instit. G. L. ed. Stallb. vol. ii., p, 50. 


236 THE GENITIVE. 


’ 


i, rane RenPeTNene: “the lessons which thou givest 





3 


| 9. The pronoun airdé¢ is often used slick ordinal num- 

de bers, to show that one person with several others, whose 

_ number is less by one than the number mentioned, has done 

something; as, KopsvOiwy orpatnydc iv ZevondAstdne, 

méumTo¢ avtTo¢, “ Xenoclides was leader of the Corinthians 
along with four others.” 

10. The demonstrative pronouns ovro¢ and 8de are gen- 

erally distinguished in this way, that ovro¢ refers to what 

-immediately precedes, and de to what immediately fol- 

lows. Thus, téupaca 7 Touvpig khpuna édeye Tade, 
Tomyris, having. sent a herald, announced as follows ;” 
ravta 0& dkotvoac eime, “having heard these things, he 
said.” | 
11. The demonstrative pronouns. are often used instead 
of the adverbs “here” and “ there ;” as, GAA’ 70’ éradav 
Ex Oduwv Epyetat, “ but here comes a maidservant out of the 
“mansion ;” abvtat yap, avTat er Spwoxovet pov, “ for 
there, there, they are leaping near me.’ 

12. The reflexive pronoun éavTov is sometimes acd for 
the other reflexive pronouns of the first and second per- 
sons ;' as, det 7judc dvepéoOar éavtodc, “it behooves us to 
ask our own selves ;” el 0’ érntipwc popov tov abriig oloa, 
“ but if you truly know your own fate.” | 


THE GENITIVE? 


1. The verbs elus and yéyvouat, denoting possession, 
property, part, or duty, require the genitive ; as, rovTo Td 
mediov qv pév Tote THY Xopaopiwy, “this same plain be- 
longed formerly to the Chorasmians ;” moans cvoiacg éort 





1. Some accompanying gesture must. be supposed, that may serve te 
express the reference of the pronoun. 

2. The fundamental idea of the genitiye is that of separation or ab- 
straction, of going forth, from, or out-of anything. 


~ 


THE GENITIVE. 237 


Snpaobar Kevd, “ it is the part of great folly to hunt hee . 
vain things.” r a 

2. The genitive is used with verbs of all kinds, even 
with those which govern an accusative, when the action 
does not refer to the whole object, but only to a part; as, 
OnTjoat Kpedv, “to roast some flesh;” Etewov Tig Yije, 
“they laid waste a part of the country ;” tapotéac tij¢ 80- 
oac, “ having opened the door a little.” . 

3. On the general principle of reference to a part, the 
genitive is put with verbs that denote “ to take hold of,” “ to 
touch,” and also with their opposites, “ to let 0,” “ to loose,” 
&c.; as, €Adbovto Tig Gavne, “ they took hold of ‘his gtr- 
dle ;” et tee budv destd¢g BobAeTae Tig éuij¢g Gpacba., “ if 
any one of yor wishes to touch my right hand ;” riod’ éxov- 
oa Traidds ob peOjoouat, * I will not willingly let go of this 
my child.” 

4. On the same principle of a part, the genitive is put 
with the verbs puuvjoney, “ to remind ;” peuvioat, “ to 
remember ;” AavOdvec0a, “to forget,” Bavuilee remember- 
ing and forgetting refer always to particular properties and 
circumstances only, and therefore to parts of the whole. 
Thus, diAwv Kal napdvtwv kai drévtov péuvnoo, “ reo 
member HE sea both when present and absent ;” obd& téTe 
emLAjoouat awTov, “ even then I will not forget him.” 

5. The genitive is also ‘pat with the verbs “ to begin,” 
such as dpyewv, dpyeo0a, ordpyerv, &c., because here 
also the reference is only to a part, that is, the commence- 
ment of an action; as, dpyete ddvKiac, “begin injustice ;” 
innpsav tH éAevdepiac andon th ‘EAAGL, “ they made a 
beginning of freedom for all Greece.” : 

6. Verbs signifying the operations of the senses, such.as 
“ to hear,” “ to feel,” “to smell,” and the like, but not those 
denoting “to see,” require the genitive ;! verbs signifying 





oF 
1. The genitive is put with these verbs only of the object which pro- 
duces the thing perceived, or of an occurrence of which we perceive only 





238 THE GENITIVE. 


“to see’ take the accusative. Thus, mavrog Baotrede 
Gkove, “a king hears everything ;” bm pbpov, “ I smell of 
=a myrrh.” ; ' a 

7. Adverbs of place and time require the genitive, be- 
cause the adverb denotes a single point only, but the sub 
joined definition of place and time designates the whole , 
as, TaVTAYOV yc, “ everywhere on earth ;” dpe THE juépac 
“* late in the day.” - ‘ 

8. Time when, that is, part of time, is put in the genitive ; 
as, Vépove Te Kal KELLOVOC, “an both summer and winter.’’ 

9. The material of which anything is made is put in the 
genitive, the thing made being a single object, but the sub- 
joined definitron denoting an entire class or kind of materi- 
als, part of which go to compose that object; as, Tov did- 
pov érroinoev ioyvpa@y SbAwy, “ he made the chariot of strong 
wood.” : 

10. ‘The superlative degree is also followed by a geni- 
tive, this genitive marking the entire class, of which the 
superlative indicates the most prominent as a part or parts ; 
as, EyOLoTo¢ TavTwY, “ most hated of all;” dproror Tpdwy, 
bravest of the Trojans.” eon 

11. Hence the genitive is put also with verbs, adjectives, 
and adverbs, which are either derived from superlatives, or 
in which merely the idea of preferableness is g@mplied ; as, 
ExaAdoTEebeTo TAG@Y yvvalK@y, “ she was the handsomest 


- 





single parts. ‘The thing perceived, on the contrary, stands in the accu- 
sative. Hence, for the various construction of these verbs, the following - 
rules obtain : 1. If the person alone is named, this stands in the genitive. 
2. If both person and thing are named, the person stands in the genitive 
and the thing in the accusative ; as, rodro Zwxpdrove jKovea. 3. It 
the thing alone is named, the question then is, whether this is conceived 
as a simple part which I comprehend with my senses, or as a compound 
whole of which single parts only are perceived ; in the first case the ac- 
cusative stands, in she second the genitive ; as, o¢ 7o0ero Ta yryvdueva, 
“when he perceived what was taking place.” On the contrary, always 
aicbavecbat Kpavyic, Sopv6ov, &c., because one can only perceive indi- 
cations of the noise. In like manner, dkovery dixne, ‘‘ to hear a suit ;”' 
aicbdvecbat éxibovaie, * to perceive a plot ;” but gvvievar Ta Aeydueva, 
‘to comprehend or understand what is said” ; ' | 


THE GENITIVE. 239 


of all women ;” dtanpereig Svntayv, “ conspicuous among 


mortals ;” &éyao névtwy, “in a manner surpassing all? 
12. To words of all kinds other words are added in the © 


genitive, which show the respect in which the sense of 
these words must be taken; and, in this case, the geni- 
tive properly signifies “ with regard to,” or ‘in respect of ;” 
as, bAne mac 6 TémOG Eyer; “ how is the place with regard 
to timber ?” ovyyvapnwv TAY GvOpwrivev dyapTnudtar, 
“ forgiving with respect to human errors ;” TOppw Tig jALK- 


tac, “ far advanced in years” (properly, “ far advanced with 


respect to years”). 

13. Hence all words expressing ideas of relation, which 
are not complete without the addition of another word as 
the object of that relation, take this object in the genitive : 
and to this rule belong in particular the adjectives “ expe- 
rienced, ignorant, desirous,” and the like, as also the verbs 
‘to concern one’s self, to neglect, to consider, to reflect, 
to be desirous,” &c. Thus, éure:poc rak@y, “ experienced 
in evils ;” dratdebroc dpetic, “uninstructed in virtue ;”' tov 
Kotvov ayabov éripuedeiobat, “to take care of the common 
good ;” weydAwy érOvueiy, “ to desire great things.” 

14. Words signifying plenty or want are followed by a 
genitive, because the term,which expresses of what any- 
thing is full or empty,indicates the respect in which the 
signification of the governing word is taken; as, peoro. 
kanav, “ full of evils ;” Eépnuog didwy, “ destitute of 
friends ;” rAnoOjvae vooov, “to be full of sickness ;” 
dela0at oikeTav, to be in want of inhabitants.” 

15. The comparative degree is- followed by a genitive, 
because this genitive indicates .the respect in which the 
comparative is to be taken; as, weiGwy mratpéc, “ greater 
than a father,” which properly means, “ ‘ greater with respect 
to a father.” 





1. Hence appears to have arisen the rule found in most grammars, 


that adjectives compounded with @ privative govern the genitive. But 
.@ privative cannot well determine the use of either the genitive or any 
ather case. 


M 





240 | ‘THE GENITIVE. 


16. All words derived from comparatives, or which in- 
volve a comparison, are followed by the genitive; as, 7/T- 

Tao0al ttvoc, “ to be defeated by any one” (literally, “ to be 
~ Jess, than any one”) ; orepaioc THS wayne, “ after the bat- 
tle ;” meptyévecOat Tov Baotréwe, “ to prove superior to the 
king ;” debTepo¢ otdevic, * second to no one.” 

17. All verbs that are equivalent in meaning to a hen 
and verb, and especially those in which the idea of ruling 
is implied, are followed by a genitive; as, dvdocev TOY 
M7dwv, “ to reign over the Medes” (equivalent to dvak elvat 
~@v Midwyr); apyey avOpeorwy, “ to rule over men” (equiv- 
alent to dpywy.civat dvOperwyv) ; and, in the same manner, 
Kuplevey for Kiptoc elvat ; Tupavvedverv for Tépayvoc elvur, 
&e. : 

18. Words indicating value or worth require the genitive ; 
as, pdet TOAA@Y ata, “he performs actions equivalent to 
those of many ;” latpo¢ neh ga avrasioc, “a physician 
equal in value to many men.” 

19. All verbs denoting “to buy,” “to sell,” “to ex- 
change,” d&c., are followed by a genitive; as, @vovyTas 
Tae yuvainac ypnudTwv TOAAGY, “ they purchase their wives 
for much money ;” éradAovy TrodAod Toig GALotc, “they sold 
for a large sum to the rest.” 

20. All verbs denoting “ to accuse,” “‘ to criminate,” &c., 
are followed by a genitive ;' as, ypapouat oe dovov, * I ac- 
cuse you of murder ; ” OL@Eoual OE Conon “I will prosecute 
you for cowardice.” 

21. The genitive often stands alone in sitiiniettinn 
with and without an interjection, as indicating the cause 
from which the feeling in question originates; as, *Q Zed 
Baotred the AerrrétynTOs THY Hpevav | “ Oh supreme Jove, 
the acuteness of his intellect !” *“ArroAXov, Tov ede: 
“ Apollo, what a pair of jaws !” 





~ 1. The genitive hefe denotes the object of the action. . For this same 
mason Evexa and dxép gevern the genitive. 


DATIVE. 241 


. DATIVE} 


1. The dative stands i in answer to the ‘naiions to whom 


or what? for whom or what? to whose advantage? to whose 
disadvantage ? as, EOwKd oot Td Bib6Aiov, “ I gave the book 
to. thee ;” éreoOE pot, @ traidec, “ follow me, ay children ;” 
‘mLTGTTW Cot TOTO, “ I enjoin this upon you ;” Seoic a ior 
cet, “he pleases the gods ;” pidocg éxeivo, “a friend to him;’ 
vyabov Ti TOAEt, “ good for the state.” | 
2. Words which express the idea of approach, meeting, 
mion, Or connexion, as well as all verbs implying an action 
vhich cannot be accomplished without approach to the ob- 
'xet, as, to associate, to speak, to converse, to pray, to dis- 
pute, to contend, to vie, to be attentive, and the like, are 


joined with the dative; as, 6p 7juiv Bapbdpovc mpootdy- 


tac, “ I see barbarians approaching us ;” my Eptse TOLC ‘you- 
evotv, “contend not with your parents ;” wo ge TOL 
Beoic, “ they pray to all-the gods.” 

3. Verbs to rebuke, to blame, to be aha to envy, ‘to be 
angry, take the dative of the person ; as, éuol Aovdophoerat, 
“he will reprove me;” uéudopat toic dpyerv BovAopévote, 
“< I blame those who wish to rule ;” ob p0oveite TOUT, “ envy 
not this man;” ti yaderaivetc TH Sepadrrovte ; “ why art 
thou angry atthe attendant ?” 

4. Words implying equality, resemblance, suitableness, 
or the contrary, have the dative case ; as, loog toi¢ ioyv- 
poic, “ equal to the powerful ;” Eorxac dobA@, “ you resemble 
a slave ;” dvdmoung 7) Tratpi, “ unlike his father.” 

5. In like manner, the dative stands also with 6 abrée, 
because it expresses perfect equality; as, év TH ato 
Kivdbve Ttol¢ pavdorarotc, “in the same danger with the 
worst ;” Toig avtoig Kipw brAotc, “in the same arms with 
Cyrus.” | oe 


1. The dative serves to designate the more remote object, that is, it 
designates the object which merely participates in an operation, without 
being immediately affected byit, or in which the effect or Bs a of 
an action is shown. 

Xx 





™% 





» 


h 242 : DATIVE. 

6. The means by which, and the instrument with which, 
a thing is accomplished, are both put in. the dative, since 
this case also"serves in Greek to indicate all definitions 
that are mentioned incidentally and'secondarily to the main 
object ;' as, Toly 6p0adpoiv épOpev, “ we see with the two 
eyes ;” of ToAEwtoL EbaAAOY AiBolc, Kai EnaLtoy payaipate, 
“the enemy threw with stones and struck with swords.” 

7. The motive and cause are put in the dative, and hence 
the verbs “ to rejoice,” “to be delighted,” “ to be grieved,” 
é&c., govern the object by which the feeling is occasioned 
in the dative ; as, ¢66m dnjAGov, “ they departed through 
feats ;” got we ethowsanii “they delight in thee ;” secon 2 
‘TovToLG, “ we are grieved by these things.” 

8. The manner and way in which a thing takes place are- 
put in the dativ®; as, Bia cic ray olxtay elojAOor, “ they 
entered into the house by force ;” mdvra dvetétaxto péTpo 
kal Toit, “all things were arranged by measure and by 
place.” 

9. The petiod of time at which a thing takes sii: or 
during which a thing continues or exists, is put in the da- 
tive ; as, T90e TH vuKri, “ on this very night ;” tpi¢ évinn- 
cav TavTy TH Népa, “they conquered thrice during this 
same day.” 

‘10. 'The verb algal, when pot for é Eye, “to have,” governs 
the aries 5; as, O00L¢g OvK id apy pee, “as many as had not 
money.” : 

11. An impersonal verb governs the iste as, éeoré 
pot anévas, “it is lawful for me to depart.” 

12. Neuter adjectives in téov govern the person in the 
dative, and the thing in the case of the verb from which 
they are derived; as, Tobto mornréov éori por, “ I must do 
this 3” tobtov emipedqréov éotiv & wai “ you must take care 
of this.” | 


ane? 
> esi 





‘ i. Hence the verb xpibat, “to he to make use vn takes the 
ative. 


coin Net aia 


5 


ACCUSATIVE. | » 243 


- ACCUSATIVE. 


1. A verb signifying actively governs theaccusative ; as, 
of “EAAnvec é éviknoay Tove Ilépoac, “ the Greeks siihtored 
the Persians.” a | 

2. Other verbs also, which in Latin frequently take” the 
object in the dative, or are connected with it by a preposi- 
_ tion, require in Greek the accusative ; such as verbs signi- ” 
fying “ to benefit,” “ to injure,” and, in general, all which de- 
note an action tending to the advantage or disadvantage of 
a person ;' as, apéAqae Tod¢ ovvértac, “he benefited those 
who associated with him ;” 6 koAakeiwv Tovg didove BAdT- 
Tet, “he that flatters injures his friends ;” TYHLOPOUYT aL TOUC 
ddixove, “ they punish the unjust.” 

3. The accusative also occurs in Greek with Airaisitive 
verbs, when the object which receives the action contained 
in the verb is definitely assigned, as in verbs signifying “ to 
go,” “ to come,” “ to reach,” “ to arrive at,’ &c. Thus, tiv 
vijoov adixerto, “he came to the island ;” tropevecOat dd6v, 
“ to go upon a journey.” 

4. Every verb may take an accusative of a cognate noun; 
as, KLvdvvevow TovTov Kivdvvor, “ I will encounter this dan- 
ger ;” nobévnoay tabThy aobéverav, “ they were sick with 
this sickness ;” émiséAovtas tacav éripédecar, “ they exer- 
cise all care ;” éAguov roAeuhoouer, % we will wage war.” 

'§. Many verbs, the action of which admits of more than 
one object, without determining the nearest, have in Greek 
a double accusative, namely, the accusative of the person 
and the accusative of the thing. ‘To these belong verbs 
signifying “‘ to do good or evil to one,” “ ta speak good or evil 
of one,” “to ask,” “to demand,” “ to teach,” “to put on-or. 
off,” “to take away,” “ to deprive,” “to conceal,” &c.; as, 





1. The verb Avoutedciv, “to be of use to,” always takes the’ dative ; : 
on the contrary, the occurrence of ddeAciv with the dative is rare, and 
confined to the poets ; as, Soph. Antig. 558, Gore roi¢ Havotow dde- 
Asiv. f Mp eat 


mee 


s 


244 » ACCUSATIVE. 


kaka TOAAG éopye Tpoag, “ he has done many evils to the 
Trojans ;” ayaba elev abrove, “he said good things of 
them ;” elpero GnavTac TOY rratda, “he asked all about his 
son ;" Tove paOnrac edidate owppooivyy, “he taught his 
disciples continence.” 

6. Verbs governing two accusatives in the active retain 
one in the seats namely, the accusative of the thing ; as, 
OKITTPOY TYLGC TE arroovAarat, * he 2s despoiled of his scep- 
tre-and honours ;” érratdeb0n pwovoikjy Kal pytopiKny, “ he 
was taught music and rhetoric.” 

7. When, in addition to the whole object, which receives 
the action ‘of te verb, particular specification is also made 
of a part, in which this action is principally shown, both 
the whole and part stand, especially with the poets, as 
proximate objects in the accusative ; as, py lévta Bade 
ornoc, “he wounded him, as he came on, in the breast ;” tp6- 
oc ITHADE yvia Exaoror, “ trenitteny came upon each one 
in his limbs beneath.” 

- 8. Since the accusative serves always to designate the 
abject upon which an action immediately passes, it fre- 
quently stands also with intransitive verbs and adjectives 
containing a general expression, and indicates the part or 
more definite object to which this expression must be prin- 
cipally referred. This is called the accusative of nearer 
definition, and is to be expressed in English by different 


peated especially by in, as to, with respect to.' Thus, 
“ rov ddxrvAoy diye TovTov, “ I feel a pain in this finger ;? 


rédac aKde ’"AytAAcic, “ Achilles swift as to his feet ;” X0v- 
o0¢ qv hg matpioa, “he was a Syrian as to his native 
country ;" TO dévdpoy TEvThiKovTa TrOdOwY éott Td tnhoc, 
“ the tree is fifty feet in height.” 

9. Time how long is put in the accusative; as, cov xp6- 
“vow dv réAsuoc 4, “ for as long atime as there aa be war ;” 





1. It is generally assumed that kard, or some other eppoulions | is um 
derstood in such constructions, but this is not correct. 


VERBS PASSIVE. , 945 


kal y0éc O& Kat Tpitnv Huépay TO abtd todTo ETPATTOY, 
* they ve this same thing during both fe ad and the day 


as oe 2 
10. Distance and space are put in ‘the accusative ; 5 a8, 
aréyet OKTA TuEep@v ddov ard BabvAdvoc, “ 7 is distant a 


journey of eight oo from Babylon.” 


VERBS PASSIVE. 
1. Verbs of a passive signification are followed in Greek 
by a genitive, governed by 76, a6, éx, mapa, or Tp6¢4 


as, 0 vov¢g UO. olvov ‘Ovapbetperat, “ the apes ip: 2 @. 


impaired by wine ;” GAdat yvewat ad’ Exdotor éréyovro, 
* other opinions were expressed by each.” 

2. The dative, however, is sometimes employed by the 
poets instead of the genitive ; as, Ayadat édaun, “ he was 
subdued by Achilles.” 

3. The dative is very frequently put with the perfect 
passive of verbs, whose perfect active is not much used ; 
as, oars AEREKTOL ii, “ these things have been said by 

” for AéAova TAvTa. 


INFINITIVE. 
1. The infinitive mood is used to express the cause o1 
end of an action ; as, SéAw ddevy, “ I wish to sing.” - 
2. The infinitive, with the neuter of the article prefixed, 
is used as a species of verbal noun ; and very frequently 


the article is thus appended to an entire clause, of’ which 


the infinitive forms a part; as, Td pa *¢ the eases) ; 
TO Every yohpara, “ the having money.” 

3. The infinitive in Greek is governed by adjectives, 
and denotes the respect in which the idea of the adjective 
is to be applied ;' as, kavot téprery. paivorvras, “ they ap- 
pear calculated to delight ;” ov devvdg éore Aéyewv, Gad’ dd- 





1. This is imitated in Latin by the poets; as, idoneus delectare, utilis 
facere. In prose, however, the gerund with a preposition must: be em: 
ployed ; as, idoneus ad delectandum, &c. | 

X 2 


246 _ INFINITIVE. 


bvarog ovyay, “he is not able in speaking, but unable to wee 


— * 
. The infinitive is used with @ore, more ately witha QC, 


to express the consequence.of an event indicated by the 
leading verb ; as, ptAotys6tatoc qv 6 Kipoc, OoTe TdvTa 
broueivar Tov érravetoOar Evexa, “ Cyrus was very ambi- 
tious, so as to endure all things for the sake of being praised.” 

5. The infinitive is frequently used, in short intermediate 
propositions, sometimes with, sometimes without we, to in- 
dicate an aim, or else to qualify what precedes; as, w¢ 
Exoc eimeiv, “so to speak;” amAde eimeiv, “ to speak plain- 
ly 3” dcov éué ert, “as far as I know;” éuoi doxeiv, 
“as appears to me.’ 

6. The nominative, and not the accusative, is put with 
the infinitive whenever the reference is to the same per- 
son that forms the subject of the leading verb;! as, é¢ac- 
Kev eivat Atoc vids, “he said he was the son of Jupiter ;” 
_ &tretoa abtrove eivar Sedc, “I persuaded | them that I was a 

god. 9 

7. The genitive and dative sometimes follow the infini- 
tive by a species of attraction; as, édéovro abtov elvat 
mpo0imov, “ they besought him to be zealous ;” dé¢ pot pav- 
qvat dé, “ grant unto me to appear worthy.” 

8. The infinitive eiva:, with and without an article, is 
put absolutely with aajecurens in adverbs, or prepositions, 
with their case; as, én@v eivat, “ wale ty ;” TO ovpray 
elvat, “ generally ;” 3” 76 wév Thuepov elvat, * to-day at least ;” 
70 Kata TOUT Elvat, “ with respect to this.” 

9. The infinitive is frequently. put for the PEC 
particularly in, the poets ;? as, Yapoa@y voy, Aroundec, eri 
Tpwecor padyeoOat, “ taking courage, now, oh Diomede, fight 





1. The accusative, however, is joined with such infinitives whenever 
emphasis is required; as, Kpoioo¢g évouile éwiTov elvar mavTov oA bit 
ratov, * Cresus thought that he himself was the happiest of all men 
(Herod. 1, 34). 

2. Some understand, but without any necessity, an ellipsis of some 
verb, such as Opa or 86¢, i in such constructions. 


PARTICIPLE. 247 


against the Trojans ;” ddoxev Munfvac opay, “ say that 
thou seest Mycene.” 

10. The infinitive of the present, future, and aorists, but 
more particularly of the future, when preceded by the verb 
véAAw, expresses the future, and answers to the future par- 
ticiple active in Latin with the verb sum; as, wéAAw ypé- 
getv, “I am about -to write” (scripturus sum); peAAjow 
ypabey, * I will be about to write” (scripturus ero); éuéd~ 
Anoa ypaderv, “ I was about to write” (scripturus fut). 


PARTICIPLE. 
1. The participle is put after a verb, and in the nomina- 


tive case, when the reference is to some state as existing 


at the time on the part of the subject, or to some action as 
being performed by it.'. Thus, oida Svnro¢ dv, “I know 
that I am a mortal ;” camer 6 vouog tude BAdnTwr, “the 
law appears to be injuring us ; ” ravoaode aoLKovrTec, * céase 
acting wrongfully.” 


2. If, however, the subject belonging to ‘the participle. 


stands with the principal verb as a proximate object in the 
accusative, the-participle also stands in the accusative ; as, 
of ’AOnvaio: Eravoay abtov otpatnyovrra, “ the Athenians 
caused him to cease being a commander ;” ov¢ adv Opa Ta 
ayaba trovovytac,  whomsoever I apay. ee doing the things 
_ that are good.” © 

3. If the subject belonging to the cna: stands with 
the principal verb as the remote object in the genitive or 
dative, the participle, in like manner, takes the genitive or 
dative ;? as, 7o06unv abtéy olouévw elvat copwtdtar, “ I 
perceived that they fancied themselves very wise ;” ovdérore 





1. This again is a species of attraction, and proceeds, as in other 
cases, from the circumstance of a dependant proposition having no sub- 
ject of its own. 

2. When a reflexive pronoun pra with the verb, the participle can 
be put in either of two cases, according as it is referred to the subject 
contained in the verb or pronoun; as, odvoida EuavT@ cogog dv, * I am 
conscious to myself of being. wise; cavt@ cupgerts cawcater’ “* you 
were conscious to yourself of acting wrongfully.’ en 


: 


248 : PARTICIPLE. 


werenéAqos poe ovyhoavrt, “ T never or repented of having been 
silent.” 

4. The verb “ to be ashamed” takes the participle when 
the action of which one is ashamed is performed ; the in- 
finitive when the action is declined through shame ; as, 
alovivowat movhoac, “ I am ashamed to have done it ;” aio- 
xivonat épecOat, “ I am ashamed to.ask.” | 

5. The ‘verbs “to commence,” “ to begin,” take the parti- 
ciple when the assigned state has already begun to take 
place ; the infinitive when it is just about ‘to take place; as, 
6 xeyiav dpato yevousvoc, “ the winter was come on;” 6 
YElUaV NpxeTo yiyveoOat, “ the winter was beginning to come 


* on” (i. e., it approached, but was not yet arrived). 


6. The verbs “to hear” and “ to learn” take the parti- 
cinle when a fact is adduced which we perceive with our 


*own ears ; the infinitive when something is assigned which 


we hear from the narration of others; as, #xovoa Tov An- 
ucobévn AéyovTa, “ I heard Demosthenes speak ;” dxovw Tov 
sp diliheit4 Aeyerv, “ I hear (i. e,, I am told) that Demosthe- 


| mes says.” 


7. The verb aivesbat ‘takes the participle in the signi- 
fication ‘‘ to be evident,” “to be manifest ;” but the infinitive 
in the signification “to seem,” “to have the appearance ;” 
as, épaiveto kraiety, “ he was just as though he wept 3” &p- 
aiveto KAaiwv, “ he evidently wept.” 

8. Verbs" signifying “to declare,” “to announce,” “to 
show,” take the participle when something is announced or 
shown as a fact; but the infinitive when it is assigned 
that something may oy is said to be. Thus, dmmyyéAAero 
Tlorida:a TroALopkovpévn, “ Potidea was announced to be in a 
state of siege” (when it is certain that it is besieged) ; dr- 
nyyéAAeTo Toridara todtopketobat, “ Potidea was reported 
to be in a state of siege” (when intelligence is given merely 
resting on report). 

9. To some verbs which merely express | subordinate 


PARTICIPLE. 3 249. 


definitions of an action, the Greeks add the participle of the 
verb which expresses the principal action. Such verbs 
are TVYYAVH, AavOdve, POdvw, dtatedéw, &Ke., which, in 
translation, are.sometimes rendered by adverbs.' Thus, 
Erwyov trapéytec, * they chanced to be present ;” &Aabev eb- 
epyetav, “he conferred kindnesses secretly ;” p0dver rowy, 
“he does it before another ;” dvatetédcka pevywr, “I have 
always avoided.” : 

10. The participle in intermediate propositions is either: 
explanatory, and is then expressed by. the relative who, 
which ; or, 2. it denotes relations of time, and is expressed 
by the English particles when, while, after, &c.; or, 3. it 
denotes relations of cause, like the particles because, since, — 
as; or, 4, it expresses condition, like the particles if, al- 
though. Thus, yadendv gore Aéyetv mpd¢g yaorépa, OTa 
ovK Exovoay, “it is adifficult thing to speak to a stomach 
which has no ears ;” ddbvatov ToAAd TexvopuEevoy &vOpwrrov 
TavTa Kad@e totlety, “ it is impossible for a man when try- 
ing many things to do all well ;” ddixet Lwxpadrne ob voui- 
Cwv Beove eivat, “ Socrates violates the laws, because he does 
not think that there are any gods ;” dévdpa piv tunbévra 
taxéwg pverat, “trees, although lopped of their branches, 
quickly grow again.” : 3 

11. A participle and verb are to be translated as two 
verbs with the copulative conjunction; as, T7v olxiay mpt 
dGpevoc anne, * he bought the house and depatted.” 

12. A participle, with a substantive, &c., whose case 
depends on no other word, is put in the genitive absolute ;? 





1. With a participle rvyydvw signifies forte ; AavOdve, clam or impru- 
dens; and ¢0dva, pre. ‘The primitive meaning of ¢6dvw is “ to get be- 
forehand,” “to get the start of.’ ‘The verb tvyyavw isoften used in 
the manner indicated by the rule, when it is impossible to be expresséd 
in translation. For the Greeks, in order to designate the absence of hu- — 
man intention and will, very frequently join it with those verbs also which, 

- without it, express a mere occurrence of nature or of chance 3 as, érvye 
Savor, “ he was dead ;” tvyxavovotv éxovtec, “ they have.” ; 

2. If a longer historical period is to be assigned by this genitive; the 
preposition éz? is usually added ; as, éx? Kipov Bacidedorroc, “ under 
the reign of Cyrus,” i. e., as long as Cyrus reigned. 


ae PARTICIPLE. 


as, éxeivov eitévroc, mévres goiywr, “he having spoken, all 
were silent.” 

13. As the dative also is frequently used in Greck for 
lefinitions of time, and to assign the cause, datives absolute 
also occur, though much more rarely than the genitive ;' 
as, TEpLtovTL “~ éviavT@, “as the year came to a close ;” 
eg hagieen avtoic tho Yadacone, “ they Wind cut off from 
the sea. 

14. Accusatives tibsscliike stand in Greek aéay in those 
cases where, in relating another’s actions, the narrator as- 
signs by conjecture the motive which influenced the agent. 
The participle is then accompanied by the particles oe 
are, Gorep, or O¢ Gv, and the use of the accusative must 
be explained elliptically, as et pba upon a verb “ to 
suppose,” “to believe,” “ to ees siete > which is indicated in 
the particles wc,<&c. ; as, nvyero mpd¢ TodE Veode aTAGE 
Tayaba SwWévat, &¢ Tove Yeovc KdAALOTA eiddrac, brota 
dyaba éoriv, “he prayed the gods simply to give him the 
things that were good, since (in his belief) the gods know 
best what things are good.” 

15. If inan intermediate proposition one of the relations, 
which are otherwise designated by genitives absolute, is to 
be expressed by the participle of an impersonal verb, this 
participle then stands in its absolute form, as a nominative 
absolute. Thus, dvd ti pévere, étov améva; “ why do you 
remain, when it is allowed you to depart?” 6 0’ éud¢ trai¢ 
Badayv, ovdéy déov, katabdAde tov dpKtor, “ but my son, 
having thrown, what hii not to have been done, strikes down 
the bear.” 








1. Care must, however, be taken not to consider passages of ancient 
authors as proofs of this usage, where the dative can by any means te 
explained in a dependant sense. 

2. The nominative absolute is also used in impersonal phrases formed 
with éori and a neuter adjective, where a participial construction enters ; : 
as, Cinaior © év, “it being just ;” adivarov ov, “as it is impossible ” 


PROSODY. 251 


PROSODY: 





1. Prosopy (poowdia), in its common acceptation at the 
present day, treats of the quantity of syllables, or the time 
occupied in pronouncing them. — 

2. In the ancient grammarians, tpoowdia spies also to. 
accent and breathings. | : 

8. The vowels « and o are short by nature ; n “and @ are 
long by nature; and a, t, v, are termed doubtful. 

4, When a vowelis said to be short by nature, the mean- 
ing is, that it is short by its natural pronunciation, being 
.equivalent merely to one short time. On the other hand 
a vowel. long by nature is long by its natural pronunciation, 
being equal to two short times. Thus 7 is equivalent to ee, 
and @ to oo. | 

5. Hence it follows, that the short vowel € has 7 for its 
corresponding long one; and the short vowel 0, in like 
manner, has @ for its long. But in the case of a, ¢, v, there 
is no. distinct mark or letter by which the eye can tell at 
the instant. whether these vowels are long or short, and 
hence they are called doubtful. 

' 6. It must be carefully borne in mind, however, that, iia 
actual usage, every syllable in any particular case always 
has a definite quantity, either long or short; and that, when 
we speak of doubtful syllables, we do not-mean that they 
have anything doubtful in their nature, or wavering between 
long and short as regards the same word ;. but only that they 
have no corresponding long or short marks by we the 
eye can detect their quantity at a glance. , 





1. For a more enlarged view of this subject, consult the author’s s larger 
work on Greck Prosody. 


_— 





fil 


252 POSITION. 


. The ening 3 of syllables is determined by various 
mote: 


rk POSITION. 


1. A short or doubtful vowel before ¢ two consonants or a 
double letter is almost always long; as, oTéAAw, Gua, ay 
TayW, Tparésa, Gudsa, dia. : 

2. These two consonants may wlohe to the same word 
with the vowel; as, éo7repoc, or one of them may belong 
to the same word, and the other to the succeeding word ; 
as, THY d60EY ye, Sed Svyarép Aréc, or both may be found 
at the beginning of the Saas word ; * — “Sunrov 
EovTa. 

3. In scanning the dramatic iveheer, éhe follows? excep- 
tions to this rule of position must be carefully noted. 

__I. A short vowel before a soft mute (7, «, T), or an as- 
ae pirate (¢, x, 0) followed by a liquid, is much rather 
left short than lengthened by the Attic poets. ye 


- -II. A short vowel before a middle mute ((, Ys 6), followed 


by p, is short in the comic re but in tragedy is 
mostly long. 

II. A short vowel before a middle mute, followed by 
any liquid except p, is almost always long. In Eurip- 
ides such syllables are always long; but in A¢schylus, 
Sophocles, and Aristophanes, they are sometimes short. 

iV. The tragic writers occasionally — a vowel short 
before the two liquids uv. 

4. The epic writers, such as Homer, &e., dint avoid 
the shortening of syllables before a mute and liquid, and 
employ it chiefly when the word cannot in any other man- 
r be adapted to the measure. Thus, in the case of such 





forms ; as ZdéxvvOoc, Zédeva, Xndpavdpoc, oKnérapvoy, &e., a 


preceding short vowel in another word remains short, sis 
withstanding the double consonant Z ee the two mutes OK 
following immediately after. 


Il. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 


1. One vowel before another or before a dipkthong i is 
generally short, unless lengthened by poetic license or 
some other peculiar cause ; as, dyAdéc, Hépioc. 

2. But the Greek poets, especially the epic, often lengthen 
vowels, even when another follows, by the aid of the arsis ; 
and this takes place not only in doubtful vowels, but also 
in those which are naturally short. | 

3. By arsis, which is called by some cesura, is meant the 
stress of the voice that is brought to bear upon a particular 
syllable in each foot during the reciting of a line. In the 
dactyl it falls on the first syllable; in the iambus on the 
last ; and in the trochee again on the first; its place being 
regulated by the long syllable. - ° 


4. The spondee leaves the place of the arsis undeter- a 


verse in which the spondee is employed. Thus, in dactylic 
and trochaic measure, the arsis falls on the first syllable of 
the Vege but in iambic on the last. 

. The following are instances of lengthening by arsis. 
pee Gtsec (Od. 9, 425) ; kara Aumapny (Il. 6, 64) ; O& pe- 
Ainv (Il. 20, 322), &c. 

6. In the epic writers, long vowels and diphthongs are 
mostly short at the end of words when the next word be 
gins with a _vowel;' as, quévm év BévOecorv (Il. 1, 358) 
dude ouac (Ib. 23) ; dexyOat arorva (Ib. 57). 

7. On the contrary, the long vowel retains its natural 


mined ;.and this becomes settled only by the nature offs 
ty 





1. The principle on which this depends is easily explained. The 7. 


ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER. 253 © 


a: 
—- 


in 7uévn, for example, is equal to ez, and one of these epsilons bap aA 


supposed to be elided before the initial vowel of the following word, 1 
other epsilon remains, of course, short by nature. In other words, 
firal voWel of 7uévn loses, as it were, a portion of its natural length 2 
the sinking of the voice and by the vowel immediately following it. Se 
the w in dude is equivalent to two omicrons, one of which it loses be- 
fore the following vowel, while the other remains short. In like man- 
ner, the diphthong az in deyAaz 3 supposed to lose a vowel. 


ite 


ae 4 


254 | DIALECT. = 


measure when it falls in the arsis of the foot. The follow- 
ing Homeric verse contains examples of both kinds.! 
‘Huerépo évt otxi, ev "Apyet, ryA602 wérpn¢. (Il. 1, 30.) 


Ill. CONTRACTION. 

1. All contracted syllables are long; as, tpd¢ for lepdc ; 
ddic for dptec, &c: 

2. T'wo vowels forming two syllables are ge ie con- 
tracted into one in poetry ; as in ypvoéw (Il. 1, 15), where 
ew forms a single syllable. This is frequent in the dra- 
Matic writers, where the syllables are in different words, 
- and is called synizesis ; as, 7) eidévac (Hippol. 1331), where 
the 7 and ez areeto be pronounced as one syllable; 7 ev- 
yévetav (Eurip. Electr. 1104). i 


| IV. DIALECT. 

1. The Doric a is long; as, dud, yvvd, Alveia. And 
so is the a in the uncontracted form ao of the Greene as, 
’"Atpeidao. 

2. The Molic a is sbiort as, ViUba, ToLnTa, KopATa. 

3. In the Ionic dialect a is generally short in the penult 
of the perfect tenses, such as yeyda ; and always short in 
the third person plural of the passive in @tat and Gro ; as, 
Edita, dedunaro. 

4, The Ionic third person plural i in aot is — long ; 
as, dot, TLBeaor. 

5. The Ionic writers double ‘the o and some other con- 
sonants at pleasure ; a license which the Attic poets never 





1. Here, after one of the vowels has been supposed to be elided, and 
a single short vowel remains, this latter, being in the arsis of the ‘foot, 
receives the stress of the voice, and becomes long again. Thus, in the 
- foot p& Evi, the syllable py is in the arsis, and hence, though one of the 
omicrons composing the omega is supposed to be cut off before the ini- 
tial vowel of évi, and only a single omicron remains; that | omicron is nev- 
ertheless lengthened by the stress of the voice falling upon it.” On the 
other hand, in the foot oi &v, the omega is not in the arsis, and hence, 
after this vowel has lost one of its component omicrons before the next 
word, there is no stress of the voice ‘=pon the other oun and there- 
fore it remains short. 


COMPOSITION. — 255 


used, either in tragedy or comedy. ‘Thus, in Homer, we 
have or7Gecory for orjOeowv ; Ommdrepog for OméTEpos, &e. — 


V. DERIVATION. 

1. Derivatives for the- most. part follow the quantity of 
the words from which they are derived ; as, vixdw from 
_ vikn; tipadw from Tih. ; 

2. But many derivatives from verbs differ in quantity 
from the present tenses of these verbs, as being immediate- 
ly formed from the perfect passive, with a short penult. 
Thus, xpitye and xpiotc, though the verb be kpivw, because 
they are immediately formed from Kéxpitas, Kéxptoat.' 


‘VI. COMPOSITION. 


1. Compound words generally follow the quantity of their 
primitives ; as, dtiwo¢ from tivq ; pvordpwv from pie, gen. 
uvoc and Tapwv. 3 

2. The privative a is commonly short; as, depyoc, déKwv, 
aSvuoc, but aBdvaroc and Gkdyato¢g are excepted, and, on 
account of the number of short syllables that follow, and 
which would make the words otherwise difficult to employ 
in verse, have the initial a always long. 

3. The particles da, a, apt, ept, and dv¢, are short; as, 
ddpovoc, Ca0e0c, GpideixeToc, Epixvdnc, dvoane. 


VII. INCREASE OF NOUNS. 


1. A in the increment of nouns is generally short; as, 
TQUA, ATOS ; peas. ato¢ ; véxtap, apo ; péday, aVOG, &e. 


Pecopiioh si 


1. All increments in avog are long except Tddavog and 


oe 
peddvos ; - as, Teray, Gvoc ; Ilay, Gvoc. hin 





1. In the same way, dvarpiba, from subipcbow, the second aorist of 
diatpibw ; and mapapix7, from rapépixor, the second aorist of mapa- 


pox. 


256 INCREASE OF NOUNS. 


2. Allincrements in axoc, from nominatives in af pure, are 
long; as, olaé, axoc ; ptak, axoc; PAvak, dxoc, &e. 
3. A is long in the dative plural of nouns, &c., that. have 

a long penult in the genitive singular; as, yiyac, av- 
Toc, do; Topac, avtoc, dot, &c. But those that are 
syncopated in the singular have the a short; as, dv- 

dpao., tatpaot, &c. | 

2. I is short in the increment of neuter nouns ; as, pert, 
‘toc; and in masculines and feminines which have the 
genitive in toc, tdo¢g, or LTO¢ ; as, TOALC, Loc ; &ptc, toe , 
xapic, iroc. But drpic, Badrbic, Kapic, kvnuis, obpayic, and 
several- others, are. excepted. 

3. Lis long in the increment of masculine and feminine 
nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; as, 
deAdic or deAdiv, tvoc ; axtic or aKriy, tvoc. 

4. I is also long. in the increment of menosyllables : as, 
Viv, Vivoc ; ic, voc; Aic, AtTéc;. excepting, however, Tic, 
tivoc; and Aic, Atéc. 

5. Lis also long in nouns.in ce, ZOoc ; ‘ inp, LTO ; i, Lyo¢ ; 
and vd, ixoc; as, Opvic, 100g; TéTTLg, Lyoc ; pdoreé, tyo¢ 
(“a lash”); doiviE, ixoc. Homer, however, has Opiixes 
always short. % | 

6. But ¢ is generally short in nouns in «1, t6o¢; and 2é, 
ivoc ; as, yépvir, toc; Spté, tpixoc; wdortE, Lxoc, “a gum.” 

7. Y is short in the increment of oe in vo, 
vos ; as, Opvc, dpvoc ; mug, wvdc. 

8, Y is also short in the increment of neuters in w; as, 
daxpv, % voc ; and in the increment of masculines and faipi- 
nines in ve and wp; as, véxve, voc; Ave, lrvog ; lyOvc, 
iyGtvo¢ ; and also in the neuter noun wip, Tvpdg. But da- 
vc, b06¢.and K@pi¢, Oc, must be excepted. 

9 Y is generally short in the increment.of nouns in vé 
and vy; as, dvvé, vyoc ; XddAvy, vboc; except doidvé, 
vKog ; KOKKVE, VYOG; KAPVs, VKOG; KAVE, KOC; yb, DrrOC ; 
yet, voc ; while Bé6pvé has either dxog or vKoc. 


— 


INCREASE OF VERBS. 257 


10. Nouns of two terminations, in v¢ and vy, have v long 
in the increment; as, Pdpxve, or hopKvy, Dvoc. 


VU. INCREASE OF VERBS. 

1. The quantity of the penult in the present and imper- 
fect remains the same through all the voices and moods; as, 
Kpive, Expivov, Kptve, Kplvouu, Kplvw, KplvELy, KplywyY, Kpi- 
vowat, éxplvdouny, Kptvov, &e. 

2. Most tenses have the same quantity in the penult as 
those from which they are formed ; as, €ruTov, TUNG, ETv- 
THY, TUTHOOpat, TETUTA, ETETUTELY. 7 

3. Verbs in df, iw, and #¢w,.are made short in the fu- 
ture; as, dp7dl@, dow; vouiSw, tow; KAbow, KAvow. 

4, Verbs in dw, where dw is preceded by a vowel, and 
all verbs in pda, have the penult of the future long; as, édo, 
‘dow; dpdw, Gow; dpdw, dow. | 

5. Verbs in dw, when preceded by a consonant other 
than p, have the penult of the future short ; as, saerse GOW ; 
YEAd@, dow. | 

6. Liquid verbs, or those siglingls In A@, LW, VO, Pw, 
shorten the penult of the future, but in the first aorist active 


they invariably take either a long vowel or a diphthong; as, » 


OGAAW, BEAD, EOnAa; TEAAW, TEAG, ETELAG; Haivw, HéVG, 
Ednva ; Sapourer dapOvve, &ddpOova. 

7. Verbs in éw, not proceeding from roots in ¢@, are made 
long in the future; as, KvAiw, tow; Koviw,tow. But éo0iw 
has the ¢ everywhere short. 

8. Dissyllabic verbs in vw are for the most part long in 
the future and aorists ; as, déw, ddow, tddoa ; Tpbw, ae, 
Etpvoa. Except rriw, 1Tv0w, érTioa ; KvW, KVOW, Exdaa ; 
and one or two others. 

9. Polysyllabic verbs in @, in the same snail are for 
the most part long in the penult of the future and aorist; as, 
ioxyiw, loydow, loyioa; Saxpia, daxpvae, édakpvoa. 

ENG & 


~ 


258 _ INCREASE OF VERBS. 


10. But polysyllables in tw are for the most part short ; 
as, GVDW, GVvOW ; dpvw, dptow ; ddvw, ddiow. 

11. Verbs in vw, which have lengthened forms in vps, 
for the most part sherten the doubtful vowel ; as, decevva, 
édeixviov ; puyvow, éuiyviov. The verbs ddw and die 
are not exceptions to this rule, since they do not furnish 
complete forms in vt, but only in the second aorist. 

12. Polysyllables in ve have the v everywhere short, 
except in the singular number of the present tense active, 
and the third person plural of the same tense and voice ; as, 
Cevyvopl, Meds ; but ceiryvipuen, ed ing Cevyvvurvat, 
Se.) * 

13. On the sethiet hand, dissyllables in vues have the v 
everywhere long ; as, dv&, dvvat, édvre, &c. 3 

- 14. The penult of the second future and second aorist 
is always short; as, ddd, AGOGO, KpvbG, Aina ; Edapor, 
éAGOov, Expvbor, EAitrov. With the single exception of the 
verb 7zAjoow, which, in the epic dialect, retains the long 
vowel in the penult; as, érAjyor, énAnyny. 

15. The third person plural in aoz, and the feminine par- 
ticiple in aoa, are always long ; as, AeAoimdaor, Kexpddaor, 
iorador; Tiwpdaoa, yparbaca, &c. 

16. The augment, which, in verbs beginning with v or ¢, 
consists merely in lengtheriing this. vowel, makes, of course, 
the initial syllable of the historical tenses long ; as, nerevo, 
cKETEVOY, LKETEVOR. 

17. The doubtful vowel in the penult of the partes: ac- 
tive strictly follows the measure of the root in the present. 
Hence the middle syllable is short in most forms which 
have a in the present; as, ypddw, yéypada ; but it fluctu- 
ates in those with z and v; as, Tpi6w, Tétpida, but pinta, 
Epipipa ; and again, KUTTW, KeKvHa; but KpUTTH, KEKpdoa. 

18. The perfect middle, with the exception of those which 
have @ inthe root, and change it into.o (as Tpédw, Etpdgor, 
rétpooba), has usually a long vewel in the penult ; as, dyw, - 


is 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 259 


“TI break,” perfect middle ééya. So dvddvw, %da; xpd- 
6a, Kéxpaya ; pryéw, tppiya; tpigw, Tétpiya; dpicow, ré- 
dpixa, &c. But 7téppada and some others are found short, 
and, in old forms, the first vowel was shortened by position 
after rejecting the intermediate consonant; as, Bé6da, ye- 
yaa, dela, tedva. 

19. Perfects with what is called the Attic reduplication 
have usually, in polysyllabic verbs, a short vowel in the pe- 
nult ; as, dAeidw, dAnAiba; dpboow, dpdépixa, &c. Still, 
however, in Ionic poets, forms of this kind are occasionally 
lengthened; as, eiAjAovOa, dreuvquixe (Il. 22, 491). 

20. When a is inserted in the third person plural of the 
perfect or pluperfect, or of the optative, it is always short ; 
as, dpwpéyato, Kekdidrat, meOoldro, &e. 

21. The reduplication before the root of verbs in put is 
short; as, THOnut, didau. 

22. In verbs in pz the ais always short; as, lordror, 
lordwev, &e. Except in the third person plural in Got, 
and in the masculine and feminine participles ; as, loraot, 
iotdc, iordoa. 


IX. DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 
As a general rule, it may be laid down that a doubtful 
vowel in the penult of Greek words is generally short. 
Some particular exceptions, however, will here be noted.! 


I.-Long ain the penult. 

1. Indf#p and compounds ; IIrodeudaic, Avkdwy, Mayaor, 
Tlooerdawy, and the like; Addc and derivatives ; vdéc, 
até, and compounds ; and in verbs in a0, when dw is 
preceded by an « or the letter p; as, aw, wepaw, dpadw 
with their compounds. Still, however, there are sev- 
eral exceptions; as, KuKdW, TLLdw, EpvOptaw, perdtaw, 
arya, orwTaw, &c., in which dw is not preceded by 
an € or the letter p. | 





eam 


1. These exceptions are noted more fully in the larger Prosody. 





% 
260 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 


2. In‘dxavw and compounds. So, also, in xuyavw and 
@0ave® with Homer and the epic poets, but xuyava 
and ¢0avw in the Attic tragic writers’ 

3. In all derivatives from verbs'in éw pure and pdo ; as, 
Sedpa, Sedowc, Searoc ; pape, dpdorc, dparée ; lava, 
idouc, iatpoc, &c. 

4, In names of nations and proper names; as, ’Aovadtne, 
Xraptiadtnc, Teyeatng. And also in the feminines 
formed from them; as, ’Aovdtec, Midedtic. Add like- 
wise names of rivers, mouritains, and islands; as, Ev- 
dpatnc, Nidatnc, Aevedtyc, &c. But forms of this 
kind proceeding from short roots have the short vowel ; 
as, AaAparne, Tadadrne, &c. 


I. Long t an the penult. 


1. I in the penultimate is long in Homeric feminines, 

such as depyin, d0vpin, dmtorin, &c., where the Attics 
have dpyia, aOvupia, dmioria, &c. But dvia and xa- 
iia are long in both Homeric and Attic Greek, the 
Homeric form being dvin and xadin. Another term, 
kovia (Hom. xovin), has the penult common in Ho- 
meric Greek, but in the singular more frequently long, 
in the plural always short. In the tragic writers it oc- 
curs thrice, and each time with the penult short. 

2. I is long in proper. names in cwv, which shorten the 
vowel in the genitive; as, *“Audiwy, Aodiwy, Tavdiwy, 
gen. ILavdiovoc. On the contrary, those remain short 
which take the long vowel in the genitive ; as, Bovo- 
Aiwy, "Hetiwy, Oivoriwv, gen. Olvoriwvoc. 

3. Comparatives in ‘wy have the « long in Attic, but short 
elsewhere; as, yAvkiwyv, kakiwv, &e. 

4. Lis long in the penult of verbs in éw, not proceeding 
from roots in ¢@; as, d0iw, ypiw, mpiw, KvAiw, &e. 
But those which had originally a ¢ in the root are 
short; as, dti@, waoTiw, to which add éo6iw and diw, 
though not from such roots : 


A® - 
aut 


DOUBTFUL VOWEL 1N THE PENULT. 261 


5. I is long in the penult of verbs in (vw ; as, KAivw, Kpi- 
vw, tive, Opivw, &c. Except tivw and dive, which 
are long in Homer, but short in Attic. 

6. I is long in nouns in é7m, irn¢, itig 3 as, “Adpodirn, 
"Apgitpitn, SOwpartitic, toAtrys, orAirng, &e. Ex- 
cept, however, «pitjc¢, and. other derivatives from the 
perfect passive with a short penult. 


Ill. Long v in the penult. 


1. Y is common in the penult of verbs in dw. Some, 
however, occur more frequently with the long penult ; 
as, loydw, daxpiw, ciw, Yiw, Ad; others, again, are 
found more commonly with the short penult; as, Gove, 
apvw, dpTvo, detkvow, TANODW, &c. 

2. Y is long in most verbals in vya, from verbs in vw ; 
as, Viva, Koa, Adpa, dpToua, unvipa ; except, how- 
ever, épvpa, Adu, poua, “q@ river,” &c., which are 
invariably short. 3 

3. TY is long in Bvyuoe, “ animus,” and its eompounds, 
aOvpoc, pabopoc, &c. But dipoc, “ thymus,” has the 
penult short. 

4. ¥ is long in the plural cases of wm pronoun OV; as, 
DuEiC, BUOV, Duiv, duac. 

5. Y is long in verbs in vw; as, evOvvw, dTpvywW, TAD- 
vw, &c., but not in the future; as, evOiva, étpiive. 
' Wher, however, they terminate in é@, the v is short ; 
as, TADVEW. 3 , 

6. YT is long im all verbs in Upe 5 ‘as, dopo, CPW, KVP), 
d0ipw, &e. But, when vpw becomes vpéo, the v is 
short ; as, Kvpé@, wapTipéw, &c. 

7. Y before o is almost always long; as, , Moviaoe, 
Xpiooc, "Audpvooc, Kaybvone, &c. - Except verbals 
in voc; as, Avoic, dvioic, &Ke.- 

8. Y is long in derivatives in orp, DTG, and UTIC; aS, 
UnVOTHP, ENvoTne, TpecbvTyc, TpEabUTIC : 


262 | FINAL SYLLABLES. 


9. Y is long in adjectives in tro¢ derived from long 
verbal roots in @ ; as, oh MERE ToAvddKpvTOS, aT- 
potoc, &c. 

10. Y is long in verbs in vy@; as, Bprxe, TPOX, and. 
their compounds. : 

11. Y is long in the following words ; Woyn, wWivxoc, 


Epoxies, katapoya &e. 


X. DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULTIMATE. 


_ The doubtful vowels before the penultimate are generally 
short. ‘The exceptions to this rule are, however, many in 
number, and are best learned from a prosodial lexicon.' 


XI. FINAL SYLLABLES. 
I. Final a, av, ap, and ac. 
I, Final @ is short; as, tpdmecd, iva, inr6rd, rérvpa. 


‘ Exceptions. i 

1. But a@ pure is long; as, ’AOfvaa, gurla, OLKOEa; eX- 
cept verbals in toa; as, WadAtpid; and derivatives 
from adjectives in 7¢; as, dAjOed; and also iéperd, 
Kodera, BaciAed (“a queen”); but Baorreia (“a king- 
dom”) and BaotAcia (st). sam, a brat have the final 
vowel long. 

2. The Doric a for. n is long; as, bdut, Alvelas and 
also the Doric genitive in a from nominatives in a¢ and 
no; as, "Avvibac, a; ’Atpeidne, G 

3. Words in da and 8a have the a long; as, BaoidAivdd, 
kinda, Xupaida, except dKav0d and Aba. © 

4. Words ending in pa, not preceded by a diphthong ; 
as, Kapa, THPA, vapa, except GyKipa, yépipa, bADpa, 
Képkopa, and the perfect-midale of verbs in pw; as, 
OvéepOopa, Trétropa. F 

5. Words ending in pa, with a consonant preceding ; as, 





1. They are given in full in the larger Prosody. 


FINAL SYLLABLES; ™ 263 


aypa, nétpa, Gnéorpa ; except apadpa, oKxodorrévdpa, 
Tavdypda. 

_ 6. All feminines adjectives hou masculines in oc, as, 
Orkaiad ; except did, réTd, la, and pid. 

7. Duals in a, as povod; and vocatives from nouns in 
ac; as, Alveid; or poetical vocatives of the third de 
clension ; as, Aaodéna, TloAvddpa. | 

8. The accusative in ea, from the genitive (third declen-- 
sion) in ewe ; as, IInAéa, from IInAéwe ; BaordAéa, from 
Baotréwe ; but, in Homeric Greek, IInAna, from I7- 
Ajoc ; BaoraAnd, from BaotAjoc. 

9. Nouns in ééa, from verbs in ev; as, Tpodytela, dov- 
Asia 


II. Final av is short ; as, dV, TaUTaY, Alay, pédayv, TrOLy~ 
oa, Eruar. 


Exceptions. 


1. Masculines in ay are long ; as, Titaév, malay. 

2. The neuter adjective may; and hence the Attics ap. 

* pear to have taken occasion to lengthen here and there 
the forms compounded with it ; as, drav, énindy, rap- 
anav. But raundv and mpérdy are probably every- 
where decidedly short. ’ 

3. Adverbs in av ; as, Alay, yay, répav. On the con- 
trary, bray and érérday follow the quantity of the sim- 

| ple av. 

4. Accusatives of the first dotlcnsioi from a long nom- 
inative ; as, @cAiay, from dtAia; Aiveiay, from Aiveidac. 
But the accusative in ay from a short nominative is 
short; as, torvidy, from trorvid ; tpdmecav, from tpd- | 
TEC. ‘ : 

5. The Doric genitive plural of the first daclaukicht in 
av, formed by contraction, is likewise always long; 
as, pediayv, vuuday, for pedi@yv, vuppav. So, also, 


264... .* | FINAL SYLLABLES. : 


—_ 


¥ 


we 


~ * 


_ the Doric forms derived from those in 4, or produced 
by contraction ; as, rronsiiy,  Tocesdar, Seni | 


wt 
Ill. Final ap is short ; as, évap, véKrip, paiip. 


Exceptions, 


Jf Ménosyllatites | in ap are long ; as, Kap, bap. 

2. The adverb ydp is properly short ; but. before of and 
similar words it very often occurs long in epic lan- 
guage, through the force of the following breathing. 


IV. Final ac is long ; as, Alveiac, rac, inde, ride, Tb- 


wdc, nas. 


Exceptions. 
1. Words of the third declension, not Pa the genitive 
in avTog ; as, wéAdc, péydc, Adurdc, céAdc, Képac, sc 
\But 7@Ad¢ has the final syllable long. 


2. The accusative plural of nouns and participles of the 


“ , 


ic. 


-~ 


third déelension ; as, Titadvac, rimrovrdc, roipevdc, 
dpévac; &c. (but BaotAéac, from Baordéa). The accu- 
sative plural of the first declension, on the other hand, 
- is always long. | 
3. Adverbs in ac are short ; as, tbat, atpéudae, ayKac. 
4. Acis shortin the second person of the different tenses 
which toraminate therein ; as, éreyéac, rey bests, oldae, 
— RéXowrraic, népukac. 
5. By a licetise of the Doric dialect, forms in ac, other- 
wise long,: are: occasionally shortened, and that, too, 
even in accusatives plural of the first declension ; as, 
poipac ah 2, 160); aitda¢ (Id. 3, 2) ; eae 
=. '4,-29).° 
II. Final t, wv, tad lc. . 
I. Final ¢ is short; as, ii, rl, wéAt, réwrovot, riOnut, 


FINAL SYLLABLES. *+ 7265 


Exceptions. 
!. But the abridged form xpi (for Kpt@n) is long, togethers 
with the names of letters in z; as, 2, 77, &c. 
, 2. The paragogic 4, added by the Attic comic poets and 


orators to certain pronouns and adverbs, is likewise - 


long ; as, ovTool, vvvt, ovTwot, &c. “So the similar z 
in the words 607, tavti, devpt, &c. 

3. Adverbs ending in 1, and formed from nouns, have the 
é either long or short, but more commonly short; such 
as duoy Gi, dpayntt, ravdnul, avo, drovnrt, &c 
But those which refer to nations have. the s always 
short; as, LxvOioTi, ’Apyodrott, Bapbapiori, Ke. 


I}. Final vy is short; as, tvmtTovoiv, Epiv, maAiv, TOATY, 
srpiv, viv, opiv. 
| Exceptions. 

1. Fimal iv, making Zvo¢ in the gonitive, is long, We Pry 
piv, intiv. , re 
2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; : 

as, deAdiy (otherwise dsAdic), dxrty, ply, ty, Atv. 


3. The datives plural jyiv and dyiv, though in several’ » 


instances Sophocles makes quiv and tpi, and the epic 
dialect has also dupiv, vppty. | ae 

Ill. Final t¢ is short ; as, di¢, tpic, méAtc, rupavvic, &e. 
: Exceptions. . 

1. Monosyllabic nouns, and those which have two ter- 
minations for the nominative ; as, l¢, Alc, pic, ass d&A- 
gic, aKTtc. 

2. Dissyllables which make the pdsiult of the pele 
long; as, dtbic, BaAbic, KAnic, kynuic, KpnTtc, bpvic, &e. 

3. Polysyllables with two short syllables before the last; 


as, Barpayic, kahaytc, Kavovic, TAoKapte padavic, but 


not Baotric, ixetic. 


4. Adjectives in tc, compounded from long forms, are like- 


Z, > 


266 FINAL SYLLABLES. 


wise long in the final syllable ; as, wt Fei Babe. 
mes &e. 


iil. Final Vv, VY, Up, and ve. 
I. Final vis short ; as, ov, yovv, yAvki;, Sénpi, & aorTv. 


Exceptions. 


1. The third person singular of the imperfect and second 
aorist of verbs in vt; as 200, &0; also the second 
person of the. imperative in one of its forms ; as, det- 
KVD, Ouvd. 

2. The names of the letters [00, vv, and fictitious words ; ; 
as, v, yrd. 


II. Final vy is short ; as, ovr, roan, paddy, Sevyvur. 


| Exceptions. 


1. The accusative of nouns which have ve in the nom- 
inative ; as, (Avy, lyOdv, loyvy, ddpdy, pov. 

2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ; 
as, Popov (otherwise PopKve) ; or es in the genitive: 
as LOCOvY. t 

_ 3. The first person singular of the imperfect and the sec- 
ond aorist of verbs in wuz ; as, Epov, édvv, edeixvir, 
élevyvov. 

4. Nov, “ now,” is long; but vd, the enclitic, is for the 
most part.short. It is long, however, on several oc- 
casions in tragedy, and always long in comedy.’ 


Ill. Final vp is long ; as, wip, waptvp. Yet, in the ob- 
lique cases, these make tripoc¢, wip; wapTvpoc, udpript. 
IV.: Final ve is short; as, names KOpvs, TXVC, earatic, 
ht aie ra 
A Exceptions. 
“1. Nouns in v¢, which have voc in the genitive; as, dy- 
Ade, LAde, vyOde, vndve, oppve, TANDUC. 





1. Ellendt, however, Lex. SL V5 maintains that vo enclitic is 
never long. 


2 


oo ek 


METRE. 267 


2. Nouns which have two terminations in the nominative; 
- as, Pdpkvc. 
3. Monosyllables ; as, pve, ove. 


4, Terminations of verbs in vit; as, delkvi¢g (second 


person singular present), devxvv¢ (participle), édetx- 
vic, &c. 


OF FEET. 


I. A foot, in metre, is composed of two or more syllables, and 1s 


either simple or compound. 


II. Of the simple feet four are of two, and eight of three syllables. 
1 Ais here are sixteen A compound feet, each of four syllables. _ 


Eight of three 
syllables 


Four of 2 
syllables 


Sixteen of four svilables, 





Pyrrhich .. s..- 


Spondee 
Iambus . 
Trochee 


Tribrach 


Molossus . . 


Dactyh <> coysis 
Anapest . . 
Bacchius ; 
Antibacchius % 
Amphibrach . . 
Amphimacer . 


4 Choriambus. 3 


Antispast 

Tonic a majore 
Ionic a minore 
Peon primus . 
Peon secundus 
Peon tertius 
Peon quarttus . 


Epitritus primus . 
Epitritus secundus 
Epitritus tertius . 
Epitritus quartus . 
Proceleusmaticus . 


Dispondzus 
Diiambus 


|. Ditrocheus 


Dochmius . 


Smmpete Feet. 


two short syllables . . as, d8d¢. 
two long syllables . . “ iy. 
one short and one long “ 8a. 

one long and one short “ odud. 


three short 2. . 2. m6AEUSe. 
three long.  edyOAj. 
one long. and two. short  oaudra. 
two short and one long“ Paotrevc. 


. one short and two long  ‘“* dvaocer. 
. ‘two long and one short =“ 
. one long between two short.“ SaAaood. 
. one short between two long ‘* déordrig 


pavredua. 


Compounp Fret. 


Trochee and Iambus . cddpictv7. 
Tambus and ‘Trochee . “ dudpriud. 
Spondee and Pytrhich. “ Kdouyrdpd. 


_ Pyrrhich and Spondee . “ wAdvéxrije. 


Trochee and Pyrrhich . “* GorpdAdyoe. 


: Jambus and Pyrrhich . “ dyvdaéidc. 


Pyrrhich and ‘Trochee . “ dvddjii. 
Pyrrhich and Iambus . -“ d8d5yévijc. 
Iambus and Spondee .  “ Gudpraa7. 
Trochee and Spondee'. ‘* dydpdddvTie. 
Spondee and Iambus . “ edpiabevijc. 
Spondee and Trochee'. “ A@bjTIpa. 
Two Pyrrhichs . . .  “ rdARuloe. 
Two Spondees . . .. ‘ ovvdodvAcdad. 


~ Twolambi . . . . “ &ttordrie. 


Two Trochees_ , ey dvorixnud. 


‘ Antispast and long syllable “ Gudprijudrav 


EL a 
ae 


268 DACTYLIC MEASURE. | 


METRE. 


1. Merre, in its general sense, means an arrangement of syllables 
and feet in verse, according to certain rules ; and in this sense it applies 


"not ‘only to an entire verse, but to a part of a verse, or any number of 


verses. 

2. But a metre, in a specific sense, Means a combination of two feet, 
and sometimes one foot only. 

3. There are-nine principal metres; viz., 1. ] ambic ; 2. Trochaic ; 
3. Anapastic ; 4. Dactylic ; 5. Choriambic ; 6. ‘Antispastic ; 7. Ionic a 
majore ; 8. Ionic a minore; 9. Peonic. 

4. These names are derived from the feet which prevail in hen. 
Each species of verse would seem originally to have been composed of 
those feet solely from which it derives its name; and other feet, equal in 
time, were not <4mitted until afterward, and then cd under certain re- 
strictions. 

5. It must be carefully noted, that two feet make a metre in the iam- 
bic, trochaic, and anapestic measures, but that one foot constitutes a 
metre in all the rest. : 

6. When a verse consists of one metre it is called monometer ; when 
it has two metres, dimeter; three metres, trimeter; four, tetrameter ; 
five, pentameter ; six, hexameter ; seven, heptameter. 

7. From what has just been remarked, it follows that, in iambic, tro- 
chaic, and anapestic verse, a monometer consists of two feet ; a dimeter 
of four; a trimeter of six, &c.; whereas, in all other kinds of verse, a 
monometer consists of one foot, a dimeter of two, a trimeter of three, &c. 

8. Verses are also denominated acatalectic when complete ; catalectic 


when they want a syllable at the end ; brachycatalectic when they want — 


two syllables at the end ; hypercatalectic when they have a syllable over 
at the end; and acephalous when they want a syllable at the beginning. 

9. The last syllable of a verse is common, esceyt in anapestic and 
greater tenis measure. 


DACTYLIC MEASURE.! : 


1. Dactylic hexameter, or heroic verse, is composed of six feet, the 
last of which must be a spondee, while the fifth is almost always a dac- 
tyl.. The first four may be either aed or bias de at the option o/ 
the poet. ‘Thus, 

yaldv du | od Kat | xdyTiv Gp | Gpét | & ovpavg | bey rvvé. 


2. Sometimes, in a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, the 





‘1 Amore enlarged view of the Greek metres is given in the author's Greek Prosody 


——————. a 2 


IAMBIC MEASURE. 269 


spondee takes the place of the dactyl in the fifth foot, and the line is 
then called a spondaic one ; as, 


G Ayr | Ad KEE ] at wé At | t giA# | wvOR | cdoBai. 


3. A short syllable in the beginning of a foot is often made long in 
epic poetry. The reasonis, that, as the first syllable of the foot was-pro- 
nounced with the rising inflection of the voice in heroic verse, so by pro 
nouncing it, when short, with a sharper tone, it was. brought nearer ir 
sound toa long syllable, by which the deficiency in time was scarcely 
perceived. The following examples show a short exsural syllable made 
long at the beginning of a foot : 

vavaAoxov | é¢ Aiwev | & «al | tic Sede | myeuo | vevér. 
div’ Gyxoc | GtAn | tov 6 W dp | a Tpo | otv peve | aivor. 


IJ. PENTAMETER. 


1. This species of verse consists of two equal er each contain- 
ing two feet followed by a long syllable. 

2. The first two feet may be either dactyls or spondees, then comes 
a long syllable, to which succeed two dactyls, followed by another long 
syllable. Thus, | 


Eprvaa. | de Keir | az || rate EAL | Kdvia | oF. 
TOAUG | Ev 0 Epica | ai || oxdré¢ & | Addve | civ. 


3. The pause always takes place after the long syllable i in the middle 
of the verse, marked by the double line in the two examples just given. 

4, Another, but less correct! mode of scanning pentameters is as fol 
lows : the first and second feet either a dactyl or spondee, the third al- 
ways a spondee, the fourth and fifth anapests ; as, 


odTé x50 | Gv dper | He od | re waAaic | pdotvijc. ) 


5. A dactylic hexameter and pentameter, | alternately succeeding each 
other, form what is called elegiac verse. Thus,, 


Kpqvat | at Aiba | déc, ti xe | Gedydré ; | rod Tdcdy | dddp ; 
; kn 


4 


Tig PAE | Eva | od¢ || EobEEV | GEAT | 0d; 


II. IAMBIC MEASURE.! 


_ 1, The only species of iambic verse which we will here consider is 
the trimeter acatalectic, called.also senarius, from its containing siz feet. 
2. In the trimeter the iambus is admitted into any one of the six 

places ; and, when all the feet are thus iambi, the verse is called a pure 

iambic one. | 





1. Consult a a Prosedy. 





~ 


270 | ANAPZSTIC MEASURE. 


3. A pure iambic line, however, is not of so frequent occurrence 
among the tragic writers as what is called a mzred one, namely, where 
other feet are admitted besides the iambus. 

4, The reason why other feet were allowed to enter appears to have 
been, not only to lessen the difficulty of composing, but in order to re- 
‘move the monotonous-and unpleasing effect of a succession of iambi, 
and also to impart more dignity and elevation to the style. 

5. The feet-admissible into this measure, besides the iambus, are the 
spondee, dactyl, anapest, and tribrach. The rules for their admission 
are as follows : | 

1. The spondee is allowed to enter into the uneven ave namely, 
the first, third, and fifth, and. into no other. 

2. The dackyls is admitted into the first and third places only. 

3. The anapast is admitted into the first place alone, except in the 
case of a proper name, when it may come.into any place but tha 
last, provided the anapzst be all contained within the proper name. 

4. The tribrach may come into any place but the last. 

6. The following lines may serve to illustrate some of these laws 


5 mao | f KActy || B¢ Ot6 | Frode || KaAOd | pEvoe. || 
Gone | orévay || wot¢ Kat | yoorg || xAodrit | Erai. || 
Lr apor | Gv adr || ot¢ yav | avi || Evat |-riva. || 
tpig | EyG || wev Zhv | Se of || dé 7 7 | éay. || 
Térapr | Gv Ina || GuEddvr | Greer || eiAév.| warhp. || 
Lirpig | SiyHv \\ at cat | xérepa || xara | Kréiveir. || 


7. The double mark ‘in these lines, ‘after every two feet, indicates 
what is -ealled a metre; it having been customary in reciting iambic 
verses to ake a short pause after every second foot. Hence the name 
trimeter._ given to this species of lines, from their a a each three 
of these metres. 


IV. ANAPASSTIC MEASURE. 


1. The most common species of anapmstic verse is the dimeter. In 
a system of legitimate dimeters each metre should end with a word, and 
the system should end with a catalectic verse called the paroemiac, pre- 
ceded by a monometer acatalectic. 

2. This metre admits indiscriminately the dacty] and spondee for the 
axapest. But an anapest ought not to follow a devs ‘to avoid too 
many short syllables occurring together. : 

3. In the catalectic verse, or paroemiac, which clei a system, eh 
catalectic syllable should be preceded by an anapest. There are, how- 
ever, sore verses in which. it is joined to a spondee. as 


ANAPZESTIC MEASURE. ; 271 


4. The last syllable’of a verse in this metre, with the exception of the 
paroemiac, is not common, but subject to the same laws of quantity as if 
_ it was found in any other part of the verse. 

5. The following is a system of anapestic dimeters, closing with a 
paroemiac : 3 
el yap | p’ tnd yar, || vép0ev | 7° atdod || 

Tob véKpd | d&yp5voc.|| sie Grp | EvTor || 

Taptupoy | HKév, || Déopotc | ZAWroi¢ || 

dypidg | rEAdoae; || Ge uH | TE FESe, || 

HATE Tig | GAAAe || ToioT Exe | y7HOel. || 

viv 0 aid | Epiov || kiviyy’ | 6 raAae 

ExOpoic | Exizapr || & wénov | 6. 


SATIN 
EATS 





APPENDIX. 





EXCURSUS A. __ 


GREEK ALPHABET. 
I. According to tradition, Cadmus brought sixteen letters fed Plee- 


nicia into Greece, to which Palamedes, at a subsequent period, added 


four more, namely, , £, 6, 7; and, Simonides, at a still later day, in- 
oqepces this number by other four, ¢, 7, yp, @ . 

. The meaning of this tradition evidently is, that the Pheenician al- 
stil was introduced into different parts of Greece in a more or less 
perfect shape ; that’ some tribes received all the letters, while others 
were content with sixteen; that these last-mentioned tribes, however, 
gradually increased the number of alphabetical characters, by borrowing, 
at two different epochs, certain letters previously used in the more per- 
fect, systems of other Grecian communities. | 

3. The old sixteen, or primitive Cadmean letters, are supposed to 
have: been the following, the v being assigned to its true place as the 
representative of the digamma, and being indicated by the old sign o} 
the digamma, namely, F’. 


ABPTAEFIKAMNOIUPST. 


4. A change, however, subsequently took place as regarded the in 
troduction of Y, which was formed from the Fad, or digamma, by split- 


ting its upper part. This new letter was then placed after the T; while . 


the F itself was omitted. 


5. The Ionians first adopted all the twenty-four letters, and of them 


fest the Samians, from whom they were received by the Athenians ; but 

it was not till after the Peloponnesian War, } in the archonship of Eucli- 

des (B.C. 403), that they were used in public acts.” Hence the twenty- 

four letters are called “Iwvixd ypdéuuara, and Re old sixteen "ArriKd 
/PGEMCTA. 

6. In the most ancient times, according to Pausanias (5, 25), the 
Greeks, like the Orientals, wrote from right to left. They soon began, 
however, to write the first liné from the left to the right, in the second 
from the right to the left, and so on alternately. This was called Gov- 





¥ 


APPENDIX. 


orpog7d6v, from its resembling the mode in which the ox turns with the 
plough. So the laws of Solon were written. But, as early as the time 
of Herodotus, it was the established custom.to write from left to right. 


EXCURSUS B.- 
é DIGAMMA. 1 


1. The whole subject of the digamma rests on the following remark- 
able fact.. A certain number of words beginning with a vowel, especially 
the pronoun ov, o/, &, and also eidw, fouxa, eimeiv, Gvas, “IAcog, olvoe, 
olxoc, Epyov, looc, Exacroc, with their derivatives, have in Homer the 
hiatus so often before them, that, leaving these words out of the account, 
the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Homer, becomes extremely rare, 
and, in most of the .emaining cases, can be easily and naturally accounted 
for. These same words have also, in comparison with others, an apos- 
trophe very seldom before them; and, moreover, the immediately prece- 
ding long vowels and diphthongs are far less frequently rendered short 
than before other words. ; : oy 

2. From an attentive examination of the subject, the illustrious Bent- 
ley was led to conclude, that the words before which these deviations 
from the usual rules of prosody took place, although beginning with a 
vowel, must have been pronounced at least, if not written, as if begin- 
ning with a consonant. He recollected that some ancient grammarians 
mentioned a letter as more particularly used by the AZolians or most an- 
cient Greeks; and that its existence might be traced in the changes 
which some Latin words, derived from the Holic Greek, had undergone ; 
as, olvoc, vinum ; ic, vis; olxoc, vicus; 7p, ver. The letter alluded to, 
which, from its form, has the name of digamma or double gamma (F), is 
yet to be seen in some ancient inscriptions and on coins; and it supplies 
the data for resolving the cases of metrical difficulty, where the length« 
ening of a short syllable uniformly takes place before particular words. 

3. Let us examine some of the instances which are found at the very 
opening of the Iliad. ’Arpéidn¢e te dvat évdpav (v. 7); ’Ayapéuvovs 
fvdave Suu@ (v. 24); ’ArdAAwvE Gvakti (2. 36); 6 & fee vuKti gouKds 
(v. 47) ; Saponoac pada, eine (v. 85). In all these cases, according to 
the practice of the language in the days of Attic purity, the short vowel 
ought to have been elided before ava, #vdave, &c. But if we write 
Favaé, Frvdave, &e. +» OF fancy the words pronounced wavaé, wnvdave, 
WewalKkac, weené, ¢ &c., the difficulty will in a great degree disappear. 


Be 





Pies: 
1. Buttmann, Ausf. Gr. Sprachl. p:27.—Buttmann’s Larger Gr, Gr. p. 28, Rob- 
inson’s transl.—M. tby’s Greek Cradas, p. Xi., seg. 


APPENDIX. 275 


EXCURSUS C. 
ACCENTS. 


1. In every polysyllabic word, one syllable is to be regarded as the 
fundamental or radical syllable, or, in other words, that which contains 
the principal idea of the word. ‘The rest, on the contrary, which are 
prefixed or appended to the fundamental syllable-in- the formation of 
words, are, in respect to the idea, of less weight. 

2. The ascendant importance of the fundamental syllatie of a word is, 
in every independent language, indicated by a sharpened elevation of the 
voice in its pronunciation ; as, for example, du in duty, or set in beset. 

_ 8. This elevation of ‘the voice in pronouncing one syllable of a word 

is called the tone or accent (mpoowdia, accentus), which can occur only 
once in each word, and of itself is one and the same in all words, namely, 
the acute or elevated accent (mpoowdia dfeia, accentus acutus). As a 
sign for this, use is made of a stroke from right to left (“); as, for exam- 
ple, Adyoc. 

4. In comparison with the accented or elevated syllable, all syllables 
of a word which are not accented must be spoken with a depressed or 
unelevated accent (mpoowdia Bapeia, accentus gravis). ‘This depressed 
or grave accent is represented by an opposite sign, namely, a stroke from 
left to right (); so that Adyoc-was in fact Adydc. But, because every 
syllable of a word which has not-the acute accent is necessarily to be 
spoken with the depréssed tone, the sign for the grave is not used, but 
these syllables remain unmarked. 

5. As an indication of the proper grave, therefore, is unnecessary, its 
sion is used for another purpose, namely, to mark what is called the 
softened acute at the final syllable of words in a continued discourse, 
and of which mention will presently be made. 

6. If two vowels, the first of which has ‘the acute, the second the 


grave, are united into one sound, this long sound receives a sign, which - 


is formed by the union of those two, namely, (’*) or (*); for which, how- 
ever, a twisted line (~) is more conveniently used,! indicating that the 
accent is to be lengthened in the pronunciation (zpoodia meptomwpévn, 
accentus circumflexus) ; as, for example, d7A0¢ for dééA0¢, cGua for cddua. 


Position of the Accents. ' 


In order to accentuate a Greek word correctly, it is necessary, 1. to 
determine the syllable on which the accent rests; and, 2. to know the 
sign by which, according to the nature of that and the remaining sylla- 





1. In the Porsonian type a semicircular mark is employed ; as, cOya. 





+ 
APPENDIX. : prides 





bles of the word, the accent is to be indicated. Concerning these" two 
points, we shall here briefly —_ what admits of accurate definition. 


” I. Dis prieination: ofthe accented syllable. m 

1.:A Greek word can have its tone or accent only on one of the last 
three syllables. - . 

2. In simple radical words (that is, those which are formed with a 
definite termination from an existing root, and not derived from a word 
already formed) the accent rests on the radical syllable; thus, root Aey, 
whence Aéya, “I say ;” néELe, “6 expression ;”? Adyoc, “* speech.” 

3. In words which are derived from others, either by a prefix or an 
appended termination, the accent usually rests on the supplemental part 
(because this, as the sign of distinction from the radical word, defines 
the idea); thus, from Adyog is derived GAoyoc, “ speechless ;” from Kdép- 
moc, “ fruat,”’ comeaxaprog, “ fruiiless,” and evxaproc, “ fruitful ;’ 
from Aéyw are derived Aexré¢, “ said,” and AeKréoc, ** to be said ;” from 
Sip, an animal,” is derived Sypiov, “a wild beast.” , 

4. The nature of the final syllable has.a decisive influence on the po- 
sition of the accent; namely, if the final syllable of a word be long by 
nature, the accent cannot lie farther towards the beginning of the word 
than on the penultimate syllable. Fora long syllable being equal to two 
short ones, if the accent were placed on the antepenult when the last 
syllable is long by nature, it would be placed, in fact, four places back 
from the end, whereas it can never go farther back than three. 


The following cases, however, are to be noted as exceptions from 
this last rule. 

1. The w which the Attic and Ionic dialects make use of in declen- 
sion for the o of the other dialects has no influence on the posi- 
tion of the accent. It is ‘right, therefore, to accentuate dmépr/e- 
we (Attic and Ionic for txéprAcoc) ; pivdxepac, “a rhinoceros ;” 
duvapuewc, * of power ;” ’Arpsidew, “ of Atrides.” 

2. The same exception holds good of the syllables az and Ol, as ter- 
minations in declension and conjugation. Hence we properly 
accentuate rpdmela, “tables ;” Aéyerat, “it is said ;” EAadgot,” 

“ stags.’ The termination of the third person singular of the 
optative, however, again forms an exception to this, and, being 
the result of contraction, is long as regards the accent. We are 
therefore to accentuate éx@épot, not &xdepor, from éxdépw ; viKg= 
‘eal, not vikyoal, as thesepentete of vikdw.' - 





1, From these fundamental eee numerous exceptions are found in Greek, which 
ere best learned from actual reading and a good lexicon, 





, Yn .™ 


APPENDIX. OBE 


5. Sonie small words are so unimportant of themselves, that; in dis- 
course, they almost unite their sound with the following word, and, there- 
fore, remain unaccented. These are the forms 6, }, oi, ai, of the article, 
besides the prepositions ei¢ or é¢, év or ei, éx org ; the conjunctions 
ei, oc, and the negative ov, odx, ody. These are called drova, “ tone- 
less,” or mpoxkAitikd, ‘* proclitic.” Some of them, on a change of signi- 
fication or position, receive the acute, namely, 1. the adduced forms of 
the article, when used as pronouns; 2. &¢, when it either stands for ot 
Tw¢, thus,” “ so,”’ or in the signification ‘ as” or “ like,” is placed after 
the chief word; as, kaxol dc, “‘ as.cowards” or “ coward-like ; 3. ob or 
ovx, when it directly denies, without an additional word, like the Eng- 
lish “no,” or is placed after the word which it negatives. 


II. Sign of the accent according to the nature of the syllables. 


If the syllable on which the tone rests is known, the question then 1s, 
with what sign it is to be accented. Concerning this the following rules 
obtain : mcr " 


1. The acute can stand on each of the last three syllables ; as, caxdc, 
“bad ;” moduc, a city ;” avOparog, “aman.” But it can stand on 
the third syllable from the end only when the last syllable is short by na- 
ture ; thus, dvOpdzov, avOpéry, avOpézrorc, although the nominative is 
marked dvOpwro¢.! : 

2. The circumflex can only stand .on a syllable long by nature, and 
only on the final or penultimate syllable, but never on the penultimate 

‘unless the final syllable is short by nature ; thus, TlepcAme, * Pericles ;?? 
xaxod, * of evil; xOpoc, space; Aeime, “leave.” On the contrary, 
Aeirety, ‘ to leave ;” yet Aeipar, xGpor, according to rule 2, § 4 of the 
previous head. , 

3. The mark properly belonging to the grave accent appears only on 
the last syllable of words standing in a continued discourse, as a sign of 
she softened tone of the acute. Thus, évip, “aman ;” ayabéc, “ brave ;” 
but in connected discourse, dvyp dyabdc ob devyer, * a brave man fleeth 
noi away.” < 


4. The intimate connexion of discourse, which would be interrupted. 


ty the sharpened pronunciation of the acute on the final syllable of a 
word, alone renders necessary the transition of the acute into the grave. 
This change, therefore, must not take place before one of the greater 
. signs of interpunction (period and colon); nor even before a comma, 
when it indicates a really distinct member of a proposition. But we 





1 For the double exception to the rule, that the acute can stand on the antepenul’ 
in case only of a short final syllable, see a 2, $4 of the previous head. 
P A ° 


278 APPENDIX. 


also use the comma in assigning nearer definitions, and predicates, before 
relatives and before expositive or intentional particles, where evidently 
the internal connexion of the discourse must not be interrupted, and in 

this case, in Greek, the sign of the acute must not be placed on the final 
syllabke before the comma. Thus, it is proper to write, ri dé, #v yphua- 
Ta TOAAG éxy Tic; and, in like manner, o/ yév dyaGoi, oi dé Kaxoi, be- 
cause here is a perceptible cesura in the discourse ; but mar7p, d¢ éduxe, 
and éAeye ToAAd, Oc, K. T. A., because here no abrupt separation of the 
single members of the proposition occurs. 

5. If the third syllable from the end is accented, it always possesses 
the acate. 

6. If the final syllable is accented, it ae bears the side (or, in 
continued discourse, the grave), except when it arises by contraction, or 
forms the genitive and dative of the first two declensions, or belongs, as 
the termination, to adverbs in we. Thus, Bacrreic, “a king,” but Ba- 
oLAEi (contracted from Baovréi) ; Kaxdc, kaxy, Kaxdv, kaxove, but Kaxod, 
KaKijC, KaKOv, KAKO, Kak}, KaKGy, KaKoi¢ (as genitive and dative of the 
first two declensions) ; xaxG¢, an adverb. 

7. Every dissyllabic word whose penult is long by nature, and followed 
by a short final syllable, is marked with a circumflex on the penult, if 
that’ be the place of the accent, as, ypifjua, yGpoc, keioat. 

8. Words have denominations according to the position of the accent. 
If the final syllable bears the acute, the word is called an oxytone (0f0- 
rovov), as, for example, xaxé¢ ; if the circumflex, a perispome (TEptoTa- 
pevov), as, woceiy; if the final syllable is unaccented, the word is a bar 
yton (Gapvtovoy). If the accent rests on the penult as an acute, the 
word is paroxyton (rapogitovoy), as, vouoc ; if as a circumflex, proper- 

 ispome (mporeptom@uevor), as, oGua ; and, lastly, if the acute stands on 
the third syllable from the end, the word is prepecveyin’ (mporrapokt- 
TOVOY), as, ern 


Ill. Change of Accents. 


1. If a word possessing an accent experiences such a change, by de- 

clension, or conjugation, or composition, that either the number or meas- 

_ are of its syllables is increased, the accent also is usually changed. 
hese oe of the accent are of a threefold kind, namely : 


1. The accent remains on the syllable on which it stands, batt is itself 
iltered, and becomes, af 
(A.) An acute from a circumflex ; as, oGuaroe, from cGua; yopor, 
from yépo¢ ; Keiwela, from Keiobar. 
(B.) A circumflex from an acute; as, gedye, ‘from devya. 


/ 


ie ee 


APPENDIX. 279 


2. Theaccent advances towards the end of a word, 

(A.) If the word is increased by the annexation of syllables, so that 
the original accented syllable has more than two syllables between 
it and the end of the word ; as, dvOparocot, from dvOpwro¢ ; Be- 
Aéeoot; from Bédog ; alte from tivo; éoteAdécOnv, from 
oTéddw. 

.(B.) If the word receives a termination 1. which always or usually 
has the accent; as, terv@dc, teTupévat, Tumeic, TeTvupévoc, all 
formed from is ; Unpdc, from 3p; Kioc, from kic, &c. 

(C.° If, in the change of a word, the final syllable, which was be- 
tore short, becomes long; as, dvOpazov, from dvOpwro¢ ; érépov, 
from érepoc¢ ; mpayudrwyv, from mpadyya. 

3. The accent is drawn back towards the beginning of a word. _ This 
takes place, 


(A.) If the word receives addition: at the beginning, or if the an 


is removed which held the accent on the penult ; as, érumrov 
trunre, from rixtw ; waideve, from radetw ; ddtdog, from gidog : 
cvvodoc, from ddéc. 

_ (B.) If, in dissyllabic words, the final syllable, which should bear 
the accent, is dropped on account of a succeeding vowel ; as, 7p’ 
éyo for dnui; and m6AA’ Erafov for roAAd; deiv’ ErAny for 
deivd. 

But prepositions and particles, when the accented final vowel is 
dropped, remain unaccented ; as, éx’ adréy for éxi; map’ éuot 
for rapa ; GAN’ éyd for GAAd ; ob8 dAiyov for oddé. 


IV. Recession of the accent to a preceding word. 


1. Several small words unite themselves so closely, in respect to 
sense, with the preceding word, that they must be blended with it, as it 
were, in pronunciation. For this reason they throw back their accent 
on the preceding word, and hence derive the name of enclitics (uépia 
éyKAtTLKG). i 

2. Such enclitics are: the indefinite pronoun tic, 77, through all the 
cases ; the oblique cases of the personal pronouns, od or ued, pol, ué, 
ood or ced, oot, oé, od or Zo, and &€ev, ol, 8, iv, viv, obé, obwé, odwtv, 
odéwy, odtot or ogioiv, and odiv, ogéac, odéa ; together with the pres- 
ent indicative of e{ui and ¢yué (except the second person singular el¢ or 

el, “thou art ;” ofc, * thou sayst) ;” and, lastly, the adverbs and parti- 
cles 70c¢, 76, Tol, TI, Tob, mobi, robév, moré, té, Tol, res ké (or best. 
v7, vb (or viv), mép, pd. 

3 All these words throw back their accent, as acute, on the last syl 


i 


280 APPENDIX. 


jable of the preceding word ; but the accentuation of that preceding word 
decides whether this aceent must be ns I or not. Concerning this 
point the following rules must be observed : 


(A.) If the -preceding word is accented on the last syllable, or is 
marked with the acute on the penult, the enclitic loses its accent 
without farther change of the preceding word ; yet it is evident 
that the grave becomes an acute, because, properly, the enclitic 
unites itself immediately to the preceding word, and the accent 
syllable is therefore no longer to be considered as standing at the 


end of a word. _Thus, we write dvqp Tic (as if it were dvypric); | 


. ayabéc Te Kaddg Te 3 GAG oe; pabynradv Tivwr, dvdpa Te, didog 
pov. | Bat | 

But, in the last case, when the receding word has an acute on the 
penult, dissyllabic enclitics retain their proper accent ; a) qv 2o- 
yo¢ more év@vriog odiciv. 

(B.) If the preceding word is accented with a “encanto on the pe- 
nult, or an acute on the antepenult, the accent, thrown back 
from the enclitic, stands as an acute on the final syllable; as, 
ivOparde tore Svynréc ; 6 Kpotoog rote tAeczev. , 

If several enclitics follow one another, the preceding always takes 
the accent of the succeeding, ‘and the last only remains dnac- 
cented ; as, ef Tic Tivd GHot pot wapeivat. 

(C.) The enclitic retains its accent (1.) in personal pronouns after 
a preposition ; as, rep cod, mapa coi, mpo¢ o€ ; and, in this case, 
the longer forms of the pronoun of the first person, éuod, éuoi, 
éué, must always be used ; as, é& éwod (not éx od) ; év éuoi (not 
év wot). (2.) In the verb éoré (which then draws back its accent 
to the root), when it is used in the emphatic signification “ there 
is,” “ there exists,” “it is situated,” or else stands followed by 


an infinitive, for &eorz, ‘‘2t 1s possible,” “it 1s permitted,” “ one 


can ;” as, for example, Ogd¢ Zoriv, “ there is a God ;” éorw ob- 
Tw¢, “it is so situated ;” tori ideiv, * one can see.” 


4, From the enclitics adduced under § 2 must yet be distinguished 


the particles dé and &é or év, which entirely lose their independence, — 


and become incorporated with the preceding word. Strictly considered, 
n annexing these particles to a word, the given rules of inclination ought 
also to be observed. On the:contrary, Sé or éy is usually regarded. as 
any other appended termination ; and thus we write oixobev, not oixdbev 
(from ‘olxoc). In the particle dé, however, two cases are to be distin- 


guished ; thus, if it is annexed to forms of nouns, it has the same influ- — 


ence as every other enclitic, and hence we write olxévde (from olkoc), 


APPENDIX. 281 


“Aidécde (from “Aic), déuovde (from dduoc). But if it is annexed te de- — 
monstrative pronouns, the accent of the principal word advances towards 
that of the particle, and passes into the syllable immediately before de ; 
as, Toodode (from Téo00¢), Totdode (from Toioc¢). And this accent thus 
retains itself regularly through all the cases and forms; consequently we 
Write toojde, Tocoide, Tocovcde ; but Tocodds, TooGde, TooHde, Tocoicds. 


EXCURSUS Db. 


DIALECTS. 


I. Of the primitive language of the Greeks the most traces are left to 
us in their epic poems, the oldest monuments cf the language of this 
people. The peculiar mode of speech observed in these is called the. 
epic dialect. Its basis formed the old national language of the Greeks, 
_ which the poet, however, for his own’ purpose, variously modified and 
enriched. Its principal characteristic is a rhythmical harmony and a 
powerful fulness of tone. 

2. The epic dialect is expressed the most purely and ina perfect form 
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod. The rest formed themselves ac- 
cording to the model of these two, particularly of Homer. The most 
eminent of them are, Theognis and the other gnomic poets, Apollonius 
of Rhodes, the author of the poems extant under the names of Orpheus, 
Quintus Smyrnezus, and Nonnus. 

3. Since the epic language was derived from the stores of the general 
national language, and variously enriched by the poet himself; since, 
moreover, the dialect found in the oldest epic remained in after times 
appropriated to this species of poetry, and thus was continually advanced 
in civilization and culture by-new admixtures ; it is natural, therefore, 
that it should not appear as a complete and finished whole, but semua 
betray in its single parts many deviations and irregularities. __ 

4. If the basis of the epic is the old primitive language of the Greeks, 
and the primitive contains all the germes of the subsequent development 
of a language, we may easily conceive how this dialect should evince 
divers traces of all the peculiarities which afterward were individually 
* cultivated and retained in the single dialects. . Thus, in epic occur Ato- 
lisms, Dorisms, Atticisms, and the like, as fundamental peculiarities of 
the Greek language. But it is erroneous to regard the epic language, 
on that account, as a mixture of all the dialects; as, on the other hand, 
it 1s wrong to confound it with the Ionic, from the circumstance of its 


having many fundamental peculiarities in common with that dialect 
Aaz 


982 APPENDIX. 


The same obtains of Molisms, Dorisms, Ionisms, and Atticisms in all 
cases where reference is made to them by. -pichiie asia and commenta- 
tors. 

5. The Hetibhes, who migrated shroud Thrace into the country after- 
ward called Hellas, were divided into several tribes, whereof two, the 
Dorians and Ionians, chiefly extended themselves. Each of these tribes 
cultivated an independent and peculiar character in language, as well as 
in manners and mode of life, and after their names we denominate the 
two principal dialects the Doric and Ionic. 

6. The Dorians, the most powerful of the Hellenic tribes, preserved 


their dialect, which was widely diffused as the common language in - 


Hellas proper and the colonies, pure from foreign intermixture, but did 
little for the particular advancement of their language. Hence the Do- 
ric dialect eXhibits the most harshness in its forms of words, and a flat- 
ness of tone from tne frequent use of the dull sound A, a peculiarity 
termed in Greek wAaretacudc. Besides this dialect, the Holic also was 
formed according to the model of antiquity, and had many peculiarities 
in common with the Doric, whence it was considered as a refined col- 
lateral form of the same, cultivated particularly for the use of the poets. 

7. The Doric and olic dialects became and continued to be the lan- 
guage of lyric and bucolic poetry. The character of the Doric is most 
purely expressed in the odes of Pindar ; while those of Alczus, Sappho, 
and Corinna exhibit rather the Aolic mode. The Doric is purer in the 
Idyls of Theocritus. _ In the lyric parts of the Attic tragedies also an ap 
proach to the sound of the Doric dialect has been preserved. Fragments 
of the Pythagorean philosophy furnish the only specimens of Doric prose. 

8. Besides these, several dialects sprung up in the mouth of the peo- 
ple as individual varieties of the generally-diffused Doric dialect. But 
their peculiar character is, for the most part, known only from insulated 
expressions and short sentences, which are adduced in historians and 


comic poets. ‘The most celebrated and extensive of them are the Laco-. 


nian, Beotian, and Thessalian dialects, and, next to these, the Sicalzan. 

9. The Ionians, driven from their settlements by the Dorians, betook 
themselves principally to Attica, and, when that: barren country was un- 
‘able to support the multitude’ of inhabitants, to the opposite coast, of 
Asia. Under the mild climate of Lesser Asia, the-form of their language 
became mild ‘and soft, and nearly allied to the epic. ‘Thus was devel- 
oped the Jonic dialect, the principal characteristic of which is a softness 
of expression, acquired from the frequency of vowels and the solution of 
harsh syllables by interposed sounds. Herodotus and si § hase wrote 
in this dialect. 

10. The numerous ‘peculiarities common to the Tonic with the epic 


a 


NS ee ee ay 


APPENDIX. 283 


dialect have occasioned the latter also to be denominated Ionic ; although 
with this distinction, that the appellation of Old Ionic is given to the epic, 
but to the Ionic that of New Ionic. 

11. The language of the Ionians who remained behind in Attica pro- 
ceeded differently in its formation; and hence.arose a new dialect, the 
’ Attic, which observed an intermediate course between the Doric harsh- — 
ness and Ionic. softness, adopting a perfect rotundity in its forms. of 
words, and the greatest pliancy in their construction. -The political con- 
sequence and the high pitch of intellectual culture to which Athens ar- 
rived, gave a wide circulation to this dialect, and the considerable num- 
ber of eminent writings which are composed in it, and have been pre- 
served, determine it for the groundwork in the study of the Greek lan- 
guage. 

12. The most celebrated works written in the flourishing period of 
the Attic language and culture are, the. historical books of Thucydides, 
the historical and philosophical writings of Xenophon, the philosophical 
books of Plato, and the orations of Demosthenes, Auschines, Lysias, 
Isocrates, &c., besides the tragedies of Auschylus, Sophocles, and Eu- 
ripides, and the comedies of Aristophanes. 

13. That peculiarity which the single Grecian states had preserved i in 
language and manners disappeared with the general decline of their 
freedom. Athens, however, for a long time continued the chief seat of 
liberal information ; and the Attic dialect, as the purest and most widely 
diffused, became the court language of the now ruling Macedonians, and, 
by degrees, the general language of writing and the people. Hence it 
necessarily followed, that much of the old peculiarity of this dialect was 
sacrificed, and many innovations were introduced in expression and in- 
flexion. This language, formed on the basis of the Attic dialect, is 
comprehended under the name of the common dialect. The authors of 
this period, however, endeavoured to exhibit the Attic dialect pure and 
uncorrupted, according to the early models, although many peculiarities 
of more modern times are interspersed throughout their writings. Hence 
their style has received the appellation of the later Attic. 

14. Writers of this class are, Aristotle, Theophrastus, Pausanias, 
Apollodorus, Polybius, Diodorus, Plutarch, Strabo, pha dor of Hali- 
earnassus, Lucian, AZlian, Arrian, &c. ; 

15. In Macedonia the Greek language was mingled with much for 
eign alloy; and, thus corrupted, it spread itself, with the extension of 
the Macedonian empire, over other barbaric nations. Hence arose what 
may be denominated the Macedonic dialect. 

16. Alexandrea was a colony of liberal information under the Mace- 
donian rulers. There a circle of learned men assembled together, and 


284 ae APPENDIX. 


mad ‘t their chief study to preserve the purity of the genuine Attic dia 
lect by rejecting all modern accessions, although their style also fell 
short of the ancient models. But the Greek language underwent a pe- 
culiar reformation by the translators of the Old and the authors of the 
New Testament, who designated by Greek expressions things of orien- 
tal conception and application. As this style occurs only in the Scrip- 
tures and some Christian writers, it has been called the ecclesiastical di- 
alect, while others have preferred the epithet of Hellenistic. 

17. By degrees, the old Greek language, under the influence of various 
causes, so far degenerated in the mouth of the people, and was deformed. 
byso much heterogeneous admixture, that it gave rise to the new Greek, 
which has almost entirely exchanged the primitive character of the old 
for that of the more modern tongues, and still continues, in ancient 
Greece, as the language of the country. ~ « 





1. From the Greek Draviev, whence comes é\\nvor#s, as referring to one whe 
speaks Serwd the Greek manner, and, in the present ease, to an Oriental trying 





eo 


BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 


AT GREATLY REDUCED PRICES, . 
PUBLISHED BY 


HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW YORK. 





Abbott’s Ilustrated Histories. 
Suitable for Reading Books in Schools. Tlluminated Titles 
pages and numerous Engravings.~ 16mo, Muslin, 60 cents 
each; Muslin; gilt edges, 75 cents each. 

Cleopatra. —Josephine. —Madame Roland.—Xerxes.—Cyrus, 
—Darius.—Alexander.—Hannibal.—Julius Cesar.—Alfred.— 
William the Conqueror.—Queen Elizabeth.—Mary Queen of 
Scots. —Charles I.—Charles II.—Maria Antoinette.—Romulus. 
—Pyrrhus.—Nero. 


Abercrombie on the Intellectual Powers. 
Essay on the Intellectual Powers. Inquiries concerning the 
Intellectual Powers and the Investigation of Truth. With 
Questions. 18mo, Muslin, 45 cents; Half Bound, 50 cents. 


Abercrombie on the Moral Feelings. 
The Philosophy of the Moral Feelings. With Questions. 
18mo, Muslin, 40 cents; Half Bound, 50 cents, 


Alison’s Essay on Taste. 
Essay on the Nature and Principles of Taste. With Correc- 
tions and Improvements, by ABRAHAM Mitts. 12mo, Muslin, 
45 cents. 


Andrews’s Latin-English Lexicon. _ 
Founded on the larger German-Latin Lexicon of Dr. Wir11aAm 
Freunp. With Additions and Corrections from the Lexicons 
of Gesner, Facciolati, Scheller, Georges, &c. Royal 8yvo, 
Sheep, $5 00. | 


Anthon’s Classical Dictionary. 

Containing an Account of the Principal Proper Names men- 
tioned in Ancient Authors, and intended to elucidate all the 
important Points connected with the Geography, History, Bi- 
ography, Mythology, and Fine Arts of the Greeks and Romans, 
together with an Account of the Coins, Weights, and Measureg 
of the Ancients, with Tabular Values of the Satan Royal 8va, 
Sheep extra, g4 00. 


Anthon’s Latin-English - Thigileincy: | 
A Latin-English and English-Latin Dictionary, for the use of 
Schools. Chiefly from the Lexicons of Freund, Georges, and 
Kaltschmidt. Small 4to, Sheep, $2 00. 


‘Anthon’s Classical Series. : 

Latin Lessons. Latin Grammar, Part I. Containing the most im. 
portant Parts of the Grammar of the atin Language, together 
with appropriate Exercises in the Translating and Writing of 
Latin. 12mo, Sheep-extra, 75 cents. | 


2 BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 


Latin Prose Composition. Latin Grammar, Part II. An Introduc- 
tion to Latin Prose Composition, with a complete Course of 
Exercises, illustrative of all the important Principles of Latin 
Syntax. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. ae 


A Kxry to the Above is published, which may be obtained by 
Teachers. 12mo, Half Sheep, 50 cents. 


Zumpt’s Latin Grammar. From the ninth Edition of the Original, 
adapted to the use of English Students. — BY. NHARD 
Scumirz, Ph.D. Corrected and enlarged. 12mo, Sheep extra, 

. 75 cents. 


An Asriwement of the Above. 12mo, Sheep extra, 50 cents. 


Latin Prosody and Metre. From the best Authorities, Ancient and 
Modern. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. eA | 


Latin Versification, Ina Series of Progressive Exercises, including 
Specimens of Translation from English and German Poetry 
into Latin Verse. _12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


A Key to the Above is published, which may be obtained by 
Teachers. 12mo, Half Sheep, 50 cents. 


Cxsar’s Commentaries on the Gallic War, and the First Book of the 

Greek Paraphrase; with English Notes, Critical and Explana- 
tory, Plans of Battles, Sieges, &c., and Historical, Geograph- 
foal, and Archzological Indexes. Map, Portrait, &e. 12mo, 
Sheep extra, $1 00. 


The neid of Virgil, With English Notes, Critical and Explana- 
tory, a Metrical Clavis, and an Historical, Geographical, and 
Mythological Index. Portrait and many Illustrations. 12mo, 
Sheep extra, $1 25. 


Eclogues and Georgics of Virgil, With English Notes, Critical and 
Explanatory. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 25. 


Sallust’s pane War and Conspiracy of Catiline. With an En- 
glish Commentary, and Geographical and Historical Indexes. - 
New Edition, corrected and enlarged. Portrait. 12m0} Sheep 
extra, 75 cents. | : 


The Works of Horace. With English Notes, Critical and Explana- 
tory. A new Edition, corrected and enlarged, with Excursions 
relative to the Vines and Vineyards of the Ancients; a Life 
of Horace, &e. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 25. “ca 


. ° : ye vt ‘ie ‘ 
Cicer Select Orations, With English Notes, Critical and Explan- 


atory, and Historical, Geographical, and Legal Indexes. An 
improved Edition. Portrait. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 00. 


BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. - 3 


Anthon’s Classical Series, continued. 


Cicero de Senectute, De Amicitia, and Paradoxa, and the Life of 
Atticus by Nepos. With English Notes, Critical and Explan- 
atory. .12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. , 

2 


Cicero’s Tusculan Disputations. With English Notes, Critical and 
Explanatory. 12mo, Sheep extra, $100.  - 


The Germania and Agricola, and also Selections. from the Annals, 
of Tacitus. With English Notes, Critical and Explanatory. 
12mo, Sheep extra, $1 00. ; 


Cornelius Nepos. Cornelii Nepotis Vite Imperatorum Excellentium. 
With English Notes, &c. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 00. 


Terence. Terentii Comedie, with English Notes, Metrical Tables, 
and an Essay on the Scanning of Terence, &c. 12mo, Sheep 
extra. (In press.) 


First Greek Lessons, Containing the most important Parts of the 
Grammar of the Greek Language, together with appropriate’ 
Exercises in the Translating and Writing of Greek; for the use 
of Beginners. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


Greek Prose Composition, Greek Lessons, Part IT.. An Introduc- 
tion to Greek Prose Composition, with a complete Course of 
Exercises illustrative of all the important Principles of Greek 
Syntax. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents, 


Grammar of the Greek Language. For the use of Schools and Col- 
leges. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


A New Greek Grammar. From the German of Kiihner, Matthie, 
Buttmann, Rost, and Thiersch; to which are appended Re- 
marks on the Prouunciation of the Greek Language, and Chro- 
nological Tables explanatory of the same. 12mo, Sheep extra, 
75 cents. 


Greek Prosody and Metre. For the use of Schools and Colleges; 

together with the Choral Scanning of the Prometheus Vinctus 

_ of Zschylus, and Cidipus Tyrannus of Sophocles, to which are 

appended Remarks on the Indo-Germaniec Analogies. 12mo, 
Sheep extra, 75 cents. . 


A Greek Reader, Principally from the German of Jacobs. With 
English Notes, Critical ‘and Explanatory, a Metrical Index to 
Homer and Anacreon, and a copious Lexicon. 12mo, Sheep 
extra, $1 00. | 


Homer, The First Six Books of Homer’s Iliad, to which are ap- 


pended English Notes, Critical and Explanatory, a Metrical In- | 


dex, and Homeric Glossary. New and enlarged Edition. 
12mo, Sheep extra, $1 25. : 


The Anabasis of Xenophon. With English Notes, Critical and Ex- 
planatory, a Map arranged according to the latest and best Au- 
thorities, and a Plan of the Battle of Cunaza. 12mo, Sheep 
extra, $1 25. 


e 


7 
4 . BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 


Anthon’s Classical Series, continued. | 

Xenophon’s Memorabilia of Socrates. .From the Text of Kuhner, 
Vith Explanatory Notes, &e., by D. B. Hick, LL.D. First 
American Edition, corrected and enlarged. 12mo, Sheep ex- 
tra, $1 00. * - 


Manual of Roman Antiquities. _ From the most recent German 
Works. With a Description of the City of Rome, &e. 12mo, 
Sheep extra, 874 cents.. 


Manual of Greek Literature. With a Critical History of the Greek 
Language 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 00. 


Manual of Greek Antiquities, From the | best and most recent 
Sources. 12mo, Sheep extra, 87} cents. 


Manual of Greek and Roman Mythology, 12mo, Sheep extra. 


Latin Syatax. Latin Lessons, Part II. Containing Latin Syntax, 
with Reading Lessons, and Exercises in double translation, on 
the basis of Kuhner’s. 12mo, Sheep extra. (Uniform with 
Latin Lessons, Part 1) . 


Ovid, Selections from the'Metamorphoses of Ovid. With English 
Notes, Critical and Explanatory. 12mo. (Jn press.) 


Euripides, The Hecuba, Hippolytus, Medea, and Bacche of Eurip- 
ides. With English Notes, Critical and Explanatory. 12mo. 
(In press.) 3 eile 


Juvenal. The Satires of Juvenal. With English Notes, Critical 
‘, and Explanatory. . (Jn press.) 


Bigelow on the Useful Arts, 


considered in Connection with the Applications of Science. 
With numerous Engravings. 2 vols. 12mo, Muslin, $1 50. 


Boucharlat’s Mechanics. , 
An Elementary Treatise on Mechanics. . Translated from the 
French, with Additions and Emendations, by Prof. Epwarp H. 
Courtenay. Plates. 8vo, Sheep extra, $225. 


Boyd’s Eclectic Moral Philosophy ; 


prepared for Literary Institutions and general Use. 12mo, 
Muslin, 75 cents, 


‘Boyd’s Rhetoric and Criticism. 

_ Elements of Rhetoric and Literary Criticism, with copious 
Practical Exercises and Examples. Including, also, a succinct 
History of the English Language, and of British and American 
Literature, from the earliest to the present Times. On the 
Basis of the recent Works of ALExanpER Rerp and R. CunNnexL; 


‘vith large Additions from other Sources. 12mo, Half Bound, 
' 0 centa. | : 
, 
+m 





“9 et 
. 7 . 


BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS ix D COLLEGES. & 5 


Brande’s Encyclopedia. 
A Dictionary of Science, Litgyft@hare;eand Art; comprising the 
History, Description, and Scientific Principles of het Branch 
of Human Knowledge; with the Derivation and Definition of 
all the Terms in general use. Illustrated by numerous En- 
gravings on Wood. 8ve, Sheep extra, $4 00. 


Burke on the Sublime and Beautiful. 
Essay on the Sublime and Beautiful. A Philosophical cathe | 
into the Origin of our Ideas of the Sublime and the Beautiful. 
With an Introductory Discourse concerning Taste. Edited by 
ApsranaM Mitts. 12mo, Muslin, 75 cents. . 


Buttmann’s Greek Grammar. 
A Greek Grammar, for the use of High Schools and Universi- 
ties. Revised and enlarged by AtexanpreR Burrmann. ‘Trans- 
lated from the 18th German Edition, by Epwarp Rosinson, 
D.D., LL.D. 8vo, Sheep extra, $2 00. : 


Campbell’s Philosophy of Rhetoric. 
Revised Edition. 12mo, Muslin, $1 25. 


Cicero’s Orator.. 
Cicero’s Three Dialogues on the Orator. Translated into En- 
glish, by W. Gururm. Revised and Corrected, with Notes. 
18mo, Muslin, 45 cents. 


Clark’s Elements of Algebra. | 
Embracing, also, the Theory and Application of Logarithms; 
together with an Appendix, containing Infinite Series, the 
General Theory of Equations, and the most approved Methods 
of resolving the higher Equations. 8vo, Sheep extra, $1 00. 


Gomte’s Philosophy of Mathematics. 
Translated from the Cours de Philosophie Positive, by W. M. 
Gittespiz, A.M. 8vo, Muslin, $1 25. 


Crabb’s Synonyms. | ai 
English Synonyms explained. With copious Illustrations an 
ay at drawn from the best Writers. Svo, Sheep ex: 
tra, $2 00. 


Dickens’s Child’s History of England. 
2 vols. or 1, 16mo, Muslin, $1 00. 


Docharty’s Arithmetic. 
12mo, Sheep extra. (In press.) 


Docharty’s Institutes of Algebra. 
Being the First Part of a Course of Mathematics, designed for 
the use of Schools, Academies, and Colleges. 12mo, Sheep ex- 
tra, 75 cents. 


Draper’s Text-book on Chemistry, 
for the use of Schools and Colleges. Carefully revised, with 
Additions. With 300 Illustrations. 12mo, Sheep, 75 cents. 


e 


er 
po 







BOOKS FOR Sc 


6 
oral Text-book 0 ural Bhflogoph 
n 


5 
for the use of School guutg) ees. Containing nf most re- 
cent Discoveries and Facts, eOMpiled from the best Authorities, 
With nearly 400 Illustrations, 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


Draper’s Chemical Organization of Plants, 
A Treatise on the Forces which produce the Organization of 
Plants. With an Appendix, containing several Memoirs on 
Capillary Attraction, Electricity, and the Chemical Action of 
Light. Engrayvings. 4to, Muslin, $2 50. 


Dufi’s Book-keeping. 

The North American Accountant: embracing Single and Double 
Entry Book-keeping, practically adapted to the Inland and 
Maritime Commerce of the United States. Exemplifying all] 
Modern Improvements in the Science, with a new and certain 
Method of detecting Errors and proving the Ledger. Embrac- 
ing an improved Plan of Instruction. Complete in Two Parts. 
8vo, School Edition, Half Sheep, 75 cents; Mercantile Edition, 
Muslin, $1 50. 


Findlay’s Classical Atlas, 
to Illustrate Ancient Geography. Comprised in 25 Maps, 
showing the various Divisions of the World as known to the 
Ancients. With an Index of the Ancient and Modern Names 
S8vo, Half Bound, $3 25. 


Fowler’s English Language, 
in its Elements and Forms. With a History of its Origin and 
Development, and a full Grammar. Designed for use in Col- 
leges and Schools. 8yvo, Muslin, $1 50; Sheep extra, $1 75. 


Goldsmith’s History of Greece. 
Abridged by the Author. Edited by the Author of “ Ameri- 
can Popular Lessons.” 18mo, Half Sheep, 45 cents. 


Goldsmith’s History of Rome. 
/ Abridged by the Author. Edited by H. W. Herserr. 18me, 
Half Sheep, 45 cents. 


Gray’s and Adams’s Elements of Geology. 


Engravings. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


Gray’s Elements of Natural Philosophy. | 
Designed as a Text-book for Academies, High Schools, and 
Colleges. Illustrated by 360 Wood-cuts, 12mo, Sheep extra, 
75 cents. 


Griscom’s Animal Mechanism —_ mi 
and Physiology; being a plain and familiar Exposition of the 
Structure and Funetions of the Human System. Designed for 
Families and Schools. Engravings. 18mo, Muslin, 45 cents; 
Half Sheep, 50 cents. 






BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. % 


Hackley’s Algebra. 
A Treatise on Algebra. 8vo, Sheep extra, $1 50. A School 
and College Edition, 8vo, Muslin, $1 00. 


Hackley’s Geometry. — | 
An Elementary Course of Geometry, for the use of Schools and 
Colleges. 8vo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


Hale’s History of the United States, | , 
from their first Settlement as Colonies to the Close of the Ad. 
ministration of Mr. Madison in 1817. 2 vols. 18mo, Muslin, 
90 cents. 


Harper’s Statistical Gazetteer of the World, 
particularly describing the United States of America, Canada, 
New Brunswick, and Nova Scotia. By J. Catviy Suirs. Il. 
lustrated by Seven Maps. 8vo, $5.00. 


Harper’s Map of the United States and Canada. 
Showing the Canals, Rail-roads, and principal Stage Routes. 
By Samuret Brersz, A.M. On Rollers, States traced, $2 00; 
States colored, $2 00; States colored and bordered, $2 25; 
Counties colored, $2 50. 


Harper’s New York Class-book. 
Comprising Outlines of the Geography and History of New 
York; Biographical Notices of Eminent Individuals; Sketches 
of Scenery and Natural History; Accounts of Public Institu- 
tions. Arranged as a Reading-book for Schools. By WittiaM 
' Russert. 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 00. : 


Harrison’s Latin Grammar. 
An Exposition of some of the Laws of the Latin Grammar. 
12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. : 


Haswell’s Engineering. 


Engineers’ and Mechanics’ Pocket-book, containing, United 


States and Foreign Weights and Measures; Tables of Areas 


and Cireumferences of Circles, Circular Segments, and Zones 


| of a Circle; Squares and Cubes, Square and Cube Roots; 


Lengths of Circular and Semi-elliptic Ares; and Rules of Arith- 
metic. Mensuration of Surfaces and Solids; the Mechanical 
Powers; Geometry, Trigonometry, Gravity, Strength of Ma- 
terials, Water Wheels, Hydraulics, Hydrostatics, Pneumatics, 
Statics, Dynamics, Gunnery, Heat, Winding Engines, Tonnage, 
Shot, Shells, &e. ° Steam and the Steam Engine; Combustion, 
Water, Gunpowder, Cables and Anchors, Fuel, Air, Guns, &e., 
&c. Tables of the Weights of Metals, Pipes, &c. ~Miscellane- 
ous Notes, Dimensions of Steamers, Mills, Motion of Bodies in 
Fluids, Orthography of Technical Terms, &e.,-&e. Eighth 
Edition and Eighteenth Thousand. With Additions. 12mo, 
Pocket-book form, $1 25. ey | 


Hazen’s Popular Technology ; a 
or, Professions and Trades. Illustrated by 81 Engravings. 
18mo, Half Sheep, 75 cents; 2 vols., Muslin, 90 cents. ~ 


f 


8 BOOKS. FOR SCHOOLS ees COLLEGES. 


money * History of Philosophy. - 
say tt of the History of Philosophy.. Beno the Work adopt- 
ed by the University of France for instruction in the Colleges 
and ‘High Schools, Translated from the French, with Addi- 
tions, and a Continuation of the History. 2 vols, 18mo, Mus- 
lin, 90 cents. 


Herschel’s Natural Philosophy. ‘ 


» A Preliminary Discourse on the Study of x atural Philosophy. 
12mo, Muslin, 60 cents. 


Kane’s Elements of Chemistry ; 
including the most recent Discoveries, and Applications of the 
Science to Medicine and Pharmacy, and to the Arts. Edited 
by Joun W. Drarer, M.D. With abana 250 Woodcuts. 8vo, 
uslin, $1950; Sheep extra, $1 75. 


Keightley’s History of England, 
» from, the earliest Period to 1839. With Notes, &e., by an 
American. 5%vols. 18mo, Muslin, $2 25. 


Leos Elements of Geology, 
for Popular Use; containing a Description of the Geological 
Formations and Mineral Resources of the United States. En- 
gravings. 18mo, Half Sheep, 50 cents. 


Lewis's Platonic Theology. 
Plato contra Atheos. Plato against the Atheists; or, the Tenth 
Book of the Dialogue on Laws, accompanied with Critical 
Notes; and followed by extended Dissertations on some of the 
main Points of the Platonic Philosophy and Theology, espe- 
cially as compared with the Holy Scriptures. 12mo, Muslin, 
$1 50. 


Liddell and Scott’s Greek-English Lexicon 
based on the German Work of Francis Passow. With Cor- 
rections and Additions, and the Insertion, in Alphabetical Or- 
der, of the Proper Names occurring in the principal Greek 
Authors, by Henry Drisurr, M.A. Royal 8vo, Sheep extra, 
$5 00. 


“Loomis's Mathematical Series. - | 
Elements of Algebra, For the use of Beginners. 12mo, ‘Sheep ex- 
tra, 624 cents. 


Treatise on Algebra. 8vo, chem ‘extra, $1 00. 


Elements of Geometry and Conic Sections.  8vo, Sheep extra, 75 
cents. 


Introduction to Practical Astronomy. 8vo, Sheep extra, (Jn press.) 


The Recent Progress of Astronomy, SO ERT in the United States. 
12mo, Muslin, $1 00. 


Peet OO of Plane and Spherical Trigonometry. 8vo, Sheep extra, 


BOOKS FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 9 


Loomis’s Mathematical Series, continued. 
Tables of Logarithms of Numbers, and of Sines and Tangents for 
every Ten Seconds of the Quadrant.” S8vo, Sheep extra, $1 00. 
( The Trigonometry and Tables, bound together, may be 
had for $1 50. 


Analytical Geometry and Calculus, Svo, Sheep extra, $1 50. 
Lowry’s Universal Atlas. 


Constructed and Engraved from the most recent Authorities. 
Quarto, Half Roan, $6 00. 


Mahan’s System of Intellectual Philosophy. 


12mo, Muslin, 90 cents. 


irs. Markham’s History of France, 
from the Conquest of Gaul by Julius Cesar to the Reign of 
Louis Philippe. With Conversations at the End of each 
Chapter. For the use of Young Persons, Edited by Jacoz 
Assotrr. 12mo, Muslin, $1 00. : 


Maury’s Principles of Eloquence. 
With an Introduction, by Bishop Porrmrk, 18mo, Muslin, 45 
cents, 


McClintock’s Classical Series. 

A First Book in Latin, Containing Grammar Exercises, and Vo- 
cabularies, on the Method of constant Imitation and Repeti-. 
tion. . With Summaries of Etymology. and Syntax. 12mo, 
Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


A Second Book in Latin, Containing Syntax, and Reading Les- 
| sons selected from Cesar and Cicero, with Imitative Exercises, 
Notes, and a full Vocabulary. Forming a sufficient Latin 
Reader. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. © 


A First Book in Greek, Containing a full View of the Forms of 
Words, with Vocabularies and copious. Exercises, on the Meth- 
od of constant Imitation and Repetition. 12mo, Sheep extra, 
75 cents. | 


A Second Book in Greek, Containing a Syntax, with Reading Les- 
sons in Prose; Prosody, and Reading Lessons in Verse. Form- 
ing a sufficient Greek Reader. With Notes and copious Vo 
cabulary. 12mo, Sheep extra, 75 cents. 


WicQueen’s The Orator’s Touchstone ; 
or, Eloquence Simplified. Embracing a comprehensive System 
of Instruction for the Improvement of the Voice} and for ad- 
vancement in the general Art of Public Speaking. 12mo, 
Muslin, 75 cents, 


Mill’s Logic, | 
Ratiocinative and Inductive; being a connected View of the 
Principles of Evidence and the Methods of Scientific Investi- 
gation. Svo, Muslin, $1 50. 


* 


i ine SH 


i ‘i 


7 
CaP atrial F, 
2 oy 





























UN 


Ve 
a dea 3 
; ke 








THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELOW 


AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
OVERDUE. 


—_—<—<———<—— 











JAN 24 1933 


we a. 


- e , 2 wt ow | 
“s 




















LD 21-50m-8,'32 








U. C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
CO4¥bedé??ic 


IIE 








- 


. 





nee Ne epee es ae 


" 
_. a 


: 


WN; 


he 





